Home

Acronis Backup & Recovery 10 Advanced Server Virtual Edition

1. a tape device anesso oa TT o o through AMEG7 o i ee Storage Node a re ee a ee ee 2 12 2 Using a single tape drive A tape drive that is locally attached to a managed machine can be used by local backup plans as a storage device The functionality of a locally attached autoloader or tape library is limited to the ordinary tape drive This means that the program can only work with the currently mounted tape and you have to mount tapes manually Backup to a locally attached tape device When creating a backup plan you are able to select the locally attached tape device as the backup destination An archive name is not needed when backing up to a tape An archive can span multiple tapes but can contain only one full backup and an unlimited number of incremental backups Every time you create a full backup you start with a new tape and create a new archive As soon as the tape is full a dialog window with a request to insert a new tape will appear The content of a non empty tape will be overwritten on prompt You have an option to disable prompts see Additional settings p 117 Workaround In case you want to keep more than one archive on the tape for example back up volume C and volume D separately choose incremental backup mode instead of a full backup when you create an initial backup of the second volume In other situations incremental backup is used for appending changes to the pre
2. Win Pop up p 123 7 t fi Event tracing Windows events log p 124 z SNMP p 124 z Pre Post commands This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and PE based bootable media The option enables you to define the commands to be automatically executed before and after the data recovery Example of how you can use the pre post commands launch the Checkdisk command in order to find and fix logical file system errors physical errors or bad sectors to be started before the recovery starts or after the recovery ends The program does not support interactive commands i e commands that require user input for example pause A post recovery command will not be executed if the recovery proceeds with reboot To specify pre post commands 1 Enable pre post commands execution by checking the following options Execute before the recovery Execute after the recovery 2 Do any of the following m Click Edit to specify a new command or a batch file Select the existing command or the batch file from the drop down list 3 Click OK Pre recovery command To specify a command batch file to be executed before the recovery process starts 1 Inthe Command field type a command or browse to a batch file The program does not support interactive commands i e commands that require user input for example pause 2 Inthe Working directory field specify a path to a di
3. Disk number a for the first disk b for the second disk etc Partition number on the disk 1 for the first partition 2 for the second partition etc To guarantee backing up selected disks regardless of their type consider including three entries in the Volumes to back up selection rules dialog box one for each possible type For example to back up the first hard disk of each Linux machine under a centralized policy you may want to type the following lines in the Volume field dev hda1 dev sda1 dev mda1 Files to back up selection rules Define file selection rules according to which the files and or folders will be backed up on the machines the policy will be applied to To define file selection rules In the first line select the rule from the list or type it manually To add another rule click the next empty line and select the rule from the list or type it manually The program remembers the rules typed manually and the next time you open the window these rules will be available for selection in the list along with the default ones Windows Full path Point to the folders and files to be backed up If you specified a path to a file or folder explicitly the policy will back up this item on each machine where this exact path will be found To include In the Files and folders column type or select File Text doc in folder D Work Text doc D Work Folder C Windows C Windows Environment vari
4. 5 Connect the console to the management server The simplified way of centralized management Backup Using the Back up control select the machine which you want to back up and then create a backup plan p 368 on the machine You can create backup plans on multiple machines in turn Recovery Using the Recover control select the machine where the data recovery is required and create a recovery task on the machine You can create recovery tasks on multiple machines in turn To recover the entire machine or the operating system that fails to start use the bootable media p 369 You cannot control operations under bootable media using the management server but you can disconnect the console from the server and connect it to the machine booted from the media Managing plans and tasks To manage the plans and tasks existing on the registered machines select Machines gt All machines in the Navigation tree and then select each machine in turn The Information pane below shows the state and the details of plans and tasks existing on each machine and enables you to start stop edit and delete the plans and tasks You can also use the Tasks view that displays all tasks existing on the registered machines The tasks can be filtered by machines backup plans and other parameters Refer to the context help for details Viewing log To view the centralized log collected from the registered machines select Log in the Navigation
5. Filtering and sorting archives p 163 Bars of the Actions and tools pane Vault Name The Actions bar is available when clicking the vault in the vaults tree Duplicates actions of the vault s toolbar Archive Name The Actions bar is available when you select an archive in the archives table Duplicates actions of the archives toolbar Backup Name The Actions bar is available when you expand the archive and click on any of its backups Duplicates actions of the archives toolbar 4 2 2 Actions on personal vaults To perform any operation except for creation with a vault you must select it first All the operations described below are performed by clicking the corresponding buttons on the toolbar These operations can be also accessed from the Vault name actions bar on the Actions and Tools pane and from the Vault name actions item of the main menu respectively The following is a guideline for you to perform operations with personal vaults To Do Create a personal vault Click Ba Create The procedure of creating personal vaults is described in depth in the Creating a personal vault p 160 section Edit a vault 1 Select the vault 2 Click Edit The Edit personal vault page lets you edit the vault s name and information in the Comments field Change user account _ Click Change user for accessing a vault i i 8 In the appearing dialog box provide the credentials required for accessi
6. To mount a backup volume 1 Use the list command to list the volumes which are stored in the backup For example trueimagecmd list filename smb server backups linux_machine tib The output will contain lines similar to the following Num Idx Partition Flags Start Size Type Table 2 Table Table 2 Table Dynamic amp GPT Volumes DYN1 4 my_volgroup my_logvol 12533760 Ext2 You will need the volume s index given in the Idx column in the next step 2 Use the mount command specifying the volume s index in the i parameter For example trueimagemnt mount mnt filename smb server backups linux_machine tib i 4 This command mounts the logical volume DYN1 whose index in the backup is 4 on the mount point mnt To unmount a backup volume Use the unmount command specifying the volume s mount point as a parameter For example trueimagemnt unmount mnt 6 10 6 Acronis PXE Server Acronis PXE Server allows for booting machines to Acronis bootable components through the network Network booting eliminates the need to have a technician onsite to install the bootable media into the system that must be booted during group operations reduces the time required for booting multiple machines as compared to using physical bootable media Bootable components are uploaded to Acronis PXE Server using Acronis Bootable Media Builder To upload bootable components start the Bootable Media Builder either
7. Apply a backup policy to a group View detailed information on a group Rename a custom group subgroup Edit a custom group Move one custom group to another Delete a custom group Refresh a list of groups Click E Create group In the Create group p 304 window specify the required parameters of the group HE Custom groups can be created in the root folder Physical machines or in other custom groups Click Apply backup policy In the Policy selection window specify the backup policy you need to apply to the selected group If there are child groups in the selected group the backup policy will be applied to them as well Click View details In the Group details p 307 window examine information on the selected group Click Rename In the Name column type a new name for the selected group Built in groups cannot be renamed Click Edit In the Edit group p 306 window change the required parameters of the group Click wy Move to In the Move to group p 306 window specify a group that will be a new parent of the selected group Click x Delete Deletion of a parent group will delete its child groups as well Backup policies applied to the parent group and inherited by its child groups will be revoked from all members of the deleted groups The the policies that are directly applied to the members will remain Fa Click 7 Refresh The management console will upd
8. File backup File level data protection is based on backing up files and directories residing on the machine where the agent is installed or on a network share accessed using the smb or nfs protocol Files can be recovered to their original location or to another place It is possible to recover all files and directories that were backed up or select which of them to recover Deduplication This add on enables the agent to back up data to deduplicating vaults managed by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node 13 3 Agent for ESX ESXi Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for ESX ESXi protects virtual machines residing on a VMware ESX or ESXi virtualization server The agent allows for backing up virtual machines from the host without having to install agents on each virtual machine The agent is delivered as a virtual appliance 1 3 4 Components for centralized management This section lists the components included in the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 editions that provide the centralized management capability Besides these components Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agents have to be installed on all machines that need data protection Management Server Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server is the central server that drives data protection within the enterprise network The management server provides the administrator with a single entry point to the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 infrastructure an
9. Note for Linux users To specify a Common Internet File System CIFS network share which is mounted on a mount point such as mnt share select this mount point instead of the network share itself 2 Using the archives table To assist you with choosing the right destination the table on the right displays the names of the archives contained in each location you select in the tree While you are reviewing the location content archives can be added deleted or modified by another user or by the program itself according to scheduled operations Use the Refresh button to refresh the list of archives 3 Naming the new archive By default the exported archive inherits the name of the original archive Because having multiple archives of the same names in the same location is not advisable the following actions are disabled with the default archive name exporting part of an archive to the same location exporting an archive or part of an archive to a location where an archive of the same name exists exporting an archive or part of an archive to the same location twice In any of the above cases provide an archive name that is unique to the destination folder or vault If you need to redo the export using the same archive name first delete the archive that resulted from the previous export operation 6 7 6 Access credentials for destination Specify credentials required for access to the location where the resulting archive wil
10. The new virtual machine will be configured automatically the source machine configuration being copied where possible The configuration is displayed in the Virtual Machine Settings p 225 section Check the settings and make changes if necessary Then you proceed to the regular disk mapping procedure described below Existing virtual machine Available when the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Hyper V or Agent for ESX ESXi is installed On selecting this you specify the virtualization server and the target virtual machine Then you proceed to the regular disk mapping procedure described below Please be aware that the target machine will be powered off automatically before the recovery If you prefer to power it off manually modify the VM power management option Disk Disk MODEL p 223 Select the destination disk for each of the source disks NT signature p 221 Select the way the recovered disk s signature will be handled The disk signature is used by Windows and the Linux kernel version 2 6 and later Disk destination To specify a destination disk 1 Select a disk where you want the selected disk to recover to The destination disk s space should be at least the same size as the uncompressed image data 2 Click OK All the data stored on the target disk will be replaced by the backed up data so be careful and watch out for non backed up data that you might need NT signature When the
11. To generate a new self signed certificate 1 Log on as a member of the Administrators group 2 Inthe Start menu click Run and then type cmd 3 Run the following command note quotation marks ZCommonProgramFiles Acronis Utils acroniscert reinstall 4 Restart Windows or restart the running Acronis services Non self signed certificates You have the option to use trusted third party certificates or certificates created by your organization s CA as an alternative to self signed certificates by using Acronis Certificate Command line Utility To install a third party certificate 1 Click Start then click Run and then type certmgr msc 2 Inthe Certificates console double click the name of the certificate that you want to install 3 Inthe Details tab in the list of fields click Thumbprint 4 Select and copy the field s value called a certificate thumbprint a string such as 20 99 00 b6 3d 95 57 28 14 Oc d1 36 22 d8 c6 87 a4 eb 00 85 5 Inthe Start menu click Run and then type the following in the Open box SCommonProgramFiles Acronis Utils acroniscert exe install 20 99 00 b6 3d 95 57 28 14 Oc dl 36 22 d8 c6 87 a4 eb 00 85 Note quotation marks substitute the sample thumbprint shown here with that of your certificate 3 Options This section covers Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 options that can be configured using Graphical User Interface The content of this section is applicable to both stand alo
12. VG Name my_volgroup VG Access read write VG Status resizable VG Size 1 99 GB VG UUID q0Q41 Vk7W yDG3 uF11 Q2AL C ze vMeACu Run the following command to create the logical volume in the L parameter specify the size given by VG Size lvm lvcreate L1 99G name my_logvol my_volgroup Activate the volume group by running the following command lvm vgchange a y my_volgroup Press CTRL ALT F1 to return to the management console Step 2 Starting the recovery DU EAO NO EA 7 In the management console click Recover In Archive click Change and then specify the name of the archive In Backup click Change and then select the backup from which you want to recover data In Data type select Volumes In Items to recover select the check box next to my_volgroup my_logvol Under Where to recover click Change and then select the logical volume that you created in Step 1 Click the chevron buttons to expand the list of disks Click OK to start the recovery For a complete list of commands and utilities that you can use in the bootable media environment see List of commands and utilities available in Linux based bootable media p 262 For detailed descriptions of the trueimagecmd and trueimagemnt utilities see the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 command line reference Mounting backup volumes You may want to mount a volume stored in a disk backup for example to view some files in it before starting the recovery
13. typing an exact value in the Acronis Secure Zone Size field 4 Click OK Deleting Acronis Secure Zone To delete the zone without uninstalling the program proceed as follows 1 Inthe Acronis Secure Zone Actions bar on the Actions and tools pane select Delete 2 Inthe Delete Acronis Secure Zone window select volumes to which you want to add the space freed from the zone and then click OK If you select several volumes the space will be distributed proportionally to each partition If you do not select any volume the freed space becomes unallocated After you click OK Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 will start deleting the zone When removing Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 agent from the system you have two options to keep Acronis Secure Zone along with its contents which will enable data recovery on booting from bootable media or remove Acronis Secure Zone 6 9 Acronis Startup Recovery Manager Acronis Startup Recovery Manager is a modification of the bootable agent p 369 residing on the system disk in Windows or on the boot partition in Linux and configured to start at boot time on pressing F11 It eliminates the need for a separate media or network connection to start the bootable rescue utility Activate Enables the boot time prompt Press F11 for Acronis Startup Recovery Manager if you do not have the GRUB boot loader or adds the Acronis Startup Recovery Manager item to GRUB s menu if you have GRUB
14. 5 In Recover to select New virtual machine In VM server select the type of the new virtual machine to be created or on which virtualization server to create the machine In VM name enter the name for the new virtual machine Optionally Review the Virtual machine settings p 225 and make changes if necessary Here you can change the path to the new virtual machine The same type of machines with the same name cannot be created in the same folder Change either the VM name or the path if you get an error message caused by identical names 9 Select the destination disk for each of the source disks or source volumes and MBRs On a Microsoft Virtual PC be sure to recover the disk or volume where the operating system s loader resides to the Hard disk 1 Otherwise the operating system will not boot This cannot be fixed by changing the boot device order in BIOS because a Virtual PC ignores these settings 10 In When to recover specify when to start the recovery task 11 Optionally Review Recovery options and change the settings from the default ones if need be You can specify in Recovery options gt VM power management whether to start the new virtual machine automatically after the recovery is completed This option is available only when the new machine is created on a virtualization server 12 Click OK If the recovery task is scheduled for the future specify the credentials under which the task will run
15. High to maximize the backup process speed by taking resources from other processes HDD writing speed This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media This option is available when an internal fixed hard disk of the machine being backed up is selected as the backup destination Backing up to a fixed hard disk for example to Acronis Secure Zone may slow performance of the operating system and applications because of the large amounts of data that needs to be written to the disk You can limit the hard disk usage by the backup process to the desired level The preset is Maximum To set the desired HDD writing speed for backup Do any of the following Click Writing speed stated as a percentage of the maximum speed of the destination hard disk and then drag the slider or select a percentage in the box Click Writing speed stated in kilobytes per second and then enter the writing speed in kilobytes per second Network connection speed This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media This option is available when a location on the network network share managed vault or an FTP SFTP server is selected as the backup destination The option defines the amount of network connection bandwidth allocated for transferring the backup data By default the speed is set to maximum i e the software uses all the network bandwidth it can get when transferring
16. In case the storage medium is stolen or accessed by an unauthorized person the malefactor will not be able to decrypt the vault contents without access to the storage node Encrypted archives p 374 will be encrypted over the encryption performed by the agent p 366 Export An operation that creates a copy of an archive p 367 or a self sufficient part copy of an archive in the location you specify The export operation can be applied to a single archive a single backup p 367 or to your choice of backups belonging to the same archive An entire vault p 379 can be exported by using the command line interface F Full backup A self sufficient backup p 367 containing all data chosen for backup You do not need access to any other backup to recover the data from a full backup G GFS Grandfather Father Son A popular backup scheme p 369 aimed to maintain the optimal balance between a backup archive p 367 size and the number of recovery points p 376 available from the archive GFS enables recovering with daily resolution for the last several days weekly resolution for the last several weeks and monthly resolution for any time in the past For more information please refer to GFS backup scheme p 34 Image The same as Disk backup p 372 Incremental backup A backup p 367 that stores changes to the data against the latest backup You need access to other backups from the same archive p 367 to restore d
17. The use of SSL certificates is enabled The connection will be established only if the use of SSL certificates is enabled on the server application Disabled The same as Not configured Server Encryption options Specifies whether to encrypt the transferred data when the component acts as a server application Select one of the following Not Configured The component will use the default setting which is to use encryption if possible see the following option Enabled Encryption is enabled In Encryption select one of the following Enabled Data transfer will be encrypted if encryption is enabled on the client application otherwise it will be unencrypted Disabled Encryption is disabled any connection to a client application which requires encryption will not be established Required Data transfer will be performed only if encryption is enabled on the client application see Client Encryption options it will be encrypted Authentication parameters In Use Agent Certificate Authentication select one of the following Do not use The use of SSL certificates is disabled Any connection to a client application which requires the use of SSL certificates will not be established Use if possible The use of SSL certificates is enabled The server will use SSL certificates if their use is enabled on the client application and will not use them otherwise Always use The use of SSL certificates is enabled The connection
18. This option is effective for both Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media The option defines whether the agent s operating on the managed machine have to send the log events of the backup operations to the specified Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP managers You can choose the types of events to be sent Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 provides the following Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP objects to SNMP management applications 1 3 6 1 4 1 24769 100 200 1 0 string identifying the type of event Information Warning Error 1 3 6 1 4 1 24769 100 200 2 0 string containing the text description of the event it looks identical to messages published by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 in its log The preset is Use the setting set in the Machine options To select whether to send the backup operations events to the SNMP managers Choose one of the following Use the setting set in the Machine options to use the setting specified for the machine For more information refer to Machine options p 93 Send SNMP notifications individually for backup operation events to send the events of the backup operations to the specified SNMP managers Types of events to send choose the types of events to be sent All events Errors and warnings or Errors only Server name IP type the name or IP address of the host running the SNMP manage
19. Windows PE 2005 1 6 Windows Server 2003 with Service Pack 1 To add Acronis Plug in to WinPE 1 x 1 Unpack all files of your WinPE 1 x ISO to a separate folder on the hard disk 2 Start the Bootable Media Builder either from the management console by selecting Tools gt Create Bootable Media or as a separate component 3 Select Bootable media type Windows PE Select Use WinPE files located in the folder specify Specify path to the folder where the WinPE files are located Specify the full path to the resulting ISO file including the file name Check your settings in the summary screen and click Proceed oe oS Burn the ISO to CD or DVD using a third party tool or copy to a flash drive Once a machine boots into the WinPE Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 starts automatically Adding the Acronis Plug in to WinPE 2 x or 3 0 Bootable Media Builder provides three methods of integrating Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 with WinPE 2 x or 3 0 Adding the Acronis Plug in to the existing PE ISO This comes in handy when you have to add the plug in to the previously configured PE ISO that is already in use Creating the PE ISO with the plug in from scratch Adding the Acronis Plug in to a WIM file for any future purpose manual ISO building adding other tools to the image and so on To be able to perform any of the above operations install Bootable Media Builder on a machine where Windows Automated Installatio
20. full backup every 10 days differential backup every 2 days incremental backup every 1 day every 6 hours retention rules delete backups older than 5 days tape options are the following the Use a separate tape set option is selected the Always use a free tape For each full backup option is selected the Always use a free tape For each incremental backup option is cleared the Always use a free tape For each differential backup option is cleared tape size is T_GB The case defines the line of backups that consists of two sections The figure below shows the sections at the moment before the first backup will be deleted In the figure the full differential and incremental backups are designated as orange blue and green rectangles respectively 12 a ST a CT Ey 02 ___ EE At the moment some backups are deleted by the Cleanup task Deletion of the outdated backups painted in dark colors is postponed as these backups are basic for the actual backups 01 ee a E 62 0 T As an exact correlation between the tape size and backup s size is unknown it is impossible to determine number of the tapes that will be free after the deletion So the calculation ignores this probability Tape set 01 should contain round up F_GB 4 D_GB 5 7 _GB CL T_GB tapes to store the backups Tape set 02 needs round up F_GB 1 D_GB 7 I_GB CL T_GB tapes The sum of the calculated values gives the total number of ta
21. or IP address as was specified when the machine was initially added to the management server Otherwise the machine will be deleted and added again as if it were another machine This means all policies both inherited and directly applied will be revoked from the machine and its static group membership will be lost The registration address of each machine can be found in the Registration address column in any management server view that contains the machine the column is hidden by default To avoid a discrepancy you can initially import the machines from a text file Modify this file later as required by adding and removing machines but do not change the names addresses of the machines that have to remain registered To synchronize machines with a text file 1 Inthe Navigation tree select te Physical machines or yall physical machines 2 Click amp Synchronize machines with text file on the toolbar 3 Inthe Path field enter the path to a txt or csv file containing the list of machines or click Browse and select the file in the Browse window 4 Under Logon settings specify the user name and password of a user who is a member of the Administrators group on all machines listed in the file 5 Click OK to start synchronizing the machines Synchronization command line tool Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server has a command line tool that enables you to create a batch file and schedule the synchronization
22. 1 day s 2 Every 3 hours From 12 00 00 AM midnight Until 09 00 00 PM thus the task will be performed 8 times a day with a 3 hour time interval After the last daily recurrence at 9 PM the next day comes and the task starts over again from midnight 3 Effective From 09 15 2009 If September 15 2009 is the current date of the task s creation and say 01 15 PM is the task s creation time the task will be started when the nearest time interval comes at 03 00 PM in our example To 12 15 2009 On this date the task will be performed for the last time but the task itself is still available in the Tasks view Several daily schedules for one task There are some cases when you might need the task to be run several times a day or even several times a day with different time intervals For such cases consider adding several schedules to a single task For example suppose that the task has to be run every 3rd day starting from 09 20 2009 five times a day first at 8 AM second at 12 PM noon third at 3 PM fourth at 5 PM fifth at 7PM The obvious way is to add five simple schedules If you spend one minute for examination you can think out a more optimal way As you can see the time interval between the first and the second task s recurrences is 4 hours and between the third fourth and fifth is 2 hours In this case the optimal way is to add two schedules to the task First daily schedule 1 Every
23. 111 123 126 Monthly schedule 174 215 326 372 Mounting an image 245 Move one group to another 312 314 Moving a machine to another group 300 304 Multi volume snapshot 100 107 N Network connection speed 100 109 Network port 260 263 Network port configuration 85 86 Network settings 260 262 Notifications 110 125 NT signature 227 229 Number of tasks 91 330 0 Operations with a machine 66 Operations with archives stored in a vault 132 133 163 165 Operations with backups 132 134 163 166 Operations with custom groups 64 Operations with panes 14 Options 90 Organizational unit criterion 94 313 Overview 72 121 132 136 139 325 Overwriting 232 Owners and credentials 32 162 224 242 250 335 P Parameters set through administrative template 341 Parameters set through GUI 355 Parameters set through Windows registry 355 Password for Acronis Secure Zone 254 255 Pending operations 276 277 278 280 287 288 289 Personal vault e 379 385 389 Personal vaults 53 162 Physical machine 382 389 Physical machines 297 Plan 389 Policies on machines and groups 65 298 Policy 389 Policy credentials 356 358 Policy deployment state on a group 71 Policy deployment state on a machine 69 Policy details 292 295 296 306 316 Policy status on a group 71 Policy status on a machine
24. 146 The Use a separate tape set option is selected All the Always use a free tape options are cleared It requires 25 tapes in rotation GFS Example 2 p 149 The Use a separate tape set option is selected The Always use a free tape For each full backup option is selected Other Always use a free tape options are cleared It requires 16 tapes in rotation GFS Example 3 p 151 The Use a separate tape set option is selected All the Always use a free tape options are selected It requires 28 tapes in rotation These examples demonstrate how the number of tapes required for automated rotation depends on the tape options If a tape library does not have enough tapes for automated rotation the Tasks Need Interaction window will sometimes ask you to load a free tape into the library GFS Example 1 Suppose the backup plan has the following tape options the Use a separate tape set option is selected the Always use a free tape For each full backup option is cleared the Always use a free tape For each incremental backup option is cleared the Always use a free tape For each differential backup option is cleared Imagine the first backup operation is scheduled on Friday 1st of January On that day at 11 00 PM the first full backup 320 Gb on the tape whose size is 400 Gb is created As the Use a separate tape set option is selected the currently mounted tape is ejected if it is not a free tape Then a free tape is loa
25. 70 95 Pop up messages 90 Post backup command 104 Post data capture command 106 Post recovery command 124 Pre Post commands 100 103 105 123 Pre Post data capture commands 100 104 108 Pre backup command 103 Pre data capture command 105 Pre recovery command 124 Prerequisites 142 Privileges for centralized management 76 Privileges for local connection 8 77 Privileges for remote connection in Linux 8 78 Privileges for remote connection in Windows 78 Privileges for VM backup and recovery 320 321 Proprietary Acronis technologies 52 Protecting the servers 60 Protecting the virtual machines 62 Protecting the workstations 61 PXE and DHCP on the same server 274 PXE Server 21 R Recovering a vast number of files from a file backup 239 Recovering data 167 191 221 235 301 329 Recovering from tape library 144 Recovering MD devices Linux 48 239 Recovering MD devices and logical volumes 46 48 121 239 269 Recovering the storage node 240 Recovery exclusions 232 233 Recovery point 388 390 391 Recovery priority 123 125 Registered machine 91 383 389 390 Registration 20 58 62 96 297 390 Removing Agent for ESX ESXi 324 Report about the archives and backups 338 Report about the backup plans 337 Report about the backup policies 336 Report about the machines 336 Report about the task a
26. Bootability troubleshooting 45 236 Bootable agent 54 257 379 382 Bootable media 9 21 27 50 114 185 221 257 258 275 291 379 382 385 389 Bootable Media Builder 21 Building Bart PE with Acronis Plug in from Windows distribution 260 266 Built in group 62 382 C Case to analyze 149 150 156 Centralized backup plan 53 58 381 382 383 Centralized log entry details 331 334 Centralized management 58 290 383 384 Centralized task 382 383 385 Centralized vault 19 20 58 383 388 389 Centralized vaults 132 328 Change volume label 282 288 Change volume letter 282 287 Changing disk status 282 Choosing a backup scheme 148 Choosing the operating system for disk management 275 282 Cleanup 27 140 380 382 383 384 390 392 Client and server applications 83 Cloning method and advanced options 278 Collecting system information 289 Column selection 340 Common operations 165 Communication between Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components 83 Components for centralized management 18 Compression level 100 108 Conditions 116 180 Configuring Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components 340 Configuring communication settings 83 84 87 Configuring iSCSI and NDAS devices 267 Connecting to a machine booted from media 266 Console Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Console 27
27. Click OK to start import Adding a machine to another group To add the selected machine to another group 1 Select the group the machine will be added to 2 Click OK The machine being added becomes a member of more than one group As a result the backup policies applied to the first group will remain on the machine and the backup policies applied to the second third etc group will be deployed to the machine Moving a machine to another group To move the selected machine to another group 1 Inthe group tree select the group the machine will be moved to 2 Click OK The machine being moved leaves one group and becomes a member of another group As a result the backup policies applied to the first group will be revoked from the machine and the backup policies applied to the second group will be deployed to the machine Adding machines to a group To add machines to the selected group 1 Inthe groups tree select the group whose machines you need to add 2 Inthe right part of the window select the machines 3 To add more machines from other groups repeat the steps 1 and 2 for each group 4 Click OK to add machines Once the machines appear in the group the policy that was applied to the group if any is deployed to the machines If any of the selected machines is not available or reachable at the moment the action will be kept in the management server as pending and will be performed as soon as
28. Let us suppose that we want to set up a backup plan that will regularly produce a series of daily D weekly W and monthly M backups Here is a natural way to do this the following table shows a sample two month period for such a plan ie Pe we ee op mo O e a wema O ft masma O gt pm inzz vre gt i mare ff gt gt ml esen fo gt fm oro foe fm feos f fi feos ff O gt hd Daily backups run every workday except Friday which is left for weekly and monthly backups Monthly backups run every fourth Friday and weekly backups run on all other Fridays Monthly Grandfather backups are full Weekly Father backups are differential Daily Son backups are incremental Parameters You can set up the following parameters of a Grandfather Father Son GFS scheme Start backup at Specifies when to start a backup The default value is 12 00 PM Back up on Specifies the days on which to perform a backup The default value is Workdays Weekly Monthly Specifies which of the days selected in the Back up on field you want to reserve for weekly and monthly backups A monthly backup will be performed every fourth such day The default value is Friday Keep backups Specifies how long you want the backups to be stored in the archive A term can be set in hours days weeks months or years For monthly backups you can also select Keep indefinitely if you
29. Local Coemection 9 7 A Br a n Navigation iJ Backup plans and tasks Nevigation wdi Check the heulth of the beckup plans and tasks editing on the machne Maine Oaitdond O Esdup plans and tasis gt gt PB SXRS iE vats Ine a Eaton state Rebs Tyge Origa Last start tin tog i LS Cah management vale ma CU ri ssdup 5 20 2009 22348 ox Badup plan Loca i Shertats Cleanup task custom sc ox Doso Loca H EP Local machine Mainet Offerertal backup o Gockup file la FAdbdup x Codup fie Loca f Incremental bocup ow Backup ie Leal Task for vaidaton after ox Validation w Local Task for valdation after w Valkdation or Oaidetion Waldstion v Local Schedule Shed ted Lat read Last teh time Nrrer ower Tasks view Common way of working with views Generally every view contains a table of items a table toolbar with buttons and the Information panel Use filtering and sorting capabilities to search the table for the item in question Inthe table select the desired item Inthe Information panel collapsed by default view the item s details Perform actions on the selected item There are several ways of performing the same action on selected items By clicking the buttons on the table toolbar By clicking in the items in the Item s name Actions bar on the Actions and Tools pane By selecting the items in the Actions me
30. Optional Enter a unique name for the validation task A conscious name lets you quickly identify the task among the others Credentials p 236 Optional The validation task will run on behalf of the user who is creating the task You can change the task credentials if necessary To access this option select the Advanced view check box What to validate Validate Choose an object to validate Archive p 236 in that case you need to specify the archive Backup p 237 specify the archive first and then select the desired backup in this archive Vault p 237 select a vault or other location which archives to validate Access Credentials p 238 Optional Provide credentials for accessing the source if the task account does not have enough privileges to access it To access this option select the check box for Advanced view When to validate Validate p 238 Specify when and how often to perform validation After you configure all the required settings click OK to create the validation task 6 4 1 Task credentials Provide credentials for the account under which the task will run To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Run under the current user The task will run under the credentials with which the user who starts the tasks is logged on If the task has to run on schedule you will be asked for the current user s password on completing the task creation Use the following credentials
31. Recovery 10 overview Based on Acronis patented disk imaging and bare metal restore technologies Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 succeeds Acronis True Image Echo as the next generation disaster recovery solution Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Advanced Server Virtual Edition inherits the benefits of the Acronis True Image Echo product family Backup of an entire disk or volume including the operating system all applications and data Bare metal recovery to any hardware File and folder backup and recovery Scalability from a single machine to an enterprise Support for both Windows and Linux environments Centralized management for distributed workstations and servers Dedicated servers for storage resource optimization Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Advanced Server Virtual Edition offers new benefits that help organizations meet challenging Recovery Time Objectives while reducing both capital expense and software maintenance costs Leveraging existing IT infrastructure Data deduplication to reduce storage consumption and network bandwidth utilization Flexible deduplication mechanism allowing deduplication of backup data both at the source and at the storage Improved support for robotic tape libraries Backward compatibility and an easy upgrade from Acronis True Image Echo Highly automated data protection All round planning of data protection backup retention and validation of backups within a backup policy Buil
32. The task will always run under the credentials you specify whether started manually or executed on schedule Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account 2 Click OK To learn more about using credentials in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 see the Owners and credentials p 31 section To learn more about operations available depending on the user privileges see the User privileges on a managed machine p 30 section 6 4 2 Archive selection Selecting the archive 1 Enter the full path to the location in the Path field or select the desired folder in the folders tree If the archive is stored in a centralized vault expand the Centralized group and click the vault If the archive is stored in a personal vault expand the Personal group and click the vault If the archive is stored in a local folder on the machine expand the Local folders group and click the required folder If the archive is located on removable media e g DVDs first insert the last DVD and then insert the discs in order starting from the first one when the program prompts If the archive is stored on a network share expand the Network folders group then select the required networked machine and then click the shared folder If the network share requires access credentials the prog
33. True or False Default value False By default Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server connects to registered machines to perform synchronization in particular to retrieve data such as backup logs This approach is known as a polling mechanism If Real Time Monitoring is set to True the management server instead sends requests to machines to provide new data whenever it will appear and then enters a listening mode This approach is called real time monitoring Real time monitoring may reduce network traffic for example when centralized backup tasks run infrequently However it is effective only when there are relatively few registered machines Avoid enabling real time monitoring if the number of registered machines exceeds the maximum number of simultaneous connections see Maximum Connections earlier in this topic Second Connection Attempt Description Specifies whether to try to connect to a registered machine by using its last known IP address after an attempt to connect to it by using its host name has failed Possible values True or False Default value False When connecting to a registered machine Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server first uses the machine s network name provided that the machine was added to the management server by name If Second Connection Attempt is set to True and a connection to the machine by using its network name has failed the management server performs a second conn
34. Workdays Execute the task once at 08 00 00 PM Also set the advanced settings as required c Setup the retention rules as follows Delete backups older than 7 days When deleting a backup that has dependencies Consolidate the backups Leave the default settings for the remaining retention rules In Apply retention rules set After backup Create a dynamic group named say W_1 Specify Windows XP and Windows Vista as the criteria This way any workstation that will be registered on the management server later will be added to this group and protected by the same policy Apply the policy to the W_1 group Make sure that the policy has been successfully deployed to each of the workstations The policy deployment state has to change from Deploying to Deployed and its status has to be OK To see the resulting backup plans on each of the workstations a navigate to the All machines group or the W_1 group b select the workstation c select the Backup plans and tasks tab on the Information pane You can also see the resulting tasks created on the workstations in the Tasks view Use the Dashboard or the Tasks view to track the daily activities related to the policy Once you ascertain that all tasks run as specified you can only check the policy status in the Backup policies view To protect data on a daily basis you can also use the GFS or Tower of Hanoi backup schemes Protecting the virtual machines Acronis Backup amp Rec
35. You will be taken to the Backup plans and tasks view where you can examine the state and progress of the recovery task 6 3 11 Bootability troubleshooting If a system was bootable at the time of backup you expect that it will boot after recovery However the information the operating system stores and uses for booting up may become outdated during recovery especially if you change volume sizes locations or destination drives Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 automatically updates Windows loaders after recovery Other loaders might also be fixed but there are cases when you have to re activate the loaders Specifically when you recover Linux volumes it is sometimes necessary to apply fixes or make booting changes so that Linux can boot and load correctly Below is asummary of typical situations that require additional user actions Why a recovered operating system may be unbootable The machine BIOS is configured to boot from another HDD Solution Configure the BIOS to boot from the HDD where the operating system resides The system was recovered on dissimilar hardware and the new hardware is incompatible with the most critical drivers included in the backup Solution for Windows Recover the volume once again When configuring recovery opt for using Acronis Universal Restore and specify the appropriate HAL and mass storage drivers Windows was recovered to a dynamic volume that cannot be bootable Solution Recover Windows to a ba
36. adding machines to the group A machine remains in a static group until the administrator removes it from the group or from the management server Storage node Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node A server aimed to optimize usage of various resources required for protection of enterprise data This goal is achieved by organizing managed vaults p 375 Storage node enables the administrator to relieve managed machines p 375 of unnecessary CPU load by using the storage node side cleanup p 377 and storage node side validation p 378 drastically reduce backup traffic and storage space taken by the archives p 367 by using deduplication p 371 prevent access to the backup archives even in case the storage medium is stolen or accessed by a malefactor by using encrypted vaults p 374 Storage node side cleanup Cleanup p 370 performed by a storage node p 377 according to the backup plans p 368 that produce the archives p 367 stored in a managed vault p 375 Being an alternative to the agent side cleanup p 367 the cleanup on the storage node side relieves the production servers of unnecessary CPU load Since the cleanup schedule exists on the machine p 375 the agent p 366 resides on and therefore uses the machine s time and events the agent has to initiate the storage node side cleanup every time the scheduled time or event comes To do so the agent must be online The following t
37. also known as cluster size or block size is not divisible by 4 KB Tip The allocation unit size on most NTFS and ext3 volumes is 4 KB and so allows for block level deduplication Other examples of allocation unit sizes allowing for block level deduplication include 8 KB 16 KB and 64 KB If you protected the archive with a password Tip If you want to protect the data in the archive while still allowing it to be deduplicated leave the archive non password protected and encrypt the deduplicating vault itself with a password which you can do when creating the vault Disk blocks that were not deduplicated are stored in the archive as they would be in a non deduplicating vault File level deduplication restrictions During a file backup to an archive in a deduplicating vault deduplication of a file is not performed in the following cases f the file is encrypted and the In archives store encrypted files in decrypted state check box in the backup options is cleared it is cleared by default m If the file is less than 4 KB in size f you protected the archive with a password Files that were not deduplicated are stored in the archive as they would be in a non deduplicating vault Deduplication and NTFS data streams In the NTFS file system a file may have one or more additional sets of data associated with it often called alternate data streams When such file is backed up so are all its alternate data s
38. are owned by the user who has created or last modified the task Managing a plan task owned by another user Having Administrator privileges on the machine a user can modify tasks and local backup plans owned by any user registered in the operating system When a user opens a plan or task for editing which is owned by another user all passwords set in the task are cleared This prevents the modify settings leave passwords trick The program displays a warning each time you are trying to edit a plan task last modified by another user On seeing the warning you have two options Click Cancel and create your own plan or task The original task will remain intact Continue editing You will have to enter all credentials required for the plan or task execution Archive owner An archive owner is the user who saved the archive to the destination To be more precise this is the user whose account was specified when creating the backup plan in the Where to back up step By default the plan s credentials are used Plan s credentials and task credentials Any task running on a machine runs on behalf of a user When creating a plan or a task you have the option to explicitly specify an account under which the plan or the task will run Your choice depends on whether the plan or task is intended for manual start or for executing on schedule Manual start You can skip the Plan s Task credentials step Every time you start the task
39. configuration You also have the ability to configure the network settings manually when the bootable agent is running on the machine Pre configuring multiple network connections You can pre configure TCP IP settings for up to ten network interface cards To ensure that each NIC will be assigned the appropriate settings create the media on the server for which the media is customized When you select an existing NIC in the wizard window its settings are selected for saving on the media The MAC address of each existing NIC is also saved on the media You can change the settings except for the MAC address or configure the settings for a non existent NIC if need be Once the bootable agent starts on the server it retrieves the list of available NICs This list is sorted by the slots the NICs occupy the closest to the processor on top The bootable agent assigns each known NIC the appropriate settings identifying the NICs by their MAC addresses After the NICs with known MAC addresses are configured the remaining NICs are assigned the settings that you have made for non existent NICs starting from the upper non assigned NIC You can customize bootable media for any machine and not only for the machine where the media is created To do so configure the NICs according to their slot order on that machine NIC1 occupies the slot closest to the processor NIC2 is in the next slot and so on When the bootable agent starts on that machine
40. create the groups DCNAME Acronis Remote Users and DCNAME Acronis Centralized Admins manually and then include the members of Acronis Remote Users and Acronis Centralized Admins in the newly created groups Management server administrator rights Normally the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server administrator operates ona registered machine on behalf of the Acronis Managed Machine Service also known as the Acronis service on that machine and has the same privileges as the service has Alternatively when creating a backup policy the management server administrator has the option to explicitly specify a user account under which the centralized backup plans will run on the registered machines In this case the user account must exist on all the machines to which the centralized policy will be deployed This is not always efficient To be a management server administrator the user must be a member of the Acronis Centralized Admins group on the machine where the management server is installed User privileges on a storage node The scope of a user s privileges on Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node depends on the user s rights on the machine where the storage node is installed A regular user such as a member of the Users group on the storage node can Create archives in any centralized vault managed by the storage node View and manage archives owned by the user A user who is a member of the Administra
41. deploying and revoking Applying a policy establishes the correspondence between the policy and one or more machines This process takes place inside the management server s database and does not take much time Deploying a policy transfers the established correspondence to the machines Physically a bundle of tasks is created on each machine according to the configuration provided by the policy Revoking a policy is the reverse action to the aggregate of applying and deploying Revoking removes the correspondence between the policy and one or more machines and then removes the tasks from the machines If a machine is not available or not reachable at the moment the change will be propagated on the machine when it becomes available This means that deploying a policy to multiple machines is not a momentary action The same is true for revoking These two processes may be durable and so the management server tracks and displays personal statuses for each machine that it works with as well as the policy s cumulative status A policy on a machine or a group In the diagrams below each numbered scheme illustrates the result of the respectively numbered action The container stands for a group the colored circle stands for a machine with applied policy the dark colored circle stands for a machine with two applications of the same policy the white circle stands for a machine to which no policy is applied Policy on a machine 1 A pol
42. functionality of the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 agent Put this component on the media if you want more functionality during recovery You will be able to configure the recovery operation in the same way as under regular bootable media use Active Restore or Universal Restore If the media is being created in Windows the disk management functionality will also be available Error handling These options are effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media These options enable you to specify how to handle errors that might occur during backup Do not show messages and dialogs while processing silent mode The preset is Disabled With the silent mode enabled the program will automatically handle situations requiring user interaction except for handling bad sectors which is defined as a separate option If an operation cannot continue without user interaction it will fail Details of the operation including errors if any can be found in the operation log Re attempt if an error occurs The preset is Enabled Number of attempts 5 Interval between attempts 30 seconds When a recoverable error occurs the program re attempts to perform the unsuccessful operation You can set the time interval and the number of attempts The attempts will be stopped as soon as the operation succeeds OR the specified number of attempts is performed depending on which comes first For example if the backup destination on th
43. it will find no NICs with known MAC addresses and will configure the NICs in the same order as you did Example The bootable agent could use one of the network adapters for communication with the management console through the production network Automatic configuration could be done for this connection Sizeable data for recovery could be transferred through the second NIC included in the dedicated backup network by means of static TCP IP settings Network port While creating bootable media you have an option to pre configure the network port that the bootable agent listens for incoming connection The choice is available between the default port the currently used port the new port enter the port number If the port has not been pre configured the agent uses the default port number 9876 This port is also used as default by the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Console Drivers for Universal Restore While creating bootable media you have an option to add Windows drivers to the media The drivers will be used by Universal Restore when recovering Windows on a machine with a dissimilar processor different motherboard or different mass storage device than in the backed up system You will be able to configure the Universal Restore to search the media for the drivers that best fit the target hardware to get the mass storage drivers that you explicitly specify from the media This is necessary when the
44. mount the root file system at the logical volume To boot the system change the loader configuration and etc fstab so that LVM is not used and reactivate your boot loader as described in the Bootability troubleshooting p 230 section When recovering a logical volume over a basic MBR volume you can resize the resulting volume Before recovering logical volumes to a target machine with no corresponding logical volume structure for example to recover to bare metal you need to create the logical volumes and groups in either of these ways Before performing the first disk backup on a source machine run the following command trueimagecmd dumpraidinfo This will save the machine s logical volume structure to the etc Acronis directory Include the volume with this directory to the list of volumes to back up Before the recovery use the restoreraids sh script in bootable media to create the structure Alternatively use the lvm utility to create the structure manually and then perform the recovery You can perform this procedure either in Linux or in bootable media For detailed instructions on how to recover logical volumes see Recovering MD devices and logical volumes p 263 You do not need to create the volume structure if it already exists on the machine such is the case when some data on the volume was lost but no hard disks were replaced How to select logical volumes to back up Logical volumes appear at the end of
45. or any of multiple conditions is not met is defined by the Task start conditions p 114 backup option What ifs What if an event occurs and a condition if any is met while the previous task run has not completed The event will be ignored What if an event occurs while the scheduler is waiting for the condition required by the previous event The event will be ignored What if the condition is not met for a very long time If delaying a backup is getting risky you can force the condition tell the users to log off or run the task manually To automatically handle this situation you can set the time interval after which the task will run regardless of the condition 5 1 Daily schedule Daily schedule is effective in Windows and Linux operating systems To specify a daily schedule In the Schedule area select the appropriate parameter as follows Every lt gt day s Set up the certain number of days you want the task to be run For example if you set Every 2 day s the task will be started on every other day In the During the day execute the task area select one of the following Once at lt gt Set up the time at which the task will be run once Every lt gt Set up how many times the task will be restarted during the specified time interval For example setting the task frequency to Every 1 hour From 10 00 00 AM until 10 00 00 PM allows the task to run 12 times from 10 AM to 10 PM during one
46. path and name are distributed to all machines registered on the server The shortcut to the vault appears on the machines in the Vaults gt Centralized group Any backup plan existing on the machines including local plans can use the centralized vault On a machine that is not registered on the management server a user having the privilege to back up to the centralized vault can do so by specifying the full path to the vault If the vault is managed the user s archives as well as other archives stored in the vault will be managed by the storage node Managed vaults The managed vault is a centralized vault managed by a storage node The storage node performs storage node side cleanup p 377 and storage node side validation p 378 for each archive stored in the managed vault When creating a managed vault an administrator can specify additional operations that the storage node will perform deduplication p 71 encryption Management operations cannot be canceled or disabled They will be performed for all archives stored in the vault unless the vault is deleted Any managed vault is self contained that is contains all metadata the storage node needs to manage the vault In case the storage node is lost or its database is corrupted the new storage node retrieves the metadata and re creates the database When the vault is attached to another storage node the same procedure takes place Accessing managed vaults To be able to back
47. schedule In the first of the previous examples we set up a schedule only for full backups However the scheme will still result in three backup tasks enabling you to manually start a backup of any type Full backup runs every Friday at 10 00 PM Incremental backup runs manually Differential backup runs manually You can run any of these backup tasks by selecting it from the list of tasks in the Backup plans and tasks section in the left pane If you have also specified the retention rules in your backup scheme the scheme will result in four tasks three backup tasks and one cleanup task 7 3 8 Archive validation Set up the validation task to check if the backed up data is recoverable If the backup could not pass the validation successfully the validation task fails and the backup plan gets the Error status To set up validation specify the following parameters 1 When to validate select when to perform the validation As the validation is a resource intensive operation it makes sense to schedule the validation to the managed machine s off peak period On the other hand if the validation is a major part of your data protection strategy and you prefer to be immediately informed whether the backed up data is not corrupted and can be successfully recovered think of starting the validation right after backup creation 2 What to validate select either to validate the entire archive or the latest backup in the ar
48. the archive will consist of weekly full backups and daily incremental backups We further require that a full backup begin only after all users have logged off Full backup Schedule Weekly every Friday at 10 00 PM Full backup Conditions User is logged off Incremental Schedule Weekly every workday at 9 00 PM Also let all backups older than one year be deleted from the archive and let the cleanup be performed upon creating a new backup Retention rules Delete backups older than 12 months Apply the rules After backing up By default a one year old full backup will not be deleted until all incremental backups that depend on it become subject to deletion too For more information see Retention rules p 39 Monthly full weekly differential and daily incremental backups plus cleanup This example demonstrates the use of all options available in the Custom scheme Suppose that we need a scheme that will produce monthly full backups weekly differential backups and daily incremental backups Then the backup schedule can look as follows Full backup Schedule Monthly every Last Sunday of the month at 9 00 PM Incremental Schedule Weekly every workday at 7 00 PM Differential Schedule Weekly every Saturday at 8 00 PM Further we want to add conditions that have to be satisfied for a backup task to start This is set up in the Conditions fields for each backup type Full backup Conditions Location available Incrementa
49. the machines and the management server occurred Last successful backup The period within which the last successful backup finished on each of the machines Next backup The period within which the next scheduled backup will start on each of the machines Operating system The operating systems that the machines run IP address physical machines only The range for the latest known IP addresses of the machines Availability physical machines only The types of the machines availability Online or Offline With the default filter settings the report includes all physical machines Report view Under Report view choose how the report will look Select whether to show all items in a single table or to group them by a particular column Specify which table columns to show and in which order Specify how to sort the table Report about the backup policies In this view you can generate a report about the backup policies existing on the management server This report consists of one or more tables Filters Under Filters choose which backup policies to include in the report Only the backup policies that meet all filter criteria are included Backup policies The list of backup policies Source type The type of data backed up under the backup policies Disks volumes and or Files Deployment state The deployment states of the backup policies for example Deployed Status The statuses of t
50. this option is not available Assume you are going to recover a volume from an old low capacity FAT16 disk to a newer disk FAT16 would not be effective and might even be impossible to set on the high capacity hard disk That s because FAT16 supports volumes up to 4GB so you will not be able to recover a 4GB FAT16 volume to a volume that exceeds that limit without changing the file system It would make sense here to change the file system from FAT16 to FAT32 Older operating systems MS DOS Windows 95 and Windows NT 3 x 4 x do not support FAT32 and will not be operable after you recover a volume and change its file system These can be normally recovered on a FAT16 volume only Logical drive letter for Windows only Assign a letter to the recovered volume Select the desired letter from a drop down list m With the default AUTO selection the first unused letter will be assigned to the volume If you select NO no letter will be assigned to the recovered volume hiding it from the OS You should not assign letters to volumes that are inaccessible to Windows such as to those other than FAT and NTFS Virtual machine type virtualization server selection The new virtual machine can be created either on a virtualization server this requires Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Hyper V or Agent for ESX ESXi to be installed or in any accessible local or networked folder To select the virtualization server the new virtual mac
51. 3 day s 2 Every 4 hours From 08 00 00 AM Until 12 00 00 PM 3 Effective From 09 20 2009 To not set Second daily schedule 1 Every 3 day s 2 Every 2 hour s From 03 00 00 PM Until 07 00 00 PM 3 Effective From 09 20 2009 To not set 5 2 Weekly schedule Weekly schedule is effective in Windows and Linux operating systems To specify a weekly schedule In the Schedule area select the appropriate parameter as follows Every lt gt week s on lt gt Specify a certain number of weeks and the days of the week you want the task to be run For example with the Every 2 week s on Mon setting the task will be performed on Monday of every other week In the During the day execute the task area select one of the following Once at lt gt Set up the time at which the task will be run once Every lt gt Set up how many times the task will be run during the specified time interval For example setting the task frequency to Every 1 hour From 10 00 00 AM until 10 00 00 PM allows the task to be run 12 times from 10 AM to 10 PM during one day From lt gt Until lt gt In the Effective area set the following settings From lt gt Set up a date when this schedule will be enabled an effective date If this check box is cleared the task will be started on the nearest day and time you have specified above To lt gt Set up a date when this schedule will be disa
52. 367 For example a backup plan can contain the following information back up volume C this is the data the plan will protect name the archive MySystemVolume and place it to server backups this is the backup archive name and location perform full backup monthly on the last day of the month at 10 00AM and incremental backup on Sundays at 10 00PM Delete backups that are older than 3 months this is a backup scheme validate the last backup immediately after its creation this is a validation rule protect the archive with a password this is an option Physically a backup plan is a bundle of tasks p 378 configured for execution on a managed machine p 375 A backup plan can be created directly on the machine local plan or appears on the machine as a result of a backup policy p 368 deployment centralized plan p 370 Backup policy Policy A backup plan template created by the management server p 376 administrator and stored on the management server A backup policy contains the same rules as a backup plan but might not explicitly specify what data items to back up Instead selection rules p 377 such as environment variables can be used Because of this flexible selection a backup policy can be centrally applied to multiple machines If a data item is specified explicitly e g dev sda or C Windows the policy will back up this item on each machine where this exact path is found By apply
53. 49 130 VM protection options 94 VMware vCenter integration 95 318 319 Volume destination 227 229 Volume operations 282 Volume properties 229 Volume selection 245 247 Volume Shadow Copy Service 100 105 107 Volumes 222 228 Volumes to back up selection rules 359 Ww Weekly schedule 172 215 326 372 What if 161 When deduplication is most effective 74 When to recover 223 233 When to validate 242 244 Why is the program asking for the password 203 Windows event log 93 96 101 111 123 127 WinPE Windows Preinstallation Environment 379 382 392 Work across subnets 274 Working under bootable media 266 Working with backup plans and tasks 190 Working with the 132 133 163 290
54. 6 32 days 16 to 47 days 16 days Adding a level doubles the full backup and roll back periods To see why the number of recovery days varies let us return to the previous example Here are the backups we have on day 12 numbers in gray denote deleted backups Pi 2 3i4 s5 6 789 10 11 12 A new level 3 differential backup has not yet been created so the backup of day five is still stored Since it depends on the full backup of day one that backup is available as well This enables us to go as far back as 11 days which is the best case scenario The following day however a new third level differential backup is created and the old full backup is deleted pi 2 3 4 5 6 71 8 9 10 11 12 13 ERE eee 2 This gives us only a four day recovery interval which turns out to be the worst case scenario On day 14 the interval is five days It increases on subsequent days before decreasing again and so on Pa 2 3 4 s5 e6 7 89 10 12 22 13 14 ae 2 ore The roll back period shows how many days we are guaranteed to have even in the worst case For a four level scheme it is four days Custom backup scheme At a glance Custom schedule and conditions for backups of each type m Custom schedule and retention rules Parameters Parameter Meaning Full backup Specifies on what schedule and under which conditions to perform a full backup For example the full backup can be set up to run ever
55. A group of machines that always exists on a management server p 376 A management server has two built in groups that contain all machines of each type All physical machines p 376 All virtual machines p 379 Built in groups cannot be deleted moved to other groups or manually modified Custom groups cannot be created within built in groups There is no way to remove a physical machine from the built in group except for deleting the machine from the management server Virtual machines are deleted as a result of their host server deletion A backup policy p 368 can be applied to a built in group C Centralized backup plan A backup plan p 368 that appears on the managed machine p 375 as a result of deploying a backup policy p 368 from the management server p 376 Such plan can be modified only by editing the backup policy Centralized management Management of the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 infrastructure through a central management unit known as Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server p 376 The centralized management operations include creating applying and managing backup policies p 368 creating and managing static p 377 and dynamic groups p 373 of machines p 375 managing the tasks p 378 existing on the machines creating and managing centralized vaults p 370 for storing archives managing storage nodes p 377 monitoring activities of the Acronis Back
56. Agent for Linux to a new or existing virtual machine using either of the agents for virtual machines Hence physical to virtual and virtual to physical machine migration becomes available Guest operating systems The following guest operating systems are supported Microsoft Windows platform Microsoft Windows 2000 Microsoft Windows XP Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 m Microsoft Vista Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Microsoft Windows 7 Linux platform Guest HDD The following virtual disk configurations are supported Partitioning style MBR Volume types basic and dynamic volumes Dynamic volumes LDM in Windows and LVM in Linux are supported to the same extent as on physical machines The LDM LVM structure needs to be created prior to the recovery if you want to retain the LDM LVM To do so you will have to boot the target virtual machine using bootable media p 369 or its ISO image and use Acronis Disk Director Lite for LDM reconstruction or Linux command line tools for LVM reconstruction Another option is to recover dynamic volumes as basic Troubleshooting Agent Agent for Hyper V Issue Backup of an online virtual machine fails because of a Volume Shadow Copy Service VSS error The error can be seen in the Application Event Log Event ID 8193 Cause This happens because there is no registry key HKEY_CLASSES_ ROOT
57. Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server a physical machine is the same as a registered machine p 377 A virtual machine is considered physical if an Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 agent is installed on the machine and the machine is registered on the management server Plan See Backup plan p 368 Policy See Backup policy p 368 R Recovery point Date and time to which the backed up data can be reverted to Registered machine A machine p 375 managed by a management server p 376 A machine can be registered on only one management server at a time A machine becomes registered as a result of the registration p 377 procedure Registration A procedure that adds a managed machine p 375 to a management server p 376 Registration sets up a trust relationship between the agent p 366 residing on the machine and the server During registration the console retrieves the management server s client certificate and passes it to the agent which uses it later to authenticate clients attempting to connect This helps prevent any attempts by network attackers from establishing a fake connection on behalf of a trusted principal the management server S Selection rule A part of the backup policy p 368 Enables the management server p 376 administrator to select the data to back up within a machine Static group A group of machines which a management server p 376 administrator populates by manually
58. Bart PE with Acronis Plug in from Windows distribution p 260 for details Linux based bootable media When using the media builder you have to specify 1 optional The parameters of the Linux kernel Separate multiple parameters with spaces For example to be able to select a display mode for the bootable agent each time the media starts type vga ask For a list of parameters see Kernel parameters p 255 The Acronis bootable components to be placed on the media Universal Restore can be enabled if Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Universal Restore is installed on the machine where the media is created optional The timeout interval for the boot menu plus the component that will automatically start on timeout If not configured the Acronis loader waits for someone to select whether to boot the operating system if present or the Acronis component If you set say 10 sec for the bootable agent the agent will launch 10 seconds after the menu is displayed This enables unattended onsite operation when booting from a PXE server or WDS RIS optional Remote logon settings user name and password to be entered on the console side at connection to the agent If you leave these fields empty the connection will be enabled on typing any symbols in the prompt window optional Network settings p 256 TCP IP settings to be assigned to the machine network adapters optional Network port p 257 the
59. Calculated automatically depending on the schedule parameters and the numbers of levels you select See the example below for details Example Schedule parameters are set as follows Recur Every 1 day Frequency Once at 6 PM Number of levels 4 This is how the first 14 days or 14 sessions of this scheme s schedule look Shaded numbers denote backup levels eee eee eet eel eee HE H H Backups of different levels have different types Last level in this case level 4 backups are full Backups of intermediate levels 2 3 are differential First level 1 backups are incremental A cleanup mechanism ensures that only the most recent backups of each level are kept Here is how the archive looks on day 8 a day before creating a new full backup The scheme allows for efficient data storage more backups accumulate toward the current time Having four backups we could recover data as of today yesterday half a week or a week ago Roll back period The number of days we can go back in the archive is different on different days The minimum number of days we are guaranteed to have is called the roll back period The following table shows full backup and roll back periods for schemes of various levels Number of Full backup On different Roll back levels every days can go period back 2 2 days 1 to 2 days 1 day 3 4 days 2 to 5 days 2 days 4 8 days 4 to 11 days 4 days 5 16 days 8 to 23 days 8 days
60. D D M schedule S Mon Tue We Thu Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue ocooocococeo oo 0 oOo 00 0 vu UCU OCF ovo couce Ww Ww W W wW W wW Fri wW Sat W Sun wW Mon W Tue W We wW wW Thu wW W Fri Ww Sat Ww An ideal archive created according to the GFS scheme Schedule Workdays at 8 00 PM Weekly Monthly Friday Keep daily backups 7 days Keep weekly backups 2 weeks Keep monthly backups 6 months e Keep daly 7 days cvouuoDooD evvuvVv00n0 ooo0oo0oo0oo0o0 oooo0ooogog E 7555 222 Keep weekly 2 week ovo voc 70 c 90 0 0 00 02 covv OU VCC Fg wW ooo0oo0oo0oo0o 0D M oo CV C0UC0 gf oO e E U0 0 ooog Co Starting from the third week weekly backups will be regularly deleted After 6 months monthly backups will start to be deleted The diagram for weekly and monthly backups will look similar to the week based timescale The resulting archive real In reality the archive content will somewhat differ from the ideal scheme When using the incremental and differential backup methods you cannot delete a backup as soon as the scheme requires if later backups are based on this backup Regular consolidation is unacceptable because it takes too much system resources The program has to wait until the scheme requires the deletion of all the dependent backups and then deletes the entire chain Here is how the first month of your backup plan will appear in real life F
61. Dynamic to basic conversion of the disk comprising of system volumes takes a certain amount of time and any power loss unintentional turning off of the machine or accidental pressing of the Reset button during the procedure could result in bootability loss In contrast to Windows Disk Manager the program ensures safe conversion of a dynamic disk to basic when it contains volumes with data for simple and mirrored volumes in multiboot systems bootability of a system that was offline during the operation Changing disk status Changing disk status is effective for Windows Vista SP1 Windows Server 2008 Windows 7 operating systems and applies to the current disk layout p 270 One of the following disk statuses always appears in the graphical view of the disk next to the disk s name Online The online status means that a disk is accessible in the read write mode This is the normal disk status If you need a disk to be accessible in the read only mode select the disk and then change its status to offline by selecting Change disk status to offline from the Operations menu Offline The offline status means that a disk is accessible in the read only mode To bring the selected offline disk back to online select Change disk status to online from the Operations menu If the disk has the offline status and the disk s name is Missing this means that the disk cannot be located or identified by the operating system It may be cor
62. ESXi virtual machines 1 VMware Tools p 49 have to be installed in the guest systems 2 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for ESX ESXi is delivered as a virtual appliance Do either of the following Deploy the agent p 311 to the ESX ESXi server or Install and configure the agent manually as described in Installing ESX ESXi virtual appliance Add p 294 the virtual appliance to the management server as an ordinary physical machine The virtual machines hosted on the ESX ESXi server except for the virtual appliance with the agent appear in the All virtual machines group Virtual machines added to the management server as virtual machines are present under the Virtual machines in the Navigation tree This section describes available operations with these machines Virtual machines on a management server Availability of virtual machines Virtual machines are displayed as available when both the agent is available for the management server and the machines are available for the agent The list of virtual machines is refreshed dynamically every time the management server synchronizes with the agents When the virtualization server or the virtual appliance becomes unavailable or is withdrawn the virtual machines are grayed out When virtual machines become unavailable for the agent this happens when machines are removed from the virtualization server inventory deleted from the disk or the server s storage is down or
63. Help Contains a list of help topics Different views and action pages of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 provided with lists of specific help topics Operations with panes How to expand minimize panes By default the Navigation pane appears expanded and the Actions and Tools minimized You might need to minimize the pane in order to free some additional workspace To do this click the chevron sl for the Navigation pane gt for the Actions and tools pane The pane will be minimized and the chevron changes its direction Click the chevron once again to expand the pane How to change the panes borders 1 Point to the pane s border 2 When the pointer becomes a double headed arrow drag the pointer to move the border The management console remembers the way the panes borders are set When you run the management console next time all the panes borders will have the same position that was set previously Main area views and action pages The main area is a basic place where you work with the console Here you create edit and manage backup plans policies tasks and perform other operations The main area displays different views and action pages according the items you select in the menu Navigation tree or on the Actions and Tools pane Views A view appears on the main area when clicking any item in the Navigation tree in the Navigation pane p 11 Acronts Hackup amp Recovery 10 Connected to This Machine
64. If the system fails to boot you will be able to start the bootable rescue utility by pressing F11 or by selecting it from the menu respectively The system disk or the boot partition in Linux should have at least 70 MB of free space to activate Acronis Startup Recovery Manager Unless you use the GRUB boot loader and it is installed in the Master Boot Record MBR Acronis Startup Recovery Manager activation overwrites the MBR with its own boot code Thus you may need to reactivate third party boot loaders if they are installed Under Linux when using a boot loader other than GRUB such as LILO consider installing it to a Linux root or boot partition boot record instead of the MBR before activating ASRM Otherwise reconfigure the boot loader manually after the activation Do not activate Disables boot time prompt Press F11 for Acronis Startup Recovery Manager or the menu item in GRUB If Acronis Startup Recovery Manager is not activated you will need one of the following to recover the system when it fails to boot boot the machine from a separate bootable rescue media use network boot from Acronis PXE Server or Microsoft Remote Installation Services RIS See the Bootable media p 252 section for details 6 10 Bootable media Bootable media Bootable media is physical media CD DVD USB drive or other media supported by a machine BIOS as a boot device that boots on any PC compatible machine and en
65. PE based bootable media contains a minimal Windows system called Windows Preinstallation Environment WinPE and Acronis Plug in for WinPE that is a modification of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent that can run in the preinstallation environment WinPE proved to be the most convenient bootable solution in large environments with heterogeneous hardware Advantages Using Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 in Windows Preinstallation Environment provides more functionality than using Linux based bootable media Having booted PC compatible hardware into WinPE you can use not only Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent but also PE commands and scripts and other plug ins you ve added to the PE PE based bootable media helps overcome some Linux related bootable media issues such as support for certain RAID controllers or certain levels of RAID arrays only Media based on PE 2 x that is Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008 kernel allows for dynamic loading of the necessary device drivers 6 10 1 How to create bootable media To enable creating physical media the machine must have a CD DVD recording drive or allow a flash drive to be attached To enable PXE or WDS RIS configuration the machine must have a network connection Bootable Media Builder can also create an ISO image of a bootable disk to burn it later ona blank disk Linux based bootable media Start the Bootable Media Builder either from the management console by selectin
66. Proprietary Acronis technologies section 6 8 1 Creating Acronis Secure Zone You can create Acronis Secure Zone while the operating system is running or using bootable media To create Acronis Secure Zone perform the following steps Space Disk p 248 Choose a hard disk if several on which to create the zone Acronis Secure Zone is created using unallocated space if available or at the expense of the volume s free space Size p 249 Specify the exact size of the zone Moving or resizing of locked volumes such as the volume containing the currently active operating system requires a reboot Settings Password p 249 Optional Protect the Acronis Secure Zone from unauthorized access with a password The prompt for the password appear at any operation relating to the zone After you configure the required settings click OK In the Result confirmation p 249 window review the expected layout and click OK to start creating the zone Acronis Secure Zone Disk The Acronis Secure Zone can be located on any fixed hard drive Acronis Secure Zone is always created at the end of the hard disk A machine can have only one Acronis Secure Zone Acronis Secure Zone is created using unallocated space if available or at the expense of the volumes free space The Acronis Secure Zone cannot be organized on a dynamic disk or a disk using the GPT partitioning style To allocate space for Acronis Secure Zone 1 Choose a hard
67. SSL certificates 83 85 87 353 Startup page 90 Static and dynamic groups 62 Static group 62 383 390 Storage Node 9 20 51 59 325 Storage node Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node 19 58 383 384 387 388 389 390 391 Storage node details 325 326 327 Storage nodes 324 Storage node side cleanup 20 132 324 389 390 Storage node side validation 20 132 324 389 390 391 Support for vCenter clusters 319 320 321 Supported file systems 22 Supported operating systems 22 Synchronizing machines with a text file 302 System requirements 25 T Tape compatibility table 51 140 141 162 Tape libraries 51 139 Tape library as a managed vault 142 Tape planning 148 159 Example 1 160 Example 2 161 Tape rotation 140 148 Tape support 51 100 118 140 144 146 Task 27 381 383 388 391 Task credentials 223 241 242 249 250 Task details 186 187 191 195 307 329 Task failure handling 100 117 Task start conditions 100 116 170 180 188 Task states 186 188 328 Task statuses 186 189 328 Tasks 295 297 301 306 316 328 Tasks need interaction 186 Technical support 26 Temporarily disabling a backup plan 165 195 Time since last backup 183 Time based alerts 91 ToH Example 1 156 157 160 ToH Example 2 156 158 ToH Example 3 156 159 Tower of Hanoi 382 391 Tow
68. Source files exclusion p 100 Pre Post backup commands p 101 Pre Post data capture commands p 102 Multi volume snapshot p 104 File level backup snapshot p 104 Use VSS p 105 Compression level p 105 Backup performance Backup priority p 106 HDD writing speed p 106 Network connection speed p 107 Fast incremental differential backup p 110 Backup splitting p 110 File level security p 111 Preserve files security settings in archives In archives store encrypted files in decrypted state Media components p 112 Error handling p 112 Do not show messages and dialogs while processing silent mode Re attempt if an error occurs Ignore bad sectors Dual destination p 113 Task start conditions p 114 Task failure handling p 115 Tape support p 115 Dest HDD Dest network share Dest removable media Dest local Dest managed vault on a tape library Dest HDD Dest network share Dest removable media Dest local Dest managed vault on a tape library Dest HDD Dest network share Dest removable media Dest local Dest managed vault on a tape library Dest HDD Dest network share Dest removable media Dest local Dest managed vault on a tape library PE only Dest HDD Dest network share Dest
69. TCP port that the bootable agent listens for incoming connection The type of media to create You can create CD DVD or other bootable media such as removable USB flash drives if the hardware BIOS allows for boot from such media build an ISO image of a bootable disc to burn it later on a blank disc upload the selected components to Acronis PXE Server upload the selected components to a WDS RIS 8 optional Windows system drivers to be used by Acronis Universal Restore p 257 This window appears only if the Acronis Universal Restore add on is installed and a media other than PXE or WDS RIS is selected 9 Path to the media ISO file or the name or IP and credentials for PXE or WDS RIS Kernel parameters This window lets you specify one or more parameters of the Linux kernel They will be automatically applied when the bootable media starts These parameters are typically used when experiencing problems while working with the bootable media Normally you can leave this field empty You also can specify any of these parameters by pressing F11 while in the boot menu Parameters When specifying multiple parameters separate them with spaces acpi off Disables Advanced Configuration and Power Interface ACPI You may want to use this parameter when experiencing problems with a particular hardware configuration noapic Disables Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller APIC You may want to use this parameter whe
70. Tasks view and specify you decision on each task in the Information pane The preset is Enabled To make a selection select or clear the Pop up the Tasks Need Interaction window check box About the task execution results This option is effective only when the console is connected to a managed machine The option defines whether to display the pop up messages about task run results successful completion failure or success with warnings When displaying of pop up messages is disabled you can review the task execution states and results in the Tasks view The preset is Enabled for all results To make a setting for each result successful completion failure or success with warnings individually select or clear the respective check box 3 1 3 Time based alerts Last backup This option is effective when the console is connected to a managed machine p 375 or to the management server p 376 The option defines whether to alert if no backup was performed on a given machine for a period of time You can configure the time period that is considered critical for your business The preset is alert if the last successful backup on a machine was completed more than 5 days ago The alert is displayed in the Alerts section of the Dashboard When the console is connected to the management server this setting will also control the color scheme of the Last backup column s value for each machine Last connection This option is eff
71. Tuesdays and Thursdays On these days you often make changes to your financial documents statements and update the spreadsheets etc on your laptop To back up this data you may want to Track changes to the financial statements spreadsheets etc performed on Tuesdays and Thursdays daily incremental backup Have a weekly summary of file changes since last month Friday weekly differential backup Have a monthly full backup of your files Moreover assume that you want to retain access to all backups including the daily ones for at least six months The following GFS scheme suits such purposes Start backup at 11 30 PM Back up on Tuesday Thursday Friday Weekly monthly Friday Keep backups Daily 6 months Weekly 6 months Monthly 5 years Here daily incremental backups will be created on Tuesdays and Thursdays with weekly and monthly backups performed on Fridays Note that in order to choose Friday in the Weekly monthly field you need to first select it in the Back up on field Such an archive would allow you to compare your financial documents as of the first and the last day of work and have a five year history of all documents etc No daily backups Consider a more exotic GFS scheme Start backup at 12 00 PM Back up on Friday Weekly monthly Friday Keep backups Daily 1 week Weekly 1 month m Monthly indefinitely Backup is thus performed only on Fridays This makes Fri
72. View tasks The Tasks p 319 view will display a list of the tasks related to the selected backup policy Click View log The Log p 321 view will display a list of the log entries related to the selected backup policy Click td Revoke The management server will revoke the policy from the machine The policy itself remains on the management server In case the machine is a member of a group and the policy is applied to the group you cannot revoke the policy from a single machine without firstly removing the machine from the group Click Explore inheritance The Inheritance order p 303 window will display the inheritance order of the policy appliied to the machine Filtering and sorting of the backup policies is performed in the same way as for the Backup policies view See the Filtering and sorting backup policies p 289 section for details Plans and tasks Displays a list of the plans both local and centralized and tasks existing on the selected machine Operations The following is a guideline for you to perform operations with backup plans and tasks To View details of a plan task View plan s task s log Do Backup plan Click View details In the Plan Details p 192 window review the plan details Task Click View details In the Task Details p 190 window review the task details Backup plan Click L View log Run a plan task Stop a plan task You will be taken to t
73. Windows in accordance with the device manufacturer s installation instructions If Removable Storage Manager RSM is present in your version of Windows it must be activated In Microsoft Windows XP and Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Removable Storage Manager is part of the operating system and is activated initially To activate Removable Storage Manager in Microsoft Windows Server 2008 1 Click Administrative Tools gt Server Manager gt Features gt Add Feature 2 Select the Removable Storage Manager check box To activate Removable Storage Manager in Microsoft Windows Vista 1 Click Control Panel gt Programs gt Programs and Features gt Turn Windows features on or off 2 Select the Removable Storage Management check box Fill the library slots with tape cartridges If a tape does not get a barcode or its barcode is corrupted you can define the tape label for identification purposes later You should have Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server and Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Console installed on local or remote machines as well as Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node installed on the machine with the tape library device and registered in the management server Tape library as a managed vault To enable data protection operations using a tape library you have to create a managed vault on the tape library You can create a vault from the Centralized vaults view of the console Se
74. a iA AEE AS AARE EE 46 2 11 Backing Up Virtual machines issssicnssni osani araeir eaea a daai ie daaa Ei E 47 2 11 1 How to install Hyper V Integration Service cccccccsccesscsscssssesssesessesscecsessessesssseesecseseessessessesauessseseessess 49 2 11 2 How to install VMware Tools scccsscsssessscssceseseecesesseecscsesseeeesceesaeseseceseacseesseeesacaesaceceesseasaeeesasaeseeeteesaees 49 212 Va PG SUP POM sione a gcuceand sane Eiee E Eos aa Eo Deens raaa iS Coa EEEa ei 2 12 1 Tape compatibility table 2 12 2 Using a single tape drive 2 13 Proprietary Acronis technologies ZAZA Acronis Secure Zoe iiss sacsisaracerciautiveny cinerea nuneeeen setae ini cette a REA aa 51 2 13 2 Acronis Startup Recovery Manage r cccscssccscssecsecssscsscssecsecsescsecssecsecsesssesesecseseeseaesesecenssaeenesesesenssaesnsens 52 2 13 3 Universal Restore Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Universal ReStOre ccccscssesesssscsesscscssssessescseeeesees 53 ZAZA Acroms Active ROSCOE ri ijesaceicsieaccicindsssscesnd candceasuetcev exces iueatensanasueutesav Ea EA EA A a A E AE Ea ATE E aaaea iaa EAA 55 2 14 Understanding centralized management cccceseessssececececessesneaecececeeseseaeaeeeeeceseessaeaneeseees 56 QMALA BASIC CONCEPTS is cascades ceccszeesiexccscassceaseyrwacensa cesaves sseeas cancun EEEE AKEE EEEIEE EEEE EEEE ERREA 56 2 14 2 Setting up centralized data protection in a heterogeneous network cccssesee
75. all hidden files and folders Select this check box to skip files and folders with the Hidden attribute If a folder is Hidden all of its contents including files that are not Hidden will be excluded Exclude all system files and folders Select this check box to skip files and folders with the System attribute If a folder is System all of its contents including files that are not System will be excluded You can view file or folder attributes in the file folder properties or by using the attrib command For more information refer to the Help and Support Center in Windows Exclude files matching the following criteria Select this check box to skip files whose names match any of the criteria called file masks in the list use the Add Edit Remove and Remove All buttons to create the list of file masks You can use one or more wildcard characters and in a file mask The asterisk substitutes for zero or more characters in a file name for example the file mask Doc txt yields files such as Doc txt and Document txt The question mark substitutes for exactly one character in a file name for example the file mask Doc txt yields files such as Doc1 txt and Docs txt but not the files Doc txt or Doc11 txt Exclusion examples By name File1 log Excludes all files named File1 log By path C Finance test log Excludes the file named test log located in the folder C Finance Mask Excl
76. and manage tasks existing on the registered machines You can view tasks details their states and execution results as well as run stop and delete tasks To find out what a task is currently doing on a machine check the task execution state The status of a task helps you to estimate whether the task is successfully accomplished To learn more about task states and statuses see the Task states p 184 and Task statuses p 185 sections Way of working with tasks Use the filtering and sorting p 321 capabilities to display the desired tasks in the table Select a task to take an action on it Actions on tasks The following is a guideline for you to perform operations with tasks To Do Create a new backup plan Click New and select one of the following or a task on a registered machine Backup plan p 195 Recovery task p 215 m Validation task p 235 Then you have to specify the registered machine on which the selected task or the backup plan will run View details of a task View a task s log Run a task Stop a task Edit a task Delete a task Click View details In the Tasks details p 190 window examine all information related to the selected task Click _ View log The Log p 321 view will display a list of the log entries related to the selected task Click gt Run The task will be executed immediately in spite of its schedule Click we Stop What will happen if
77. at 9 PM The schedule s parameters are thus set up as follows 1 Every 1 week s on lt Workdays gt selecting the lt Workdays gt check box automatically selects the corresponding check boxes Mon Tue Wed Thu and Fri and leaves the remaining ones unchanged Once at 09 00 00 PM Effective From empty If you have created the task say on Monday at 11 30 AM the task will be started on the same day at 9 PM If the task was created say on Friday after 9 PM then it will be started for the first time on the nearest workday Monday in our example at 9 PM End date empty The task will be restarted for an indefinite number of weeks This schedule is widely used when creating a custom backup scheme The Workdays like schedule is added to the incremental backups while the full backup is scheduled to be performed one day in the week For more details see the Full and incremental backups plus cleanup example in the Custom backup scheme p 210 section Several weekly schedules for one task In the case when the task needs to be run on different days of the weeks with different time intervals consider adding a dedicated schedule to every desired day of the week or to several days For example you need the task to be run with the following schedule Monday twice at 12 PM noon and 9 PM Tuesday every 3 hours from 9 AM till 9 PM Wednesday every 3 hours from 9 AM till 9 PM Thursday every 3 hours from 9 AM t
78. backup file will be created if the destination disk s file system allows the estimated file size The backup will automatically be split into several files if the destination disk s file system does not allow the estimated file size Such might be the case when the backup is placed on FAT16 and FAT32 file systems that have a 4GB file size limit If the destination disk runs out of free space while creating the backup the task enters the Need interaction state You have the ability to free additional space and retry the operation If you do so the resulting backup will be split into the parts created before and after the retry When backing up to removable media CD DVD or a tape device locally attached to the managed machine The task will enter the Need interaction state and ask for a new media when the previous one is full Fixed size Enter the desired file size or select it from the drop down list The backup will then be split into multiple files of the specified size This comes in handy when creating a backup that you plan to burn to multiple CDs or DVDs later on You might also want to split the backup destined to an FTP server since data recovery directly from an FTP server requires the backup to be split into files no more than 2GB in size File level security These options are effective only for file level backup in Windows operating systems In archives store encrypted files in a decrypted state This option defines whether to
79. backup plan the corresponding column header As a result you will see the list of tasks whose names owner names or backup plan names fully or just partly coincide with the entered value Filter tasks by type execution In a field below the corresponding header select the required value from the list state status type origin last result schedule Configuring tasks table By default the table has eight columns that are displayed others are hidden If required you can hide the shown columns and show the hidden ones To show or hide columns 1 Right click any column header to open the context menu The menu items that are ticked off correspond to the column headers presented in the table 2 Click the items you want to be displayed hidden 7 1 7 Log The Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 log stores the history of actions the software does on a machine or a user does on a machine using the software For example when a user edits a task an entry is added to the log When the software executes a task it adds multiple entries saying what it is currently doing Local and centralized logging in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 has local and centralized logs of events Local event log A local event log holds information about Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 operations on a managed machine For example creating a backup plan executing a backup plan managing archives in personal vault
80. backups will be deleted The next figure demonstrates the tapes content at the moment before creation of the new backup on level D a l 0 EM 0 Ll ie 04 A At the moment the data archive occupies four tapes and the total size of the backups written up to the current time is maximal for the example However if in the future a full backup will be written at the end of a tape the archive will occupy five tapes After the next backup is created on level D tape 01 is freed and can be reused It is noticed that the ToH scheme combined with the specified options has the following properties for the analyzed case the last figure shows that the data recovery requires loading and mounting of up to three tapes one tape 16 two tapes 72 three tapes 12 as well as rewinding and reading of one 6 two 50 or three 44 backups five level scheme requires up to five tapes for this case TOH Example 2 Suppose the backup plan has the following tape options the Use a separate tape set option is selected the Always use a free tape For each full backup option is selected the Always use a free tape For each incremental backup option is cleared the Always use a free tape For each differential backup option is cleared The only difference between ToH Example 2 and ToH Example 1 is that the Always use a free tape For each full backup option is selected The first figure shows the tapes usage
81. be used to reconstruct data in case of failure is also striped across the disk array And it is always stored on a different disk than the data itself If a physical disk fails the portion of the RAID 5 volume that was on that failed disk can be re created from the remaining data and the parity A RAID 5 volume provides reliability and is able to overcome the physical disk size limitations with a higher than mirrored disk to volume size ratio Create volume wizard The Create volume wizard lets you create any type of volume including system and active select a file system label assign a letter and also provides other disk management functions Its pages will enable you to enter operation parameters proceeding step by step further on and return to any previous step if necessary to change any previously selected options To help you with your choices each parameter is supplemented with detailed instructions If you want to create a volume Run the Create volume wizard by selecting Create volume on the Wizards bar or right click any unallocated space and select Create volume in the appearing context menu Select the type of volume being created At the first step you have to specify the type of volume you want to create The following types of volume are available m Basic Simple Spanned Striped Mirrored RAID 5 You will obtain a brief description of every type of volume for better understanding of the advantages a
82. by the storage node that manages the vault The destination can be a network share or a local folder of the storage node export from an unmanaged centralized vault The export is performed by the agent installed on the managed machine you specify The destination can be any location accessible to the agent including a managed vault Tip When configuring export to a deduplicating managed vault choose a machine where the deduplication add on to the agent is installed Otherwise the export task will fail Operations with an export task An export task starts immediately after you complete its configuration An export task can be stopped or deleted in the same way as any other task Once the export task is completed you can run it again at any time Before doing so delete the archive that resulted from the previous task run if the archive still exists in the destination vault Otherwise the task will fail You cannot edit an export task to specify another name for the destination archive this is a limitation Tip You can implement the staging scenario manually by regularly running the archive deletion task followed by the export task Different ways to create an export task Using the Export page is the most general way to create an export task Here you can export any backup or archive you have permission to access You can access the Export page from the Vaults view Right click the object to export archive or back
83. connected to a management server the following views are available in the navigation tree Ga Management server name Root of the tree also called a Welcome view Displays the name of the management server the console is currently connected to Use this view for quick access to the main operations available on the management server Dashboard Use this view to estimate at a glance whether the data is successfully protected on the machines registered on the management server Backup policies Use this view to manage backup policies existing on the management server Physical machines Use this view to manage machines registered on the management server Virtual machines Use this view to manage virtual machines from the registered physical machines and from the registered machines with the agent for ESX ESXi m amp vaults Use this view to manage centralized vaults and archives stored in there create new managed and unmanaged vaults rename and delete the existing ones m Storage nodes Use this view to manage storage nodes Add a storage node to be able to create centralized vaults that will be managed by the node m E Tasks Use this view to manage tasks run edit stop and delete tasks monitor their states examine task history a Log Use this view to examine the history of centralized management operations such as creating a managed entities group applying a policy managing a centralized vault as
84. creation Use the following credentials The task will always run under the credentials you specify whether started manually or executed on schedule Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account 2 Click OK To learn more about using credentials in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 see the Owners and credentials p 31 section To learn more about operations available depending on the user privileges see the User privileges on a managed machine p 30 section oe Archive selection Selecting the archive 1 Enter the full path to the location in the Path field or select the desired folder in the folders tree If the archive is stored in a centralized vault expand the Centralized group and click the vault If the archive is stored in a personal vault expand the Personal group and click the vault If the archive is stored in a local folder on the machine expand the Local folders group and click the required folder If the archive is located on removable media e g DVDs first insert the last DVD and then insert the discs in order starting from the first one when the program prompts If the archive is stored on a network share expand the Network folders group then select the required networked machine and then click the shared folder If the network share
85. database is lost or damaged for tapes whose content is out of date for example a tape content was modified through another storage node or manually Bear in mind a tape might keep some backups that were deleted before the tape rescanning So after the task is completed all such backups will be recovered in the storage node database and become accessible for data recovery At rescanning a tape label should be saved in the storage node database If a slot selected for the procedure contains a tape that still does not have a label the Rescan task for the tape is paused to perform the Labeling p 142 procedure Labeling When a tape required for data recovery is not found the Task Need Interaction window will ask the user to bring the tape and insert it into a tape library slot So all the tape cartridges need a barcode or other readable labels If a tape does not get a label you should define it before the tape will be used If you need to apply a specific label for a tape for example MyWork label for a tape dedicated to back up files from the folder C work instead of a barcode label use the Labeling procedure as well To launch the procedure select the tape library vault in the Navigation pane of the console and click Manage tapes on the toolbar Then the Tape Management window will show a list of the library slots that contain tapes For every tape belonging to the Free pool or to the Acronis pool the slot data fi
86. day From lt gt Until lt gt In the Effective area set the following settings From lt gt Set up a date when this schedule will be enabled an effective date If this check box is cleared the task will be started on the nearest day and time you have specified above To lt gt Set up a date when this schedule will be disabled If this check box is cleared the task will be run for an indefinite number of days Advanced scheduling settings p 174 are available only for machines registered on Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server To specify these settings click Change in the Advanced settings area All the settings you made are displayed in the Result field at the bottom of the window Examples Simple daily schedule Run the task every day at 6PM The schedule s parameters are thus set up as follows 1 Every 1 day s 2 Once at 06 00 00 PM 3 Effective From not set The task will be started on the current day if it has been created before 6PM If you have created the task after 6 PM the task will be started for the first time on the next day at 6 PM To not set The task will be performed for an indefinite number of days Three hour time interval lasting for three months schedule Run the task every three hours The task starts on a certain date say September 15 2009 and ends after three months The schedule s parameters are thus set up as follows 1 Every
87. decrypt files before saving them to a backup archive The preset is Disabled Simply ignore this option if you do not use the encryption Enable the option if encrypted files are included in the backup and you want them to be accessed by any user after recovery Otherwise only the user who encrypted the files folders will be able to read them Decryption may also be useful if you are going to recover encrypted files on a different machine File encryption is available in Windows using the NTFS file system with the Encrypting File System EFS To access a file or folder encryption setting select Properties gt General gt Advanced Attributes gt Encrypt contents to secure data Preserve file security settings in archives This option defines whether to back up NTFS permissions for files along with the files The preset is Enabled When the option is enabled files and folders are saved in the archive with the original permissions to read write or execute the files for each user or user group If you recover a secured file folder on a machine without the user account specified in the permissions you may not be able to read or modify this file To completely eliminate this kind of problem disable preserving file security settings in archives The recovered files and folders will always inherit the permissions from the folder to which they are recovered or from the disk if recovered to the root Alternatively you can disable rec
88. default Generally this option ensures more efficient usage of tapes than the A separate tape set for each single machine option However the second one can be useful for example when there are special requirements to store the tapes with backups from a specific machine off site When the Use a separate tape set option is enabled there might be a case when the backup has to be written onto a tape that is currently out of the tape library device Define what to do in this case Ask for user interaction the backup task will enter the Need Interaction state and wait for the tape with the required label to be loaded into the tape library device Usea free tape the backup will be written onto a free tape so the operation will be paused only if there is no free tape in the library Always use a free tape If you leave the options below unchanged then each backup will be written onto the tape specified by the Use a separate tape set option With some of the options below enabled the program will add new tapes to the tape set every time when a full incremental or differential backup is created For each full backup The preset is Disabled When this option is enabled each full backup will be written onto a free tape The tape will be loaded to a drive especially for this operation If the Use a separate tape set option is enabled only incremental and differential backups of the same data will be appended to the tape For ea
89. described below are performed by clicking the corresponding buttons on the toolbar These operations can be also accessed from the Archive name actions bar on the Actions and tools pane and from the Archive name actions item of the main menu respectively The following is a guideline for you to perform operations with archives stored in a vault To Do Validate an archive Click W Validate The Validation p 235 page will be opened with the pre selected archive as a source Validation of an archive will check all the archive s backups Export an archive Click Export The Export p 242 page will be opened with the pre selected archive as a source The export of an archive creates a duplicate of the archive with all its backups in the location you specify Delete a single archive 1 Select the archive or one of the archives you want to delete or multiple archives Delete all archives in the vault 2 Click x Delete The program duplicates your selection in the Backups deletion p 163 window that has check boxes for each archive and each backup Review the selection and correct if need be select the check boxes for the desired archives then confirm the deletion Please be aware that if filters have been applied to the vaults list you see only a part of the vault content Be sure that the vault does not contain archives you need to retain before starting the operation Click e Delete all The program duplicates
90. destination using the credentials you specify Use this option if the task account does not have access permissions to the destination Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account 2 Click OK 6 3 8 When to recover Select when to start the recovery task Recover now the recovery task will be started immediately after you click the final OK Recover later the recovery task will be started at the date and time you specify If you do not need to schedule the task and wish to start it manually afterwards select the Task will be started manually do no schedule the task check box 6 3 9 Universal Restore Use Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Universal Restore when you need to recover and boot up Windows on dissimilar hardware Universal Restore handles differences in devices that are critical for the operating system startup such as storage controllers motherboard or chipset To learn more about the Universal Restore technology see the Universal Restore p 53 section Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Universal Restore is not available when a machine is booted with Acronis Startup Recovery Manager using F11 the backup image is located in Acronis Secure Zone you have chosen to use Acronis Active Restore p 366 because these features are primarily meant for i
91. disconnected the machines disappear from the All virtual machines groups and other groups they are included in Tasks that back up these virtual machines will fail with an appropriate log record as a result the generative policy will have the Error status The online or offline state of a virtual machine does not affect its backup since virtual machines can be backed up in both states Policies for virtual machines Any policy that backs up disks and volumes can be applied to virtual machines as well as to physical machines Policies that perform file level backup cannot be applied to virtual machines For more information about backup and recovery of virtual machines supported guest operating systems and disk configurations see Backing up virtual machines p 47 What happens when a policy is applied to a group of virtual machines Each machine will be backed up by a separate task to a separate archive The default archive name will include the virtual machine name and the policy name It is advisable to keep default archive naming so that you can easily find each machine s backups in the storage vault Grouping of virtual machines The Virtual machines section of the navigation tree contains one built in group called All virtual machines You cannot modify this group manually delete or move it You can apply policies that back up disks or volumes to this group You can create both static and dynamic groups of virtual machines Any v
92. disk if several on which to create the zone The unallocated space is selected by default The program displays the total space available for the Acronis Secure Zone 2 If you need to allocate more space for the zone you can select volumes from which free space can be taken Again the program displays the total space available for the Acronis Secure Zone depending on your selection You will be able to set the exact zone size in the Acronis Secure Zone Size p 249 window 3 Click OK Acronis Secure Zone Size Enter the Acronis Secure Zone size or drag the slider to select any size between the minimum and the maximum ones The minimum size is approximately 50MB depending on the geometry of the hard disk The maximum size is equal to the disk s unallocated space plus the total free space on all the volumes you have selected in the previous step If you have to take space from the boot or the system volume please bear the following in mind Moving or resizing of the volume from which the system is currently booted will require a reboot Taking all free space from a system volume may cause the operating system to work unstably and even fail to start Do not set the maximum zone size if the boot or the system volume is selected Password for Acronis Secure Zone Setting up a password protects the Acronis Secure Zone from unauthorized access The program will ask for the password at any operation relating to the zone and the archives
93. dynamic volume can be recovered over any type of existing volume to unallocated space of a disk group to unallocated space of a basic disk Recovery over an existing volume When a dynamic volume is recovered over an existing volume either basic or dynamic the target volume s data is overwritten with the backup content The type of target volume basic simple spanned striped mirrored RAID 0 1 RAID 5 will not change The target volume size has to be enough to accommodate the backup content Recovery to disk group unallocated space When a dynamic volume is recovered to disk group unallocated space both the type and the content of the resulting volume are recovered The unallocated space size has to be enough to accommodate the backup content The way unallocated space is distributed among the disks is also important Example Striped volumes consume equal portions of space on each disk Assume you are going to recover a 30GB striped volume to a disk group consisting of two disks Each disk has volumes and a certain amount of unallocated space The total size of unallocated space is 40GB The recovery will always result in a striped volume if the unallocated space is distributed evenly among the disks 20GB and 20GB If one of the disks has 10GB and the other has 30GB of unallocated space then the recovery result depends on the size of the data being recovered If the data size is less than 20GB then one disk can hold
94. enabling the network interface card so that the card appears in the list of boot devices If the hardware has multiple network interface cards make sure that the card supported by the BIOS has the network cable plugged in PXE and DHCP on the same server If Acronis PXE Server and the DHCP server are on the same machine add to the DHCP server option 60 Client Identifier with string value PXE Client This can be done as follows C WINDOWS system32 gt netsh netsh gt dhcp netsh gt dhcp gt server lt server_machine_name gt or lt IP address gt netsh dhcp gt add optiondef 60 PXEClient STRING comment Option added for PXE support netsh dhcp gt set optionvalue 6 STRING PXEClient Work across subnets To enable the Acronis PXE Server to work in another subnet across the switch configure the switch to relay the PXE traffic The PXE server IP addresses are configured on a per interface basis using IP helper functionality in the same way as DHCP server addresses For more information please refer to http support microsoft com default aspx kb 257579 6 11 Disk management Acronis Disk Director Lite is a tool for preparing a machine disk volume configuration for recovering the volume images saved by the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 software 268 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2010 Sometimes after the volume has been backed up and its image placed into a safe storage the machine disk configuration might c
95. for the ToH scheme combined with the above mentioned tape options The recurring part of the scheme contains sixteen backup sessions The figure displays the backup archive state at the moment when the 17th session is finished 0 ee BE 02 ee ee eee N A B o TT Eee In the figure below the backups deleted at the moment are drawn as dark gray rectangles lt 01 CO eee Bg 02 M ee ca esa B 03 EEE The figure indicates that there are two full backups on level E because at the moment the first full backup is a base for differential backups D C and B are a base for incremental backup A So the full backup deletion is postponed until all the D C B and A backups will be deleted The next figure shows the tape usage at the moment before creating a new backup on level D BaCO E 02 EE LM hh BoC E B 04 EE eee At the moment the backup archive occupies four tapes It is the maximal number of tapes required in the example After the next backup on level D is created both tapes 01 and 02 are freed and can be reused It is noticed that the ToH scheme combined with the specified options has the following properties for the analyzed case the data recovery requires access to the backups kept on one 25 or two tapes 75 five level scheme can require up to four tapes So in this specific case the selection of the Always use a free tape For each full backup option considerably increases the usage efficiency of the tapes in
96. if a client has previously connected to a server by using a self signed certificate and tries to establish connection again the server checks whether the certificate s thumbprint is the same as the one used before In case the list of certificates for the local machine is not displayed in the Certificates console you can use the following procedure To open the list of a machine s certificates Click Start then click Run and then type mmc In the console on the File menu click Add Remove Snap in In the Add Remove Snap in dialog box click Add In the Add Standalone Snap in dialog box double click Certificates Click Computer account and then click Next Oe ee E a Click Local computer and then click Finish Tip Alternatively you can manage the list of certificates of a remote machine To do this click Another computer and then type the remote machine s name 7 Click Close to close the Add Standalone Snap in dialog box and then click OK to close the Add Remove Snap in dialog box Self signed certificates On machines running Windows if the certificate location contains no server certificate a self signed server certificate is automatically generated and installed during the installation of any Acronis component except Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Console If the machine is renamed after its self signed certificate was generated the certificate cannot be used and you will need to generate a new one
97. in group The example of a built in group is the Gal All physical machines group that contains all the machines registered on the management server Custom groups groups created manually by the management server administrator Static groups Static groups contain machines manually added to the group by the administrator A static member remains in the group until the administrator removes the member from the group or deletes the corresponding managed machine from the management server m Er Dynamic groups Dynamic groups contain machines added automatically according to the criteria specified by the administrator Once the criteria are specified the management server starts to analyze the existing machines properties and will analyze every newly registered machine The machine that meets a certain dynamic criterion will appear in all groups that use this dynamic criterion To learn more about grouping machines see the Grouping the registered machines p 61 section To learn more about how policies are applied to machines and groups see the Policies on machines and groups p 63 section Way of working with machines First add machines to the management server Adding machines is available when selecting the Ge Physical machines view or the an physical machines group in the Navigation tree Select the group the required machine is in then select the machine Use the toolbar s operational buttons to take actio
98. in a local folder on the machine expand the Local folders group and click the required folder If the archive is located on removable media e g DVDs first insert the last DVD and then insert the discs in order starting from the first one when the program prompts f the archive is stored on a network share expand the Network folders group then select the required networked machine and then click the shared folder If the network share requires access credentials the program will ask for them Note for Linux users To specify a Common Internet File System CIFS network share which is mounted on a mount point such as mnt share select this mount point instead of the network share itself fthe archive is stored on an FTP or SFTP server type the server name or address in the Path field as follows ftp ftp_server port number or sftp sftp_server port number If the port number is not specified port 21 is used for FTP and port 22 is used for SFTP After entering access credentials the folders on the server become available Click the appropriate folder on the server You can access the server as an anonymous user if the server enables such access To do so click Use anonymous access instead of entering credentials According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted b
99. initrd respectively determine The title of the menu item The device on which the Linux kernel is located typically this is the boot partition or the root partition such as root hd0 0 in this example The path to the kernel on that device and the root partition in this example the path is vmlinuz 2 6 24 4 and the root partition is dev sda2 You can specify the root partition by label such as root LABEL identifier in the form root UUID some_uuid or device name such as root dev sda2 The path to the initrd service on that device 7 Edit the file mnt system etc fstab to correct the names of any devices that have changed as a result of the recovery 8 Start the GRUB shell by running one of the following commands chroot mnt system sbin grub or chroot mnt system usr sbin grub 9 Specify the disk on which GRUB is located typically the boot or root partition root hde e 10 Install GRUB For example to install GRUB in the master boot record MBR of the first disk run the following command setup hd 11 Exit the GRUB shell quit 12 Unmount the mounted file systems and then reboot umount mnt system dev umount mnt system proc umount mnt system boot umount mnt system reboot 13 Reconfigure the bootloader by using tools and documentation from the Linux distribution that you use For example in Debian and Ubuntu you may need to edit some commented lines in the boot grub menu lst fil
100. integration with the vCenter or when getting access to the ESX ESXi server You have the option to specify credentials for a different account if need be The virtual appliance s time zone will be set automatically according to the management server s time zone You can change the time zone directly in the virtual appliance GUI as described in Installing ESX ESXi Virtual Appliance Changing the account or network settings is also possible but is not recommended unless it is absolutely necessary 5 Licenses Click Provide license When installing the trial product version select Use the following trial license key and enter the trial license key Deduplication is always enabled in the trial version When installing the purchased product select Use a license from the following Acronis License Server and specify the license server that has the appropriate number of licenses for Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Advanced Server Virtual Edition You need one license for every host you selected To be able to deduplicate backups an agent needs a separately sold license for deduplication If you have imported such licenses into the license server you can select the Enable deduplication check box to let the agents acquire these licenses 6 Click Deploy ESX agent Monitoring the deployment progress and result Creating or updating virtual appliances may take some time Watch the progress of the operations at the bottom of the virtual machines v
101. is made and the Acronis Active Restore icon disappears from the system tray 2 14 Understanding centralized management This section contains an overview of centralized data protection with Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Please be sure you have an understanding of how data is protected on a single machine p 26 before reading this section 2 14 1 Basic concepts Applying backup policies and tracking their execution To protect data on a single machine you install on the machine an agent p 366 or multiple agents for various data types you want to protect You connect the console to the machine and create a backup plan p 368 or multiple backup plans What if you have to manage hundreds of machines It takes time to create a backup plan on each machine while the plans may be quite similar you need to back up say the system drive and the users documents Tracking the plans execution on each machine separately is also time consuming To be able to propagate the management operations to multiple machines you install Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server p 376 and register p 377 the machines on the server After that you can create groups of machines and thus manage multiple machines as a whole You can protect all of them or your selection by setting up a common backup plan which is called a backup policy p 368 Once you apply the policy to a group of machines the management server deploys the policy t
102. is also duplicated in the Log entry details p 324 window Ways to open the Log view with the pre filtered log entries Having selected items in other administration views Dashboard Machines Backup policies Tasks you can open the Log view with already filtered log entries for the item in question Thus you do not have to configure filters in the log table by yourself C Dashboard In the calendar right click on any highlighted date and then select View log The Log view will appear with the list of the log entries already filtered by the date in question Select a machine or a group of machines then click View log The Log view will display a list of the log entries related to the selected machine or group Backup policies Select a backup policy then click View log The Log view will display a list of the log entries related to the selected policy Tasks Select a task and then click View log The Log view appears with the log entries belonging to the selected task Actions on log entries All the operations described below are performed by clicking the corresponding items on the log toolbar All these operations can also be performed with the context menu by right clicking the log entry or with the Log actions bar on the Actions and tools pane The following is a guideline for you to perform actions on log entries C Select multiple log non contiguous hold down CTRL and click the log entries one by one entries c
103. is deployed to an ESX ESXi host this requires a license for Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Advanced Server Virtual Edition the virtual machines from this host are ready for applying a backup policy or individual backup Such machines appear as manageable If Agent for Windows or Agent for Linux is installed in a guest system but there is no Agent for ESX ESXi on its host the virtual machine appears as not manageable under Virtual machines Such machine has to be managed as a physical one On the vCenter Server side When integration is enabled the vCenter Server will store and show information about when and how successful each virtual machine was backed up The same information is displayed in the Status and the Last backup columns on the management server Backup status the most severe status of all backup plans and backup policies on the machine For more information see Backup plan statuses p 183 and Policy status on a machine p 69 Last backup how much time has passed since the last successful backup You can see this information in the virtual machine summary Summary gt Annotations or on the Virtual Machines tab for every host datacenter folder or entire vCenter Server for example View gt Inventory gt Hosts and Clusters gt select host gt Virtual Machines 3 3 Machine options The machine options define the general behavior of all Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 agents operating on the manage
104. items click Add all gt gt If more than 1000 matches are found only the first 1000 items will be displayed In this case it is recommended that you refine your search and try again The right part of the window displays the items you selected for import If required remove the erroneously selected items by using the respective x Remove and H Remove all buttons Click OK to start import Synchronizing machines with a text file During synchronization the management server adjusts the All physical machines group in accordance with the list of machines provided in a txt or csv file The management server Adds machines that are present in the list but are not registered Deletes registered machines not present in the list Deletes and then tries again to add registered machines that are present in the list but their current availability p 298 is Withdrawn As a result only those physical machines that are listed in the file will be present in the All physical machines group Text file requirements The file should contain machine names or IP addresses one machine per line Example Machine_name_1 Machine_name_2 192 168 1 14 192 168 1 15 Specifying an empty file leads to deletion of all physical machines from the management server A registered machine has to be specified by its registration address that is you need to provide exactly the same host name fully qualified domain name FQDN
105. located there such as data backup and recovery validating archives resizing and deleting the zone To set up a password 1 Choose Use password 2 Inthe Enter the password field type a new password 3 Inthe Confirm the password field re type the password 4 Click OK To disable password 1 Choose Do not use 2 Click OK Result confirmation The Result confirmation window displays the expected partition layout according to the settings you have chosen Click OK if you are satisfied with the layout and the Acronis Secure Zone creation will start How the settings you make will be processed This helps you to understand how creating the Acronis Secure Zone will transform a disk containing multiple volumes Acronis Secure Zone is always created at the end of the hard disk When calculating the final layout of the volumes the program will first use unallocated space at the end If there is no or not enough unallocated space at the end of the disk but there is unallocated space between volumes the volumes will be moved to add more unallocated space to the end When all unallocated space is collected but it is still not enough the program will take free space from the volumes you select proportionally reducing the volumes size Resizing of locked volumes requires a reboot However there should be free space on a volume so that the operating system and applications can operate for example for creating temporar
106. manage the compacting task The panel is collapsed by default To expand the panel click the chevron The content of the pane is also duplicated in the Storage node details p 318 window Way of working with storage nodes typical workflow 1 Install the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node 2 Create a user account for each user whom you want to allow to access the storage node Note You can skip this step if both the storage node and the users machines are in the same Active Directory domain For information about user rights on a storage node and in its managed vaults see User rights on a storage node p 80 3 Add p 318 the storage node to the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server Create a managed vault p 132 specify the path to the vault select the storage node that will manage the vault and select the management operations such as deduplication or encryption 5 Create a backup policy p 346 or a backup plan that will use the managed vault Actions on storage nodes All the operations described here are performed by clicking the corresponding buttons on the toolbar The operations can be also accessed from the Storage nodes bar on the Actions and tools pane and from the Storage nodes item of the main menu To perform an operation with a storage node added to the management server first select the storage node The following is a guideline for you to perform operations with s
107. managed vault on a tape library PE only Dest HDD Dest network share Dest managed vault on a tape library Additional settings p 117 Overwrite data on a tape without prompting user for confirmation Dismount media after backup is finished Ask for first media while creating backup archives on removable media Validate backup after creation Reset archive bit Reboot after the backup Notifications E mail p 107 Win Pop up p 108 Event tracing Windows events log p 109 SNMP p 109 Archive protection Dest Tape Dest removable media Dest removable media Dest Tape Dest removable media Dest removable media Dest Tape Dest removable media Dest removable media Dest Tape Dest removable media Dest removable media Dest Tape Dest removable media Dest removable media This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media This option is effective for both disk level and file level backup The preset is Disabled To protect the archive from unauthorized access 1 Select the Set password for the archive check box In the Enter the password field type a password 2 3 Inthe Confirm the password field re type the password 4 Select one of the following Do not encrypt the archive will be protected with the password only AES 128 the archive will be encrypted using the Advanced
108. means of the third party file manager Applies to backup plans that use custom backup schemes only To disable a backup plan 1 Click Edit 2 Enter the backup scheme scheduling option and disable the schedule for the desired period by changing the Start date and or End date parameters Task details The Task details window also duplicated on the Information panel aggregates all information on the selected task When a task requires user interaction a message and action buttons appear above the tabs The message contains a brief description of the problem The buttons allow you to retry or stop the task or the backup plan Types of tasks The following table summarizes all types of tasks that exist in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 The actual types of tasks you might observe depend on the product edition and the product component the console is connected to Task name Description Backup disk Backing up disks and volumes Backup file Backing up files and folders Backup virtual machine Backing up an entire virtual machine or its volumes Recovery disk Disk backup recovery Recovery file Recovery volume Recovery MBR Recovery disk to existing VM Recovery disk to new VM Recovery existing VM Recovery new VM Validation archive Validation backup Validation vault Cleanup ASZ creation ASZ management Disk management Compacting Indexing File and folder recovery Recovery of volu
109. network adapter tape drive or other device You will have to repeat this procedure for each driver you want to be included in the resulting WinPE boot media 5 Choose whether you want to create ISO or WIM image or upload the media on Acronis PXE Server 6 Specify the full path to the resulting image file including the file name or specify the PXE server and provide the user name and password to access it 7 Check your settings in the summary screen and click Proceed 8 Burn the ISO to CD or DVD using a third party tool or copy to a flash drive Once a machine boots into WinPE Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 starts automatically To create a PE image ISO file from the resulting WIM file replace the default boot wim file in your Windows PE folder with the newly created WIM file For the above example type copy c AcronisMedia wim c winpe_x86 ISO sources boot wim use the Oscdimg tool For the above example type oscdimg n bc winpe_x86 etfsboot com c winpe_x86 ISO c winpe_x86 winpe_x86 iso For more information on customizing Windows PE see the Windows Preinstallation Environment User s Guide Winpe chm Building Bart PE with Acronis Plug in from Windows distribution 1 Get the Bart PE builder 2 Install Bootable Media Builder from the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 setup file 3 Change the current folder to the folder where the Acronis Plug in for WinPE is installed by default C Program Files Acro
110. nodes enable creating highly scalable and flexible in terms of the hardware support storage infrastructure Up to 20 storage nodes can be set up each being able to manage up to 20 vaults The administrator controls the storage nodes centrally from the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server p 376 Direct console connection to a storage node is not possible Setting up the storage infrastructure Install the storage nodes add them to the management server the procedure is similar to the managed machine registration p 377 and create centralized vaults p 370 When creating a centralized vault specify the path to the vault the storage node that will manage the vault and the management operations to be performed on the vault A managed vault can be organized onthe hard drives local to the storage node on a network share ona Storage Area Network SAN ona Network Attached Storage NAS ona tape library locally attached to the storage node The management operations are as follows Storage node side cleanup and validation Archives stored in unmanaged vaults are maintained by the agents p 366 that create the archives This means that each agent not only backs up data to the archive but also executes service tasks that apply to the archive the retention rules and validation rules specified by the backup plan p 368 To relieve the managed machines of unnecessary CPU load execution of the service ta
111. not selected the command execution result does not affect the task execution failure or success You can track the command execution result by exploring the log or the errors and warnings displayed on the Dashboard 5 Click Test command to check if the command is correct A post recovery command will not be executed if the recovery proceeds with reboot Recovery priority This option is effective for both Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media The priority of a process running in a system determines the amount of CPU and system resources allocated to that process Decreasing the recovery priority will free more resources for other applications Increasing the recovery priority might speed up the recovery process by requesting the operating system to allocate more resources to the application that will perform the recovery However the resulting effect will depend on the overall CPU usage and other factors like disk I O speed or network traffic The preset is Normal To specify the recovery process priority Select one of the following Low to minimize resources taken by the recovery process leaving more resources to other processes running on the machine Normal to run the recovery process with normal speed allocating resources on a par with other processes High to maximize the recovery process speed by taking resources from the other processes F
112. opened with the pre selected backup as a source Validation of a file backup imitates recovering of all files from the backup to a dummy destination Validation of a disk backup calculates a checksum for every data block saved in the backup Click amp Export The Export p 242 page will be opened with the pre selected backup as a source The export of a backup creates a new archive with a self sufficient copy of the backup in the location you specify Select one of the backups you want to delete then click x Delete The program duplicates your selection in the Backups deletion p 163 window that has check boxes for each archive and each backup Review the selection and correct if need be select the check boxes for the desired backups then confirm the deletion Delete all archives and Please be aware that if filters have been applied to the vaults list you see only a part backups in the vault of the vault content Be sure that the vault does not contain archives you need to retain before starting the operation Click a Delete all The program duplicates your selection in the Backups deletion p 163 window that has check boxes for each archive and each backup Review the selection and correct if need be then confirm the deletion 4 3 3 Deleting archives and backups The Backups deletion window displays the same tab as for the vaults view but with check boxes for each archive and backup The archive or backup you have chos
113. or select Control Panel gt Administrative tools gt Event Viewer You can filter the events to be logged You can override the settings set here exclusively for the events that occur during backup or during recovery in the Default backup and recovery options p 97 In this case the settings set here will be effective for operations other than backup and recovery such as archive validation or cleanup You can further override the settings set in the default backup and recovery options when creating a backup plan or a recovery task The settings you obtain in this case will be plan specific or task specific The preset is Disabled To enable this option select the Log events check box Use the Types of events to log check box to filter the events to be logged in the Application Event Log of Windows All events all events information warnings and errors Errors and warnings Errors only To disable this option clear the Log events check box SNMP notifications This option is effective for both Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media The option defines whether the agent s operating on the managed machine have to send the log events to the specified Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP managers You can choose the types of events to be sent You can override the settings set here exclusively for the events that occur during backup or duri
114. parent group to another any group type to any group type delete a group that is disjoin the group members that remain in the group of all machines anyway Operations with groups to which backup policies are applied will result in changing the policies on the member machines If a machine is not available or reachable at the moment the action becomes pending and will be performed as soon as the machine becomes available For information on how to perform the operations please see Operations with groups p 303 2 14 4 Policies on machines and groups This section helps you understand the automatic deployment and revoking policies performed by the management server when a policy or a number of policies are applied to machines and nested groups of machines in various combinations when a policy is revoked from machines and groups when a machine or a group is moved from one group to another Operations with groups to which backup policies are applied will result in changing the policies on the member machines On any hierarchy change that is when moving removing creating groups adding machines to static groups or when machines enter a group based on dynamic criteria a huge number of inheritance changes may occur Please familiarize yourself with this section to be sure that your actions yield the desired result and to understand the result of the automated Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server operations What is applying
115. policy from the machines or groups the policy is applied to Click Ge View tasks The Tasks p 319 view will display a list of the tasks related to the selected policy Click L View log The Log p 321 view will display a list of the log entries related to the selected policy o Click Refresh The management console will update the list of backup policies from the management server with the most recent information Though the list of policies is refreshed automatically based on events the data may not be retrieved immediately from the management server due to some latency Manual refresh guarantees that the most recent data is displayed To apply the backup policy to machines or to groups of machines 1 Choose whether to apply the selected backup policy to m Groups In the group tree select the group s the policy will be applied to The right part of the window lists the machines of the selected group Individual machines In the group tree select the required group Then in the right part of the window select the machines to apply the backup policy to 2 Click OK The Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server will deploy the policy to the selected machines and machines belonging to the selected groups Filtering and sorting backup policies The following is a guideline for you to filter and sort backup policies To Do Sort backup policies by any Click the column s header to sort the bac
116. provider either Acronis VSS or Microsoft VSS has to notify VSS aware applications that the backup is about to start This ensures the consistent state of all data used by the applications in particular completion of all database transactions at the moment of taking the data snapshot by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Data consistency in turn ensures that the application will be recovered in the correct state and become operational immediately after recovery The preset is Create snapshots using VSS Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 will select the VSS provider automatically based on the operating system running on the machine and whether the machine is a member of an Active Directory domain Create snapshots without using VSS Choose this option if your database is incompatible with VSS The data snapshot will be taken by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Backup process is fastest but data consistency of the applications whose transactions are not completed at the time of taking a snapshot cannot be guaranteed You may use Pre Post data capture commands p 102 to indicate which commands should be performed before and after taking the snapshot to ensure that the data is being backed up ina consistent state For instance specify pre data capture commands that will suspend the database and flush all caches to ensure that all transactions are completed and specify post data capture commands that will resume the database operations after
117. recover the backed up files to Original location files and folders will be recovered to the same path s as they are in the backup For example if you have backed up all files and folders in C Documents Finance Reports the files will be recovered to the same path If the folder does not exist it will be created automatically New location files will be recovered to the location that you specify in the tree The files and folders will be recovered without recreating a full path unless you clear the Recover without full path check box 2 Click OK Recovery exclusions Set up exclusions for the specific files you do not wish to recover Use the Add Edit Remove and Remove All buttons to create the list of file masks Files whose names match any of the masks will be skipped during recovery You can use one or more wildcard characters and ina file mask The asterisk substitutes for zero or more characters in a file name for example the file mask Doc txt yields files such as Doc txt and Document txt The question mark substitutes for exactly one character in a file name for example the file mask Doc txt yields files such as Doc1 txt and Docs txt but not the files Doc txt or Doc11 txt Exclusion examples By name File1 log Excludes all files named File1 log By path C Finance test log Excludes the file named test log located in the folder C Finance Mask og Excludes all files with the log exten
118. result from an incorrectly scheduled plan or plans It makes sense to edit the plan in this case Stopping At least one task is No action is required stopping Otherwise see 5 Backup plan statuses A backup plan can have one of the following statuses Error Warning OK A backup plan status is derived from the results of the last run of the plans tasks Ee How it is determined How to Howtohande At least one task has ae the failed tasks gt Check the tasks log to find out failed the reason of the failure then do one or more of the Otherwise see 2 following m Remove the reason of the failure gt optionally Start the failed task manually Edit the local plan to prevent its future failure in case a local plan has failed Edit the backup policy on the management server in case a centralized plan has failed When creating a backup plan or policy the administrator can turn on the option to stop executing the backup plan as soon as the backup plan gets the Error status The backup plan s execution can be resumed using the Restart button At least one task has View the log to read the warnings gt optionally Perform succeeded with actions to prevent the future warnings or failure warnings Otherwise see 3 All the tasks are No action is required Note that a backup plan can be OK in completed successfully case none of the tasks has been started yet or some of the tasks are stopped or being sto
119. right of machine administrators A user who is a member of the Administrators group on a machine can view and manage any archives created from that machine in a managed vault regardless of the type of that user s account on the storage node Example Suppose that two users on a machine UserA and UserB perform backups from this machine to a centralized vault managed by a storage node On the storage node let these users have regular non administrative accounts UserA_SN and UserB_ SN respectively Normally UserA can access only the archives created by UserA and owned by UserA_SN and UserB can access only the archives created by UserB and owned by UserB_SN However if UserA is a member of the Administrators group on the machine this user can additionally access the archives created from this machine by UserB even though UserA s account on the storage node is a regular one Rights for Acronis services The Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server and Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node components run as services When installing any of these components you need to specify the account under which the component s service will run For each service you can either create a dedicated user account recommended in most cases or specify an existing account of a local or domain user for example LocalUser or DomainName DomainUser If you choose to create
120. s service Withdrawn the machine was registered on another management server or the Stand alone management parameter is selected in the Options gt Machine options gt Machine management p 94 As a result it is not possible to control the machine from the current management server However you are able to regain control over the machine by specifying the management server address in the Machine management settings Expired the trial period of the machine s agent has expired To specify a full license key use the Change License functionality or run the setup program and follow its instructions Installed agents full name of Acronis agents installed on the machine Operating system the operating system the machine s agent runs Processor the type of CPU used in the managed machine CPU clock clock rate of the CPU RAM memory size Comments the machine s description taken from the Computer description in Windows Backup policies Displays a list of backup policies applied to the selected machine and lets the management server administrator perform the following operations To View details of a policy View tasks of a policy View log of a policy Revoke policy from the machine Examine where the applied policy has come from Filtering and sorting Do Click View details In the Policy details p 290 window examine all information related to the selected backup policy Click
121. say 10GB the other will hold the remaining 10GB This way a striped volume will be created on both disks and 20GB on the second disk will remain unallocated If the data size is more than 20GB the data cannot be distributed evenly between the two disks but can fit into a single simple volume A simple volume accommodating all the data will be created on the second disk The first disk will remain untouched Backed up source Recovered to Dynamic volume Basic MBR volume Basic GPT volume Dynamic volume Dynamic volume Dynamic volume Dynamic volume Type as of the Type as of the Type as of the target target target Unallocated space disk group Dynamic volume Dynamic volume N A Type as of the Simple source Basic MBR volume Basic MBR volume Basic MBR volume Basic MBR volume Basic GPT volume Basic GPT volume Basic GPT volume Basic GPT volume Unallocated space basic MBR disk Basic MBR volume Basic MBR volume Basic MBR volume Unallocated space basic GPT disk Basic GPT volume Basic GPT volume Basic GPT volume Moving and resizing volumes during recovery You can resize the resulting basic volume both MBR and GPT during recovery or change the volume s location on the disk A resulting dynamic volume cannot be moved or resized Preparing disk groups and volumes Before recovering dynamic volumes to bare metal you should create a disk group on the target hardware You also might need to create or increase u
122. setting a new volume label you use characters that are unsupported by the currently installed operating system you will get the appropriate warning and the OK button will be disabled You will have to use only supported characters to proceed with changing the volume label To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 283 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them The new label will be graphically represented in the Disk Management view of the console immediately Format volume You might want to format a volume if you want to change its file system to save additional space which is being lost due to the cluster size on the FAT16 or FAT32 file systems asa quick and more or less reliable way of destroying data residing in this volume If you want to format a volume 1 Select a volume to format 2 Right click on the selected volume and then click Format in the context menu You will be forwarded to the Format Volume window where you will be able to set the new file system options You can choose one of the Windows file systems FAT16 disabled if the Volume Size is more than 2 GB FAT32 disabled if the Volume Size is more than 2 TB or NTFS In the text window you will be able to enter the volume label if necessary by default this window is empty In setting the cluster size you can choose between any number in the preset amount for each file system Note t
123. share requires access credentials the program will ask for them Note for Linux users To specify a Common Internet File System CIFS network share which is mounted on a mount point such as mnt share select this mount point instead of the network share itself To export data to an FTP or SFTP server type the server name or address in the Path field as follows ftp ftp_server port _number or sftp sftp_server port number If the port number is not specified port 21 is used for FTP and port 22 is used for SFTP After entering access credentials the folders on the server become available Click the appropriate folder on the server You can access the server as an anonymous user if the server enables such access To do so click Use anonymous access instead of entering credentials According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer To export data to a locally attached tape device expand the Tape drives group then click the required device For the management server the folders tree contains Local folders group to export data onto the hard drives that are local to the storage node Network folders group to export data to a network share If the network share requires access credentials the program will ask for them
124. shell is not available in this case Example Suppose that you previously performed a disk backup of a machine with the following disk configuration The machine has two 1 gigabyte and two 2 gigabyte SCSI hard disks mounted on dev sda dev sdb dev sdc and dev sdd respectively The first and second pairs of hard disks are configured as two MD devices both in the RAID 1 configuration and are mounted on dev mdO0 and dev md1 respectively A logical volume is based on the two MD devices and is mounted on dev my_volgroup my_logvol The following picture illustrates this configuration Idev sdc dev sdd Idevisda Idevisdb Idevimd0 Idevimd1 208 idevimy_volgroup my_logvol Do the following to recover data from this archive Step 1 Creating the volume structure 1 Boot the machine from a Linux based bootable media 2 Inthe management console press CTRL ALT F2 3 Run the following commands to create the MD devices mdadm create dev md level 1 raid devices 2 dev sd ab mdadm create dev md1 level 1 raid devices 2 dev sd cd 4 Run the following commands to create the logical volume group Caution The pvcreate command destroys all data on the dev md0 and dev md1 devices 7 lvm pvcreate dev md dev md1 lvm vgcreate my_volgroup dev md dev md1 lvm vgdisplay The output of the lvm vgdisplay command will contain lines similar to the following Volume group
125. snapshot storage is created in a Windows temporary files folder and initially occupies 50 percent of the space available on the volume containing that folder This size may then grow if more space is needed for the snapshot You may want to increase the initial size of the snapshot storage or to place it on a different volume when experiencing problems with backing up data that changes extensively during backup This parameter is used when creating a backup plan Changes to this parameter do not affect already existing backup plans This parameter has the following settings Snapshot Storage Path Description Specifies the folder in which to create the snapshot storage Possible values Any string 0 to 32765 characters long Default value Empty string An empty string means a temporary files folder which is typically given by the TMP or TEMP environment variable You can specify a local folder on any volume including a volume you are backing up Snapshot Storage Absolute Size Description Specifies the initial size of the snapshot storage in megabytes Possible values Any integer number between 0 and 2147483647 Default value 0 If this setting is 0 the management server uses the Snapshot Storage Relative Size setting The initial size will not exceed the available space minus 50 MB Snapshot Storage Relative Size This setting is effective only when the Snapshot Storage Absolute Size setting is 0 Description Specifies the
126. so click Use anonymous access instead of entering credentials According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer If the archive is stored on a locally attached tape device expand the Tape drives group then click the required device In the table to the right of the tree select the archive The table displays the names of the archives contained in each vault folder you select While you are reviewing the location content archives can be added deleted or modified by another user or by the program itself according to scheduled operations Use the Refresh button to refresh the list of archives Click OK 6 5 2 Backup selection To select a backup 1 Select one of the backups by its creation date time 2 To assist you with choosing the right backup the bottom table displays the volumes contained in the selected backup To obtain information on a volume right click it and then click Information 3 Click OK G0 Access credentials To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Use the current user credentials The program will access the location using the credentials of the current user Use the following credentials The program will access the location using the credentials you specify Use this option if t
127. so it can be reused Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2010 151 The main drawback is the large number of required tapes that is used 5 10 If we have to keep a daily backup for a week 4 backups and a weekly backup for a month 4 backups the total number of required tapes will be equal to 4 4 13 1 22 Using the Tower of Hanoi tape rotation scheme The ToH scheme requires fewer tapes for rotation as compared with the GFS scheme So the ToH scheme is the best choice for small tape libraries especially for autoloaders Once the ToH backup scheme is selected it is possible to specify the scheme schedule and the number of levels Best practice suggests that five levels should be used if you are applying the Tower of Hanoi to weekly backups and eight levels if you are applying it to daily backups In the first case the rotation includes 16 weekly sessions so it ensures that the roll back period the minimum number of days that you can go back in the archive is 8 weeks Tape rotation for the second case includes 128 daily sessions i e it allows the roll back period equal 64 days The roll back period is always half the number of sessions Each additional level doubles not only the number of sessions but also the oldest backup age Let s return to the analyzed case described in the Case to analyze p 145 section and suppose the TOH settings are the following Schedule Start the task every 1 day at 11 00 PM Repeat once Numb
128. source code of Linux PAM is available at Linux PAM source code Web page Remote connection as the root user Remote connections by the root user are established according to the Acronisagent authentication policy which is automatically set up during the installation of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Linux by creating the file etc pam d Acronisagent with the following content SPAM 1 0 auth required pam_unix so auth required pam_rootok so account required pam_unix so Remote connection as a non root user Since accessing the system as the root user should be restricted the root user can create an authentication policy to enable remote management under non root credentials The following are two examples of such policies Note As a result the specified non root users will be able to connect to the machine remotely as if they were root users A security best practice is to make sure that the user accounts are hard to compromise for example by requiring that they have strong passwords Example 1 This authentication policy uses the pam_succeed_if module and works with Linux distributions with kernel version 2 6 or later For an authentication policy which works with kernel version 2 4 see the next example Perform the following steps as the root user 1 Create the Acronis_Trusted group account by running the following command groupadd Acronis_Trusted 2 Add the names of the non root users who
129. specify the user account explicitly not just Everyone Vault encryption If you protect a vault with encryption anything written to the vault will be encrypted and anything read from it will be decrypted transparently by the storage node using a vault specific encryption key stored on the node In case the storage medium is stolen or accessed by an unauthorized person the malefactor will not be able to decrypt the vault contents without access to the storage node This encryption has nothing to do with the archive encryption specified by the backup plan and performed by an agent If the archive is already encrypted the storage node side encryption is applied over the encryption performed by the agent To protect the vault with encryption Select the Encrypt check box 2 Inthe Enter the password field type a password 3 Inthe Confirm the password field re type the password 4 Select one of the following AES 128 the vault contents will be encrypted using the Advanced Standard Encryption AES algorithm with a 128 bit key AES 192 the vault contents will be encrypted using the AES algorithm with a 192 bit key AES 256 the vault contents will be encrypted using the AES algorithm with a 256 bit key 5 Click OK The AES cryptographic algorithm operates in the Cipher block chaining CBC mode and uses a randomly generated key with a user defined size of 128 192 or 256 bits The larger the key size the longer it will t
130. stands for full backup Dif stands for differential backup I stands for incremental backup The backups that outlive their nominal lifetime because of dependencies are marked pink The initial full backup will be deleted as soon as all differential and incremental backups based on this backup are deleted So i Jn ve S Pe fe i ov ve mk Total w i chee D D D OW 00D0ow_ _ 0DD0D0ODW___ DD OD OM Mon F Tue F Il We FI Tu F I I I Fi F li l I Off St F lI ol 1 Of Sn F lI I I D Mon F oI I D Fi Te F I bi amp amp I l We F tt oF ll Tu F gt re ee E Fi F ws I 1 l Of Sa F Dii ti I i l Dif Sun F E blot tot ot Mon F Dif l i l I Of l Tue F Dif IT i i Of 1 We F 1l 1 ttt or roto Tu F Dif Dif TERS O a Fi F Dif I l i l D Sa F Dif I l ot l Dif Sn F Dif I i l D Mon F Dif a tot Off I Te F Dif 10 t 1 Off I1 We F Dif tot i D E Tu F Dif Dif T ee Fi F Dif ito tour Sat F Dif 1otototer An archive created according to the GFS scheme by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Schedule Workdays at 8 00 PM Weekly Monthly Friday Keep daily backups 7 days Keep weekly backups 2 weeks Keep monthly backups 6 months 2 6 Tower of Hanoi backup scheme The need to have frequent backups always conflicts with the cost of keeping such backups for a long time The Tower of Hanoi ToH backup scheme is a useful compromise Tower of Hanoi overview The Tower of Hanoi scheme
131. started at all rather than failed Event Weekly Every 1 week s on lt workdays gt Once at 09 00 00 PM Condition Location s host is available Task start conditions Skip the task execution As a result 1 If 9 00 PM comes and the location s host is available the backup task starts right on time 2 If 9 00 PM comes but the host is unavailable at the moment the backup task will start on the next workday if the location s host is available 3 If the location s host will never be available on workdays at 9 00 PM the task never starts 5 6 3 Fits time interval Applies to Windows Linux Restricts a backup task s start time to a specified interval Example A company uses different locations on the same network attached storage for backing up users data and servers The workday starts at 8AM and ends at 5 PM Users data should be backed up as soon as the users log off but not earlier than 4 30 PM and not later than 10 PM Every day at 11 PM the company s servers are backed up So all the users data should be preferably backed up before this time in order to free network bandwidth By specifying the upper limit as 10 PM it is supposed that the backing up of users data does not take more than one hour If a user is still logged on within the specified time interval or logs off at any other time do not back up the users data i e skip task execution Event When logging off The following user Any us
132. stop the task Generally stopping the task aborts its operation backup recovery validation exporting conversion migration The task enters the Stopping state first then becomes Idle The task schedule if created remains valid To complete the operation you will have to run the task over again recovery task from the disk backup The target volume will be deleted and its space unallocated the same result you will get if the recovery is unsuccessful To recover the lost volume you will have to run the task once again recovery task from the file backup The aborted operation may cause changes in the destination folder Some files may be recovered but some not depending on the period when you stopped the task To recover all the files you will have to run the task once again Click Edit Why can t edit the task Task belongs to a backup plan Only tasks that do not belong to a backup plan such as a recovery task can be modified by direct editing When you need to modify a task belonging to a local backup plan edit the backup plan A task belonging to a centralized backup plan can be modified by editing the centralized policy that spawned the plan Only the management server administrator can do this Do not have the appropriate privilege Without Administrator privileges on the machine a user cannot modify tasks owned by other users Click x Delete Why can t I delete the task Task belong
133. system only a test recovery under the bootable media to a spare hard drive can guarantee successful recovery in the future Validation rules A part of the backup plan p 368 Rules that define when and how often to perform validation p 379 and whether to validate the entire archive p 367 or the latest backup in the archive Vault A place for storing backup archives p 367 A vault can be organized on a local or networked drive or detachable media such as an external USB drive There are no settings for limiting a vault size or the number of backups in a vault You can limit the size of each archive using cleanup p 370 but the total size of archives stored in the vault is limited by the storage size only Virtual machine On Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server a machine p 375 is considered virtual if it can be backed up from the virtualization host without installing an agent p 366 on the machine A virtual machine appears on the management server after registration of the virtualization server that hosts the machine provided that Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 agent for virtual machines is installed on that server W WinPE Windows Preinstallation Environment A minimal Windows system based on any of the following kernels Windows XP Professional with Service Pack 2 PE 1 5 Windows Server 2003 with Service Pack 1 PE 1 6 Windows Vista PE 2 0 Windows Vista SP1 and Windows Server 20
134. the RSM to detect the tapes written by Acronis True Image Echo Acronis True Image 9 1 product families and by components of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 The storage node will locate all tapes written in Acronis format into the Acronis pool at the Inventory p 141 operation Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components don t use the Unrecognized pool To utilize a tape from this pool forcibly move the tape to the Free pool using the Removable storage snap in Control panel gt Administrative tools gt Computer management gt Removable storage gt Media pools If a tape has moved into the Free pool it is considered as free and will be accessible to write by any application So the tape data will be lost If all the backups are deleted from a tape it will not return to the Free pool It remains in the Acronis pool as a free tape to be reused So if a storage node needs a new tape it finds a free tape first in the Acronis pool then in the Free pool Thereinafter Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node deals only with the tapes belonging to the Acronis pool Getting started with a tape library If you have a tape library device attached to a machine with Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node installed all you need to do to back up onto the tape library is to create an archive vault on the device under storage node management Prerequisites A tape library device has to be installed on a machine running
135. the backup strategy conditions are obligatory put the backup task run on hold until all the conditions are met conditions are preferable but a backup task run has higher priority put the task on hold for the specified time interval If the time interval lapses and the conditions are still not met run the task anyway With this setting the program will automatically handle the situation when the conditions are not met for too long and further delaying the backup is undesirable backup task start time matters skip the backup task if the conditions are not met at the time when the task should be started Skipping the task run makes sense when you need to back up data strictly at the specified time especially if the events are relatively often Adding multiple conditions Multiple conditions must be met simultaneously to enable task execution Example It is required to run the backup task after free space on the managed machine is changed by at least 1 GB but only if all users are logged off and more than 12 hours have passed since the last backup Set the schedule conditions and the Task start conditions backup option as follows Schedule When free space changed Value Run task if free space has changed by at least 1 GB Condition User logged off Value Run the task on schedule only if all users are logged off Condition Time since last backup Value Time since the last backup 12 hour s Task start conditions
136. the default settings which is to use encryption if possible and to trust self signed SSL certificates see the following option Enabled Encryption is enabled In Encryption select one of the following Enabled Data transfer will be encrypted if encryption is enabled on the server application otherwise it will be unencrypted Disabled Encryption is disabled any connection to a server application which requires encryption will not be established Required Data transfer will be performed only if encryption is enabled on the server application see Server Encryption options it will be encrypted Authentication parameters Selecting the Trust self signed certificates check box allows the client to connect to the server applications that use self signed SSL certificates such as certificates created during the installation of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components see SSL certificates p 86 You should keep this check box selected unless you have a Public Key Infrastructure PKI in your environment In Use Agent Certificate Authentication select one of the following Do not use The use of SSL certificates is disabled Any connection to a server application which requires the use of SSL certificates will not be established Use if possible The use of SSL certificates is enabled The client will use SSL certificates if their use is enabled on the server application and will not use them otherwise Always use
137. the list of volumes available for backup Basic volumes included in logical volumes are also shown in the list with None in the Type column If you select to back up such partitions the program will image it sector by sector Normally it is not required To back up all available disks specify all logical volumes plus basic volumes not belonging to them A logical volume is a GPT GUID partition table partition Logical volumes are displayed under Dynamic amp GPT Volumes Here is an example of a volumes list obtained with the command trueimagecmd list The GUI displays a similar table Num Partition Flags Seane Size Type priS karik 1 1 hdal boot PrI JAC 63 208782 EKES Oech Pri 208845 SL P VOSS None Daleile 2 2 icliont Pri Act 63 8385867 None Dake 38 Sil Jacok Prp ACE 63 EAEN Ext3 3 2 Acronis Secure Zone Pri 1219680 2974608 FAT32 Dynamic amp GPT Volumes DYNI VolGroup00 LogVo100 15269888 Ext3 DYN2 VolGroup00 LogVol101 1048576 Linux Swap The system has three physical disks Disk 1 Disk 2 and Disk 3 Two logical volumes DYN1 and DYN2 are arranged across basic volumes 1 2 and 2 1 Disk 3 includes Acronis Secure Zone which is not normally backed up To back up the logical volume DYN1 select the volume DYN1 To back up all three hard disks select the volumes 1 1 3 1 DYN1 and DYN2 If you select Disk 2 volume 1 2 or volume 2 1 the program will create a raw sector by sector backu
138. the network or within one system Each time a piece of data moves it is included in the incremental backup which becomes sizeable while it does not contain new data Deduplication helps to solve the problem each time an item appears in a new place a reference to the item is saved instead of the item itself Deduplication and incremental backups In case of random changes to the data de duplication at incremental backup will not produce much effect because The deduplicated items that have not changed are not included in the incremental backup The deduplicated items that have changed are not identical anymore and therefore will not be deduplicated Deduplication best practices Follow these recommendations when using deduplication When creating a deduplicating vault place the vault and its deduplication database on different disks This will make deduplication faster because deduplication involves extensive simultaneous use of both the vault and the database Indexing of a backup requires that the vault have free space with a minimum size of 1 1 multiplied by the size of the archive the backup belongs to If there is not enough free space in the vault the indexing task will fail and start again after 5 10 minutes on the assumption that some space has been freed up as a result of cleanup or of other indexing tasks The more free space there is in the vault the faster your archives will reduce to the minimum possible size
139. the task will run under the credentials with which you are currently logged on Any person that has administrative privileges on the machine can also start the task The task will run under this person s credentials The task will always run under the same credentials regardless of the user who actually starts the task if you specify the task credentials explicitly To do so on the plan task creation page 1 Select the Advanced view check box 2 Select General gt Plan s Task credentials gt Change 3 Enter the credentials under which the plan task will run Scheduled or postponed start The plan task credentials are mandatory If you skip the credentials step you will be asked for credentials after finishing the plan task creation Why does the program compel me to specify credentials A scheduled or postponed task has to run anyway regardless if any user is logged on or not for example the system is at the Windows Welcome screen or a user other than the task owner is logged on It is sufficient that the machine be on that is not in standby or hibernate at the scheduled task start time That s why the Acronis scheduler needs the explicitly specified credentials to be able to start the task 2 4 Full incremental and differential backups Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 provides the capability to use popular backup schemes such as Grandfather Father Son and Tower of Hanoi as well as to create custom backup sch
140. to wake up the appropriate machines A magic packet is a packet that contains 16 contiguous copies of the receiving NIC s MAC address The Acronis WOL Proxy installed in the other subnet transfers the packets to machines located in that subnet The preset is Disabled To bring this option into use 1 Install Acronis WOL Proxy on any server in the subnet where the machines to be woken are located The server has to provide continuous services availability With multiple subnets install Acronis WOL Proxy in every subnet where you need to use the Wake On LAN functionality 2 Enable Acronis WOL Proxy in the Management server options as follows a Select the Use the following proxies check box b Click Add and then enter the name or IP address of the machine where the Acronis WOL Proxy is installed Provide access credentials for the machine c Repeat this step if there are several Acronis WOL Proxies 3 When scheduling a backup policy enable the Use Wake On LAN setting You also have the ability to delete proxies from the list Please keep in mind that any change to this option affects the entire management server If you delete a proxy from the list the Wake On LAN functionality in the corresponding subnet will be disabled for all policies including the policies already applied 3 2 0 VM protection options These options define the management server behavior as related to backup and recovery of virtual machines hosted on vir
141. to manage tape cartridges belonging to tape libraries To separate access to media by different programs the RSM uses so called Media Pools that are logical media groups There are two categories of media pools in the manager System and Application System media pools include Free pool Import pool and Unrecognized pool The System pools hold media that are not currently used by applications The Free pool holds media that are considered as free and can be used by applications The Import and Unrecognized pools are temporary pools for media that are new in certain library Through RSM an application can get its own pools with proper names move media from the Free pool into its own pools use its own pools media for correct purpose return media to the Free pool etc Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node manages the tapes belonging to the Acronis pool If you fill tape library slots with unused tapes all the tapes will be included into the Free pool automatically If a tape was used previously the RSM tries to detect the registered application the tape is concerned to If the application is not found the RSM will move the tape into the Unrecognized pool If the application is not found but the RSM database has no information about the tape it will be moved into the Import pool If the RSM database has the information the tape moves into its own pool of the application Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node provides
142. unavailable You may also want to ensure that the licenses are present on the license server or that the license key data was not corrupted After a successful license check the agent will start Please make sure you have a working valid license on Acronis License Server x Trial version of product Connect Once the trial version of the product is installed the expires in X day s program starts the countdown of days remaining until the trial period expires Please make sure you have a P p valid license on Acronis License Server Trial period is over Start the Connect 15 day trial period has expired Enter a full license key installer and enter a full license key Please make sure you have a valid license on Acronis License Server Q Vaults with low free space X View vaults View vaults will take you to the Vaults view where you can examine the vault size free space content and take the necessary steps to increase the free space A Bootable media was not Create now To be able to recover an operating system when the created machine fails to boot you must 1 Back up the system volume and the boot volume if it is different 2 Create at least one bootable media p 369 Create now will launch the Bootable Media Builder p 376 A No backups have been Back up now The Dashboard warns you that no data was backed up on created for X days the machine for a relatively long period of time Back up now wi
143. up This comes in handy when the operating system and applications such as a database server run ona virtual disk but the data such as a database is stored on a large capacity physical disk added to the same machine You will be able to use different backup strategies for the virtual disk and the physical storage The virtual machine configuration will be also backed up Limitations A Hyper V virtual machine that uses at least one pass through disk a physical disk either local or SAN LUN attached to the virtual machine cannot be backed up from the host To back up such machine or its disks install Agent for Windows or Agent for Linux on the machine An online running ESX ESXi virtual machine that has an independent disk or an RDM disk attached in the physical compatibility mode cannot be backed up from the host To back up such machine or its disks either stop the machine or install Agent for Windows or Agent for Linux on the machine Virtual machine backup vs physical machine backup Backing up an entire virtual machine or its volumes yields a standard disk backup p 372 With Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows or Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Linux you can mount its volumes recover individual files from this backup and recover disks and volumes from the backup to a physical machine Similarly you can recover disks or volumes from a physical machine backup created with the Agent for Windows or the
144. up to a managed vault a user must have an account on the machine where the storage node is installed The scope of a user s privileges in a vault depends on the user s rights on the storage node A user who is a member of the Users group can view and manage his her own archives Members of the Administrators group can view and manage any archive stored on the storage node A user who is a member of the Administrators group on a managed machine can view and manage archives created by any user of this machine To learn more about privileges depending on the user rights see the User privileges on a storage node p 80 section Unmanaged vaults An unmanaged vault is a centralized vault that is not managed by a storage node To access an unmanaged vault a user has to have access privileges for the location from the network Any user that has permission to read write files in an unmanaged vault can back up data to the unmanaged vault recover data from any backup located in the unmanaged vault view and manage all the archives located in the unmanaged vault 4 1 1 Working with the Centralized vault view This section briefly describes the main elements of the Centralized vault view and suggests ways to work with them Vault toolbar The toolbar contains operational buttons that let you perform operations with the selected centralized vault See the Actions on centralized vaults p 131 section for details Pie chart with legend
145. user name Password enter the password 6 Click Send test e mail message to check if the settings are correct Messenger service WinPopup This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems on the sending machine and only for Windows on the receiving machine This option is not available when operating under bootable media The option enables you to receive WinPopup notifications about the backup task s successful completion failure or need for interaction The preset is Disabled Before configuring WinPopup notifications make sure the Messenger service is started on both the machine executing the task and the machine that will receive messages The Messenger service is not started by default in the Microsoft Windows Server 2003 family Change the service Startup mode to Automatic and start the service To configure WinPopup notifications 1 Select the Send WinPopup notifications check box 2 Inthe Machine name field enter the name of the machine to which notifications will be sent Multiple names are not supported Under Send notifications select the appropriate check boxes as follows When backup completes successfully to send notification when the backup operation is completed successfully When backup fails to send notification when the backup operation is failed The When user interaction is required check box to send notification during the operation when user interaction is requir
146. users A user who has administrative privileges on the machine such as a member of the Administrators or Backup Operators group additionally has the following management rights Back up and recover the entire machine or any data on the machine with or without using a disk snapshot Members of the Administrators group also can View and manage backup plans and tasks owned by any user on the machine Linux When managing a machine running Linux the user has or obtains the root privileges and so can Back up and recover any data or the entire machine having full control over all Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 agent operations and log files on the machine Manage local backup plans and tasks owned by any user registered in the operating system To avoid routine logging on to the system as root the root user can log on with the ordinary user credentials and then switch user as required 2 3 Owners and credentials This section explains the concept of owner and the meaning of a backup plan s or task s credentials Plan task owner A local backup plan owner is the user who created or last modified the plan A centralized backup plan owner is the management server administrator who created or last modified the centralized policy that spawned the plan Tasks belonging to a backup plan either local or centralized are owned by the backup plan owner Tasks that do not belong to a backup plan such as the recovery task
147. vaults either manually or during cleanup unreferenced data may appear in the deduplicating vaults and their databases The compacting procedure deletes such data in order to free up more storage space Only one compacting task is available per storage node Click 2 Reschedule compacting In the Schedule window set up the schedule for the compacting procedure Only the time events daily p 166 weekly p 168 and monthly p 170 schedules are available for setting up The preset is Start the task every 1 week on Sunday at 03 00 00 AM Repeat once Click View details In the Storage node details p 318 window the content of which is duplicated on the Information panel examine information about the storage node and the vaults managed by this node You can also manage the compacting task manually start and stop the task Refresh the list of Click o Refresh storage nodes The management console will update the list of storage nodes from the management server with the most recent information Though the list of storage nodes is refreshed automatically based on events the data may not be retrieved immediately from the management server due to some latency Manual refresh guarantees that the most recent data is displayed Adding a storage node To add a storage node 1 3 In the IP Name field enter the name or the IP address of the machine the storage node resides on or click Browse and browse the network fo
148. well as the history of operations logged in the local logs of the registered machines and the storage nodes Shortcuts bar The Shortcuts bar appears under the navigation tree It offers you an easy and convenient way of connection to the machines in demand by adding them as shortcuts To add a shortcut to a machine 1 Connect the console to a managed machine 2 Inthe navigation tree right click the machine s name a root element of the navigation tree and then select Create shortcut If the console and agent are installed on the same machine the shortcut to this machine will be added to the shortcuts bar automatically as Local machine Machine name If the console has ever been connected to Acronis Management Server the shortcut is added automatically as AMS Machine name Actions and tools pane The Actions and tools pane enables you to easily and efficiently work with Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 The pane s bars provide quick access to program s operations and tools All items of the Actions and tools bar are duplicated in the program menu Bars Item s name actions Contains a set of actions that can be performed on the items selected in any of the navigation views Clicking the action opens the respective action page p 15 Items of different navigation views have their own set of actions The bar s name changes in accordance with the item you select For example if you select the backup plan named System ba
149. with warnings and or Failed Schedule The types of the tasks schedules Manual or Scheduled Manual schedule means that a task runs only when you start it manually m Owner The list of users who created the tasks Duration The limits for the amount of time within which each of the tasks last ran With the default filter settings the report includes all tasks from all machines Report view Under Report view choose how the report will look Select whether to show all items in a single table or to group them by a particular column Specify which table columns to show and in which order Specify how to sort the table Report about the archives and backups In this view you can generate a report about the archives that are stored in managed centralized vaults This report consists of one or more tables Filters Under Filters choose which archives to include in the report Only the archives that meet all filter criteria are included Vaults The list of centralized managed vaults that store the archives Machines The list of registered machines from which the archives were created Type The archive types disk level archives and or file level archives Owner The list of users who created the archives Creation time The period within which the newest backup was created in each of the archives Occupied space The limits for the space occupied by each of the archives Data backed up The lim
150. you can recover data as of today yesterday half a week ago or a week ago For the five level scheme you can also recover data backed up two weeks ago So every additional backup level doubles the maximal roll back period for your data Tower of Hanoi by Acronis The Tower of Hanoi backup scheme is generally too complex to mentally calculate the next media to be used But Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 provides you with automation of the scheme usage You can set up the backup scheme while creating a backup plan Acronis implementation for the scheme has the following features up to 16 backup levels incremental backups on first level A to gain time and storage savings for the most frequent backup operations but data recovery from such backups takes longer because it generally requires access to three backups full backups on the last level E for five level pattern the rarest backups in the scheme take more time and occupy more space in storage differential backups on all intermediate levels B C and D for five level pattern the pattern starts with a full backup since the very first backup cannot be incremental the scheme forces every backup level to keep only the most recent backup other backups from the level have to be deleted however backup deletion is postponed in cases where the backup is a base for another incremental or differential one an old backup on a level is kept until a new backup has been s
151. you want to allow writing data onto the device specify the five character write key Without this key the device will be available in the read only mode Click OK 6 10 4 List of commands and utilities available in Linux based bootable media Linux based bootable media contains the following commands and command line utilities which you can use when running a command shell To start the command shell press CTRL ALT F2 while in the bootable media s management console Acronis command line utilities acronis asamba lash restoreraids trueimagecmd trueimagemnt Linux commands and utilities busybox ifconfig rm cat init rmmod cdrecord insmod route chmod iscsiadm scp chown kill scsi_id chroot kpartx sed cp in sg_map26 dd ls sh df lspci sleep dmesg lvm ssh dmraid mdadm sshd e2fsck mkdir strace e2label mke2fs swapoff echo mknod swapon egrep mkswap sysinfo fdisk more tar fsck mount tune2fs fxload mtx udev gawk mv udevinfo gpm pecardctl udevstart grep ping umount growisofs pktsetup uuidgen grub powerofft vconfig gunzip ps vi halt raidautorun zcat hexdump readcd hotplug reboot 6 10 5 Recovering MD devices and logical volumes To recover Linux Software RAID devices known as MD devices and or devices created by Logical Volume Manager LVM known as logical volumes you need to create the corresponding volume structure before starting the recovery You can create the volume structure in ei
152. your vaults Navigate further to the specific vault to view archives and backups and perform manual operations with them mounting validating deleting viewing contents You can also select a backup to recover data from it The following diagram illustrates the notions discussed above For more definitions please refer to the Glossary Managed Machine J f Control Backup Plan 1 Task 1 F Backup 1 Full backup F Backup 2 Create Backup Plan 2 Task 1 Full backup Bootable media Task 2 Differential backup Task 3 LL Incremental backup Task 4 Validate archive D backup 3 l Backup 4 Task 5 F Backup 5 Maintain Cleanup archive archive Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2010 27 Backup using bootable media You can boot the machine using the bootable media configure the backup operation in the same way as a simple backup plan and execute the operation This will help you extract files and logical volumes from a system that failed to boot take an image of the offline system or back up sector by sector an unsupported file system Managed Machine Vault Bootable Agent F Backup 0 F Backup 1 F Backup 2 Backup Operation Full backup of Data 2 Recovery under operating system When it comes to data recovery you create a recovery task on the managed machine You specify the vault then select the archive and then select the backup referring to the
153. 0 Bootable Agent The choice is available between The default port 9876 The currently used port New port enter the port number If a port has not been pre configured the agent uses the default port number SSL certificates Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components use Secure Sockets Layer SSL certificates for secure authentication SSL certificates for the components can be one of the two types Self signed certificates such as certificates automatically generated during the installation of an Acronis component Non self signed certificates such as certificates issued by a third party Certificate Authority CA for example by a public CA such as VeriSign or Thawte or by your organization s CA Certificate path All Acronis components installed on a machine when acting as a server application use an SSL certificate called the server certificate In Windows the certificate path and the server certificate s file name are specified in the registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Acronis Encryption Server The default path is SystemDrive Program Files Common Files Acronis Agent To ensure reliability the certificate is stored in Windows Certificate Store at the following location Certificates Local Computer Acronis Trusted Certificates Cache For self signed certificates the certificate thumbprint also known as fingerprint or hash is used for future host identification
154. 08 PE 2 1 WinPE is commonly used by OEMs and corporations for deployment test diagnostic and system repair purposes A machine can be booted into WinPE via PXE CD ROM USB flash drive or hard disk The Acronis Plug in for WinPE p 366 enables running the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent p 366 in the preinstallation environment Index A A policy on a machine or a group 66 About Windows loaders 238 Access credentials 245 246 Access credentials for archive location 202 209 Access credentials for destination 223 233 250 253 Access credentials for location 222 226 357 366 Access credentials for source 201 207 242 244 250 251 356 364 Acronis Active Restore 52 56 221 223 233 379 392 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 99 352 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows 98 349 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components 16 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server 92 344 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 overview 7 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node 342 Acronis Plug in for WinPE 379 382 393 Acronis PXE Server 273 Acronis PXE Server Installation 273 Acronis Secure Zone 53 254 379 392 Acronis Secure Zone Disk 254 Acronis Secure Zone Size 254 255 Acronis security groups 78 79 Acronis Startup Recovery Manager 54 221 257 Acronis Startup Recovery Manager ASRM 278 379 392 Acroni
155. 1 Select a volume to change a letter 2 Right click on the selected volume and then click Change letter in the context menu 3 Select a new letter in the Change Letter window 4 By clicking OK in the Change Letter window you ll add a pending operation to volume letter assignment To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 283 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them The new volume structure will be graphically represented in the Disk management view immediately Change volume label The volume label is an optional attribute It isa name assigned to a volume for easier recognition For example one volume could be called SYSTEM a volume with an operating system or PROGRAM an application volume DATA a data volume etc but it does not imply that only the type of data stated with the label could be stored on such a volume In Windows volume labels are shown in the Explorer disk and folder tree LABEL1 C LABEL2 D LABEL3 E etc LABEL1 LABEL2 and LABEL3 are volume labels A volume label is shown in all application dialog boxes for opening and saving files If you need to change a volume label 1 Right click on the selected volume and then click Change label 2 Enter a new label in the Change label window text field 3 By clicking OK in the Change label window you ll add the pending operation of changing the volume label If when
156. 10 Storage Node Windows 2000 Professional SP4 XP Professional SP2 Windows 2000 Server 2000 Advanced Server Server 2003 Server 2008 m Windows SBS 2003 SBS 2008 Windows XP Professional x64 Edition Windows Server 2003 2008 x64 Editions Windows Vista all editions except for Vista Home Basic and Vista Home Premium Windows 7 all editions except for the Starter and Home editions Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node handles tape libraries and autoloaders by using Removable Storage Management RSM Since Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7 do not support RSM a storage node installed in these operating systems does not support tape libraries and autoloaders Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for ESX ESXi VMware ESX Infrastructure 3 5 Update 2 VMware ESX ESXi 4 0 The Agent for ESX ESXi is delivered as a virtual appliance The Agent for ESX ESXi supports all VMware ESXi licenses except for the free license This is because the agent uses the Remote Command Line appliance and free VMware ESXi restricts access to this appliance to read only access The agent works during the VMware ESXi evaluation period Once a free VMware ESXi serial key is entered the Agent for ESX ESXi will stop functioning Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Hyper V Windows Server 2008 x64 Edition with Hyper V Microsoft Hyper V Server 2008 This agent installs on a Hyper V host as an add on to Acronis Backup amp Rec
157. 31 333 Filtering and sorting machines 298 311 Filtering and sorting tasks 328 330 Fits time interval 181 Fonts 91 Format volume 282 288 Full backup 380 382 384 387 Full incremental and differential backups 27 33 210 367 G Getting started 8 Getting started with a tape library 142 GFS Grandfather Father Son 382 388 391 GFS backup scheme 35 140 148 388 GFS Example 1 150 GFS Example 2 150 153 GFS Example 3 150 155 Grandfather Father Son scheme 211 368 Group details 297 298 312 315 Grouping the registered machines 10 60 62 298 H Hardware 140 HDD writing speed 100 109 How deduplication works 73 How to convert a disk backup to a virtual machine 235 How to create bootable media 259 265 How to install Hyper V Integration Services 18 48 50 317 How to install VMware Tools 48 51 317 How to load Acronis Administrative Template 84 341 How to reactivate GRUB and change its configuration 237 l Image 388 Importing machines from a text file 299 303 Importing machines from Active Directory 299 302 Increasing Acronis Secure Zone 256 Incremental backup 380 382 384 388 Inheritance of policies 67 Inheritance order 306 310 316 Introducing Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 7 Inventory 141 145 161 Items to back up 201 204 356 359 K Kernel parameters 260 2
158. 379 382 384 Console options 90 Consolidation 141 380 384 Content selection 222 225 Create volume wizard 284 Creating a backup plan 191 193 201 220 241 300 308 329 Creating a backup policy 295 325 356 Creating a custom static or dynamic group e 300 312 314 Creating a managed centralized vault 135 136 142 325 326 Creating a personal vault 164 Creating a volume 282 283 Creating Acronis Secure Zone 164 254 366 Creating an unmanaged centralized vault 135 138 Creating the volume structure automatically 269 Creating the volume structure manually 269 270 Criteria of the choice 148 Cumulative state and status of a policy e 72 Custom backup scheme 41 173 175 216 374 Customer Experience Program 99 D Daily schedule 170 215 326 372 Dashboard 184 186 290 Data type 222 225 Decreasing Acronis Secure Zone 256 Deduplicating vault 384 Deduplication 18 20 21 58 72 133 141 384 389 390 Deduplication best practices 74 Deduplication ratio 75 Deduplication restrictions 73 76 Default backup and recovery options 96 97 99 Default backup options 99 202 357 Default recovery options 121 223 Delete volume 282 286 Deleting Acronis Secure Zone 257 Deleting archives and backups 166 167 Deploying and updating Agent for ESX ESXi 95 317 319 Destination selection 226 Differential backu
159. 4 Acronis COMPUTE WITH CONFIDENCE WWW ACRONIS COM Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Advanced Server Virtual Edition User s Guide Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2010 All rights reserved Acronis and Acronis Secure Zone are registered trademarks of Acronis Inc Acronis Compute with Confidence Acronis Startup Recovery Manager Acronis Active Restore and the Acronis logo are trademarks of Acronis Inc Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds VMware and VMware Ready are trademarks and or registered trademarks of VMware Inc in the United States and or other jurisdictions Windows and MS DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation All other trademarks and copyrights referred to are the property of their respective owners Distribution of substantively modified versions of this document is prohibited without the explicit permission of the copyright holder Distribution of this work or derivative work in any standard paper book form for commercial purposes is prohibited unless prior permission is obtained from the copyright holder DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED AS IS AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON INFRINGEMENT ARE DISCLAIMED EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID Third party code may be provided with the Sof
160. 5 249 250 Archive validation 202 219 377 At Windows Event Log event 177 Attaching a managed vault 135 139 B Back up later scheme 210 368 Back up now scheme 210 367 Backing up dynamic volumes Windows 43 222 Backing up LVM volumes Linux 45 269 Backing up RAID arrays Linux 47 Backing up to tape library 144 Backing up virtual machines 48 318 Backup 27 33 380 383 384 385 387 388 392 Backup archive Archive 19 27 380 381 383 384 387 388 389 390 391 392 Backup operation 380 381 Backup options 381 387 Backup performance 108 Backup plan Plan 9 20 27 58 201 380 381 382 383 384 388 389 390 391 392 Backup plan details 187 191 197 307 Backup plan execution states 186 187 197 297 Backup plan statuses 95 186 187 197 305 Backup plans and tasks 186 203 Backup plan s credentials 201 203 Backup policies 292 Backup policy Policy 19 58 381 383 384 389 390 Backup policy deployment states 292 293 Backup policy statuses 292 293 297 305 Backup policy s state and statuses 69 293 Backup priority e 100 108 Backup scheme 381 382 388 391 Backup scheme selection 357 367 Backup schemes 202 210 Backup selection 241 243 245 246 250 251 Backup splitting 100 113 Basic concepts 8 27 57 58 201 Basic disk cloning 276 277 Basic precautions 275
161. 61 L Labeling 145 146 License Server 21 Limitations 141 Linux based bootable media 259 260 267 273 List of commands and utilities available in Linux based bootable media 268 272 Listed in txt csv file criterion 313 314 Local backup plan 53 385 388 Local task 385 388 Location selection 241 243 250 252 Location s host is available 181 Log 191 198 295 297 301 306 307 316 329 331 Log cleanup rules 92 98 345 350 Log entry details e 198 200 Logging level 92 333 M Machine 19 380 381 382 383 385 386 388 389 390 391 392 Machine details e 297 298 301 302 305 Machine management 96 302 305 Machine options 95 112 127 128 Machines selection 295 Main area views and action pages 11 14 Managed machine 10 27 91 379 381 383 384 388 390 391 Managed vault 58 324 384 387 388 390 391 392 Management Console 8 21 Management Server 8 19 Management server Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server 10 20 58 91 381 382 383 384 385 386 389 390 Management server administrator rights 80 Management server options 92 Managing a tape library 136 145 Managing Acronis Secure Zone 256 Managing mounted images 247 MBR destination 229 Media builder 185 291 389 Media components 100 114 Merging and moving personal vaults 165 Messenger service WinPopup 101
162. 8 PM on the first and third Friday of every month preferably when all users are logged off If one of the users is still logged on at 11 PM run the task anyway Event Monthly Months lt All gt On lt First gt lt Third gt lt Friday gt Once at 08 00 00 PM Condition User logged off Task start conditions Wait until the conditions are met Run the task anyway after 3 hour s As a result 1 If all users are logged off at 8PM the backup task will start at 8PM 2 If the last user logs off between 8PM and 11PM the backup task will start immediately after the user has logged off 3 If any of the users is still logged on at 11PM the backup task starts anyway 565 Time since last backup Applies to Windows Linux Enables to put a backup task run on hold until the specified time interval since the last successful backup completion passes Example Run the backup task after free space on the managed machine has changed by at least 1 GB but only if more than 12 hours have passed since the last successful backup Event When free space changed Run task if free space has changed by at least 1 GB Condition Time since last backup Time since the last backup 12 hour s Task start conditions Wait until the conditions are met As a result 1 if the free space changes by more than 1GB before 12 hours pass since the successful completion of the last backup the scheduler will wait until 12 hours pa
163. Agents require a license to perform operations on each managed machine Agents have multiple features or add ons that enable additional functionality and so might require additional licenses Components for centralized management These components delivered with the advanced editions provide the centralized management capability Usage of these components is not licensed Console The console provides Graphical User Interface and remote connection to the agents and other Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components Usage of the console is not licensed Bootable media builder With bootable media builder you can create bootable media in order to use the agents and other rescue utilities in a rescue environment Availability of the agent add ons in a rescue environment depends on whether an add on is installed on the machine where the media builder is working 1 3 1 Agent for Windows This agent enables disk level and file level data protection under Windows Disk backup Disk level data protection is based on backing up either a disk or a volume file system as a whole along with all the information necessary for the operating system to boot or all the disk sectors using the sector by sector approach raw mode A backup that contains a copy of a disk or a volume in a packaged form is called a disk volume backup or a disk volume image It is possible to recover disks or volumes as a whole from such backup as well as individual fold
164. Back up on field Such an archive would allow you to compare your financial documents as of the first and the last day of work and have a five year history of all documents etc No daily backups Consider a more exotic GFS scheme Start backup at 12 00 PM Back up on Friday Weekly monthly Friday Keep backups Daily 1 week Weekly 1 month m Monthly indefinitely Backup is thus performed only on Fridays This makes Friday the only choice for weekly and monthly backups leaving no other date for daily backups The resulting Grandfather Father archive will hence consist only of weekly differential and monthly full backups Even though it is possible to use GFS to create such an archive the Custom scheme is more flexible in this situation Tower of Hanoi scheme At a glance Up to 16 levels of full differential and incremental backups Next level backups are twice as rare as previous level backups One backup of each level is stored at a time Higher density of more recent backups Parameters You can set up the following parameters of a Tower of Hanoi scheme Schedule Set up a daily p 166 weekly p 168 or monthly p 170 schedule Setting up schedule parameters allows creating simple schedules example of a simple daily schedule a backup task will be run every 1 day at 10 AM as well as more complex schedules example of a complex daily schedule a task will be run every 3 days starting from
165. Center setting Privileges on vCenter Server or ESX ESXi host Outlined in the below table are the privileges a vCenter Server user must have to perform operations on all the vCenter hosts and clusters To enable a user to operate on a specific ESX host only assign the user the same privileges on the host In addition the Global gt Licenses privilege is required to be able to back up virtual machines of a specific ESX host Operation Object Privilege Backupa Backupa Recoverto Recoverto VA VM VM s disk anewVM an existing deploymen VM t Datastore Allocate space Browse datastore Low level file operations Global Network Resource Virtual machine gt Configuration Virtual machine gt Interaction Virtual machine gt Inventory Virtual machine gt Provisioning Virtual machine gt State Licenses required required on ESX host on ESX host only only Assign network Assign VM to resource pool Add existing disk Add new disk Add or remove device Change CPU count Memory Remove disk Rename Settings Configure CD media Console interaction Power off Power on Create from existing Create new Remove Allow disk access Create snapshot Remove snapshot Privileges for a folder To enable a user to operate within a specific vCenter folder assign the user the following privileges on the folder Operation Object Privilege Backupa Backupa_ Recover to
166. Does backup of an online production server affect the server performance To ensure that the centralized backup will not slow down business processes in your company and to minimize the resources required for the data protection you install Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node p 377 and configure it to manage a centralized vault or multiple centralized vaults Such vaults are called managed vaults p 375 The storage node helps the agent deduplicate p 371 backups before transferring them to managed vaults and deduplicates the backups already saved in the vaults Deduplication results in reducing backup traffic and saving storage space The storage node also undertakes operations with archives such as validation and cleanup which otherwise are performed by the agent and thus relieves the managed machines from unnecessary computing load Last but not least Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node enables using a tape library as a centralized vault for storing backup archives More than one storage node each managing a number of vaults can be set up and controlled centrally from the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server For more detailed information about storage nodes please refer to Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node p 20 2 14 2 Setting up centralized data protection in a heterogeneous network Assume that the network infrastructure includes servers 1 2 9 and workstations 3 5 8 runnin
167. Example 2 requires 4 tapes which is the minimum for the case So its tape options settings are the best in comparison with options for other examples ToH Example 1 Suppose the backup plan has the following tape options the Use a separate tape set option is selected the Always use a free tape For each full backup option is cleared the Always use a free tape For each incremental backup option is cleared the Always use a free tape For each differential backup option is cleared The figure below shows the tapes usage for the ToH scheme combined with the above mentioned tape options The recurring part of the scheme contains sixteen backup sessions The figure displays the backup archive state at the moment when the 17th session is finished Bn COC E SS ee BB 02 6 6 ee ee A M A N A B o C C As the Tower of Hanoi backup scheme forces presence of only one backup on each level all the outdated backups are deleted automatically In the next figure the deleted backups are drawn as dark gray rectangles Actually the deleted backup is still stored on the tapes but the information about it is deleted from the storage node database Bn E BS 02 lO ec A B 03 Ea The figure shows the full backup kept on tape 01 at the moment which cannot be deleted as it is a base for actual differential D C B and incremental A backups stored on tape 02 The full backup deletion is postponed until all the above mentioned four
168. Increasing Acronis Secure Zone To increase Acronis Secure Zone 1 Onthe Manage Acronis Secure Zone page click Increase 2 Select volumes from which free space will be used to increase the Acronis Secure Zone 3 Specify the new size of the zone by dragging the slider and selecting any size between the current and maximum values The maximum size is equal to the disk s unallocated space plus the total free space of all selected partitions typing an exact value in the Acronis Secure Zone Size field When increasing the size of the zone the program will act as follows m first it will use the unallocated space Volumes will be moved if necessary but not resized Moving of locked volumes requires a reboot m If there is not enough unallocated space the program will take free space from the selected volumes proportionally reducing the volumes size Resizing of locked partitions requires a reboot Reducing a system volume to the minimum size might prevent the machine s operating system from booting 4 Click OK Decreasing Acronis Secure Zone To decrease Acronis Secure Zone 1 Onthe Manage Acronis Secure Zone page click Decrease 2 Select volumes that will receive free space after the zone is decreased 3 Specify the new size of the zone by dragging the slider and selecting any size between the current and minimum values The minimum size is approximately 50MB depending on the geometry of the hard disk
169. January 15 During the specified days the task will be repeated every 2 hours from 10 AM to 10 PM Thus complex schedules specify the sessions on which the scheme should run In the discussion below days can be replaced with scheduled sessions Number of levels Select from 2 to 16 backup levels See the example stated below for details Roll back period The guaranteed number of sessions that one can go back in the archive at any time Calculated automatically depending on the schedule parameters and the numbers of levels you select See the example below for details Example Schedule parameters are set as follows Recur Every 1 day Frequency Once at 6 PM Number of levels 4 This is how the first 14 days or 14 sessions of this scheme s schedule look Shaded numbers denote backup levels a ee ee Backups of different levels have different types Last level in this case level 4 backups are full Backups of intermediate levels 2 3 are differential First level 1 backups are incremental A cleanup mechanism ensures that only the most recent backups of each level are kept Here is how the archive looks on day 8 a day before creating a new full backup The scheme allows for efficient data storage more backups accumulate toward the current time Having four backups we could recover data as of today yesterday half a week or a week ago Roll back period The number of days we can go back in the arc
170. MBR is selected along with the disk backup you need to retain operating system bootability on the target disk volume The operating system must have the system volume information e g volume letter matched with the disk NT signature which is kept in the MBR disk record But two disks with the same NT signature cannot work properly under one operating system If there are two disks having the same NT signature and comprising of a system volume on a machine at the startup the operating system runs from the first disk discovers the same signature on the second one automatically generates a new unique NT signature and assigns it to the second disk As a result all the volumes on the second disk will lose their letters all paths will be invalid on the disk and programs won t find their files The operating system on that disk will be unbootable To retain system bootability on the target disk volume choose one of the following Select automatically A new NT signature will be created only if the existing one differs from the one in the backup Otherwise the existing NT signature will be kept Create new The program will generate a new NT signature for the target hard disk drive Recover from backup The program will replace the NT signature of the target hard disk with one from the disk backup Recovering the disk signature may be desirable due to the following reasons Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 creates scheduled tasks u
171. MM YYYY HH MM SS Backup plan Backup plan name Task Task name Managed entity type Machine Managed entity ENTITY_NAME Machine MACHINE_NAME Message Description of the operation Code 12 3x45678A Module Module name Owner Owner of the plan 7 18 Reporting Reporting provides the management server administrator with detailed and well structured information concerning the enterprise data protection operations Reports can be used as an instrument for profound analysis of the whole backup infrastructure within a corporate network The management server generates reports using statistics and logs which are collected from registered machines and are stored in the dedicated databases Reports are generated based on report templates The templates define the information to be included in the report and the way the information is represented Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server offers report templates for Registered machines Backup policies existing on the management server Local and centralized backup plans existing on the registered machines Local and centralized tasks existing on the registered machines Archives and backups stored in the centralized managed vaults Statistics about centralized managed vaults Task activities history Reports about machines backup policies backup plans tasks and archives and backups contain information as of the current time Reports about vaults statistics a
172. Primary options will be disabled and you will only be able to select the Logical volume type The warning message will advise you that an OS installed on this volume will not be bootable If you use characters when setting a new volume label that are unsupported by the currently installed operation system you will get the appropriate warning and the Next button will be disabled You will have to change the label to proceed with the creation of the new volume If you click the Back button you will be returned to the previous page Set the volume size p 279 If you click the Finish button you will complete the operation planning To perform the planned operation click Commit in the toolbar and then click Proceed in the Pending Operations window If you set a 64K cluster size for FAT16 FAT32 or on 8KB 64KB cluster size for NTFS Windows can mount the volume but some programs e g Setup programs might calculate its disk space incorrectly Delete volume This version of Acronis Disk Director Lite has reduced functionality because it is mainly a tool for preparing bare metal systems for recovering previously saved volume images The features of resizing the existing volumes and creating the new volumes using free space from the existing ones exist on the full version of the software so with this version deleting an existing volume sometimes might be the only way to free the necessary disk space without changing the existing disk conf
173. Recovery 10 Agent writes and reads the tapes or accessed through the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node p 20 Storage nodes ensure fully automatic operation of tape libraries and autoloaders p 136 Backup archives created using different ways of access to tape have different formats A tape written by a storage node cannot be read by an agent Linux based and PE based bootable media allow for backup and recovery using both local access and access through the storage node Backups created using the bootable media can be recovered with the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent running in the operating system 2 12 1 Tape compatibility table The following table summarizes the readability of tapes written by Acronis True Image Echo and Acronis True Image 9 1 product families in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 The table also illustrates the compatibility of tapes written by various components of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 is readable on a tape device attached to a machine with ABR10 ABR10 ABR10 ABR10 Bootable Agent for Agent for Storage Media Windows Linux Node Tape written on Bootable Media mae a attached tape anes device tape an a TO o a drive ortape Agentfor aneor ibrary by Windows aeos ee A A o ngent for linux aneor mes ates o aR Tere m
174. SXi Virtual 512 MB 5 GB 5 GB CPU reservation Appliance the Virtual minimum 300 MHz Appliance recommended memory setting In a vCenter cluster a shared storage is required Network interface card or virtual network adapter is a common requirement for all the components Bootable media Media type Memory ISO image size Additional Based on Windows PE 512 MB 300 MB Linux based 256 MB 130 MB 1 7 Technical support As part of a purchased annual Support charge you are entitled to Technical Support as follows to the extent that electronic services are available you may electronically access at no additional charge Support services for the Software which Acronis shall endeavor to make available twenty four 24 hours a day seven 7 days per week Such electronic services may include but are not limited to user forums software specific information hints and tips bug fix retrieval via the internet software maintenance and demonstration code retrieval via a WAN accessible FTP server and access to a problem resolution database via Acronis customer support system Support shall consist of supplying telephone or other electronic support to you in order to help you locate and on its own correct problems with the Software and supplying patches updates and other changes that Acronis at its sole discretion makes or adds to the Software and which Acronis makes generally available without additional charge to other licensees of the Sof
175. Send test e mail message to check if the settings are correct Messenger service WinPopup This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not available when operating under bootable media The option enables you to receive WinPopup notifications about about the recovery task s successful completion failure or need for interaction The preset is Disabled Before configuring WinPopup notifications make sure the Messenger service is started on both the machine executing the task and the machine that will receive messages The Messenger service is not started by default in the Microsoft Windows Server 2003 family Change the service Startup mode to Automatic and start the service To configure WinPopup notifications 1 Select the Send WinPopup notifications check box 2 Inthe Machine name field enter the name of the machine to which notifications will be sent Multiple names are not supported 3 Under Send notifications select the appropriate check boxes as follows When recovery completes successfully to send notification when the recovery task has completed successfully When recovery fails to send notification when the recovery task has failed The When user interaction is required check box to send notification during the operation when user interaction is required is always selected 4 Click Send Test WinPopup Message to check if the settings are correct Event tr
176. Standard Encryption AES algorithm with a 128 bit key AES 192 the archive will be encrypted using the AES algorithm with a 192 bit key AES 256 the archive will be encrypted using the AES algorithm with a 256 bit key 5 Click OK The AES cryptographic algorithm operates in the Cipher block chaining CBC mode and uses a Dest Tape Dest removable media Dest removable media randomly generated key with a user defined size of 128 192 or 256 bits The larger the key size the longer it will take for the program to encrypt the archive and the more secure your data will be The encryption key is then encrypted with AES 256 using a SHA 256 hash of the password as a key The password itself is not stored anywhere on the disk or in the backup file the password hash is used for verification purposes With this two level security the backup data is protected from any unauthorized access but recovering a lost password is not possible Source files exclusion This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media This option is effective for disk level backup of NTFS and FAT file systems only This option is effective for file level backup of all supported file systems The option defines which files and folders to skip during the backup process and thus exclude from the list of backed up items The preset is Exclude files matching the following criteria tmp bak To specif
177. The pie chart lets you estimate the vault s load it shows the proportion of the vault s free space and occupied space The pie chart is not available if the vault is located on a tape library l free space space on the storage device where the vault is located For example if the vault is located on a hard disk the vault free space is free space of the appropriate volume I occupied space total size of backup archives and their metadata if it is located in the vault The legend displays the following information about the vault for managed vaults only the name of the storage node that manages the vault full path to the vault total number of archives and backups stored in the vault the ratio of the occupied space to the original data size for managed vaults only deduplication p 71 state On Off for managed vaults only encryption state Yes No Vault content The Vault content section contains the archives table and toolbar The archives table displays archives and backups that are stored in the vault Use the archives toolbar to perform actions on the selected archives and backups The list of backups is expanded by clicking the plus sign to the left of the archive s name All the archives are grouped by type on the following tabs The Disk archives tab lists all the archives that contain disk or volume backups images The File archives tab lists all the archives that contain file backups Re
178. USB hard drive a flash drive or any internal hard drive How it works When configuring a recovery operation you select disks or volumes to recover from a backup Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 scans the selected disks or volumes in the backup If this scan finds a supported operating system the Acronis Active Restore option becomes available If you do not enable the option the system recovery will proceed in the usual way and the machine will become operational after the recovery is completed If you enable the option the sequence of actions will be set as follows Once the system recovery is started the operating system boots from the backup The machine becomes operational and ready to provide necessary services The data required to serve incoming requests is recovered with the highest priority everything else is recovered in the background Because serving requests is performed simultaneously with recovery the system operation can slow down even if recovery priority in the recovery options is set to Low This way the system downtime is reduced to a minimum at the cost of a temporary performance downgrade Usage scenarios 1 The system uptime is one of the efficiency criteria Examples Client oriented online services Web retailers polling stations 2 The system storage space ratio is heavily biased toward storage Some machines are being used as storage facilities where the operating system claims a small space segment
179. Use the table in the right part of the window to browse and select the nested items Selecting the check box beside the Name column s header automatically selects all items in the table Clearing this check box automatically deselects all items 3 Click OK Selecting entire virtual machines Backing up a virtual machine means backing up all the machine s disks plus the machine configuration To back up one or more virtual machines residing on a virtualization server 1 Select the check boxes next to virtual machines that you want to back up Selecting the check box for the virtualization server automatically selects all the virtual machines hosted on this server Use the right part of the window to view details of the selected virtual machine or selected virtualization server 2 Click OK Backing up an entire virtual machine yields a standard disk backup p 372 Having Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows or for Linux you can mount its volumes recover individual files from this backup and recover disks and volumes from the backup to a physical machine The virtual machine configuration stored in a virtual machine backup will be suggested by default at recovering the backup content to a new virtual machine Limitations A Hyper V virtual machine that uses at least one pass through disk a physical disk either local or SAN LUN attached to the virtual machine cannot be backed up from the host To back up such mac
180. VM VM s disk an existing VM Datastore Allocate space Global Licenses Network Assign network Resource Assign VM to Virtual machine gt Configuration resource pool Add existing disk Add new disk Remove disk Settings Virtual machine gt Power off Interaction Power on Virtual machine gt Inventory Virtual machine gt Provisioning Virtual machine gt State Create from existing Create new Remove Allow disk access Create snapshot Remove snapshot Removing Agent for ESX ESXi You can remove Agent for ESX ESXi from an ESX ESXi server by deleting the corresponding virtual appliance When integration with vCenter is enabled Agent for ESX ESXi can be removed automatically from the hosts managed by the vCenter Server To remove Agent for ESX ESXi automatically 1 Inthe Navigation tree right click the group that has the same name as the vCenter Server 2 Click Remove ESX agents 3 A list of ESX ESXi hosts obtained from the vCenter Server will be displayed Select the hosts to remove the agents from or check the Select all check box 4 Click Remove ESX agents What happens when you remove an agent The virtual appliance that contains the agent will be deleted from the server s disk The virtual machines hosted on this ESX ESXi server will disappear from the management server or become unavailable for backup and restore if integration with the vCenter is still enabled The Virtual Edition license
181. Wait until the conditions are met If the free space changes by more than 1 GB the scheduler will wait until both conditions are met at the same time and then run the backup task 5 6 1 User is idle Applies to Windows User is idle means that a screen saver is running on the managed machine or the machine is locked Example Run the backup task on the managed machine every day at 9PM preferably when the user is idle If the user is still active by 11PM run the task anyway Event Daily every 1 day s Once at 09 00 00 PM Condition User is idle Task start conditions Wait until the conditions are met Run the task anyway after 2 hour s As a result 1 If the user becomes idle before 9PM the backup task will start at 9PM 2 If the user becomes idle between 9PM and 11PM the backup task will start immediately after the user becomes idle 3 If the user is still active at 11PM the backup task starts anyway 5 6 2 Location s host is available Applies to Windows Linux Location s host is available means that the machine hosting the destination for storing archives on a networked drive is available Example Backing up data to the networked location is performed on workdays at 9 00 PM If the location s host is not available at that moment for instance due to maintenance work skip the backup and wait for the next workday to start the task It is assumed that the backup task should not be
182. When backing up multiple systems with similar content back up one of the similar systems first so that Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node indexes all the system s files as potential deduplication items This will lead to faster backup processes and less network traffic because of effective deduplication at source regardless of whether the backups are performed simultaneously or not Before starting the subsequent backups make sure that the indexing task has finished deduplication of the first backup and is now idle You can view the state of the indexing task in the list of tasks on Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server Deduplication ratio The deduplication ratio shows the size of archives in a deduplicating vault in relation to the size they would occupy in a non deduplicating vault For example suppose that you are backing up two files with identical content from two machines If the size of each file is one gigabyte then the size of the backups in a non deduplicating vault will be approximately 2 GB but this size will be just about 1 GB in a deduplicating vault This gives a deduplication ratio of 2 1 or 50 Conversely if the two files had different content the backup sizes in non deduplicating and duplicating vaults would be the same 2 GB and the deduplication ratio would be 1 1 or 100 What ratio to expect Although in some situations the deduplication ratio may be very high in the previous exam
183. Windows machines Once the first backup is started the policy gets the Error status on the Linux machines and on the Windows machines that do not have such volumes The policy gets the Warning status on Windows machines that have either a D or F volume unless an event that will result in an error occurs The policy that has to back up the System and the dev sda1 volumes will get the Warning status on the Windows machines since dev sda is not found and on the Linux machines that have the dev sda1 volume since the System volume is not found The policy will get the Error status on Linux machines that do not have a SCSI device The following table provides details State Status Deploying Error Warning OK Error Warning OK Warning OK Error Warning OK Description The deployment log has errors for example disk space runs out The deployment log has warnings the machine went offline during the deployment cannot connect for N days The deployment log does not have errors and warnings The status of the corresponding backup plan is Error The status of the corresponding backup plan is Warning The status of the corresponding backup plan is OK The updating log has errors cannot delete the locked task the Acronis service is stopped The updating log has warnings The updating log does not have errors and warnings The revoking log has errors The revoking log has warnings The revoking log does no
184. Wow6432Node CLSID F2C2787D 95AB 40D4 942D 298F5F757874 Solution Add this key to the registry To do so create and run the following script xxx reg HKEY_CLASSES_ ROOT Wow6432Node CLSID F2C2787D 95AB 40D4 942D 298F5F757874 PSFactoryBuffer HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT Wow6432Node CLSID F2C2787D 95AB 40D4 942D 298F5F757874 InProcServer32 hex 2 25 00 73 00 79 00 73 00 74 00 65 00 6d 00 72 00 6f 00 6F 00 74 00 25 00 5c 00 53 00 79 00 73 00 57 00 4F 00 57 00 36 00 34 00 5c 00 76 00 73 00 73 00 5f 00 70 00 73 00 2e 00 64 00 6c 00 6c 00 00 02 ThreadingModel Both 2 11 1 How to install Hyper V Integration Services To install the Hyper V Integration Services 1 Run the guest operating system 2 Select Action gt Insert Integration Services Setup Disk 3 The server connects the ISO image of the setup disk to the machine Follow the onscreen instructions 2 11 2 How to install VMware Tools To install the VMware Tools 1 Run the VMware Infrastructure vSphere Client 2 Connect to the ESX server 3 Select the virtual machine and run the guest operating system 4 Right click the virtual machine and select Install Upgrate VMware Tools 5 Follow the onscreen instructions 2 12 Tape support Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 supports tape libraries autoloaders SCSI and USB tape drives as storage devices A tape device can be locally attached to a managed machine in this case the Acronis Backup amp
185. able summarizes the cleanup types used in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage node side Schedule set by Backup plan Backup plan Retention rules set by Backup plan Backup plan Storage node side validation Validation p 379 performed by a storage node p 377 according to the backup plans p 368 that produce the archives p 367 stored in a managed location p 375 Being an alternative to the agent side validation p 367 the validation on the storage node side relieves the production servers of unnecessary CPU load T Task In Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 a task is a set of sequential actions to be performed on a managed machine p 375 when a certain time comes or a certain event occurs The actions are described in an xml script file The start condition schedule exists in the protected registry keys Tower of Hanoi A popular backup scheme p 369 aimed to maintain the optimal balance between a backup archive p 367 size and the number of recovery points p 376 available from the archive Unlike the GFS p 374 scheme that has only three levels of recovery resolution daily weekly monthly resolution the Tower of Hanoi scheme continuously reduces the time interval between recovery points as the backup age increases This allows for very efficient usage of the backup storage For more information please refer to Tower of Hanoi backup scheme p 37 U Universal Restore Acronis Backup amp R
186. ables Some environment variables point to Windows folders Using such variables instead of full folder and file paths ensures that proper Windows folders are backed up regardless of where Windows is located on a particular machine To include In the Files and folders Comments column type or select Program Files folder PROGRAMFILES Points to the Program Files folder for example C Program Files Windows folder WINDIR Points to the folder where Windows is located for example C Windows Common data for all user ALLUSERSPROFILE Points to the folder where the common data of all profiles user profiles is located typically C Documents and Settings All Users in Windows XP and C ProgramData in Windows Vista You can use other environment variables or a combination of environment variables and text For example to refer to the Acronis folder in the machines Program Files folder type PROGRAMEFILES Acronis Templates Templates are similar to environment variables but are already pre customized To include In the Files and folders Comments column type or select All files on all volumes on a machine All user profiles existing on a machine Linux To include Text file file txt on the volume dev hda3 mounted on home usr docs Home directory of the common users The root user s home directory Directory for all user related programs Directory for system configuration files 12308 All Fi
187. ables you to run Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent either in a Linux based environment or Windows Preinstallation Environment WinPE without the help of an operating system Bootable media is most often used to recover an operating system that cannot start access and back up the data that has survived in a corrupted system deploy an operating system on bare metal create basic or dynamic volumes on bare metal back up sector by sector a disk with an unsupported file system back up offline any data that cannot be backed up online because of restricted access being permanently locked by the running applications or for any other reason A machine can be booted into the above environments either with physical media or using the network boot from Acronis PXE Server Windows Deployment Services WDS or Remote Installation Services RIS These servers with uploaded bootable components can be thought of as a kind of bootable media too You can create bootable media or configure the PXE server or WDS RIS using the same wizard Linux based bootable media Linux based media contains Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Bootable Agent based on Linux kernel The agent can boot and perform operations on any PC compatible hardware including bare metal and machines with corrupted or non supported file systems The operations can be configured and controlled either locally or remotely using the management console PE based bootable media
188. access to very large quantities of data is more suitable for a tape library than random access to small portions of data Limitations Limitations of tape library usage are the following 1 The consolidation p 371 operation is not possible for archives located on tapes Deletion of a single separate backup is impossible from a tape It is possible to delete all the backups stored on a tape However after this operation all the incremental and differential backups stored on other tapes and based on the deleted backups cannot be used for data recovery In a Custom backup plan s retention rules the If deletion of a backup affects other backups gt Consolidate the backup option is disabled Only the Postpone the deletion option is available Deduplication p 371 is not available for archives located on tape storage devices File recovery from a disk backup stored on tape is possible but can take a very long time A tape with backups written by the storage node cannot be read on a tape device locally attached to a machine the agent is installed on because of a difference in tape format To get information about the readability of the archives on tapes written by different components of other versions of the product by means of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 see the Tape compatibility table p 50 section 5 Barcode printers are not used RSM Media Pools Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 uses Windows Removable Storage Manager RSM
189. ach disk that you want to include in the volume and the size of the volume will depend on the size of the smallest space Access to the data on a striped volume is usually faster than access to the same data on a single physical disk because the I O is spread across more than one disk Striped volumes are created for improved performance not for their better reliability they do not contain redundant information Mirrored Volume A fault tolerant volume also sometimes called RAID 1 whose data is duplicated on two identical physical disks All of the data on one disk is copied to another disk to provide data redundancy Almost any volume can be mirrored including the system and boot volumes and if one of the disks fails the data can still be accessed from the remaining disks Unfortunately the hardware limitations on size and performance are even more severe with the use of mirrored volumes Mirrored Striped Volume A fault tolerant volume also sometimes called RAID 1 0 combining the advantage of the high I O speed of the striped layout and redundancy of the mirror type The evident disadvantage remains inherent with the mirror architecture a low disk to volume size ratio RAID 5 A fault tolerant volume whose data is striped across an array of three or more disks The disks do not need to be identical but there must be equally sized blocks of unallocated space available on each disk in the volume Parity a calculated value that can
190. acing It is possible to duplicate log events of the recovery operations performed on the managed machine in the Application Event Log of Windows or send the events to the specified SNMP managers Windows event log This option is effective only in Windows operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media This option defines whether the agent s operating on the managed machine have to log events of the recovery operations in the Application Event Log of Windows to see this log run eventvwr exe or select Control Panel gt Administrative tools gt Event Viewer You can filter the events to be logged The preset is Use the setting set in the Machine options To select whether to log the recovery operations events in the Application Event Log of Windows Select one of the following Use the setting set in the Machine options to use the setting specified for the machine For more information refer to Machine options p 93 Log the following event types to log events of the recovery operations in the Application Event Log Specify the types of events to be logged All events log all events information warnings and errors Errors and warnings Errors only Do not log to disable logging events of the recovery operations in the Application Event Log SNMP notifications This option is effective for both Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not availab
191. ack up on Workdays Weekly monthly Friday Keep backups Daily 1 week Weekly 10 days Monthly 6 months With this scheme you will have a week to recover a previous version of a damaged file from a daily backup as well as 10 day access to weekly backups Each monthly full backup will be available for six months since the creation date Work schedule Suppose you are a part time financial consultant and work in a company on Tuesdays and Thursdays On these days you often make changes to your financial documents statements and update the spreadsheets etc on your laptop To back up this data you may want to Track changes to the financial statements spreadsheets etc performed on Tuesdays and Thursdays daily incremental backup Have a weekly summary of file changes since last month Friday weekly differential backup Have a monthly full backup of your files Moreover assume that you want to retain access to all backups including the daily ones for at least six months The following GFS scheme suits such purposes Start backup at 11 30 PM Back up on Tuesday Thursday Friday Weekly monthly Friday Keep backups Daily 6 months Weekly 6 months Monthly 5 years Here daily incremental backups will be created on Tuesdays and Thursdays with weekly and monthly backups performed on Fridays Note that in order to choose Friday in the Weekly monthly field you need to first select it in the
192. age Area Network SAN ona Network Attached Storage NAS ona tape library locally attached to the storage node To create a new folder for the vault in the selected location click ES Create folder 2 Click OK A vault can be created in an empty folder only We do not recommend creating a deduplicating managed vault on a FAT32 volume The reason is that such vault stores all deduplicated items in two potentially large files Because the maximum file size in the FAT file systems is limited to 4 GB the storage node may stop working when this limit is reached The folder permissions must allow the user account under which the storage node s service is running by default ASN User to write to the folder When assigning permissions specify the user account explicitly not just Everyone Vault database path To specify the path where the vault s database will be created 1 Inthe Local folders of the storage node select the desired folder or enter the full path to the folder in the Path field To create a new folder for the database click ES Create folder 2 Click OK When choosing a folder for the vault s database follow these considerations The folder size may become large one estimate is 200 GB per 8 TB of used space or about 2 5 percent The folder permissions must allow the user account under which the storage node s service is running by default ASN User to write to the folder When assigning permissions
193. age Relative Size This setting is effective only when the Snapshot Storage Absolute Size setting is 0 Description Specifies the initial size of the snapshot storage as a percentage of the disk space that is available at the time of starting the backup Possible values Any integer number between 0 and 100 Default value 50 If this setting is 0 the snapshot storage will not be created The initial size will not exceed the available space minus 50 MB Without the snapshot storage taking snapshots is still possible The size of the snapshot storage does not affect the size of the backup Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows The following are the parameters of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent that can be set by using Acronis Administrative Template Licensing Specifies how often the agent checks its license on the license server and how long it can work without a license server License Check Interval in days Description Specifies how often in days to check for license availability on Acronis License Server Possible values any integer number between 0 and 5 Default value 1 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent periodically checks whether its license key is present on the license server The first check is performed every time that Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent starts and subsequent checks are performed once in the number of days given by License Check Interval When the agent cannot connec
194. ake for the program to encrypt the archives stored in the vault and the more secure the archives will be The encryption key is then encrypted with AES 256 using a SHA 256 hash of the password as a key The password itself is not stored anywhere on the disk the password hash is used for verification purposes With this two level security the archives are protected from any unauthorized access but recovering a lost password is not possible Creating an unmanaged centralized vault To create an unmanaged centralized vault perform the following steps Vault Name Specify a unique name for the vault The creation of two centralized vaults with the same name is prohibited Comments Enter the distinctive description of the vault Type Select the Unmanaged type Path p 135 Specify where the vault will be created After you have performed all the required steps click OK to commit creating the unmanaged centralized vault Vault path To specify the path where the unmanaged vault will be created 1 Enter the full path to the folder in the Path field or select the desired folder in the folders tree Unmanaged vaults can be organized on a network share ona Storage Area Network SAN ona Network Attached Storage NAS on FTP and SFTP servers According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and pa
195. al machine or multiple virtual machines residing on the server without having to install the agent on each virtual machine recover a virtual machine to the same another or new virtual machine residing on the same server or on another virtualization server where the agent for virtual machines is installed The virtual machine configuration stored in a virtual machine backup will be suggested by default at recovering the backup content to a new virtual machine back up and recover individual disks and volumes of a virtual machine A virtual machine can be online running offline stopped suspended or switch between the three states during backup A virtual machine has to be offline stopped during the recovery to this machine The machine will be automatically stopped before recovery You can opt for manual stopping of machines p 126 Virtual machine backup vs the machine s volumes backup Backing up a virtual machine means backing up all the machine s disks plus the machine configuration With this source type you can back up multiple machines This comes in handy when having small in terms of virtual disk size but numerous legacy servers such as those resulting from workload consolidation A separate archive will be created for each machine Backing up volumes within a virtual machine is similar to backing up a physical machine s volumes With this source type you select the machine and then select the disks volumes to back
196. ame as Not configured Server Encryption options Specifies whether to encrypt the transferred data when the component acts as a server application Select one of the following Not configured The component will use the default setting which is to use encryption if possible see the following option Enabled Encryption is enabled In Encryption select one of the following Enabled Data transfer will be encrypted if encryption is enabled on the client application otherwise it will be unencrypted Disabled Encryption is disabled any connection to a client application which requires encryption will not be established Required Data transfer will be performed only if encryption is enabled on the client application see Client Encryption options it will be encrypted Authentication parameters In Use Agent Certificate Authentication select one of the following Do not use The use of SSL certificates is disabled Any connection to a client application which requires the use of SSL certificates will not be established Use if possible The use of SSL certificates is enabled The server will use SSL certificates if their use is enabled on the client application and will not use them otherwise Always use The use of SSL certificates is enabled The connection will be established only if the use of SSL certificates is enabled on the client application Disabled The same as Not configured Network port configuratio
197. amic volume Any volume located on dynamic disks p 372 or more precisely on a disk group p 372 Dynamic volumes can span multiple disks Dynamic volumes are usually configured depending on the desired goal to increase the volume size a spanned volume to reduce the access time a striped volume to achieve fault tolerance by introducing redundancy mirrored and RAID 5 volumes E Encrypted archive A backup archive p 367 encrypted according to the Advanced Encryption Standard AES When the encryption option and a password for the archive are set in the backup options p 367 each backup belonging to the archive is encrypted by the agent p 366 before saving the backup to its destination The AES cryptographic algorithm operates in the Cipher block chaining CBC mode and uses a randomly generated key with a user defined size of 128 192 or 256 bits The encryption key is then encrypted with AES 256 using a SHA 256 hash of the password as a key The password itself is not stored anywhere on the disk or in the backup file the password hash is used for verification purposes With this two level security the backup data is protected from any unauthorized access but recovering a lost password is not possible Encrypted vault A managed vault p 375 to which anything written is encrypted and anything read is decrypted transparently by the storage node p 377 using a vault specific encryption key stored on the node
198. amp Recovery 10 Management Console p 371 on the same machine or any machine from which you prefer to operate If you have the standalone product edition skip this step since in your case the console installs with the agent Run the console To be able to recover the machine s operating system if the system fails to start create bootable media p 369 Connect the console to the managed machine Create a backup plan p 368 To do so you have to specify at the very least the data to be protected and the location where the backup archive p 367 will be stored This will create a minimal backup plan consisting of one task p 378 that will create a full backup p 367 of your data every time the task is manually started A complex backup plan might consist of multiple tasks which run on schedule create full incremental or differential backups p 32 perform archive maintenance operations such as backup validation p 379 or deleting outdated backups archive cleanup p 370 You can customize backup operations using various backup options such as pre post backup commands network bandwidth throttling error handling or notification options Use the Backup plans and tasks page to view information about your backup plans and tasks and monitor their execution Use the Log page to browse the operations log The location where you store backup archives is called a vault p 379 Navigate to the Vaults page to view information about
199. and all other disk space is committed to storage such as movies sounds or other multimedia files Some of these storage volumes can be extremely large as compared to the system and so practically all the recovery time will be dedicated to recovering the files which might be used much later on if in any near future at all If you opt for Acronis Active Restore the system will be operational in a short time Users will be able to open the necessary files from the storage and use them while the rest of the files which are not immediately necessary are being recovered in the background Examples movie collection storage music collection storage multimedia storage How to use 1 Back up the system disk or volume to a location accessible through the system s BIOS This may be Acronis Secure Zone a USB hard drive a flash drive or any internal hard drive If your operating system and its loader reside on different volumes always include both volumes in the backup The volumes must also be recovered together otherwise there is a high risk that the operating system will not start Create bootable media If a system failure occurs boot the machine using the bootable media Start the console and connect to the bootable agent Configure the system recovery select the system disk or volume and select the Use Acronis Active Restore check box Acronis Active Restore will choose for the boot up and subsequent recovery the first
200. another machine Install a storage node on the machine the tape library is attached to create a centralized vault on the tape library and then rescan each tape containing backups What if have lost my storage node and need to recover data from a tape If you know which tape has the data to recover and you have a tape device with vault managed by a storage node insert the tape cartridge into the device go to the Centralized vaults view of the console select the vault rescan the tape select the archive and the backup to recover data from and create the recovery task If you don t know which tape has the data to recover you have to rescan each tape until the data is found Generally all the steps you need to do are the same as mentioned above except the rescan has to be applied to a number of tapes instead one tape What if need to recover data from an Echo tape Use the table from the Tape compatibility table p 50 section to find out which Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components can read data from your tape 4 2 Personal vaults A vault is called personal if it was created using direct connection of the console to a managed machine Personal vaults are specific for each managed machine Personal vaults are visible to any user that can log on to the system A user s right to back up to a personal vault is defined by the user s permission for the folder or device where the vault is located A personal vault can be orga
201. any time The automatic cleanup mechanism maintains the required rollback period by deleting the expired backups and keeping the most recent backups of each level Custom to create a custom scheme where you are free to set up a backup strategy in the way your enterprise needs it most specify multiple schedules for different backup types add conditions and specify the retention rules Back up now scheme With the Back up now scheme the backup will be performed immediately right after you click the OK button at the bottom of the page In the Backup type field select whether you want to create a full incremental or differential backup p 32 Back up later scheme With the Back up later scheme the backup will be performed only once at the date and time you specify Specify the appropriate settings as follows Backup type Select the type of backup full incremental or differential If there is no full backup in the archive a full backup will be created regardless of your selection Date and time Specify when to start the backup The task will be Select this check box if you do not need to put the backup task on a schedule and started manually wish to start it manually afterwards Simple scheme With the simple backup scheme you just schedule when and how often to back up data and set the retention rule At the first time a full backup will be created The next backups will be incremental To set up the simple backup scheme
202. ar hardware or a virtual machine A Windows system can be brought online in seconds while it is still being recovered Using the proprietary Acronis Active Restore p 55 technology Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 will boot the machine into the operating system found in the backup as if the system were on the physical disk The system becomes operational and ready to provide necessary services Thus the system downtime will be minimal A dynamic volume can be recovered over an existing volume to unallocated space of a disk group or to unallocated space of a basic disk To learn more about recovering dynamic volumes please turn to the Microsoft LDM Dynamic volumes p 42 section Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows has the ability to recover a disk volume backup to a new virtual machine of any of the following types VMware Workstation Microsoft Virtual PC Parallels Workstation or Citrix XenServer virtual appliance The virtual appliance can then be imported to XenServer The VMware Workstation machine can be converted to the open virtualization format OVF using the VMware OVF tool With Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Hyper V or Agent for ESX ESXi you can create a new virtual machine on the respective virtualization server You might need to prepare target disks before recovery Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 includes a handy disk management utility which enables you to create or delete volumes change a d
203. are also granted access to the registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Acronis called Acronis registry key with the following rights Query Value Set Value Create Subkey Enumerate Subkeys Notify Delete and Read Control In addition there are two Acronis services which run under a system account The Acronis Scheduler2 Service provides scheduling for Acronis components tasks It runs under the Local System account and cannot run under a different account The Acronis Remote Agent Service provides connectivity among Acronis components It runs under the Network Service account and cannot run under a different account 2 14 8 Communication between Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components This section describes how Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components communicate with each other using secure authentication and encryption This section also provides information on configuring communication settings selecting a network port for communication and managing security certificates Secure communication Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 provides the capability to secure the data transferred between its components within a local area network and through a perimeter network also known as demilitarized zone DMZ There are two mechanisms which ensure secure communication between Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components Secure authentication provides secure transfer of certificates needed to establish a connection
204. ariables that reflect the policy name and the name of the machine that will be backed up You can add suffixes to the name but never delete variables since each virtual machine has to have a distinct and unique name Folder on VMware vCenter If the management server is integrated with vCenter Server the resultant virtual machines will appear in the Acronis Backups folder on the vCenter You can specify a subfolder for the machines resulting from execution of the policy After you have performed all the required steps click OK to create the backup policy Teal Policy credentials Provide the credentials under which the centralized tasks will run on the machines To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Use Acronis service credentials The tasks will run under the Acronis service account whether started manually or executed on schedule Use the following credentials The tasks will run under the credentials you specify whether started manually or executed on schedule Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account 2 Click OK To learn more about Acronis service credentials see the Rights for Acronis services p 81 section To learn more about operations available depending on the user privileges see the User privileges on a managed machine p 30 secti
205. as a cumulative deployment state and a cumulative status The cumulative state of a backup policy To see this parameter select Backup policies in the tree The Deployment state column displays the cumulative deployment state for each policy This state is defined as a combination of deployment states of the policy on all machines the policy is applied to directly or through inheritance If the policy is currently not applied to any machine it does not have a deployment state and the column shows Not applied For example you applied the policy to machine A The policy was successfully deployed Then you modify the policy and immediately apply it to the group consisting of machines B and C The policy has to be updated on A and deployed to B and C While the processes take place the policy s cumulative state may look like Updating Deploying then change to Updating Deployed or Deployed Deploying and will normally end up with Deployed The cumulative status of a backup policy To see this parameter select Backup policies in the tree The Status column displays the cumulative status for each policy This status is defined as the most severe status of the policy on all machines the policy is applied to If the policy is not applied to any machine its status is OK 2 14 6 Deduplication This section describes deduplication a mechanism designed to eliminate data repetition by storing identical data in archives only once Ov
206. as well as incremental p 375 and differential backups p 371 Backups belonging to the same archive are always stored in the same location Multiple backup plans can back up the same source to the same archive but the mainstream scenario is one plan one archive Backups in an archive are entirely managed by the backup plan Manual operations with archives validation p 379 viewing contents mounting and deleting backups should be performed using Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Do not modify your archives using non Acronis tools such as Windows Explorer or third party file managers Backup operation An operation that creates a copy of the data that exists on a machine s p 375 hard disk for the purpose of recovering or reverting the data to a specified date and time Backup options Configuration parameters of a backup operation p 367 such as pre post backup commands maximum network bandwidth allotted for the backup stream or data compression level Backup options are a part of a backup plan p 368 Backup plan Plan A set of rules that specify how the given data will be protected on a given machine A backup plan specifies what data to back up where to store the backup archive p 367 the backup archive name and location the backup scheme p 369 that includes the backup schedule and optionally the retention rules optionally the archive validation rules p 379 the backup options p
207. ase All the below analyzed examples are a simplistic approach to a real case but provide you with a general conception of backup distribution onto tapes Legend for the case example figures Any daily incremental backup 16 GB is shown in the figures as a green rectangle m Weekly differential backups 40 GB are displayed as a blue rectangle MM Any full monthly backup 320 GB is drawn in orange ESS SSS A whole tape 400 GB is drawn as a gray rectangle E Using the Grandfather Father Son tape rotation scheme Tape rotation for the GFS backup scheme is substantially defined by the tape options specified for the backup policy plan to be created Assume the GFS settings are the following Start backup at 11 00 00 PM Back up on Workdays Weekly Monthly Friday Keep backups Daily 2 weeks Weekly 2 months Monthly 1 year The main goal is to achieve full automation of tape rotation for these settings Keep in mind that a monthly backup is full a weekly backup is differential and a daily backup is incremental in this implementation of the GFS scheme The first backup is always full So if the backup policy plan starts on Wednesday and full backups should be created on every fourth Friday on Wednesday the first backup will be full instead of an incremental one There are analyzed examples showing how the GFS scheme can be combined with different tape options in the following sections GFS Example 1 p
208. ata from an incremental backup L Local backup plan A backup plan p 368 created on a managed machine p 375 using direct management p 371 Local task A task p 378 belonging to a local backup plan p 375 or a task that does not belong to any plan such as a recovery task A local task belonging to a backup plan can be modified by editing the plan only other local tasks can be modified directly M Machine A physical or virtual computer uniquely identified by an operating system installation Machines with multiple operating systems multi boot systems are considered as multiple machines Managed machine A machine p 375 either physical or virtual where at least one Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent p 366 is installed Managed vault A centralized vault p 370 managed by a storage node p 377 Archives p 367 in a managed vault can be accessed as follows bsp node_address vault_name archive_name Physically managed vaults can reside on a network share SAN NAS on a hard drive local to the storage node or on a tape library locally attached to the storage node The storage node performs storage node side cleanup p 377 and storage node side validation p 378 for each archive stored in the managed vault An administrator can specify additional operations that the storage node will perform deduplication p 371 encryption Any managed vault is self contained that is contains all metada
209. atabase This database contains a list of vaults that are managed by the storage node other than tape vaults see the next parameter Its typical size does not exceed a few kilobytes Possible values Any string 0 to 32765 characters long Default value C Program Files Acronis StorageNode Registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Acronis ASN Configuration StorageNode DatabasePath TapesDatabasePath Description Specifies the folder where Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node stores its tape vaults database This database contains a list of tape vaults that are managed by the storage node Its size depends on the number of archives stored in the tape libraries and approximately equals 10 MB per hundred archives Possible values Any string 0 to 32765 characters long Default value C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Acronis BackupAndRecovery TapeLocation Registry key HKLM SOFTWARE Acronis BackupAndRecovery TapeLocation TapesDatabasePath 7 3 Creating a backup policy A backup policy can be applied to both Windows and Linux machines To create a backup policy perform the following steps General Policy name Optional Enter a unique name for the backup policy A conscious name lets you identify the policy among the others Source type Select the type of items to back up Disk volumes or Files Policy credentials p 348 Optional You can change the policy account credentials if necessary T
210. ate the list of groups from the management server with the most recent information Though the list of groups is refreshed automatically based on events the data may not be retrieved immediately from the management server due to some latency Manual Refresh guarantees that the most recent data is displayed Creating a custom static or dynamic group To create a group 1 Inthe Group name field enter a name for the group being created 2 Choose the type of group a Static to create a group that will contain machines added manually b Dynamic to create a group that will contain machines added automatically according to the specified criteria Click the Add criteria and select the criterion pattern Operating system All the machines running the selected operating system will be members of the dynamic group Organizational unit p 305 All the machines belonging to the specified organizational unit OU will be members of the dynamic group P address range All the machines whose IP addresses are within the specified IP range will be members of the dynamic group Listed in txt csv file p 306 All the machines that are listed in the specified txt or csv file will be members of the dynamic group 3 Inthe Comments field enter a description of the created group 4 Click OK Adding multiple criteria Adding multiple criteria forms a condition according to the following rules a All the entries of the sa
211. ault appears in the Personal group of the vaults tree Merging and moving personal vaults What if need to move the existing vault from a one place to another Proceed as follows 1 Make sure that none of the backup plans uses the existing vault while moving files or temporarily disable p 190 schedules of the given plans 2 Move the vault folder with all its archives to a new place manually by means of a third party file manager 3 Create a new vault 4 Edit the backup plans and tasks redirect their destination to the new vault 5 Delete the old vault How can I merge two vaults Suppose you have two vaults A and B in use Both vaults are used by backup plans You decide to leave only vault B moving all the archives from vault A there To do this proceed as follows 1 Make sure that none of the backup plans uses vault A while merging or temporarily disable p 190 schedules of the given plans Move the archives to vault B manually by means of a third party file manager Edit the backup plans that use vault A redirect their destination to vault B In the vaults tree select vault B to check whether the archives are displayed If not click Refresh OTP w Delete vault A 4 3 Common operations 4 3 1 Operations with archives stored in a vault To perform any operation with an archive you have to select it first If the archive is protected with a password you will be asked to provide it All the operations
212. aults that reside on shared storages only Refresh a vault s Click s Refresh information While you are reviewing the vault content archives can be added to the vault deleted or modified Click Refresh to update the vault information with the most recent changes Actions on a tape library on a managed vault Define tape labels and click A Manage tapes perform inventorying of a tape library on a managed vault In the Tape Management window define labels for tapes and refresh the inventory For more details see the Managing tape library p 141 section Rescan tapes in a click 8 Rescan tapes managed vaults Rescan reads information about the content of user selected tapes and updates the storage node database This operation is described in depth in the Rescan p 142 section Creating a managed centralized vault To create a managed centralized vault perform the following steps Vault Name Specify a unique name for the vault Creation of two centralized vaults with the same name is prohibited Comments Optional Enter the distinctive description of the vault being created Type Select the Managed type Storage node Select the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node that will manage the vault You may need to enter access credentials for the storage node Path p 133 Specify where the vault will be created Managed centralized vaults can reside on a network share SAN NAS or on a hard drive l
213. available 1 Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Express that comes with the installation package and installs on the same machine In this case an SQL server instance with three databases will be created on the machine 2 Microsoft SQL Server 2008 any edition previously installed on any machine 3 Microsoft SQL Server 2005 any edition previously installed on any machine VMware vCenter integration This feature provides the capability to view virtual machines managed by a VMware vCenter Server in the management server GUI view the backup status of these machines in the vCenter and automatically register virtual machines created by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 in the vCenter Integration is available in all Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 advanced editions a license for Virtual Edition is not required No software installation is required on the vCenter Server This feature also enables automatic deployment and configuration of Agent for ESX ESXi to any ESX ESXi server that is not necessarily managed by the vCenter Storage Node Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node is a server aimed to optimize usage of various resources such as the corporate storage capacity the network bandwidth or the managed machines CPU load required for the enterprise data protection This goal is achieved through organizing and managing the locations that serve as dedicated storages of the enterprise backup archives managed vaults The storage
214. aving downloaded one or more updates and scheduled their installation the Microsoft Windows Vista operating system records an event with the event source Microsoft Windows WindowsUpdateClient and event number 18 into the System log the type of this event is Information When creating the plan type or select the following in the Schedule area Log name System Event source Microsoft Windows WindowsUpdateClient Event type Information Event ID 18 Tip To set up a similar backup plan for machines running Microsoft Windows XP replace the text in Event source with Windows Update Agent and leave the remaining fields the same How to view events in Event viewer To open a log in Event Viewer 1 Onthe Desktop or in the Start menu right click My Computer and then click Manage 2 Inthe Computer Management console expand System Tools and then expand Event Viewer 3 In Event Viewer click the name of a log that you want to view for example Application Note To be able to open the security log Security you must be a member of the Administrators group To view properties of an event including the event source and event number 1 In Event Viewer click the name of a log that you want to view for example Application Note To be able to open the security log Security you must be a member of the Administrators group 2 Inthe list of events in the right pane double click the name of an event whose p
215. ays run under the credentials you specify whether started manually or executed on schedule Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account 2 Click OK To learn more about operations available depending on the user privileges see the Users privileges ona managed machine p 30 section G23 Source type Select the type of data you want to be backed up on the managed machine The list of available data types depends on the agents running on the machine Files Available if the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows or for Linux is installed Select this option to back up specific files and folders If you are not concerned about recovery of the operating system along with all the settings and applications but plan to keep safe only certain data the current project for example choose file backup This will reduce the archive size thus saving storage space Disks volumes Available if the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows or for Linux is installed Select this option to back up disks and or volumes To be able to back up disks or volumes you must have Administrator or Backup operator privileges Backing up disks and volumes enables you to recover the entire system in case of severe data damage or hardware failure The backup procedure is faster t
216. base is stored on a large capacity physical disk added to the same machine You will be able to use different backup strategies for the virtual disk and the physical storage 6 2 4 Items to back up The items to backup depend on the source type p 198 selected previously Selecting disks and volumes To specify disks volumes to back up 1 Select the check boxes for the disks and or volumes to back up You can select a random set of disks and volumes If your operating system and its loader reside on different volumes always include both volumes in the backup The volumes must also be recovered together otherwise there is a high risk that the operating system will not start 2 Optional To create an exact copy of a disk or volume on a physical level select the Back up sector by sector check box The resulting backup will be equal in size to the disk being backed up if the Compression level option is set to None Use the sector by sector backup for backing up drives with unrecognized or unsupported file systems and other proprietary data formats 3 Click OK What does a disk or volume backup store For supported file systems with the sector by sector option turned off a disk or volume backup stores only those sectors that contain data This reduces the resulting backup size and speeds up the backup and recovery operations Windows The swap file pagefile sys and the file that keeps the RAM content when the machin
217. bled If this check box is cleared the task will be run for an indefinite number of weeks Advanced scheduling settings p 174 are available only for machines registered on Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server To specify these settings click Change in the Advanced settings area All the settings you made are displayed in the Result field at the bottom of the window Examples One day in the week schedule Run the task every Friday at 10PM starting from a certain date say 05 14 2009 and ending after six months The schedule s parameters are thus set up as follows 1 Every 1 week s on Fri 2 Once at 10 00 00 PM 3 Effective From 05 13 2009 The task will be started on the nearest Friday at 10 PM To 11 13 2009 The task will be performed for the last time on this date but the task itself will still be available in the Tasks view after this date If this date were not a Friday the task would be last performed on the last Friday preceding this date This schedule is widely used when creating a custom backup scheme The One day in the week like schedule is added to the full backups while the incremental backups are scheduled to be performed on workdays For more details see the Full and incremental backups plus cleanup example in the Custom backup scheme p 210 section Workdays schedule Run the task every week on workdays from Monday through Friday During a workday the task starts only once
218. by using the Secure Sockets Layer SSL protocol Encrypted communication provides secure transfer of information between any two components for example between Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent and Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node by encrypting the data being transferred For instructions on how to set up secure authentication and data encryption settings see Configuring communication options p 83 For instructions on how to manage SSL certificates used for secure authentication see SSL certificates p 86 Note The components of earlier Acronis products including those of the Acronis True Image Echo family cannot connect to the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components regardless of the secure authentication and data encryption settings Client and server applications There are two stakeholders of the secure communication process Client application or client is an application that tries to establish connection Server application or server is an application to which the client tries to connect For example if Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Console is connecting to Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent on a remote machine the former is the client and the latter is the server An Acronis component can act as a client application a server application or both as shown in the following table Component name Can be Can be client server Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Y
219. cannot be taken the backup will fail Create a snapshot if it is possible Back up files directly if taking a snapshot is not possible Do not create a snapshot Always back up files directly Administrator or Backup Operator privileges are not required Trying to back up files that are opened for exclusive access will result in a read error Files in the backup may be not time consistent Multi volume snapshot This option is effective only for Windows operating systems This option applies to disk level backup This option also applies to file level backup when the file level backup is performed by taking a snapshot The File level backup snapshot p 104 option determines whether a snapshot will be taken during file level backup The option determines whether to take snapshots of multiple volumes at the same time or one by one The preset is Enable When this option is set to Enable snapshots of all volumes being backed up will be created simultaneously Use this option to create a time consistent backup of data spanned across multiple volumes for instance for an Oracle database When this option is set to Disable the volumes snapshots will be taken one after the other As a result if the data spans across several volumes the resulting backup may be not consistent Volume Shadow Copy Service This option is effective only for Windows operating systems The option defines whether a Volume Shadow Copy Service VSS
220. ces 2 dev sd cd 1 For detailed information about recovering software RAID arrays in Linux and bootable media see Recovering MD devices Linux p 233 and Recovering MD devices and logical volumes p 263 respectively Hardware RAID arrays Hardware RAID arrays under Linux combine several physical drives to create a single partitionable disk The special file related to a hardware RAID array is usually located in dev ataraid You can back up hardware RAID arrays in the same way as ordinary hard disks Physical drives that are part of hardware RAID arrays may be listed alongside other disks as if they had a bad partition table or no partition table at all Backing up such disks does not make sense as it won t be possible to recover them 2 11 Backing up virtual machines Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Advanced Server Virtual Edition allows for backing up virtual machines from the host Preparation On Windows 2008 Server x64 any edition or Microsoft Hyper V Server 2008 Install the Agent for Hyper V on the Hyper V host Integration services p 49 have to be installed on the guest systems On VMware ESX ESXi Install the Agent for ESX ESXi on the ESX or ESXi host The agent is delivered as a virtual appliance VMware Tools p 49 have to be installed on the guest systems Virtual machines backup Once the agent is installed on the host and the required services are installed on the guests you can back up a virtu
221. ch differential backup The preset is Disabled When this option is enabled each differential backup will be written onto a free tape This option is available only when using free tape for each full backup is selected For each incremental backup The preset is Disabled When this option is enabled each incremental backup will be written onto a free tape This option is available only when using free tape for each full and differential backup is selected Additional settings Specify the additional settings for the backup operation by selecting or clearing the following check boxes Overwrite data on a tape without prompting for user confirmation This option is effective only when backing up to a tape device The preset is Disabled When starting backup to a non empty tape in a locally attached tape device the program will warn that you are about to lose data on the tape To disable this warning select this check box Dismount media after backup has finished This option is effective in Windows and Linux operating systems This option is effective when backing up to a removable media CD DVD tape or floppy disk The preset is Disabled The destination CD DVD can be ejected or the tape can be dismounted after the backup is completed Ask for the first media while backing up to removable media This option is effective only when backing up to removable media The option defines whether to display the Insert First Me
222. cheduled in fact tasks are not created at all If you need to repeat the operation configure it from scratch 7 The log lifetime is limited to the current session You can save the entire log or the filtered log entries to a file 8 Centralized vaults are not displayed in the folder tree of the Archive window To access a managed vault type the following string in the Path field bsp node_address vault_name To access an unmanaged centralized vault type the full path to the vault s folder After entering access credentials you will see a list of archives located in the vault Setting up a display mode For a machine booted from media a display video mode is detected automatically based on the hardware configuration monitor and graphics card specifications If for some reason the video mode is detected incorrectly do the following 1 Inthe boot menu press F11 2 Add to the command prompt the following command vga ask and then proceed with booting 3 From the list of supported video modes choose the appropriate one by typing its number for example 318 and then press ENTER If you do not wish to follow this procedure every time you boot from media on a given hardware configuration re create the bootable media with the appropriate mode number in our example vga 0x318 typed in the Kernel parameters window see the Bootable Media Builder p 254 section for details Configuring iSCSI and NDAS devices This sec
223. chine to be synchronized waits for an available worker For this reason the actual number of workers will never exceed the maximum number of connections see Maximum Connections described previously Period in seconds Description Specifies how often in seconds to perform synchronization for machines that have a normal synchronization priority typically the machines without currently running centralized backup tasks Possible values Any integer number between 120 and 2147483647 Default value 120 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server tries to perform synchronization for each normal priority machine once in the number of seconds given by Period by using an available worker thread see Maximum Workers described previously If there are fewer worker threads than normal priority machines the actual interval between synchronizations may be longer than the value of this parameter Period High Priority in seconds Description Specifies how often in seconds to perform synchronization for machines that have a high synchronization priority typically the machines with currently running centralized backup tasks Possible values Any integer number between 15 and 2147483647 Default value 15 This parameter is analogous to the Period parameter described previously Real Time Monitoring Description Specifies whether to perform real time monitoring of registered machines instead of using a polling mechanism Possible values
224. chines to the management server later using their names or IP addresses Install Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for ESX ESXi Agent ESX on the ESX server 4 to back up the virtual machines from the host The agent is delivered as a virtual appliance 5 Install Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node ASN on one of the Windows servers 9 The storage node enables you to organize the infrastructure for storing backup archives and to use the deduplication functionality The node can be installed together with the management server if the host is capable enough When installing the storage node register it on the management server in the same way as you register the agents Installation tips Both AMS and ASN can be installed on a workstation operating system as well There can be multiple storage nodes on the network Each of the nodes can manage up to 20 local or remote vaults Multiple Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components can be installed on a machine with a single installation procedure Inan Active Directory domain you can deploy the components using the Group Policy Setting up the storage node Before using the storage node make sure that all users that will back up to the node s vaults have Windows accounts on the node If the node is included in an Active Directory domain all the domain users will be able to back up to the node and all the domain administrators will become node administrato
225. chive Validation of a file backup imitates recovery of all files from the backup to a dummy destination Validation of a volume backup calculates a checksum for every data block saved in the backup Validation of the archive will validate all the archive s backups and may take a long time and a lot of system resources 3 Validation schedule appears only if you have selected the on schedule in step 1 set the schedule of validation For more information see the Scheduling p 165 section Glossary A Acronis Active Restore The Acronis proprietary technology that brings a system online immediately after the system recovery is started The system boots from the backup p 372 and the machine becomes operational and ready to provide necessary services The data required to serve incoming requests is recovered with the highest priority everything else is recovered in the background Limitations the backup must be located on the local drive any device available through the BIOS except for network boot does not work with Linux images Acronis Plug in for WinPE A modification of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows that can run in the preinstallation environment The plug in can be added to a WinPE p 379 image using Bootable Media Builder The resulting bootable media p 369 can be used to boot any PC compatible machine and perform with certain limitations most of the direct management p 371 operations with
226. ck the Error hyperlink to see the log entry of the latest occurred error Select the policy and click View tasks Check the tasks that have Failed as their last result select a task and then click View log Select a log entry and then click View details This approach comes in handy if the policy state is Deployed that is the policies tasks already exist on the managed machines Select the policy and click View log Check the error log entries to find out the reason of the failure select a log entry and then click View details This approach comes in handy if the policy has errors while being deployed revoked or updated In the Tasks view apply the Last result gt Failed filter if there are too many tasks You can also sort the failed tasks by backup plans or by machines In the Log view apply the Error filter if there are too many log entries You can also sort the error entries by backup plans managed entities or machines 2 Once the reason of the failure is clear do one or more of the following Remove the reason of the failure After that you may want to start the failed task manually to maintain the backup scheme consistency for example if the policy uses the GFS or Tower of Hanoi backup scheme Edit the backup policy to prevent future failure Use the Activities section of the Dashboard to quickly access the error log entries What to do if a policy has the Warning status 1 To find
227. ck the Next button you will proceed to the next page Set the volume options p 279 Set the volume options On the next wizard page you can assign the volume Letter by default the first free letter of the alphabet and optionally a Label by default none Here you will also specify the File system and the Cluster size The wizard will prompt you to choose one of the Windows file systems FAT16 disabled if the volume size has been set at more than 2 GB FAT32 disabled if the volume size has been set at more than 2 TB NTFS or to leave the volume Unformatted In setting the cluster size you can choose between any number in the preset amount for each file system Note the program suggests the cluster size best suited to the volume with the chosen file system If you are creating a basic volume which can be made into a system volume this page will be different giving you the opportunity to select the volume Type Primary Active Primary or Logical Typically Primary is selected to install an operating system to a volume Select the Active default value if you want to install an operating system on this volume to boot at machine startup If the Primary button is not selected the Active option will be inactive If the volume is intended for data storage select Logical A Basic disk can contain up to four primary volumes If they already exist the disk will have to be converted into dynamic otherwise or Active and
228. ckup Here is the total schedule marked out according to the selection D stands for the backup that is considered Daily W stands for the backup that is considered Weekly M stands for the backup that is considered Monthly 2 oo fre fwe roa Fs san su to ruo fwe frou Fa fet su e ruo fwe fmu Fn Sat So Mo tue wo muf Fa set Total schedule D D D D W D DBD OD W D D DDW D D D D M The schedule marked out according to the GFS scheme Schedule Workdays at 8 00 PM Weekly Monthly Friday Acronis uses incremental and differential backups that help save storage space and optimize the cleanup so that consolidation is not needed In terms of backup methods weekly backup is differential Dif monthly backup is full F and daily backup is incremental I The first backup is always full The Weekly Monthly parameter splits the total schedule into daily weekly and monthly schedules Assume you select Friday for Weekly Monthly backup Here is the real schedule of the backup tasks that will be created D D D D W D D DDW D D DDW D D D D M Monthly SO Backup tasks created according to the GFS scheme by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Schedule Workdays at 8 00 PM Weekly Monthly Friday Keep backups Daily This step defines the retention rule for daily backups The cleanup task will run after each daily backup and delete all daily backups that are older than you specify Keep backups Weekl
229. ckup Incremental backup Storage space Maximal Medium Minimal Creation time Maximal Medium Minimal Recovery time Minimal Medium Maximal 2 5 GFS backup scheme This section covers implementation of the Grandfather Father Son GFS backup scheme in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 With this backup scheme you are not allowed to back up more often than once a day The scheme enables you to mark out the daily weekly and monthly cycles in your daily backup schedule and set the retention periods for the daily monthly and weekly backups The daily backups are referred to as sons weekly backups are referred to as fathers the longest lived monthly backups are called grandfathers GFS as a tape rotation scheme GFS was initially created and is often referred to as a tape rotation scheme Tape rotation schemes as such do not provide automation They just determine how many tapes you need to enable recovery with the desired resolution time interval between recovery points and roll back period m which tapes you should overwrite with the forthcoming backup Tape rotation schemes enable you to get by with the minimal number of cartridges and not to be buried in used tapes A lot of Internet sources describe varieties of the GFS tape rotation scheme You are free to use any of the varieties when backing up to a locally attached tape device GFS by Acronis With Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 you can easily set up a back
230. ckup in the Backup plans and tasks view the actions bar will be named as System backup actions and will have the set of actions typical to backup plans All actions can also be accessed in the respective menu items A menu item appears on the menu bar when you select an item in any of the navigation views ault 15 actions R wr validate Log R ER Delete view details Explore Ep Save selected to file archive 1 actions a B Create FFA Save all to file Validate B Create Acronis Secure Zone a Clear log MM Delete ii Refresh 5 Refresh Refresh Examples of Item name actions bars Actions Contains a list of common operations that can be performed on a managed machine or ona management server Always the same for all views Clicking the operation opens the respective action page see the Action pages p 15 section All the actions can also be accessed in the Actions menu Actions R Q Backup Recover W Validate Ba Create personal location GB Create 452 continue Actions R Mount image Create backup policy Q Manage mounted images Ss Add centralized location Actions bar on a managed machine and on a management server Tools Contains a list of the Acronis tools Always the same across all the program views All the tools can also be accessed in the Tools menu Tools R F Create bootable media Ea Install Acronis components Tools bar
231. click Run management console 3 On the toolbar click Actions and then click Start shell Alternatively you can press CTRL ALT F2 4 If necessary examine the structure of volumes which are stored in the archive by using the trueimagecmd utility Also you can use the trueimagemnt utility to mount one or more of these volumes as if they were regular volumes see Mounting backup volumes later in this topic 5 Create the volume structure according to that in the archive by using the mdadm utility for MD devices the Ivm utility for logical volumes or both Note Logical Volume Manager utilities such as pvcreate and vgcreate which are normally available in Linux are not included in the bootable media environment so you need to use the lvm utility with a corresponding commana lvm pvcreate lvm vgcreate etc 6 If you previously mounted the backup by using the trueimagemnt utility use this utility again to unmount the backup see Mounting backup volumes later in this topic 7 Return to the management console by pressing CTRL ALT F1 or by running the command bin product Do not reboot the machine at this point Otherwise you will have to create the volume structure again 8 Click Recover then specify the path to the archive and any other required parameters and then click OK Note This procedure does not work when connected to Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Bootable Agent remotely because the command
232. command command command If the Volume Shadow Copy Service p 105 option is enabled the commands execution and the Microsoft VSS actions will be sequenced as follows Before data capture commands gt VSS Suspend gt Data capture gt VSS Resume gt After data capture commands Using the pre post data capture commands you can suspend and resume a database or application that is not compatible with VSS As opposed to the Pre Post commands p 101 the pre post data capture commands will be executed before and after the data capture process which takes seconds while the entire backup procedure may take much longer depending on the amount of data to be backed up Therefore the database or application idle time will be minimal To specify pre post data capture commands 1 Enable pre post data capture commands execution by checking the following options Execute before the data capture 2 3 Execute after the data capture Do any of the following m Click Edit to specify a new command or a batch file Select the existing command or the batch file from the drop down list Click OK Pre data capture command To specify a command batch file to be executed before data capture 1 Inthe Command field type a command or browse to a batch file The program does not support interactive commands i e commands that require user input for example pause 2 Inthe Working directory field specify a path to a direct
233. converted to basic the group is discontinued though its name is kept in the above registry key In case a dynamic disk is created or connected again a disk group with an incremental name is created When moved to another machine a disk group is considered as foreign and cannot be used until imported into the existing disk group The import updates the configuration data on both the local and the foreign disks so that they form a single entity A foreign group is imported as is will have the original name if no disk group exists on the machine For more information about disk groups please refer to the following Microsoft knowledge base article 222189 Description of Disk Groups in Windows Disk Management http support microsoft com kb 222189 EN US Dynamic disk A hard disk managed by Logical Disk Manager LDM that is available in Windows starting with Windows 2000 LDM helps flexibly allocate volumes on a storage device for better fault tolerance better performance or larger volume size A dynamic disk can use either the master boot record MBR or GUID partition table GPT partition style In addition to MBR or GPT each dynamic disk has a hidden database where the LDM stores the dynamic volumes configuration Each dynamic disk holds the complete information about all dynamic volumes existing in the disk group which makes for better storage reliability The database occupies the last 1MB of an MBR disk On a GPT disk Windows c
234. cording to scheduled operations Use the Refresh button to refresh the list of archives 3 Click OK 6 3 3 Data type Choose what type of data to recover from the selected disk backup m Disks to recover disks Volumes to recover volumes Files to recover specific files and folders 6 3 4 Content selection The representation of this window depends on the type of data stored in the archive Disks volumes selection To select a backup and disks volumes to recover 1 Select one of the successive backups by its creation date and time Thus you can revert the disk data to a certain moment in time Specify the items to recover By default all items of the selected backup will be selected If you do not want to recover certain items just uncheck them To obtain information on a disk volume right click it and then click Information 2 Click OK Selecting an MBR You will usually select the disk s MBR if The operating system cannot boot The disk is new and does not have an MBR Recovering custom or non Windows boot loaders such as LILO and GRUB The disk geometry is different to that stored in the backup There are probably other times when you may need to recover the MBR but the above are the most common When recovering the MBR of one disk to another Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 recovers Track 0 which does not affect the target disk s partition table and partition layout Acronis Backup amp Reco
235. covering MD devices and logical volumes ccccccscesessesssssesesscsscsscsscecsscsessessesscsessesesesessessssseeaseesenees 263 6 10 65 Acronis PXE SEVE niren tassel castes e e aaee inven EEEN ev aver eee Beaten 267 6 11 Disk management 6 T1 T BASIE pretation S eccecivcaeccecc cacti cede ecsea sce ducssecacga vs tcneeedssecsecuecuuseuusdatsedlouadastssccdeesunseWievedertdestanesuedencevkesieeut es 269 6 11 2 Running Acronis Disk Director Lite ce ecessessesessesscsscsscsesssssessesscecsessesssesecsecsessesscseseeesessesaseaseaseesenees 269 6 11 3 Choosing the operating system for disk management cescsseeesesseseessesessseseeecescssseesessseseseeescereesees 270 6 114 Disk management VEW ecscsscscescccrssessscetsedssccecssevsessosessdsecsevensenssssvescdducescondsatvecunsetdursssoudeasssedhevsasarvedsteaties 270 oa a TEE DIE 907011 1e 1A AE E A A EAEE EENEN ENEA 271 6 116 Voume opera OS a ae a aa E E Ea E a A snes A P RE AE PAIAR EAA ink 276 6 1127 PENCING OPSraviOns e E E E A A EEA EE AR 283 6 12 Collecting system informatio Me eA E a EE EE r De AA E E ARA aaea 283 Centralized management vcvccves ciccccceecsddvenssercucessiccvcevececseseccensetsccsscsveccessessedssbeseccseuveccensesveds 284 7 1 Administering Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Servel ssssccccccseessessnaeees 284 7 1 1 Dashboard oa a a a A E A T E E A EA 284 7 1 2 B ckup POCIE a r a a a a a cot aac ohtUe meets es ncasd ne eees 286 7 1 3 Phy
236. creating bootable media p 369 There are two media builder distributions for installation on Windows and installation on Linux The media builder that installs on Windows can create bootable media based on either Windows Preinstallation Environment or Linux kernel The Universal Restore p 17 add on enables you to create bootable media with the restore to dissimilar hardware functionality Universal Restore handles differences in devices that are critical for Windows start up such as storage controllers motherboard or chipset The media builder that installs on Linux creates bootable media based on Linux kernel The Deduplication p 18 add on enables you to create bootable media with the back up to a deduplicating vault functionality This add on can be installed to either of the media builder distributions L37 Acronis Wake On LAN Proxy Acronis Wake On LAN Proxy enables Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server to wake up for backup machines located in another subnet Acronis Wake On LAN Proxy installs on any server in the subnet where the machines to be backed up are located 1 4 Supported file systems Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 can back up and recover the following file systems with the following limitations FAT16 32 NTFS Ext2 Ext3 ReiserFS3 particular files cannot be recovered from disk backups located on Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node ReiserFS4 volume recovery without the v
237. cryption select one of the following Enabled Data transfer will be encrypted if encryption is enabled on the server application otherwise it will be unencrypted Disabled Encryption is disabled any connection to a server application which requires encryption will not be established Required Data transfer will be performed only if encryption is enabled on the server application see Server Encryption options it will be encrypted Authentication parameters Selecting the Trust self signed certificates check box allows the client to connect to the server applications that use self signed SSL certificates such as certificates created during the installation of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components see SSL certificates p 86 You should keep this check box selected unless you have a Public Key Infrastructure PKI in your environment In Use Agent Certificate Authentication select one of the following Do not use The use of SSL certificates is disabled Any connection to a server application which requires the use of SSL certificates will not be established Use if possible The use of SSL certificates is enabled The client will use SSL certificates if their use is enabled on the server application and will not use them otherwise Always use The use of SSL certificates is enabled The connection will be established only if the use of SSL certificates is enabled on the server application Disabled The s
238. cssssssssecececessssesnsseeeeeceseesesaeseeeescesseseaaeseeeesseesesaaeees 6 74 TakiCredenitial Sisiveccccssczcsccsccsccacscescddvsactsscetssdsiecsesktsstoreaesdssuddevausetasiesesr E R a a PTA E E SAE AEE E T E EAA AAE EEEE A 6 7 3 721e Ao EIE Ee a PAAA EAE E E 6 7 4 Access credentials for SOUrCe cccssescsscsscsscssessessssessesscsecssesessessessessessessesssssesesaueascssecesesosesesaesaesseeasersenees 6 7 5 LOCATION selecti Meronia a aa EE a a E E E Aaa e a E E 6 7 6 Access credentials for destination cccccecssessscsscssscssccsscsecseecsescsscsecsescsescsscsesceressscsecseeceresscsessnscetesssees 68 Acronis SE eUre AONO cces esis cri fesse Seceent cece tees wenlcs teadeteds a andes Cok A e E a EE 6 8 1 Creating Acronis Secure ZoNe manton naear aE Ee aA athe tedes Aa a AEEA SEA AKEE 6 8 2 Managing Acronis Secure Zone 6 9 Acronis Startup Recovery Manager ccccccccecececececececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeees 251 6 10 Bootable media 6 10 1 How to create bootable media 6 10 2 Connecting to a machine booted from media s sssssssssssesssssssresesesesesesrsrsraresesrsesrsranasesesesrasaesrsrsrsrsne 260 6 10 3 Working Under bootable Media cccesssesssssssesscsscsscsscsesssssecsesscsscsscsessessecsessessseseseseesseseessesassaesesenees 260 6 10 4 List of commands and utilities available in Linux based bootable Media cessceeseeeeetseeeteeeeeeeeeeees 262 6 10 5 Re
239. ctive Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account 2 Click OK According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer 6 3 6 Destination selection Specify the destination the selected data will be recovered to Disks Available disk destinations depend on the agents operating on the machine Recover to Physical machine Available when the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows or Agent for Linux is installed The selected disks will be recovered to the physical disks of the machine the console is connected to On selecting this you proceed to the regular disk mapping procedure described below New virtual machine p 224 If Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows is installed The selected disks will be recovered to a new virtual machine of any of the following types VMware Workstation Microsoft Virtual PC Parallels Workstation or Citrix XenServer virtual appliance The virtual machine files will be saved to the destination you specify If Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Hyper V or Agent for ESX ESXi is installed These agents enable creating a new virtual machine on the virtualization server you specify
240. ctivities 339 Report about the tasks 337 Report about the vaults statistics 339 Report view 340 Reporting 335 Rescan 136 143 145 162 Result confirmation 254 255 Retention rules 40 211 217 218 219 368 375 376 377 384 Rights for Acronis services 82 358 RSM Media Pools 140 141 Run backup plan 191 195 307 Running Acronis Disk Director Lite 275 S Scheduling 116 169 211 220 244 368 378 Secure communication 83 Select destination disks 284 285 Select the type of volume being created 284 285 Selecting a host that will perform conversion 202 203 220 358 Selecting a virtual machine s disks and volumes 206 Selecting disks and volumes 205 206 Selecting entire virtual machines 206 Selecting files and folders 205 Selecting source and target disks 278 Selection rule 70 381 390 Set active volume 282 287 Set the volume options 285 Set the volume size 285 286 Setting up a conversion schedule 202 220 358 Setting up a display mode 267 Setting up a machine to boot from PXE e 273 Setting up centralized data protection ina heterogeneous network 10 59 Setting up regular conversion to a virtual machine 220 Setting up SNMP services on the receiving machine 98 Simple scheme 211 368 SNMP notifications 93 97 101 112 123 128 Source files exclusion 100 102 Source type 197 201 203 204
241. cution on a managed machine To find out what a backup plan is currently doing on the machine check the backup plan execution state p 183 A backup plan state is a cumulative state of the plan s tasks The status of a backup plan p 183 helps you to estimate whether the data is successfully protected A task is a set of sequential actions to be performed on a machine when a certain time comes or certain event occurs To keep track of a task s current progress examine its state p 184 Check a task status p 185 to ascertain the result of a task Way of working Use filters to display the desired backup plans tasks in the backup plans table By default the table displays all the plans of the managed machine sorted by name You can also hide the unneeded columns and show the hidden ones See the Filtering and sorting backup plans and tasks p 189 section for details Inthe backup table select the backup plan task Use the toolbar s buttons to take an action on the selected plan task See the Actions on backup plans and tasks p 186 section for details You can run edit stop and delete the created plans and tasks Use the Information panel to review detailed information on the selected plan task The panel is collapsed by default To expand the panel click the Al chevron The content of the panel is also duplicated in the Plan details p 192 and Task details p 190 windows respectively Understanding state
242. d machine and so the options are considered machine specific To access the machine options connect the console to the managed machine and then select Options gt Machine options from the top menu Jal Machine management This option defines whether the machine has to be managed centrally by the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server To be able to use this option you must be logged on as a member of the Administrators group on the machine You have the opportunity to register the machine on the management server when installing an Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 agent If the machine is not registered selecting Centralized management here will initiate the registration p 377 Or you can add the machine to the management server on the server side Any of the three registration methods require the server administrator privileges Selecting Stand alone management on a registered machine will result in the machine stopping communication with the server On the management server the machine appears as Withdrawn The management server administrator can delete the machine from the server or register the machine once again The preset is Stand alone management To set up centralized management on the machine 1 Select Centralized management 2 Specify the Management Server IP Name 3 Specify the user name and password of the management server administrator on prompt 4 In the Machine s registration address select
243. d on the management server in case the storage node and the management server are installed on different machines if they are installed on the same machine simply recover that machine Consider the following scenario You have a machine with the management server and a machine with the storage node The storage node is registered on the management server You backed up the machine with the storage node earlier and have just recovered it either on the same machine or on a different machine Before using the recovered storage node follow these steps If you have recovered the storage node on the same machine and no centralized vaults managed by the storage node have been added or removed between the backup and recovery do nothing Otherwise do the following 1 Connect to the management server and remove the storage node from it Note All vaults managed by the storage node will also be removed from the management server No archives will be lost 2 Add the storage node to the management server again by specifiying the machine on which the recovered storage node is installed 3 Re create the necessary managed vaults 6 4 Validating vaults archives and backups Validation is an operation that checks the possibility of data recovery from a backup Validation of a file backup imitates recovery of all files from the backup to a dummy destination Validation of a disk or volume backup calculates a checksum for eve
244. d to the centralized log Errors only only errors will be recorded to the centralized log To disable collection of the log events clear the Collect logs check box 3 2 2 Log cleanup rules This option specifies how to clean up the centralized event log stored in the management server s reporting database This option defines the maximum size of the reporting database The preset is Maximum log size 1 GB On cleanup keep 95 of the maximum log size When the option is enabled the program compares the actual log size with the maximum size after every 100 log entries Once the maximum log size is exceeded the program deletes the oldest log entries You can select the amount of log entries to retain The default 95 setting will keep most of the log With the minimum 1 setting the log will be nearly cleared Even if you remove the log size limit logging events to an SQL Server Express database will stop after the log size reaches 4 GB because SQL Express Edition has the 4 GB per database limit Set the maximum log size to approximately 3 8 GB if you want to use the maximum capacity of the SQL Express database This parameter can also be set by using Acronis Administrative Template p 334 323 Event tracing You can configure the management server to log events in the Application Event Log of Windows besides the management server s own log You can configure the management server to send Simple Network Management Protoc
245. date and time of the backup creation or more precisely to the time when the creation has started In most cases the data will be reverted to that moment Examples of exceptions to this rule Recovering a database from a backup that contains the transaction log a single backup provides multiple recovery points and so you can make additional selections Recovering multiple files from a file backup taken without snapshot each file will be reverted to the moment when it was actually copied to the backup You also specify the destination where to recover the data You can customize the recovery operation using recovery options such as pre post recovery commands error handling or notification options The following diagram illustrates data recovery under the operating system online No backup can proceed on the machine while the recovery operation is taking place If required you can connect the console to another machine and configure a recovery operation on that machine This ability remote parallel recovery first appeared in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 the previous Acronis products do not provide it vA Lea Managed Machine Vault Archive 1 Backup o ON Backup Plan 1 Full backup P er Backup Plan 2 E Task 1 Full backup Bootable media Task2 F Backup 0 Differential backup oa I Backup 1 Restore task D Backup 3 Restore Data2 from l Backup 4 aiiin F Backup 5 Recovery us
246. day the only choice for weekly and monthly backups leaving no other date for daily backups The resulting Grandfather Father archive will hence consist only of weekly differential and monthly full backups Even though it is possible to use GFS to create such an archive the Custom scheme is more flexible in this situation Tower of Hanoi scheme At a glance Up to 16 levels of full differential and incremental backups Next level backups are twice as rare as previous level backups One backup of each level is stored at a time Higher density of more recent backups Parameters You can set up the following parameters of a Tower of Hanoi scheme Schedule Set up a daily p 166 weekly p 168 or monthly p 170 schedule Setting up schedule parameters allows creating simple schedules example of a simple daily schedule a backup task will be run every 1 day at 10 AM as well as more complex schedules example of a complex daily schedule a task will be run every 3 days starting from January 15 During the specified days the task will be repeated every 2 hours from 10 AM to 10 PM Thus complex schedules specify the sessions on which the scheme should run In the discussion below days can be replaced with scheduled sessions Number of levels Select from 2 to 16 backup levels See the example stated below for details Roll back period The guaranteed number of sessions that one can go back in the archive at any time
247. de warnings in the Dashboard Vault Free Space Warning Percentage Description Specifies the amount of free space in a managed vault as a percentage of its total size below which a warning is recorded in the storage node s log Possible values Any integer number between 0 and 100 Default value 10 The total size of a vault is the vault s free space plus the size of all archives that are contained in the vault For example suppose that two vaults Vault A and Vault B are both stored on a disk volume Suppose further that the size of the archives in Vault A is 20 GB and the size of the archives in Vault B is 45 GB If the volume has 5 GB of free space then the total size of Vault A is 20 GB 5 GB 25 GB and that of Vault B is 45 GB 5 GB 50 GB regardless of the size of the volume The percentage of free space in a vault is the vault s free space divided by the vault s total size In the previous example Vault A has 5 GB 25 GB 20 of free space and Vault B has 5 GB 50 GB 10 of free space When the percentage of free space in a vault is equal to the value in Vault Free Space Warning Percentage or less a warning is recorded in the storage node s log indicating the vault in question You can view storage node warnings in the Dashboard Note The parameters Vault Free Space Warning Limit and Vault Free Space Warning Percentage are independent of each other a warning will be recorded every time that either of the thr
248. ded especially for backing up the data The tape is marked with number 01 in the figure below In accordance with the legend described in the Case to analyze p 145 section the full data backup is displayed as an orange rectangle in the figure The specified GFS backup scheme settings force the data to be backed up on Workdays only so the next backup is created at the same time 11 00 PM on Monday 4th of January This backup is an incremental one 16 Gb that is written onto the same tape 01 because the Always use a free tape For each incremental backup option is cleared The backup is drawn as a green rectangle in the figure BICO o T The next three incremental backups are written onto tape 01 on 5th 6th and 7th of January As a result the free space on the tape is only 16 Gb at the moment On 8th of January the data differential backup 40 Gb is recorded onto the same tape 01 as the Always use a free tape For each differential backup option is cleared However the tape reached the end after the first 16 Gb of the backup is written Then the tape is dismounted and ejected from the drive into a slot by the loader Further a free tape is loaded into the same drive and mounted and then the backup last 24 Gb is continued onto the beginning of the new tape The next figure demonstrates the data backup archive at the moment The differential backup is drawn as a blue rectangle in the figure Number 1 in the green rectangle marks the increm
249. ded that you integrate p 310 the management server with your vCenter Server before starting the agent deployment You will not have to specify every host manually in this case To deploy Agent for ESX ESXi to VMware ESX ESXi servers 1 Inthe Navigation tree right click Virtual machines or right click the group that has the same name as the vCenter Server Click Deploy ESX agent ESX ESXi hosts For a vCenter Server a list of ESX ESXi hosts and clusters obtained from the vCenter Server will be displayed Select the hosts and clusters to deploy the agent to or check the Select all check box In a vCenter cluster a single Agent for ESX ESXi backs up virtual machines hosted on all the cluster s hosts For more information please see Support for vCenter clusters p 312 You can add a single host to the list by specifying its IP address or name Provide a user name and password for every host you add to the list A vCenter Server cannot be specified in this window When you select a host or cluster where the agent is already installed the right panel of the ESX Agent Deployment window displays Update ESX agent on this host Other settings are not available If you only need the update proceed directly to step 6 4 Optional The agents settings You can deploy Agents for ESX ESXi with default settings or specify custom settings for any agent The settings are as follows Datastore This is the datastore on the ESX ESXi
250. dedicated user accounts for the services the setup program will create the following user accounts For the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows service Acronis Agent User For the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server service AMS User For the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node service ASN User The newly created accounts are given the following privileges All three accounts are assigned the Log on as a service user right The Acronis Agent User user account is assigned the Adjust memory quotas for a process and Replace a process level token user rights The Acronis Agent User and ASN User user accounts are included in the Backup Operators group The setup program will assign the above listed user rights to any existing account you specify for a corresponding service If you choose to specify an existing user account for the agent service or the storage node service make sure that this account is a member of the Backup Operators group before proceeding with the installation If the machine is part of an Active Directory domain make sure that the domain s security policies do not prevent the accounts described in this section whether existing or newly created from having the above listed user rights Important After the installation do not specify a different user account for a component s service Otherwise the component may stop working The newly created user accounts
251. dent backups can be deleted as well For more information see Retention rules p 39 Resulting tasks Any custom scheme always produces three backup tasks and in case the retention rules are specified a cleanup task Each task is listed in the list of tasks either as Scheduled if the schedule has been set up or as Manual if the schedule has not been set up You can manually run any backup task or cleanup task at any time regardless of whether it has a schedule In the first of the previous examples we set up a schedule only for full backups However the scheme will still result in three backup tasks enabling you to manually start a backup of any type Full backup runs every Friday at 10 00 PM Incremental backup runs manually Differential backup runs manually You can run any of these backup tasks by selecting it from the list of tasks in the Backup plans and tasks section in the left pane If you have also specified the retention rules in your backup scheme the scheme will result in four tasks three backup tasks and one cleanup task 6 2 10 Archive validation Set up the validation task to check if the backed up data is recoverable If the backup could not pass the validation successfully the validation task fails and the backup plan gets the Error status To set up validation specify the following parameters 1 When to validate select when to perform the validation As the validation is a resource
252. dia prompt when backing up to removable media The preset is Enabled When the option is enabled backing up to removable media may be not possible if the user is away because the program will wait for someone to press OK in the prompt box Hence you should disable the prompt when scheduling a backup to removable media Then if the removable media is available for example a DVD is inserted the task can run unattended Reset archive bit The option is effective only for file level backup in Windows operating systems and in bootable media The preset is Disabled In Windows operating systems each file has the File is ready for archiving attribute available by selecting File gt Properties gt General gt Advanced gt Archive and Index attributes This attribute also known as the archive bit is set by the operating system each time the file is changed and can be reset by backup applications each time they include the file in a backup The archive bit value is used by various applications such as databases When the Reset archive bit check box is selected Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 will reset the archive bits of all files being backed up Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 itself does not use the archive bit value When performing incremental or differential backup it determines whether a file has changed by the file size and the date time when the file was last saved Restart the machine automatically after backup is
253. e management server machine and add the machine to AMS Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server has not been backed up for X day s Back up now less than 10 free space View vaults will take you to the Centralized vaults p 130 view where you can examine the vault size free space content and take the necessary steps to increase the free space To be able to recover an operating system when the machine fails to boot you must 1 Back up the system volume and the boot volume if it is different 2 Create at least one bootable media p 369 Create now will launch the Bootable Media Builder p 376 The Dashboard warns you that no data was backed up on some of the registered machines for a period of time To configure the length of time that is considered critical select Options gt Console options gt Time based alerts The Dashboard warns you that no connection was established between some of the registered machines and the management server for a period of time thus indicating that the machines might not be centrally managed Click View the machines to open the Machines view with the list of machines filtered by the Last connect field To configure the length of time that is considered critical select Options gt Console options gt Time based alerts Install Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows to back up the machine where the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Ser
254. e GFS Example 2 tape rotation scheme is more suitable for the case than GFS Example 1 The advantages of the GFS Example 2 tape rotation scheme for the analyzed case are the following it uses 16 tapes instead of 25 adata recovery task requires one 25 or two 75 tapes data recovery from a full backup requires only one tape that makes the data recovery from an incremental or differential backup faster GFS Example 3 Imagine the backup plan has the following tape options the Use a separate tape set option is selected the Always use a free tape For each full backup option is selected the Always use a free tape For each incremental backup option is selected the Always use a free tape For each differential backup option is selected These options define the tape rotation scheme that is classical for GFS The figure shows the beginning of the rotation scheme that uses 8 tapes for daily backups 6 tapes for weekly backups and 13 tapes for monthly backups since there are 13 four week cycles in a year for the analyzed case And one tape is required for the next backup In total this rotation scheme combined with the options requires 28 tapes To recover the data only one tape is required for a full backup two tapes for a differential backup and two or three tapes for an incremental backup This scheme has the following advantages access to any full backup requires only one tape backup deletion frees a tape
255. e a final warning about the dynamic disk being converted to basic You will be advised about the changes that will happen to the system if the chosen disk is converted from dynamic into basic E g if such a conversion will stop the disk from being accessed by the system the operating system will stop loading after such conversion or if the disk you want to convert to basic contains any volumes of the types that are only supported by dynamic disks all volume types except Simple volumes then you will be warned here about the possible damage to the data involved in the conversion Please note the operation is unavailable for a dynamic disk containing Spanned Striped or RAID 5 volumes 3 If you click OK in this warning window the conversion will be performed immediately After the conversion the last 8Mb of disk space is reserved for the future conversion of the disk from basic to dynamic In some cases the possible unallocated space and the proposed maximum volume size might differ e g when the size of one mirror establishes the size of the other mirror or the last 8Mb of disk space are reserved for the future conversion of the disk from basic to dynamic System disk conversion Acronis Disk Director Lite does not require an operating system reboot after dynamic to basic conversion of the disk if 1 There is a single Windows 2008 Vista operating system installed on the disk 2 The machine runs this operating system
256. e along with the new backup This option enables quick machine backup to the internal drive as an intermediate step before saving the ready backup on the network This comes in handy in cases of slow or busy networks and time consuming backup procedures Disconnection during the copy transfer will not affect the backup operation as opposed to backing up directly to the remote location Other advantages Replication enhances the archive reliability Roaming users can back up their portable computers to Acronis Secure Zone while on the road When the portable computer is connected to the corporate network all changes made to the archive will be transferred to its stationary copy after the first backup operation If you select the password protected Acronis Secure Zone as the primary destination keep in mind that the archive in the secondary destination will not be protected with a password To use Dual destination 1 Select the check box for Use dual destination 2 Browse to the secondary destination or enter the full path to the destination manually 3 Click OK You might have to provide the access credentials for the secondary destination Enter the credentials on prompt Task start conditions This option is effective in Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not available when operating under bootable media This option determines the program behavior in case a backup task is about to start the schedul
257. e and then run the update grub script otherwise the changes might not take effect About Windows loaders Windows NT 2000 XP 2003 A part of the loader resides in the partition boot sector the rest is in the files ntldr boot ini ntdetect com ntbootdd sys boot ini is a text file that contains the loader configuration Example boot loader timeout 30 default multi disk rdisk partition 1 WINDOWS operating systems multi disk rdisk partition 1 WINDOWS Microsoft Windows XP Professional noexecute optin fastdetect Windows Vista 2008 A part of the loader resides in the partition boot sector the rest is in the files bootmgr boot bcd At starting Windows boot bcd is mounted to the registry key HKLM BCDOOO00000 6 3 12 Recovering MD devices Linux In Linux when performing recovery from a disk backup to an existing MD device also called Linux Software RAID device make sure that this device is assembled at the time of recovery If the device is not assembled assemble it by using the mdadm utility Here are two examples Example 1 The following command assembles the device dev md0O combined of the volumes dev sdb1 and dev sdc1 mdadm assemble dev md ayes dev sdb1 sdc1 Example 2 The following command assembles the device dev md0O combined of the disks dev sdb and dev sdc mdadm assemble dev md ayes dev sdb dev sdc If recovering an MD device requires the machine to be rebooted us
258. e column headers presented in the table 2 Click the items you want to be displayed hidden Centralized log entry details Displays detailed information on the log entry you have selected and lets you copy the details to the clipboard To copy the details click the Copy to clipboard button Log entry data fields A centralized log entry contains the following data fields Type Type of event Error Warning Information Date Date and time when the event took place Policy The backup policy the event relates to if any Task The task the event relates to if any Managed entity type Type of managed entity where the event has occurred if any Managed entity The name of the managed entity where the event has occurred if any Machine The name of the machine where the event has occurred if any Code Blank or the program error code if the event type is error Error code is an integer number that may be used by Acronis support service to solve the problem Module Blank or the number of program module where an error was occurred It is an integer number that may be used by Acronis support service to solve the problem Owner User name of the policy backup plan owner p 31 Message The event text description The log entry s details that you copy will have the following appearance Log Entry Details Type Information Date and time DD
259. e for grouping applying backup policies and monitoring the activities related to data protection To estimate whether the data is successfully protected on a managed machine the management server administrator checks its status A machine s status is defined as the most severe status of all backup plans p 183 both local and centralized existing on the machine and all backup policies p 287 applied to the machine It can be OK Warnings or Errors Groups The management server administrator has the ability to group machines A machine can be a member of more than one group One or more nested groups can be created inside any group created by the administrator Grouping helps organize data protection by the company departments by the Active Directory domains or organizational units within a domain by various populations of users by the site locations etc The main goal of grouping is protection of multiple machines with one policy Once a machine appears in a group the policy applied to the group is applied to the machine and the new tasks are created by the policy on the machine Once a machine is removed from a group the policy applied to the group will be revoked from the machine and the tasks created by the policy will be removed Built in group a group that always exists on a management server The group cannot be deleted or renamed A built in group cannot include nested groups A backup policy can be applied to a built
260. e goes into hibernation hiberfil sys are not backed up After recovery the files will be re created in the appropriate place with the zero size A volume backup stores all other files and folders of the selected volume independent of their attributes including hidden and system files the boot record the file allocation table FAT if it exists the root and the zero track of the hard disk with the master boot record MBR The boot code of GPT volumes is not backed up A disk backup stores all volumes of the selected disk including hidden volumes such as the vendor s maintenance partitions and the zero track with the master boot record Linux A volume backup stores all files and folders of the selected volume independent of their attributes a boot record and the file system super block A disk backup stores all disk volumes as well as the zero track with the master boot record Selecting files and folders To select files and or folders for backing up 1 Expand the local folders tree items in order to view its nested folders and files 2 Select an item by checking the corresponding check box in the tree Selecting a check box for a folder means that all its content files and folders will be backed up That is also the case for new files that will appear there in the future A file based backup is not sufficient for recovery of the operating system In order to recover your operating system you have to perform a disk backup
261. e local node s drives Otherwise the archive storage will be backed up to itself 3 Apply the policy to the S_1 group Make sure that the policy has been successfully deployed to each of the servers The policy deployment state has to change from Deploying to Deployed and its status has to be OK To see the resulting backup plans on each of the servers a navigate to the All machines group or the S_1 group b select the server c select the Backup plans and tasks tab on the Information pane When you need and have the opportunity to back up any of the servers navigate to the backup plan as described above select the plan and run it Protecting the workstations Here is how to set up the most popular schedule weekly full backup and daily incremental backup of users default document folders In addition we will retain only backups from the last 7 days Create a policy that backs up All Profiles Folder to the managed vault on the storage node This will back up the folder where user profiles are located for example C Documents and Settings in Windows XP Choose the Custom backup scheme a Schedule full backup as follows Weekly Every 1 week on Sunday Execute the task once at 12 00 00 AM Advanced settings Wake on LAN On You may also want to distribute the backup start time within the time window to optimize the network usage and the storage node CPU load b Schedule incremental backup as follows Weekly Every 1 week on
262. e logical and will not be able to be used as a system volume If you plan to install an OS that does not support GPT disks the reverse conversion of the disk to MBR is also possible through the same menu items the name of the operation will be listed as Convert to MBR Dynamic disk conversion MBR to GPT Acronis Disk Director Lite does not support direct MBR to GPT conversion for dynamic disks However you can perform the following conversions to reach the goal using the program 1 MBR disk conversion dynamic to basic p 275 using the Convert to basic operation 2 Basic disk conversion MBR to GPT using the Convert to GPT operation 3 GPT disk conversion basic to dynamic p 274 using the Convert to dynamic operation Disk conversion GPT to MBR If you plan to install an OS that does not support GPT disks conversion of the GPT disk to MBR is possible the name of the operation will be listed as Convert to MBR If you need to convert a GPT disk to MBR 1 Select a GPT disk to convert to MBR 2 Right click on the selected volume and then click Convert to MBR in the context menu You will receive a warning window stating that you are about to convert GPT into MBR You will be explained the changes that will happen to the system after the chosen disk is converted from GPT to MBR E g if such conversion will stop a disk from being accessed by the system the operating system will stop loading after such conversion or some volu
263. e network becomes unavailable or not reachable the program will attempt to reach the destination every 30 seconds but no more than 5 times The attempts will be stopped as soon as the connection is resumed OR the specified number of attempts is performed depending on which comes first Ignore bad sectors The preset is Disabled When the option is disabled the program will display a pop up window each time it comes across a bad sector and ask for a user decision as to whether to continue or stop the backup procedure In order to back up the valid information on a rapidly dying disk enable ignoring bad sectors The rest of the data will be backed up and you will be able to mount the resulting disk backup and extract valid files to another disk Dual destination This option is effective for both Windows and Linux operating systems when the primary backup destination is a local folder or Acronis Secure Zone and the secondary destination is another local folder or network share Managed vaults and FTP servers are not supported as secondary destinations The preset is Disabled When dual destination is enabled the agent will automatically copy each backup being created locally to the secondary destination such as a network share Once the backup to the primary destination is completed the agent compares the updated archive contents to the secondary archive contents and copies to the secondary destination all backups that are missing ther
264. e or select BOOT Refers to the registered machine s boot volume The boot volume contains the Windows folder and the supporting files for the Windows operating system typically located in the Windows System32 folder It may or may not be the same as the system volume If multiple operating systems are installed on the computer this is the boot volume of the operating system in which the agent is working For more details see Note on Windows machines below All fixed volumes Type or select Fixed Volumes Refers to all volumes other than removable media Fixed volumes include volumes on SCSI ATAPI ATA SSA SAS and SATA devices and on RAID arrays Linux volumes First partition on the Type or select dev hdal hda1 is the standard device name for the first IDE hard disk of first partition of the first IDE hard disk a Linux machine drive For more details see Note on Linux machines below First partition on the Type or select dev sda1 sda1 is the standard device name for the first SCSI hard disk of first partition of the first SCSI hard disk a Linux machine drive For more details see Note on Linux machines below First partition on the Type or select dev md1 md1 is the standard device name for the first software RAID first partition of the first software RAID hard disk of a Linux drive For more details see Note on Linux machine machines below The names of templates are case sensitive N
265. e plan s deletion deletes all its tasks Why can t I delete the backup plan The backup plan is in the Running state A backup plan cannot be deleted if at least one of its tasks is running The backup plan has a centralized origin A centralized plan can be deleted by the management server administrator by revoking the backup policy that produced the plan Task Click XxX Delete Why can t I delete the task Refresh table Filtering and sorting Task belongs to a backup plan A task belonging to a backup plan cannot be deleted separately from the plan Edit the plan to remove the task or delete the entire plan Fa Click Refresh The management console will update the list of backup plans and tasks existing on the machine with the most recent information Though the list is refreshed automatically based on events the data may not be retrieved immediately from the managed machine due to some latency Manual refresh guarantees that the most recent data is displayed Filtering and sorting of the backup policies is performed in the same way as in the Backup plans and tasks view for direct management See the Filter and sort backup plans and tasks p 189 section for details Member of This tab appears only if the selected machine is added to one or more custom groups and displays a list of the groups the machine is a member of Operations To View details of a group View tasks related to a group View log
266. e required steps click OK to commit to attaching the vault This procedure may last for quite a while since the storage node has to scan the archives write the metadata in the database and deduplicate the archives if the vault was originally deduplicating 4 1 3 Tape libraries This section describes in detail how to use robotic tape devices as vaults for storing backup archives A tape library robotic library is a high capacity storage device that contains the following one or more tape drives multiple up to several thousand slots to hold tape cartridges one or more loaders robotic mechanisms intended for relocating the tape cartridges between the slots and the tape drives barcode readers optional Overview Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 provides full support of a tape library through Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node The storage node should be installed on the machine a tape library is attached to Storage node can simultaneously use more than one tape library for keeping archives To manage a tape library media the storage node uses the Windows Removable Storage Manager RSM See the RSM Media Pools p 137 section for more information A dedicated database of the storage node keeps information of the backup content written onto the tapes So some operations for example Cleanup p 370 can be performed quite fast without accessing the media It is possible to view the content of a backup archi
267. e storage device free space approaches zero you might need to toughen the restrictions for some or all archives residing in this vault 2 8 Backing up dynamic volumes Windows This section explains in brief how to back up and recover dynamic volumes p 374 using Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Basic disks that use the GUID Partition Table GPT are also discussed Dynamic volume is a volume located on dynamic disks p 372 or more exactly on a disk group p 372 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 supports the following dynamic volume types RAID levels simple spanned striped RAID 0 mirrored RAID 1 amirror of stripes RAID 0 1 RAID 5 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 can back up and recover dynamic volumes and with minor limitations basic GPT volumes Backing up dynamic volumes Dynamic and basic GPT volumes are backed up in the same way as basic MBR volumes When creating a backup plan through the GUI all types of volumes are available for selection as Items to back up When using the command line specify the dynamic and GPT volumes with the DYN prefix Command line examples trueimagecmd create partition DYN1 DYN2 asz This will back up DYN1 and DYN2 volumes to the Acronis Secure Zone trueimagecmd create harddisk DYN asz This will back up all dynamic volumes in the system to the Acronis Secure Zone The boot code on basic GPT volumes is not backed up or recovered Recovering dynamic volumes A
268. e the Creating a managed centralized vault p 132 section for more information But the simplest way is to create a vault from the Storage Nodes view In addition to that select the storage node the tape library is attached to and then click Create vault The Create centralized vault page will be displayed with the pre selected parameters All you need to do is to specify the vault Name before you click OK Once the vault is created it is accessible from the Centralized vaults view of the console Then the tape library can be used for backing up Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 allows creating only one vault per tape device If all cartridges in a tape library have barcodes and the RSM Free pool contains enough tapes for a chosen backup scheme the library is ready to fully work automatically You can start working with the vault even though all the tape library slots are empty If there are no available tapes in the tape library slots during the backup operation the Tasks Need Interaction window asks you to load a tape If the tape barcode cannot be read another Tasks Need Interaction window asks you to label a tape Actions on a tape library vault If a tape library vault is selected on the Navigation pane of the console the Centralized vaults page toolbar will contain the following two actions that are used for tape libraries only Manage tapes displays the Tape Management window allowing you to refresh information on the lib
269. e where the storage node is installed Availability Unknown this status is displayed until the first connection between the management server and the storage node is established after adding the storage node or starting the management server s service Online the storage node is available for the management server This means that the last management server s connection to the node was successful Connection is established every 2 minutes Offline the storage node is unavailable Withdrawn the storage node was registered on another management server As a result it is not possible to control the node from the current management server Archives the total number of archives stored in all the vaults managed by the storage node Backups the total number of backups stored within the archives in all the vaults managed by the storage node Vaults This tab displays a list of the vaults managed by the storage node To opena managed vault for detailed examination and to perform operations on it select the vault then click View vault on the tab s toolbar In the Centralized vault p 129 view perform the required actions Services This tab displays the compacting task scheduling parameters Service tasks This tab lets the management server administrator manage the compacting task and review its parameters Only one compacting task can exist on a storage node 7 1 6 Tasks The Tasks view lets you monitor
270. eGUIIN EP E A E OS E states sacccceadesccs essactetesadscceedssccsessaedeceatssdensssecsecs 165 5E Dailysched le anaa a eE A a A a E E A E A E a a 166 Sx Weekly schedule sartre a E a a Bethan aa a idan aene 168 5 3 Monthly Schedule ss e tinne e as e sack da ai ae asda shee sae iaaa a aaa a eed 170 5 4 At Windows Event Log event oee sack ccd corel ht ee a OAA a a aA E R a 172 55 Advanced scheduling settings eesin unie E a e AE aa eiaa 174 56 Conditions assasi aaia rea ENAA i EA AATAS A N Ei EIAN EAA AAS ETEA Ea AA EA 5 6 1 Users 1dl us eane e a A A A EE AA E eaea SE a 5 6 2 Location s host is available 5 6 3 Fits time intervalrsonenicariseiiicareneii iaiia iaten i Ee E E Eiaa 5 6 4 User logged offnen a e e a A A A 6 Direct management asser ssni nae Neri EENS AE Er EENIA EEEN NES EAER 6 1 Administering a managed machine 6 1 1 Dashboard se cscs csccevcantvcass cess cizcecncccescdsccetsscscdevausevssscesecidiecs cdsietaresiearictediaviieistedsesteuenseess 6 1 2 Backup plans and tasks 6 1 3 Eel AERAR sede casesceactassezscdas due E E sets aedosceglesevesaseantensatn T 6 2 Creating a backup plan 6 2 1 Why is the program asking for the password cccscescesesscssessesssscsscecsesseesscsesseecseceeseessesaeesseaeeaseasenees 197 6 2 2 Backup plan s credenitials anann naa R E E ES TEE EE E aa TE A E 6 2 3 S rce type oaan ei rE n i a a neria i aaa eaa ei a 6 2 4 items TO Dack UP er a A a EE Va Ea A E E EESE 6 2 5 Access cr
271. easy way to protect data on numerous machines p 375 using backup policies p 368 and grouping enterprise wide monitoring and reporting functionality the ability to create centralized vaults p 370 for storing enterprise backup archives p 367 the ability to manage storage nodes p 377 If there are multiple management servers on the network they operate independently manage different machines and use different centralized vaults for storing archives The management server s databases The management server uses three Microsoft SQL databases The configuration database that stores the list of registered machines and other configuration information including backup policies created by the administrator The synchronization database used for synchronization of the management server with registered machines and storage nodes This is a database with rapidly changing operational data The reporting database that stores the centralized log This database may grow large Its size depends on the logging level you set The configuration and synchronization databases should reside on the same Microsoft SQL Server called an operational server preferably installed on the same machine as the management server The reporting database can be configured on the same or different SQL server When installing a management server you can select for both operational and reporting servers what server to use The following options are
272. ecific needs leave them unchanged An archive can occupy several tapes In such cases a so called tape set is used for keeping the data backups Tape set is a logical group of one or more tapes which contain backups of the specific protected data A tape set can contain backups of other data as well Separate tape set is a tape set which contains only backups of the specific protected data Other backups cannot be written to a separate tape set For the backup policy plan to be created Use a separate tape set The preset is Disabled If you leave this option unchanged then the backups belonging to the policy or plan being created might be written onto tapes containing backups written by different backup policies and comprising of data from different machines Similarly backups from other policies might be written onto the tapes containing this policy s backups You will not have a problem with such tapes as the program manages all the tapes automatically When this option is enabled the backups belonging to the policy or plan being created will be located on a separate tape set Other backups will not be written to this tape set If the console is connected to the management server The Use a separate tape set option has more precise definitions So for the backup policy to be created you can use a separate tape set for all machines or for each single machine The A single tape set for all machines option is selected by defa
273. ecorded if Trace State is set to True SNMP Specifies the types of the management server s events to send notifications about by means of Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP This parameter contains the following settings Trace State Description Specifies whether to send the SNMP notifications Possible values True or False Default value False Trace Level Description Specifies the minimum level of severity of events for sending SNMP notifications about them Only notifications about events of levels greater than or equal to Trace Level will be sent Possible values 0 Internal event 1 Debugging information 2 Information 3 Warning 4 Error or 5 Critical error Default value 4 only errors and critical errors will be sent if Trace State is set to True SNMP Address Description Specifies the network name or IP address of the SNMP server Possible values Any string 0 to 32765 characters long Default value Empty string SNMP Community Description Specifies the community name for the SNMP notifications Possible values Any string 0 to 32765 characters long Default value public Synchronization Specifies how Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server connects to registered machines for deployment of centralized policies retrieval of logs and backup plan states and similar actions collectively called synchronization This parameter has the following settings Maximum Connections Descrip
274. ecovery 10 Acronis Startup Recovery Manager appears as deactivated regardless of its status before the upgrade You can activate Acronis Startup Recovery Manager again at any time 2 13 3 Universal Restore Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Universal Restore Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Universal Restore is the Acronis proprietary technology that helps recover and boot up Windows on dissimilar hardware or a virtual machine The Universal Restore handles differences in devices that are critical for the operating system start up such as storage controllers motherboard or chipset Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Universal Restore purpose A system can be easily recovered from a disk backup image onto the same system or to identical hardware However if you change a motherboard or use another processor version a likely possibility in case of hardware failure the recovered system could be unbootable An attempt to transfer the system to a new much more powerful computer will usually produce the same unbootable result because the new hardware is incompatible with the most critical drivers included in the image Using Microsoft System Preparation Tool Sysprep does not solve this problem because Sysprep permits installing drivers only for Plug and Play devices sound cards network adapters video cards etc As for system Hardware Abstraction Layer HAL and mass storage device drivers they must be identical on the source and the targ
275. ecovery 10 Universal Restore The Acronis proprietary technology that helps boot up Windows on dissimilar hardware or a virtual machine The Universal Restore handles differences in devices that are critical for the operating system start up such as storage controllers motherboard or chipset The Universal Restore is not available when the machine is booted with Acronis Startup Recovery Manager p 366 using F11 or the image being recovered is located in Acronis Secure Zone p 366 or when using Acronis Active Restore p 366 because these features are primarily meant for instant data recovery on the same machine Universal Restore is not available when recovering Linux Unmanaged vault Any vault p 379 that is not a managed vault p 375 V Validation An operation that checks the possibility of data recovery from a backup p 367 Validation of a file backup imitates recovery of all files from the backup to a dummy destination The previous product versions considered a file backup valid when the metadata contained in its header was consistent The current method is time consuming but much more reliable Validation of a volume backup calculates a checksum for every data block saved in the backup This procedure is also resource intensive While the successful validation means a high probability of successful recovery it does not check all factors that influence the recovery process If you back up the operating
276. ect the desired folder in the folders tree fthe archive is stored in a centralized vault expand the Centralized group and click the vault fthe archive is stored in a personal vault expand the Personal group and click the vault If the archive is stored in a local folder on the machine expand the Local folders group and click the required folder If the archive is located on removable media e g DVDs first insert the last DVD and then insert the discs in order starting from the first one when the program prompts f the archive is stored on a network share expand the Network folders group then select the required networked machine and then click the shared folder If the network share requires access credentials the program will ask for them Note for Linux users To specify a Common Internet File System CIFS network share which is mounted on a mount point such as mnt share select this mount point instead of the network share itself If the archive is stored on an FTP or SFTP server type the server name or address in the Path field as follows ftp ftp_server port _number or sftp sftp_server port number If the port number is not specified port 21 is used for FTP and port 22 is used for SFTP After entering access credentials the folders on the server become available Click the appropriate folder on the server You can access the server as an anonymous user if the server enables such access To do
277. ection attempt this time using the latest IP address which was associated with that network name We recommend setting Second Connection Atempt to True only in networks which often experience problems with their DNS servers and provided that the machines IP addresses change infrequently as in cases of fixed IP addresses or long DHCP lease times This setting has no effect on machines that were added to the management server by IP address Offline Period Threshold in seconds Description Specifies the maximum interval in seconds between attempts to connect to a registered machine which appears to be offline Possible values Any integer number between 120 and 2147483647 Default value 1800 Normally the management server connects to each registered machine with a certain time interval see Period and Period High Priority earlier in this section When the management server discovers that the machine is offline it doubles this interval it keeps doubling this interval on each further attempt until reaching the value specified in Offline Period Threshold If the machine comes back online the time interval becomes normal again This approach aims at efficient use of the management server resources and reducing the network load Backup Specifies the location and initial size of the snapshot storage a temporary file that is used when backing up data by taking a snapshot This file is deleted as soon as the backup is complete With
278. ective when the console is connected to the management server or to a registered machine p 377 The option defines whether to alert if no connection was established between a registered machine and the management server for a period of time so indicating that the machine might not be centrally managed for instance in the case of network connection failure to that machine You can configure the length of time that is considered critical The preset is alert if the machine s last connection to the management server was more than 5 days ago The alert is displayed in the Alerts section of the Dashboard When the console is connected to the management server this setting will also control the color scheme of the Last connect column s value for each machine 3 1 4 Number of tasks This option is effective only when the console is connected to the management server The option defines how many tasks will be displayed at a time in the Tasks view You can also use filters available in the Tasks view to limit the number of displayed tasks The preset is 400 The adjustment range is 20 to 500 To make a selection choose the desired value from the Number of tasks drop down menu ILS Fonts This option is effective when the console is connected to a managed machine or to the management server The option defines the fonts to be used in the Graphical User Interface of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 The Menu setting affects the drop dow
279. ed is always selected Click Send test WinPopup message to check if the settings are correct Event tracing It is possible to duplicate log events of the backup operations performed on the managed machine in the Application Event Log of Windows or send the events to the specified SNMP managers Windows event log This option is effective only in Windows operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media This option defines whether the agent s operating on the managed machine have to log events of the backup operations in the Application Event Log of Windows to see this log run eventvwr exe or select Control Panel gt Administrative tools gt Event Viewer You can filter the events to be logged The preset is Use the setting set in the Machine options To select whether to log the backup operations events in the Application Event Log of Windows Choose one of the following Use the setting set in the Machine options to use the setting specified for the machine For more information refer to Machine options p 93 Log the following event types to log events of the backup operations in the Application Event Log Specify the types of events to be logged All events log all events information warnings and errors Errors and warnings Errors only Do not log to disable logging events of the backup operations in the Application Event Log SNMP notifications
280. ed The further operations are described in the Adding the Acronis Plug in to WinPE 2 x or 3 0 p 258 section If you do not have a machine with WAIK prepare as follows 1 Download and install Windows Automated Installation Kit WAIK Automated Installation Kit AIK for Windows Vista PE 2 0 http www microsoft com Downloads details aspx familyid C7D4BC6D 15F3 4284 9123 679830D629F2 amp displaylang en Automated Installation Kit AIK for Windows Vista SP1 and Windows Server 2008 PE 2 1 http www microsoft com downloads details aspx FamilyID 94bb6e34 d890 4932 81a5 5b50c657de08 amp DisplayLang en Automated Installation Kit AIK for Windows 7 PE 3 0 http www microsoft com downloads details aspx familyid 696DD665 9F76 4177 A811 39C26D3B3B34 amp displaylang en 2 optional Burn the WAIK to DVD or copy to a flash drive 4 5 6 Install the Microsoft NET Framework v 2 0 from this kit NETFXx86 or NETFXx64 depending on your hardware Install Microsoft Core XML MSXML 5 0 or 6 0 Parser from this kit Install Windows AIK from this kit Install Bootable Media Builder on the same machine It is recommended that you familiarize yourself with the help documentation supplied with Windows AIK To access the documentation select Microsoft Windows AIK gt Documentation from the start menu Using Bart PE You can create a Bart PE image with Acronis Plug in using the Bart PE Builder Please refer to Building
281. ed machine Personal vaults are specific for each managed machine Way of working with the Vaults view Vaults on the navigation pane top element of the vaults tree Click this item to display groups of centralized and personal vaults 5 Centralized This group is available when the console is connected to a managed machine or to a management server Expand this group to display a list of centralized vaults added by the management server administrator Click any centralized vault in the vaults tree to open the detailed view of this vault p 130 and to take actions on the vault p 131 archives p 161 and backups p 162 stored in there E gt Personal This group is available when the console is connected to a managed machine Expand this group to display a list of personal vaults created on the managed machine Click any personal vault in the vaults tree to open the detailed view of this vault p 158 and to take actions on the vault p 159 archives p 161 and backups p 162 stored in there 4 1 Centralized vaults A centralized vault is a networked location allotted by the management server administrator to serve as storage for the backup archives A centralized vault can be managed by a storage node or be unmanaged The total number and size of archives stored in a centralized vault is limited by the storage size only As soon as the management server administrator commits to creating a centralized vault the vault
282. ed time comes or the event specified in the schedule occurs but the condition or any of multiple conditions is not met For more information on conditions please see Scheduling p 165 and Conditions p 175 The preset is Wait until the conditions are met Wait until the conditions are met With this setting the scheduler starts monitoring the conditions and launches the task as soon as the conditions are met If the conditions are never met the task will never start To handle the situation when the conditions are not met for too long and further delaying the backup is becoming risky you can set the time interval after which the task will run irrespective of the condition Select the Run the task anyway after check box and specify the time interval The task will start as soon as the conditions are met OR the maximum time delay lapses depending on which comes first Time diagram Wait until conditions are met gt waiting f jiti Scheduled Time interval time or event Condition Idle Waiting Running Idle Task state pe o od gt t Time int L lt waiting f jiti Scheduled time or event Condition Idle Waiting Running idle Task state _ Skip the task execution Delaying a backup might be unacceptable for example when you need to back up data strictly at the specified time Then it makes sense to skip the backup rather than wait for the conditions especially if the events occur relatively often Ta
283. ed letter label type capacity free space size used space size file system and status for each volume The toolbar comprises of icons to launch the Undo Redo and Commit actions intended for pending operations p 283 The graphic panel at the bottom of the view also graphically depicts all the disks and their volumes as rectangles with basic data on them label letter size status type and file system Both parts of the view also depict all unallocated disk space that can be used in volume creation Starting the operations Any operation can be launched From the volume or disk context menu both in the table and the graphic panel From the Disk management menu of the console From the Operations bar on the Actions and Tools pane Note that the list of available operations in the context menu the Disk management menu and the Operations bar depends on the selected volume or disk type The same is true for unallocated space as well Displaying operation results The results of any disk or volume operation you have just planned are immediately displayed in the Disk management view of the console For example if you create a volume it will be immediately shown in the table as well as in graphical form at the bottom of the view Any volume changes including changing the volume letter or label are also immediately displayed in the view 6 11 5 Disk operations Acronis Disk Director Lite includes the following opera
284. ed personal vault See the Actions on personal vaults p 159 section for details Pie chart with legend The pie chart lets you estimate the vault s load it shows the proportion of the vault s free space and occupied space l free space space on the storage device where the vault is located For example if the vault is located on a hard disk the vault free space is free space of the appropriate volume l occupied space total size of backup archives and their metadata if it is located in the vault Other files that may be put to this folder by a user are not counted The legend displays the following information about the vault full path to the vault total number of archives and backups stored in the vault the ratio of the occupied space to the original data size Vault content The Vault content section contains the archives table and toolbar The archives table displays archives and backups that are stored in the vault Use the archives toolbar to perform actions on the selected archives and backups The list of backups is expanded by clicking the plus sign to the left of the archive s name All the archives are grouped by type on the following tabs The Disk archives tab lists all the archives that contain disk or volume backups images The File archives tab lists all the archives that contain file backups Related sections Operations with archives stored in a vault p 161 Operations with backups p 162
285. edentials for SOUFCE ccsccscesessesssssessescssessceesesssessssssscsecseseessessesaeeaeesseeeeess 6 2 6 EXCIUSIONSvcss2stsscdisscaszesastascetssaateayeststistassoresaasuaaeasasnniael xbvaaeatotratestateanentasabeeanenteatotantetieys 6 2477 AN CHIVE nem anne e e a a a 6 2 8 Access credentials for archive lOCation c ccccccsccsceessesssssescsscssceeesessecasesessessceseeeeees 6 2 9 Backtip schemes innean anii a A aT 6 2 10 Archive validation 6 2 11 Setting up regular conversion to a virtual Machine s esesssssssssesesesesesesrsrsrsresesrsesrsranasesesesrnrareresesesrsne 6 3 Recovering F 1 i E EE E ET E EA A TNE E Fe A E E Ao E a STE EE E A E EN E E E E E E EENS 6 3 2 Archive Selectionner nnn a a tab a a a i ra aa ie 6 3 3 Data typ niiorirearosi mnie i et a r i a a a aa i a a ea E 634 Content selectioNi ennn an ea nan aa a a a a an 6 3 5 Access credentials for location renro nena aa a 6 3 6 De stiniatiGnSele ction AAE A EEA EE E AE 6 3 7 Access credentials for destination ccccccesssssesesscsscsscsscsesssssessesscsecsecsesssssecsessessssscseseeesesaessesaesaseesenees 6 3 8 When to recov m aa a a a a a a a a a a 6 3 9 U iversal REStor n ennnen ciiirt a ARa EEEE ER R E RR A EEE 6 3 10 How to convert a disk backup to a virtual machine s snssesesesssssssesesesesesesrsrsrerisesesesrerenesesesesrasasesrsrsrsrsee 6 3 11 Bootability troubleShOoting cc ccesccscsscssessesssssssesscsscsecessesssssessesscecesse
286. eeneasentaeanees 1 3 7 Acronis Wake On LAN Proxy 14 Supported filesystems eparina a O AEE ae a EE EE KERKEE hace 1 5 Supported operating SYStCMS cccccecssssecececeeseseneaeceeecessesseaeeeseesceseesaeseceeeessessesssaeeneeseseesees 22 1 6 System requirements eona e a banccdes sbaccccsccdenncesebeaddsecddcecsben 24 17 Technical SUPPOMr csset e a nri e oE de i Eae aeir oak 25 2 Understanding Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 sesssssssssssssssssssssosssseossesosseseosssssossessessessesse 26 2 1 BAaSIC CONCE DUS iisszazevcssaeiieta aeae ae a a eE a Raat nia neta a REEE 26 2 2 User privileges on a managed machine sesssssseseriesrssssrsrrrrnnsseserrrnnssssnserrnnrssssrnernnnnssssrnne 30 2 3 Owners and credentials ciscccict aii titi aniiinnaniiinmtaniiinai alii 31 2 4 Full incremental and differential backups cccccsessecececeeeesesneaeeececeseeseaeseceeecessessaeaeeeeeess 32 2 5 GES DACKUP SCNEIMG sereis enoar a enee EEE EE E E AEE eE E E Enea EEan 34 2 6 Tower of Hanoi backup scheme ccceseessssececececeeseseaececeeeseescsaeaecesecsssesaaeeeeeeseessesenaeaeeeeeens 37 27 Retenion tUle Soene E ESE S 39 2 8 Backing up dynamic volumes Windows ccsscccceessececeesseeeceessececeesaeeeesesaececeesaeeeeseaaeeeeseaas 42 2 9 Backing up LVM volumes LINUX cccccccsssceceessececeeseeeceesaececsesaececeesaeeecseaueceesesaeceesssaeeeeneaas 44 2 10 Backing up RAID arrays LINUX sinsir a eia
287. either local or SAN LUN attached to the virtual machine cannot be backed up from the host To back up such machine or its disks install Agent for Windows or Agent for Linux on the machine A SAN LUN disk attached to an ESX ESXi virtual machine in the Physical compatibility mode cannot be backed up from the host while the virtual machine is online running To back up such disk either stop the machine or install Agent for Windows or Agent for Linux on the machine G25 Access credentials for source Specify the credentials required for access to the data you are going to backup To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Use the plan s credentials The program will access the source data using the credentials of the backup plan account specified in the General section Use the following credentials The program will access the source data using the credentials you specify Use this option if the plan s account does not have access permissions to the data Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account 2 Click OK 6 2 6 Exclusions Set up exclusions for the specific types of files you do not wish to back up For example you may not want database hidden and system files and folders as well as files with specific extensions to be stored in the archive To speci
288. either of the following Recover the files as two or more groups For example if the problem occurs when recovering 1 million files try recovering the first 500 000 of them and then the remaining 500 000 Modify the registry as follows Note This procedure requires restarting the machine Use standard precautions when modifying the registry 1 In Registry Editor open the following registry subkey HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Control Session Manager Memory Management 2 Add the PoolUsageMaximum entry to the subkey Entry type DWORD Value Base Decimal Value 40 3 Add the PagedPoolSize entry to the subkey Entry type DWORD Value Base Hexadecimal Value FFFFFFFF 4 Quit Registry Editor and then restart the machine If this does not resolve the problem or for more details on adding these registry settings see the corresponding Microsoft Help and Support article Tip In general if a volume contains many files consider using a disk level backup instead of a file level one In this case you will be able to recover the entire volume as well as particular files stored on it 6 3 14 Recovering the storage node In addition to backing up data to centralized vaults managed by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node you may want to perform a disk backup of the machine where the storage node itself is installed This section describes how to recover the storage node registere
289. eld indicates the tape label Labels are also displayed for tapes that are in the Imported pool and contain backups written by Acronis such might be the case when you bring a tape from another tape library By default an unused tape with a barcode gets a label that is equal to the barcode If a barcode is absent or corrupted the label name will be created automatically You can accept proposed labels or provide your own label as a plain text Tapes from the Free or the Imported pool can be renamed on condition that the user account used to run the storage node service ASN User has write permissions for these pools These permissions are not assigned to ASN User during installation so you might need to add them manually To define your own label for a tape select a related data field type in a new label click Eject tape write the same label on the tape cartridge to make association with the label and insert it back into the same slot Once all the required tape labels are specified press Set labels to store labels in the storage node database Tape support These options are effective when the backup destination is a managed vault located on a tape library Tape support options enable you to specify how the backup tasks will distribute backups among the tapes Some combinations of tape options might degrade usage efficiency of both the whole tape library and each tape If you are not forced to modify these options by some sp
290. ely select Connect gt Manage a remote machine in the console menu and specify one of the machine s IP addresses Provide the user name and password if these have been configured when creating the bootable media Local connection Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Console is always present on the bootable media Anyone who has physical access to the machine terminal can run the console and connect Just click Run management console in the bootable agent startup window 6 10 3 Working under bootable media Operations on a machine booted with bootable media are very similar to backup and recovery under the operating system The difference is as follows 1 Disk letters seen under Windows style bootable media might differ from the way Windows identifies drives For example the D drive under the rescue utility might correspond to the E drive in Windows Be careful To be on the safe side it is advisable to assign unique names to the volumes The Linux style bootable media shows local disks and volumes as unmounted sda1 sda2 The Linux style bootable media cannot write a backup to an NTFS formatted volume Switch to the Windows style if you need to do so 4 Youcan switch the bootable media between the Windows style and the Linux style by selecting Tools gt Change volume representation 5 There is no Navigation tree in the media GUI Use the Navigation menu item to navigate between views 6 Tasks cannot be s
291. em resources retention rules provide an option to not delete backups with dependencies In our example the full backup will be retained until the incremental one also becomes obsolete Then both backups will be deleted D Deduplicating vault A managed vault p 375 in which deduplication p 371 is enabled Deduplication A method of storing different duplicates of the same information only once Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 can apply the deduplication technology to backup archives p 367 stored on storage nodes p 377 This minimizes storage space taken by the archives backup traffic and network usage during backup Differential backup A differential backup stores changes to the data against the latest full backup p 374 You need access to the corresponding full backup to recover the data from a differential backup Direct management Any management operation that is performed on a managed machine p 375 using the direct console p 371 agent p 366 connection as opposed to centralized management p 370 when the operations are configured on the management server p 376 and propagated by the server to the managed machines The direct management operations include creating and managing local backup plans p 375 creating and managing local tasks p 375 such as recovery tasks creating and managing personal vaults p 376 and archives stored there viewing the state progress and properties o
292. emes All backup schemes are based on full incremental and differential backup methods The term scheme in fact denotes the algorithm of applying these methods plus the algorithm of the archive cleanup Comparing backup methods with each other does not make much sense because the methods work as a team in a backup scheme Each method should play its specific role according to its advantages A competent backup scheme will benefit from the advantages of all backup methods and lessen the influence of all the methods shortcomings For example weekly differential backup facilitates archive cleanup because it can be easily deleted along with the weekly set of daily incremental backups depending on it Backing up with the full incremental or differential backup method results in a backup p 367 of the corresponding type Full backup A full backup stores all data selected for backup A full backup underlies any archive and forms the base for incremental and differential backups An archive can contain multiple full backups or consist of only full backups A full backup is self sufficient you do not need access to any other backup to recover data from a full backup It is widely accepted that a full backup is the slowest to do but the fastest to restore With Acronis technologies recovery from an incremental backup may be not slower than recovery from a full one A full backup is most useful when you need to roll back the system to its i
293. en operating under bootable media The preset is Disabled This option enables booting the machine into the recovered operating system without user interaction Change SID after the recovery is finished This option is not effective when recovering to a virtual machine unless an agent is installed in the guest system or the machine is booted using the bootable media The preset is Disabled Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 can generate an unique security identifier SID for the recovered system You do not need a new SID when recovering a system over itself or when creating a system replica that will replace the original system Generate a new SID if the original and the recovered systems will work concurrently in the same workgroup or domain Use FTP in Active mode The preset is Disabled Enable this option if the FTP server supports active mode and you want this mode to be used for file transfers VM power management These options are effective for virtual machines residing on the virtualization servers These options are available only if any Acronis agent for virtual machines is installed on the virtualization server Power off target virtual machines when starting recovery The preset is On Recovery to an existing virtual machine is not possible if the machine is online and so the machine is powered off automatically as soon as the recovery task starts Users will be disconnected from the machine and any unsaved data
294. en to delete has the check mark Review the archive or backup that you have selected to delete If you need to delete other archives and backups select the respective check boxes then click Delete selected and confirm the deletion The filters in this window are from the archives list of the vault view Thus if some filters have been applied to the archives list only the archives and backups corresponding to these filters are displayed here To see all content clean all the filter fields What happens if delete a backup that is a base of an incremental or differential backup To preserve archive consistency the program will consolidate the two backups For example you delete a full backup but retain the next incremental one The backups will be combined into a single full backup which will be dated the incremental backup date When you delete an incremental or differential backup from the middle of the chain the resulting backup type will be incremental Please be aware that consolidation is just a method of deletion but not an alternative to deletion The resulting backup will not contain data that was present in the deleted backup and was absent from the retained incremental or differential backup There should be enough space in the vault for temporary files created during consolidation Backups resulting from consolidation always have maximum compression 4 3 4 Filtering and sorting archives The following is a guideline for you to
295. en using Acronis Active Restore because these features are primarily meant for instant data recovery on the same machine Universal Restore is not available when recovering Linux Getting Universal Restore Universal Restore comes free with Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Advanced Server SBS Edition and Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Advanced Server Virtual Edition Universal Restore for the other product editions is purchased separately has its own license and is installed as a separate feature from the setup file You need to re create bootable media to make the newly installed add on operational in the bootable environment 2 13 4 Acronis Active Restore Active Restore is the Acronis proprietary technology that brings a system online immediately after the system recovery is started Customers familiar with Acronis Recovery for Microsoft Exchange can note that this product uses Active Restore to achieve immediate availability of an Exchange information store after starting the recovery While based on the same technology recovery of the Information Store proceeds in quite a different way than the operating system recovery described in this section Supported operating systems Acronis Active Restore is available when recovering Windows starting from Windows 2000 Limitation The only supported archive location is a local drive or more precisely any device available through the machine s BIOS This may be Acronis Secure Zone a
296. ent console select from the top menu Help gt Collect system information from machine name 2 Specify where to save the file with system information 7 Centralized management This section covers operations that can be performed centrally by using the components for centralized management The content of this section is only applicable to advanced editions of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 7 1 Administering Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server This section describes the views that are available through the navigation tree of the console connected to the management server and explains how to work with each view 7 1 1 Dashboard Use the Dashboard to estimate at a glance the health of data protection on the registered machines The Dashboard displays the summary of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 agents activities lets you check for free space available in managed vaults and rapidly identify and resolve any issues Alerts The alerts section draws your attention to issues that have occurred on the management server and registered machines in centralized vaults and offers you ways of fixing or examining them The most critical issues are displayed at the top If there are no alerts or warnings at the moment the system displays No alerts or warnings Types of alerts The table below illustrates the types of messages you may observe Description Offer Comment Q Failed tasks X View the View the tasks wi
297. ent the archive from exceeding the desired size Cleanup consists in applying to an archive the retention rules set by the backup plan p 368 that produces the archive This operation checks if the archive has exceeded its maximum size and or for expired backups This may or may not result in deleting backups depending on whether the retention rules are violated or not For more information please refer to Retention rules p 39 Console Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Console A tool for remote or local access to Acronis agents p 366 and Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server p 376 Having connected the console to the management server the administrator sets up and manages backup policies p 368 and accesses other management server functionality that is performs centralized management p 370 Using the direct console agent connection the administrator performs direct management p 371 Consolidation Combining two or more subsequent backups p 367 belonging to the same archive p 367 into a single backup Consolidation might be needed when deleting backups either manually or during cleanup p 370 For example the retention rules require to delete a full backup p 374 that has expired but retain the next incremental p 375 one The backups will be combined into a single full backup which will be dated with the incremental backup s date Since consolidation may take a lot of time and syst
298. ental backup created on Monday of the 1st week of the year Bn C C 02 aw a ee re Then the following backups are written onto tape 02 four incremental and one differential backup on the second week four incremental and one differential backup on the third week four incremental backups on the 4th week The next full backup 320 Gb should be written on Friday of the 4th week However tape 02 has only 104 Gb of free space at the moment So after the tape reaches the end the recording continues from the beginning of free tape 03 BB o CO 02 2 O T M s T T he T T B C C Keep in mind that the Cleanup task is launched after each backup operation for the GFS scheme This task deletes all the outdated backups The next figure shows dark gray rectangles instead of the backups deleted up to the current time B COO O M Bo M sh TF 03 COO Physically the deleted backups are still on the tapes however information about the backups is deleted from the storage node database Below the figure shows the deleted backups as actual but demonstrates tape usage during the whole year for the GFS backup scheme in combination with the specified tape options A number in the green rectangle marks an incremental backup created on Monday of the corresponding week of the year a 01 g 02 By 03 E 04 By 05 Be 06 Be 07 By os By 09 Tape usage during the first year The next figure shows the actual usage of
299. entering access credentials the folders on the server become available Click the appropriate folder on the server You can access the server as an anonymous user if the server enables such access To do so click Use anonymous access instead of entering credentials According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer To back up data to a locally attached tape device expand the Tape drives group then click the required device 2 Using the archives table To assist you with choosing the right destination the table displays the names of the archives contained in each location you select While you are reviewing the location content archives can be added deleted or modified by another user or by the program itself according to scheduled operations Use the Refresh button to refresh the list of archives 3 Naming the new archive Once you select the archive destination the program generates a name for the new archive and displays it in the Name field The name commonly looks like Archive 1 The generated name is unique within the selected location If you are satisfied with the automatically generated name click OK Otherwise enter another unique name and click OK If the automatically generated name looks like Virtualization Server Type V
300. entralized vaults view of the console when the current vault is a tape library Validate Delete Delete all archives Deletion in the storage node database is performed without access to tapes A backup archive deleted from a tape library vault can be restored after the deletion by the Rescan p 142 operation which is performed for all the tapes keeping the archive s data The Rescan operation for a tape where a backup was deleted from can recover the backup as it recreates information on the content of the backup in the storage node database If all the backups are deleted from a tape it is considered as free So the deleted backups will be irrevocably lost after the first writing to the tape Backing up to tape library At creating a backup policy plan with a tape library destination you set up the backing up in the same way as with other storage devices The only difference is the additional Tape support p 115 options that can be set up during the backup policy plan creation These options enable you to specify how the created backup policy plan should use tapes from the tape library however the options presets increase usage efficiency of both whole tape library and each tape To view and change the tape options select Options gt Default backup and recovery options gt Default backup options gt Tape support from the top menu To change the settings of the backup policy plan to be created click Change in the Back
301. entries The following is a guideline for you to filter and sort log entries Display log entries fora 1 In the From field select the date starting from which to display the log entries given time period 2 Inthe To field select the date up to which to display the log entries Filter log entries by type Press or release the following toolbar buttons x to filter error messages A to filter warning messages to filter information messages Filter log entries by the Under the Backup plan or Managed entity type column header select the backup plan original backup plan or or the type of managed entity from the list managed entity type Filter log entries by task Type the required value task name machine name owner name etc in the field below managed entity the respective column header machine code owner 3 eof As a result you will see that the list of log entries fully or just partly coincide with the entered value Sort log entries by date Click the column s header to sort the log entries in ascending order Click it once again to and time sort the log entries in descending order Configuring the log table By default the table has seven columns that are displayed others are hidden If required you can hide the shown columns and show the hidden ones To show or hide columns 1 Right click any column header to open the context menu The menu items that are ticked off correspond to th
302. er m Condition Fits the time interval from 04 30 00 PM until 10 00 00 PM Task start conditions Skip the task execution As a result 1 if the user logs off between 04 30 00 PM and 10 00 00 PM the backup task will start immediately following the logging off 2 if the user logs off at any other time the task will be skipped What if What if a task is scheduled to be executed at a certain time and this time is outside the specified time interval For example Event Daily Every 1 day s Once at 03 00 00 PM Condition Fits time interval from 06 00 00 PM until 11 59 59 PM In this case whether and when the task will run depends on the task start conditions If the task start conditions are Skip the task execution the task will never run Ifthe task start conditions are Wait until the conditions are met and the Run the task anyway after check box is cleared the task scheduled to run at 3 00 PM will start at 6 00 PM the time when the condition is met If the task start conditions are Wait until the conditions are met and the Run the task anyway after check box is selected with say the 1 Hour waiting time the task scheduled to run at 3 00 PM will start at 4 00 PM the time when the waiting period ends 5 6 4 User logged off Applies to Windows Enables to put a backup task run on hold until all users log off from Windows on the managed machine Example Run the backup task at
303. er all the disk data onto a new disk It can be a case of expanding the system volume starting a new system layout or disk evacuation due to a hardware fault In any case the reason for the Clone basic disk operation can be summed up as the necessity to transfer all the source disk data to a target disk exactly as it is Acronis Disk Director Lite allows the operation to be carried out to basic MBR disks only To plan the Clone basic disk operation 1 Select a disk you want to clone 2 Select a disk as target for the cloning operation 3 Select a cloning method and specify advanced options The new volume structure will be graphically represented in the Disk management view immediately It is advisable that you deactivate Acronis Startup Recovery Manager p 366 ASRM if it is active before cloning a system disk Otherwise the cloned operating system might not boot You can activate the ASRM again after the cloning is completed If deactivation is not possible choose the As is method to clone the disk Selecting source and target disks The program displays a list of partitioned disks and asks the user to select the source disk from which data will be transferred to another disk The next step is selection of a disk as target for the cloning operation The program enables the user to select a disk if its size will be sufficient to hold all the data from the source disk without any loss If there is some data on the disk t
304. er of Hanoi backup scheme 38 140 148 391 Tower of Hanoi scheme 215 372 Types of connection to a managed machine 76 Types of dynamic volumes 283 U Understanding Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 27 Understanding centralized management 57 Understanding states and statuses 187 Universal Restore 17 21 223 233 263 Universal Restore Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Universal Restore 52 54 221 233 391 Unmanaged vault 380 392 User is idle 180 User logged off 182 User privileges on a managed machine 31 78 79 203 224 242 250 358 User privileges on a storage node 81 133 325 Using a single tape drive 52 Using custom groups 63 Using the Grandfather Father Son tape rotation scheme 35 149 Using the management console 8 10 Using the Tower of Hanoi tape rotation scheme 40 156 V Validating vaults archives and backups 135 164 166 167 191 241 329 Validation 27 140 380 391 392 Validation rules 381 392 Vault 27 53 256 387 389 392 Vault database path 136 137 Vault encryption 136 137 Vault path 136 137 138 Vaults 43 131 241 256 326 Views 14 Virtual machine 382 392 Virtual machine settings 227 228 231 235 Virtual machine type virtualization server selection 227 228 230 Virtual machines 316 Virtual machines on a management server e 63 310 317 VM power management
305. er of levels 5 The Tower of Hanoi scheme with five levels ensures that the roll back period is 8 days Let s designate the backups of the levels with numbers from 1 to 5 by letters A B C D and E respectively Then the rotation template for the backup sequence in the archive is the following E A B A C A B A D A B A C A B A In the five level ToH scheme all the backups on the 1st level A are incremental on the 5th level E full and other backups on levels 2 3 and 4 B C and D are differential Tape rotation for the ToH scheme substantially depends on the tape options whose default settings do not always provide optimal usage of tapes and the whole tape library The goal is to choose the tape options requiring the minimal number of tapes in the rotation There are analyzed examples showing how the ToH scheme can be combined with different tape options in the following sections ToH Example 1 p 152 The Use a separate tape set option is selected All the Always use a free tape options are cleared It requires 5 tapes in rotation ToH Example 2 p 153 The Use a separate tape set option is selected The Always use a free tape For each full backup option is selected The other Always use a free tape options are cleared It requires 4 tapes in rotation ToH Example 3 p 154 The Use a separate tape set option is selected All the Always use a free tape options are selected It requires 7 tapes in rotation ToH
306. er the cloning operation check box if necessary Click Finish to add the pending operation Click Commit on the toolbar and then click Proceed in the Pending Operations window Wait until the task is finished A ee Disk conversion MBR to GPT You would want to convert an MBR basic disk to a GPT basic disk in the following cases If you need more than 4 primary volumes on one disk If you need additional disk reliability against any possible data damage If you need to convert a basic MBR disk to basic GPT 1 Select a basic MBR disk to convert to GPT 2 Right click on the selected volume and then click Convert to GPT in the context menu You will receive a warning window stating that you are about to convert MBR into GPT 3 By clicking OK you ll add a pending operation of MBR to GPT disk conversion To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 283 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them Please note A GPT partitioned disk reserves the space in the end of the partitioned area necessary for the backup area which stores copies of the GPT header and the partition table If the disk is full and the volume size cannot be automatically decreased the conversion operation of the MBR disk to GPT will fail The operation is irreversible If you have a primary volume belonging to an MBR disk and convert the disk first to GPT and then back to MBR the volume will b
307. ere is only one full backup left and an incremental or differential backup is in progress an error occurs saying there is a lack of available space This setting is recommended when backing up to a USB drive or Acronis Secure Zone This setting is not applicable to managed vaults This setting enables deletion of the last backup in the archive in case your storage device cannot accommodate more than one backup However you might end up with no backups if the program is not able to create the new backup for some reason Apply the rules Specifies when to apply the retention rules p 39 only if the retention rules For example the cleanup procedure can be set up to run after each backup and are set also on schedule This option is available only if you have set at least one retention rule in Retention rules Cleanup schedule Specifies a schedule for archive cleanup only if On schedule is For example the cleanup can be scheduled to start on the last day of each selected month This option is available only if you selected On schedule in Apply the rules Examples Weekly full backup The following scheme yields a full backup performed every Friday night Full backup Schedule Weekly every Friday at 10 00 PM Here all parameters except Schedule in Full backup are left empty All backups in the archive are kept indefinitely no archive cleanup is performed Full and incremental backup plus cleanup With the following scheme
308. ers or files File backup File level data protection is based on backing up files and folders residing on the machine where the agent is installed or on a network share Files can be recovered to their original location or to another place It is possible to recover all files and folders that were backed up or select which of them to recover Other operations Conversion to a virtual machine Rather than converting a disk backup to a virtual disk file which requires additional operations to bring the virtual disk into use Agent for Windows performs the conversion by recovering a disk backup to a new virtual machine of any of the following types VMware Workstation Microsoft Virtual PC Parallels Workstation or Citrix XenServer virtual appliance Files of the fully configured and operational machine will be placed in the folder you select You can start the machine using the respective virtualization software or prepare the machine files for further usage Disk management Agent for Windows includes Acronis Disk Director Lite a handy disk management utility Disk management operations such as cloning disks converting disks creating formatting and deleting volumes changing a disk partitioning style between MBR and GPT or changing a disk label can be performed either in the operating system or using bootable media Universal Restore The Universal Restore add on enables you to use the restore to dissimilar hardware functionality on t
309. ers the following dynamic membership criteria Operating system OS Active Directory organization unit OU P address range Multiple criteria can be specified for a dynamic group For example a set of criteria OS equals Windows 2000 OS equals Windows 2003 OU equals Accounting is interpreted as all machines running Windows 2000 or Windows 2003 and belonging to the Accounting organizational unit The All machines group can be thought of as a dynamic group with the single built in criterion include all the registered machines Using custom groups Grouping helps the administrator to organize data protection by company departments by Active Directory organizational units by various populations of users by the site locations and the like To make the best use of the AD OU criterion consider reproducing the Active Directory hierarchy in the management server Grouping by the IP address range enables taking account of the network topology The groups you create can be nested The management server is capable of maintaining up to 500 groups in total A machine can be a member of more than one group Besides physical machines you can group virtual machines p 309 hosted on registered virtualization servers Virtual machines have their own grouping criteria depending on their properties Example The diagram below presents an example of group hierarchy Six machines are registered on the management server 1 the inte
310. erve Description Offer Failed tasks X Resolve Tasks that need interaction X Resolve Failed to check the license for Connect the current edition X day s remaining until the software stops working Please make sure you have a valid license on Acronis License Server Cannot check the license key Connect for the current edition for X days Either Acronis License Server was unavailable or the license key data was corrupted Check connectivity to the server and run Acronis License Server to manage licenses Comment Resolve will open the Backup plans and Tasks view with failed tasks where you can examine the reason of failure Each time a task needs human interaction the Dashboard shows a message to inform you what action has to be performed for example insert new CD or Stop Retry Ignore on an error Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 agent connects to Acronis License Server at the start and then every 1 5 days the default is 1 day as specified by the agent configuration parameters If the license check does not succeed for 1 60 days as specified by the agent configuration parameters the default is 30 days the agent will stop working until there has been a successful last license check Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 is stopped For the past X days the agent was unable to check whether its license is available on Acronis License Server This is probably due to the license server being
311. erver 1 Inthe Navigation tree right click Virtual machines and select VMware vCenter Integration 2 Click Configure integration 3 Clear the Enable VMware vCenter integration check box 4 Click OK The group that has the same name as the vCenter Server will be removed and the policies applied to this group or its child groups will be revoked Virtual machines remain in the All virtual machines group and in other groups if their host is managed by Agent for ESX ESXi Policies applied to these groups or directly to the machines continue functioning on the machines This way by removing the integration you remove only the machines that are not manageable Deploying and updating Agent for ESX ESXi Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server provides an easy way to deploy Agent for ESX ESXi to every VMware ESX or ESXi server whose virtual machines you want to back up A virtual appliance with an agent will be created on every ESX ESXi server you specify and registered on the management server Virtual machines dynamically grouped by their hosts will appear on the management server and you will be able to apply backup policies to the virtual machines or back up each machine individually The update of already installed agents is performed in the same way as deployment Upon selecting a host or cluster where the agent is installed you will be suggested to update the agent on that host If you are using VMware vSphere it is recommen
312. erview Deduplication is the process of minimizing storage space taken by the data by detecting data repetition and storing the identical data only once For example if a managed vault where deduplication is enabled contains two copies of the same file whether in the same archive or in different archives the file is stored only once and a link to that file is stored instead of the second file Deduplication may also reduce network load if during a backup a file or a disk block is found to be a duplicate of an already stored one its content is not transferred over the network Deduplication is performed on disk blocks block level deduplication and on files file level deduplication for disk level and file level backups respectively In Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 deduplication consists of two steps Deduplication at source Performed on a managed machine during backup Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent uses the storage node to determine what data can be deduplicated and does not transfer the data whose duplicates are already present in the vault Deduplication at target Performed in the vault after a backup is completed The storage node analyses the vault s archives and deduplicates data in the vault When creating a backup plan you have the option to turn off deduplication at source for that plan This may lead to faster backups but a greater load on the network and storage node Deduplicating vault A mana
313. es Management Console Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent Yes Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Yes Yes Management Server Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Yes Yes Node Acronis PXE Server No Yes Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Yes Yes Bootable Agent Configuring communication settings You can configure communication settings such as whether to encrypt transferred data for Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components installed on one or more machines by using Acronis Administrative Template For information on how to load the Administrative Template see How to load Acronis Administrative Template p 331 When applied to a single machine the Administrative Template defines the communication settings for all the components on the machine when applied to a domain or an organizational unit it defines the communication settings for all the components on the machines in that domain or organizational unit To configure communication settings 1 Click Start then click Run and then type gpedit msc 2 Inthe Group Policy console expand Computer Configuration then expand Administrative Templates and then click Acronis 3 Inthe Acronis pane to the right double click a communication option that you want to configure The Administrative Template contains the following options each option is explained later in this topic Remote Agent ports m Client Encryption options Server Encryption options 4 For the ne
314. es the actual log size with the maximum size after every 100 log entries Once the maximum log size is exceeded the program deletes the oldest log entries You can select the amount of log entries to retain The default 95 setting will keep most of the log With the minimum 1 setting the log will be nearly cleared This parameter can also be set by using Acronis Administrative Template p 339 3 3 4 Customer Experience Program This option defines whether the machine will participate in the Acronis Customer Experience Program ACEP If you choose Yes I want to participate in the ACEP information about the hardware configuration the most and least used features and about any problems will be automatically collected from the machine and sent to Acronis on a regular basis The end results are intended to provide software improvements and enhanced functionality to better meet the needs of Acronis customers Acronis does not collect any personal data To learn more about the ACEP read the terms of participation on the Acronis Web site or in the product GUI Initially the option is configured during the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 agent installation This setting can be changed at any time using the product GUI Options gt Machine options gt Customer Experience Program The option can also be configured using the Group Policy infrastructure p 342 A setting defined by a Group Policy cannot be changed using the product GUI unless t
315. esents the item s content within the vault Before sending the item to the vault the agent queries the deduplication database to determine whether the item s hash value is the same as that of an already stored item If so the agent sends only the item s hash value otherwise it sends the item itself Some items such as encrypted files or disk blocks of a non standard size cannot be deduplicated and the agent always transfers such items to the vault without calculating their hash values For more information about restrictions of file level and disk level deduplication see Deduplication restrictions p 74 Deduplication at target The storage node performs deduplication at target in a managed vault by running two tasks the indexing task and the compacting task Indexing task After backup to a deduplicating vault is completed the storage node runs the indexing task to deduplicate data in the vault as follows 1 It moves the items disk blocks or files from the archives to a special folder within the vault storing duplicate items there only once This folder is called the deduplication data store Items that cannot be deduplicated remain in the archives 2 Inthe archives it replaces the moved items with the corresponding references to them As a result the vault contains a number of unique deduplicated items with each item having one or more references to it from the vault s archives The indexing task may take conside
316. esholds is reached Vault Free Space Error Limit Description Specifies the amount of free space in a managed vault in megabytes below which an error is recorded in the storage node s log and any backup to the vault becomes prohibited Possible values Any integer number between 0 and 2147483647 Default value 50 When the amount of free space in a vault is equal to the value in Vault Free Space Error Limit or less an error is recorded in the storage node s log Backups performed to the vault will keep failing until the vault s free space is above the limit Vault Database Free Space Warning Limit Description Specifies the amount of free space in megabytes on the volume containing a managed vault s database below which a warning is recorded in the storage node s log Possible values Any integer number between 0 and 2147483647 Default value 20 If the amount of free space on the volume containing a managed vault s database is less than the value in Vault Database Free Space Warning Limit a warning is recorded in the storage node s log indicating the vault in question You can view storage node warnings in the Dashboard The database is stored on the storage node in a local folder whose name is specified in Database path when creating the vault Vault Database FreeSpace Error Limit Description Specifies the amount of free space on the volume containing a managed vault s database in megabytes below which an error is reco
317. esscseeseesessseseeeesseeseeeeees 58 2 14 3 Grouping the registered MACHINES cccceeessessessesessesseecsecsessessesseseesecsessessessecsessusessessessessesaecaueaseaeseeeess 61 2 14 4 Policies ON MACHINES and groupsS sccscesseccssesssssesesscsscsecsecsesssssecsssscsecescsessesseseussessessessceeseeseessecaueseeseeeseess 63 2 14 5 Backup policy s state and StatUS S ccccccsessssssssesessesscsecsecsessesscssesecsecsecsessessessesausesseseessesaesaesaussseeeeseess 68 214 6 DEGAUPIICAI OM gies cce be sechessseeetenssecdabah onal shad ehescesebeniieais a r a veundehds A E EEE 71 2 14 7 Privileges for centralized management ccccssescssssscssesscseeseessesesscsecsececsessessesseseeseseseseeseseessecseesssaseeseess 75 2 14 8 Communication between Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components ccscesceeseesseteesseseeeesesseeeesees 81 OPTIONS aaraa ae iE N Jicteacacccececcseendecdeueddacedcvessdceusccaecsencocesdesssccteencesssvestacsavessecssvesdeess 88 Sl lt GCONSOIEO PIONS aeeie n aen AOE e A es esas ee A E A A I OE OER 3 1 1 SUAPCU 0 a4 AE A A A E A 3 1 2 POP UP MESSABCS osc ccccscscuciescecacssccsceutceecesdscecssceesdesccdscvedesstssteeseasatveeusnedecdubcevdegeastscnts 3 1 3 Time based alerts ronin in e aa ea aeaa aea nana ena eles 3 1 4 NUMBER OF r SA ENE E ANE AO 3 1 5 3 2 Management SErver OPtions cii a a a a aa EE 3 2 1 Logging level niinno a R RA R N EE R E REONE E ROERNE 3 2 2 tog c
318. essessedoasccbcdsascdcsbas 128 41 Centralized valts esoneri ieee shins eh eee eas EENE EN 129 4 1 1 Working with the Centralized vault view esssssssssesesesesesesssreresesrsssrsreresesesrsrsraranenesesesrerenenesesenrnnanenen 130 4 1 2 Actions on centralized VAUItS cceecssecsseecescecescesecesceeeseesesescescseesesscesesesacseeassecacseeecsesesaeeeaesesseseeeeseeesaes 131 41 3 Tap librarie Sasserra an na a a ana a i ian An rN 136 A2 Personal Vaults escea i E N E TN E T AE E weet 158 4 2 1 Working with the Personal vault view cccccccssesessssscsscsscsecssesessessescsecsessessecscsseseesessessessesausaesaseeeeees 158 4 22 Actions ON personal VAUITS csccsccscessscsssssesssscsecssessesssssesseacsecsssseesssssessesesacesccacseessesessssaceneeaeseessesteaess 159 4 3 COMMON OPELAtiONS seinne cued lances Feccecuetecskecbenecdeueeel ences cau a 161 4 3 1 Operations with archives stored in a VaUIt cc ccccscsscsssscssesscsecsessssessesscsessessessesseescsesecsesseesesaeeasesseeseees 161 43 2 Op rations With DaCkUPS wisrcsecscescsssceccsccecsccssseccetasssusenssscscscasvcousosesecstevecstvetdddondertodesucvhdssededeasedscdussendetessetiie 162 4 3 3 De letingiarchives and backups nn crc sestioasleccctebisssecestesveselengendes Gatses a a loots 163 4 3 4 Filtering and Sorting archives c cccsccscsscsscssessessssssscssesscsecssesesssssesssscecsecsecsessesaussesscsscseseessesaussessssasaesers 163 SCH
319. estination The tab displays information about the backup destination Settings The tab displays information about the backup scheme used by the policy and backup options that were modified against the default settings Applied to The tab displays a list of machines and groups the selected policy is applied to Actions To Do View details of the machine click View details group In the Machine details p 298 Group details p 307 window examine all information on the selected machine or the selected group View tasks of the machine Click View tasks group The Tasks p 319 view will display a list of the tasks pre filtered by the selected machine group View log of the machine Click _ amp View log group The Log p 321 view will display a list of the log entries pre filtered by the selected machine group Revoke policy from the Click u Revoke machine group The management server will revoke the policy from the selected machine or group of machines The policy itself remains on the management server TA F Physical machines Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 lets the administrator protect data and perform management operations on multiple machines The administrator adds a machine to the management server using the machine s name or IP address imports machines from Active Directory or from text files Once a machine is registered p 377 on the management server it becomes availabl
320. et computers see Microsoft Knowledge Base articles 302577 and 216915 The Universal Restore technology provides an efficient solution for hardware independent system recovery by replacing the crucial Hardware Abstraction Layer HAL and mass storage device drivers Universal Restore is applicable for 1 Instant recovery of a failed system on different hardware 2 Hardware independent cloning and deployment of operating systems 3 Physical to physical physical to virtual and virtual to physical machine migration The Universal Restore principles 1 Automatic HAL and mass storage driver selection Universal Restore searches for drivers in the network folders you specify on removable media and in the default driver storage folders of the system being recovered Universal Restore analyzes the compatibility level of all found drivers and installs HAL and mass storage drivers that better fit the target hardware Drivers for network adapters are also searched and passed to the operating system which installs them automatically when first started The Windows default driver storage folder is determined in the registry value DevicePath which can be found in the registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE WMicrosoft Windows CurrentVersion This storage folder is usually WINDOWS inf 2 Manual selection of the mass storage device driver If the target hardware has a specific mass storage controller such as a SCSI RAID or Fibre Channe
321. etwork Therefore using a SAN or a storage local to the host that performs conversion is the best choice from the network usage standpoint A local disk is not an option though if the conversion is performed by the same machine that is backed up Using a NAS also makes good sense Disk space On VMware ESX ESXi new machines are created with pre allocated disks This means that virtual disk size is always equal to the original disk capacity Assuming that the original disk size is 100 GB the corresponding virtual disk will occupy 100 GB even if the disk stores 10 GB of data Virtual machines created on a Hyper V server or workstation type machines VMware Workstation Microsoft Virtual PC or Parallels Workstation use as much disk space as the original data occupies Since the space is not pre allocated the physical disk on which the virtual machine will run is expected to have sufficient free space for the virtual disks to increase in size 6 3 Recovering data When it comes to data recovery first consider the most functional method connect the console to the managed machine running the operating system and create the recovery task If the managed machine s operating system fails to start or you need to recover data to bare metal boot the machine from the bootable media p 369 or using Acronis Startup Recovery Manager p 52 Then create a recovery task Acronis Universal Restore p 53 lets you recover and boot up Windows on dissimil
322. exactly as was configuration Store collections of similar files separately for example an MP3 collection or video files ona separate volume Store backups images of other volumes disks on a special volume Install a new operating system or swap file on a new volume Add new hardware to a machine In Acronis Disk Director Lite the tool for creating volumes is the Create volume Wizard Types of dynamic volumes Simple Volume A volume created from free space on a single physical disk It can consist of one region on the disk or several regions virtually united by the Logical Disk Manager LDM It provides no additional reliability no speed improvement nor extra size Spanned Volume A volume created from free disk space virtually linked together by the LDM from several physical disks Up to 32 disks can be included into one volume thus overcoming the hardware size limitations but if at least one disk fails all data will be lost and no part of a spanned volume may be removed without destroying the entire volume So a spanned volume provides no additional reliability nor a better I O rate Striped Volume A volume also sometimes called RAID O consisting of equal sized stripes of data written across each disk in the volume it means that to create a striped volume a user will need two or more dynamic disks The disks in a striped volume don t have to be identical but there must be unused space available on e
323. f the centralized tasks p 370 existing on the machine viewing and managing the log of the agent s operations disk management operations such as clone a disk create volume convert volume A kind of direct management is performed when using bootable media p 369 Some of the direct management operations can also be performed via the management server GUI This presumes however either an explicit or an implicit direct connection to the selected machine Disk backup Image A backup p 367 that contains a sector based copy of a disk or a volume in a packaged form Normally only sectors that contain data are copied Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 provides an option to take a raw image that is copy all the disk sectors which enables imaging of unsupported file systems Disk group A number of dynamic disks p 372 that store the common configuration data in their LDM databases and therefore can be managed as a whole Normally all dynamic disks created within the same machine p 375 are members of the same disk group As soon as the first dynamic disk is created by the LDM or another disk management tool the disk group name can be found in the registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services dmio Boot Info Primary Disk Group Name The next created or imported disks are added to the same disk group The group exists until at least one of its members exists Once the last dynamic disk is disconnected or
324. f the value is 0 no reconnection attempts will be performed the agent will only check for the license as determined by License Check Interval License Server Address Description Specifies the network name or IP address of Acronis License Server Possible values Any string 0 to 32765 characters long Default value Empty string Log Cleanup Rules Specifies how to clean up the agent log This parameter has the following settings Max Size Description Specifies the maximum size of the agent log folder in kilobytes Possible values Any integer number between 0 and 2147483647 Default value 1048576 that is 1 GB Percentage To Keep Description Specifies the percentage of the maximum log size to keep on cleanup Possible values Any integer number between 0 and 100 Default value 95 For details on how the agent log is cleaned up see Log cleanup rules p 96 Windows Event Log Specifies when to record Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent s events into the Application event log in Windows This parameter has two settings Trace State Description Specifies whether to record the agent s events into the event log Possible values True or False Default value False Trace Level Description Specifies the minimum level of severity of events to be recorded into the event log Only events of levels greater than or equal to the value in Trace Level will be recorded Possible values 0 Internal event 1 Debugging information 2 Informati
325. ferential backup The preset is Disabled When this option is enabled each differential backup will be written onto a free tape This option is available only when using free tape for each full backup is selected For each incremental backup The preset is Disabled When this option is enabled each incremental backup will be written onto a free tape This option is available only when using free tape for each full and differential backup is selected Tape rotation If all backups are deleted from a tape i e if information about the last backup on the tape is deleted from the storage node database the tape is considered as empty and can be reused during a backup cycle The same tape rotation enables you to get by with the minimum number of cartridges and not to be buried in used tapes Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 enables you to achieve full automation of tape rotation while backing up onto tape libraries This section provides you with useful information to choose a backup scheme and tape options for tape rotation To calculate the number of tapes required for tape rotation schemes you can use the method described in the Tape planning p 155 section Choosing a backup scheme When creating a backup policy plan with a tape library destination the following backup schemes are available Back up now Back up later Grandfather Father Son Tower of Hanoi or Custom The Simple backup scheme is disabled because backup con
326. filter and sort archives in the archives table To Do Sort backup archives by any Click the column s header to sort the archives in ascending order column Ee ar A Click it once again to sort the archives in descending order Filter archives by name In the field below the corresponding column s header type the archive name owner or machine the owner name or the machine name As a result you will see the list of the archives whose names owner names or machine names fully or just partly coincide with the entered value Configuring the archives table By default the table has seven columns that are displayed others are hidden If required you can hide the displayed columns and show hidden ones To show or hide columns 1 Right click any column header to open the context menu The menu items that are ticked off correspond to the column headers presented in the table 2 Click the items you want to be displayed hidden 5 Scheduling Acronis scheduler helps the administrator adapt backup plans to the company s daily routine and each employee s work style The plans tasks will be launched systematically keeping the critical data safely protected The scheduler uses local time of the machine the backup plan exists on Before creating a schedule be sure the machine s date and time settings are correct Schedule To define when a task has to be executed you need to specify an event or multiple events The task w
327. finished This option is available only when operating under bootable media The preset is Disabled When the option is enabled Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 will restart the machine after the backup process is completed For example if the machine boots from a hard disk drive by default and you select this check box the machine will be restarted and the operating system will start as soon as the bootable agent has finished creating the backup Deduplicate backup only after transferring it to the vault do not deduplicate at source This option is available only in advanced editions of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media when the backup destination is a deduplicating vault The preset is Disabled Enabling this option turns off deduplicating backups at source meaning that deduplication will be performed by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node after the backup is saved to the vault this is called deduplication at target Turning off deduplication at source may lead to faster backup processes but greater network traffic and heavier load of the storage node The eventual size of the backup in the vault is independent of whether deduplication at source is turned on Deduplication at source and deduplication at target are described in Deduplication overview p 71 Save software RAID and LVM metadata along with backups This option is effec
328. following is a guideline for you to perform actions on log entries vooo e O Select multiple log non contiguous hold down CTRL and click the log entries one by one entries contiguous select a single log entry then hold down SHIFT and click another entry All the entries between the first and last selections will be selected too View a log entry s details 1 Select a log entry Do one of the following Click View Details The log entry s details will be displayed in a separate window Expand the Information panel by clicking the chevron Save the selected log Select a single log entry or multiple log entries entries to a file _ Click Save Selected to File In the opened window specify a path and a name for the file Save all the log entries Make sure that the filters are not set to a file Click A Save All to File In the opened window specify a path and a name for the file Save all the filtered log Set filters to get a list of the log entries that satisfy the filtering criteria entries to a file 5 Click A Save All to File In the opened window specify a path and a name for the file As a result the log entries of that list will be saved Delete all the log entries Click a Clear Log All the log entries will be deleted from the log and a new log entry will be created It will contain information about who deleted the entries and when Filtering and sorting log entries The fol
329. for access to the location where the backup archive will be stored The user name of these credentials will be considered as the archive owner To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Use the policy credentials The program will access the location using the credentials of the backup policy specified in the General section Use the following credentials The program will access the location using the credentials you specify Use this option if the policy credentials do not have access permissions to the location You might need to provide special credentials for a network share or a storage node Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account 2 Click OK Warning According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer Fad Backup scheme selection Choose one of the available backup schemes Back up now to create a backup task for manual start and run the task immediately after its creation Back up later to create a backup task for manual start OR schedule one time task execution in the future Simple to schedule when and how often to backup data and speci
330. formed all the required steps click OK to start the export task 6 7 1 Task credentials Provide credentials for the account under which the task will run To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Run under the current user The task will run under the credentials with which the user who starts the tasks is logged on If the task has to run on schedule you will be asked for the current user s password on completing the task creation Use the following credentials The task will always run under the credentials you specify whether started manually or executed on schedule Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account 2 Click OK To learn more about using credentials in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 see the Owners and credentials p 31 section To learn more about operations available depending on the user privileges see the User privileges on a managed machine p 30 section 6 7 2 Archive selection To select an archive 1 Enter the full path to the location in the Path field or select the desired folder in the folders tree fthe archive is stored in a centralized vault expand the Centralized group and click the vault fthe archive is stored in a personal vault expand the Personal group and click the vault If the archive is stored
331. from the management console by selecting Tools gt Create bootable media or as a separate component and follow the step by step instructions described in the Bootable Media Builder p 254 section Booting multiple machines from the Acronis PXE Server makes sense if there is a Dynamic Host Control Protocol DHCP server on your network Then the network interfaces of the booted machines will automatically obtain IP addresses Acronis PXE Server Installation To install Acronis PXE Server 1 Run the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 setup file 2 Select Acronis PXE Server from the list of Centralized management components 3 Follow the onscreen instructions Acronis PXE Server runs as a service immediately after installation Later on it will automatically launch at each system restart You can stop and start Acronis PXE Server in the same way as other Windows services Setting up a machine to boot from PXE For bare metal it is enough that the machine s BIOS supports network booting On a machine that has an operating system on the hard disk the BIOS must be configured so that the network interface card is either the first boot device or at least prior to the Hard Drive device The example below shows one of reasonable BIOS configurations If you don t insert bootable media the machine will boot from the network Netuork boot fron AMD An 9CI70A j Enter In some BIOS versions you have to save changes to BIOS after
332. fully When backup fails to send a notification when the backup task has failed The When user interaction is required check box is always selected 4 For the e mail message to include the log entries related to the backup select the Add full log to the notification check box 5 Click Additional e mail parameters to configure additional e mail parameters as follows then click OK From type the e mail address of the user from whom the message will be sent If you leave this field empty messages will be constructed as if they are from the destination address Use encryption you can opt for encrypted connection to the mail server SSL and TLS encryption types are available for selection Some Internet service providers require authentication on the incoming mail server before being allowed to send something If this is your case select the Log on to incoming mail server check box to enable a POP server and to set up its settings Incoming mail server POP enter the name of the POP server Port set the port of the POP server By default the port is set to 110 User name enter the user name Password enter the password Select the Use the specified outgoing mail server check box to enable an SMTP server and to set up its settings Outgoing mail server SMTP enter the name of the SMTP server Port set the port of the SMTP server By default the port is set to 25 Username enter the
333. fy retention rules Grandfather Father Son to use the Grandfather Father Son backup scheme The scheme does not allow data to be backed up more than once a day You set the days of week when the daily backup will be performed and select from these days the day of weekly monthly backup Then you set the retention periods for the daily referred to as sons weekly referred to as fathers and monthly referred to as grandfathers backups The expired backups will be deleted automatically Tower of Hanoi to use the Tower of Hanoi backup scheme where you schedule when and how often to back up sessions and select the number of backup levels up to 16 In this scheme the data can be backed up more than once a day By setting up the backup schedule and selecting backup levels you automatically obtain the rollback period the guaranteed number of sessions that you can go back at any time The automatic cleanup mechanism maintains the required rollback period by deleting the expired backups and keeping the most recent backups of each level Custom to create a custom scheme where you are free to set up a backup strategy in the way your enterprise needs it most specify multiple schedules for different backup types add conditions and specify the retention rules Back up now scheme With the Back up now scheme the backup will be performed immediately right after you click the OK button at the bottom of the page In the Backu
334. fy which files and folders to exclude Set up any of the following parameters Exclude all hidden files and folders Select this check box to skip files and folders with the Hidden attribute If a folder is Hidden all of its contents including files that are not Hidden will be excluded Exclude all system files and folders Select this check box to skip files and folders with the System attribute If a folder is System all of its contents including files that are not System will be excluded You can view file or folder attributes in the file folder properties or by using the attrib command For more information refer to the Help and Support Center in Windows Exclude files matching the following criteria Select this check box to skip files whose names match any of the criteria called file masks in the list use the Add Edit Remove and Remove All buttons to create the list of file masks You can use one or more wildcard characters and in a file mask The asterisk substitutes for zero or more characters in a file name for example the file mask Doc txt yields files such as Doc txt and Document txt The question mark substitutes for exactly one character in a file name for example the file mask Doc txt yields files such as Doc1 txt and Docs txt but not the files Doc txt or Doc11 txt Exclusion examples By name File1 log Excludes all files named File1 log By path C Finance te
335. g Windows and Linux You also have a VMware ESX server 4 that hosts two guest systems You have to protect each server as a whole the users data on the workstations and the virtual machines You want to be able to track the health of the data protection be sure that the backup archives do not store duplicated information and that the obsolete backups are deleted from the storage in a timely manner These goals can be achieved by regular backup of the desired data items to a centralized vault with deduplication Administrator D a A AQA See Setting up the Acronis infrastructure 1 Install Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Console Console on the machine which you prefer to operate from 3 The console enables you to access and manage other Acronis components through Graphical User Interface Install Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server AMS on one of the Windows servers 2 The management server is your single entry point to the Acronis infrastructure Install Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent on each of the machines to back up the machine s disks volumes or files Agent W Agent for Windows Agent L Agent for Linux When installing the agents register each of the machines on the management server To do so enter the server s name or IP address and the server s administrator credentials in the appropriate window of the installation wizard Or alternatively add the ma
336. g rewinding and reading of the following tapes containing the data backups tapes storing the incremental backup selected to recover the data tapes storing the last full backup created before the selected incremental one tapes storing the last differential backup created after the last full backup but before the selected incremental one if necessary tapes containing all incremental backups created after the last full or differential backups before the selected incremental one if necessary While a recovery task is running the following tape specific information is accessible from the management console labels of all the tapes that may be required for the operation label of the tape that is currently being read labels of the tapes that have already been read labels of tapes that are still waiting to be read with information of their current availability loaded or not Managing a tape library To manage a tape library the following tasks procedures are in the product Inventory p 141 Rescan p 142 Labeling p 142 Any user with access to a managed vault on a tape library is able to perform these operations However two or more users cannot manage a tape library drive simultaneously because some operations can take minutes hours or even days For example if a user launches a tape library Rescan task all other users requests to perform the same task will be canceled automatically as it is already ru
337. g Excludes the file named test log located in the folder C Finance Mask eS Excludes all files with the log extension Mask my log Excludes all log files with names consisting of five symbols and starting with my The above settings are not effective for the files or folders that were explicitly selected for backup For example assume that you selected the folder MyFolder and the file MyFile tmp outside that folder and selected to skip all tmp files In this case all tmp files in the folder MyFolder will be skipped during the backup process but the file MyFile tmp will not be skipped Pre Post commands This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and PE based bootable media The option enables you to define the commands to be automatically executed before and after the backup procedure The following scheme illustrates when pre post commands are executed Pre backup Backup Post backup command command Examples of how you can use the pre post commands delete some temporary files from the disk before starting backup configure a third party antivirus product to be started each time before the backup starts copy an archive to another location after the backup ends The program does not support interactive commands i e commands that require user input for example pause To specify pre post commands 1 Enable pre post commands execution by checking the following op
338. g Tools gt Create Bootable Media or as a separate component Select the way volumes and network resources will be handled called the media style A media with Linux style volume handling displays the volumes as for example hda1 and sdb2 It tries to reconstruct MD devices and logical LVM volumes before starting a recovery A media with Windows style volume handling displays the volumes as for example C and D It provides access to dynamic LDM volumes The wizard will guide you through the necessary operations Please refer to Linux based bootable media p 254 for details PE based bootable media Acronis Plug in for WinPE can be added to WinPE distributions based on any of the following kernels Windows XP Professional with Service Pack 2 PE 1 5 Windows Server 2003 with Service Pack 1 PE 1 6 Windows Vista PE 2 0 Windows Vista SP1 and Windows Server 2008 PE 2 1 Windows 7 PE 3 0 If you already have media with PE1 x distribution unpack the media ISO to a local folder and start the Bootable Media Builder either from the management console by selecting Tools gt Create Bootable Media or as a separate component The wizard will guide you through the necessary operations Please refer to Adding the Acronis Plug in to WinPE 1 x p 258 for details To be able to create or modify PE 2 x or 3 0 images install Bootable Media Builder on a machine where Windows Automated Installation Kit AIK is install
339. g and the options changed against the default values Progress The Progress tab is available while the task is running It is common for all types of tasks The tab provides information about task progress elapsed time and other parameters Backup plan details The Backup plan details window also duplicated on the Information panel aggregates in four tabs all the information on the selected backup plan The respective message will appear at the top of the tabs if one of the plan s tasks requires user interaction It contains a brief description of the problem and action buttons that let you select the appropriate action or stop the plan Backup plan The Backup plan tab provides the following general information on the selected plan Name name of the backup plan Origin whether the plan was created on the managed machine using direct management local origin or appeared on the machine as a result of deploying a backup policy from the management server centralized origin Policy for backup plans with centralized origin name of the backup policy whose deployment created the backup plan Account the name of the account under which the plan runs Owner the name of the user who created or last modified the plan State execution state p 183 of the backup plan Status status p 183 of the backup plan Schedule whether the task is scheduled or set to start manually Last backup how much
340. ged centralized vault where deduplication is enabled is called a deduplicating vault When you create a managed centralized vault you can specify whether to enable deduplication in it A deduplicating vault cannot be created on a tape device Deduplication database Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node managing a deduplicating vault maintains the deduplication database which contains the hash values of all items stored in the vault except for those that cannot be deduplicated such as encrypted files The deduplication database is stored in the folder which is specified by the Database path in the Create centralized vault view when creating the vault Deduplication database can be created ina local folder only The size of the deduplication database is about one percent of the total size of archives in the vault In other words each terabyte of new non duplicate data adds about 10 GB to the database In case the database is corrupted or the storage node is lost while the vault retains archives and the service folder containing metadata the new storage node rescans the vault and re creates the database How deduplication works Deduplication at source When performing a backup to a deduplicating vault Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent reads items being backed up disk blocks for disk backup or files for file backup and calculates a fingerprint of each block Such a fingerprint often called a hash value uniquely repr
341. ges to SNMP server check box The messages are sent over UDP The next section contains additional information about Setting up SNMP services on the receiving machine p 96 Setting up SNMP services on the receiving machine Windows To install the SNMP service on a machine running Windows Start gt Control Panel gt Add or Remove Programs gt Add Remove Windows Components Select Management and Monitoring Tools Click Details Select the Simple Network Management Protocol check box Click OK ON a ee You might be asked for Immib2 dll that can be found on the installation disc of your operating system Linux To receive SNMP messages on a machine running Linux the net snmp for RHEL and SUSE or the snmpd for Debian package has to be installed SNMP can be configured using the snmpconf command The default configuration files are located in the etc snmp directory etc snmp snmpd conf configuration file for the Net SNMP SNMP agent etc snmp snmptrapd conf configuration file for the Net SNMP trap daemon EE Log cleanup rules This option specifies how to clean up the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 agent log This option defines the maximum size of the agent log folder in Windows XP 2003 Server ALLUSERSPROFILE Application Data Acronis BackupAndRecovery MMS LogEvents The preset is Maximum log size 1 GB On cleanup keep 95 of the maximum log size When the option is enabled the program compar
342. h This option is available only if you selected On schedule in Apply the rules Examples Weekly full backup The following scheme yields a full backup performed every Friday night Full backup Schedule Weekly every Friday at 10 00 PM Here all parameters except Schedule in Full backup are left empty All backups in the archive are kept indefinitely no archive cleanup is performed Full and incremental backup plus cleanup With the following scheme the archive will consist of weekly full backups and daily incremental backups We further require that a full backup begin only after all users have logged off Full backup Schedule Weekly every Friday at 10 00 PM Full backup Conditions User is logged off Incremental Schedule Weekly every workday at 9 00 PM Also let all backups older than one year be deleted from the archive and let the cleanup be performed upon creating a new backup Retention rules Delete backups older than 12 months Apply the rules After backing up By default a one year old full backup will not be deleted until all incremental backups that depend on it become subject to deletion too For more information see Retention rules p 39 Monthly full weekly differential and daily incremental backups plus cleanup This example demonstrates the use of all options available in the Custom scheme Suppose that we need a scheme that will produce monthly full backups weekly differential backups and dai
343. han copying files and may significantly speed up the backup process when it comes to backing up large volumes of data Note for Linux users We recommend that you unmount any volumes that contain non journaling file systems such as the ext2 file system before backing them up Otherwise these volumes might contain corrupted files upon recovery recovery of these volumes with resize might fail Entire virtual machines Available if Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Hyper V or for ESX ESXi is installed Select this option to back up one or more virtual machines residing on a virtualization server Backing up a virtual machine means backing up all the machine s disks plus the machine configuration With this source type you can back up multiple machines This comes in handy when having small in terms of virtual disks size but numerous legacy servers such as those resulting from workload consolidation A separate archive will be created for each machine Volumes of a virtual machine Available if Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Hyper V or for ESX ESXi is installed Select this option to back up individual disks or volumes within a virtual machine residing ona virtualization server With this source type you select the machine and then select the disks volumes to back up This comes in handy when the operating system and applications such as a database server run on a virtual disk but the data such as a data
344. hange due to a HDD replacement or hardware loss In such case with the help of Acronis Disk Director Lite the user has the possibility to recreate the necessary disk configuration so that the volume image can be recovered exactly as it was or with any alteration of the disk or volume structure the user might consider necessary All operations on disks and volumes involve a certain risk of data damage Operations on system bootable or data volumes must be carried out very carefully to avoid potential problems with the booting process or hard disk data storage Operations with hard disks and volumes take a certain amount of time and any power loss unintentional turning off of the machine or accidental pressing of the Reset button during the procedure could result in volume damage and data loss All operations on volumes of dynmic disks in Windows XP and Windows 2000 require Acronis Managed Machine Service to be run under an account with administrator s rights Please take all necessary precautions p 269 to avoid possible data loss 6 11 1 Basic precautions To avoid any possible disk and volume structure damage or data loss please take all necessary precautions and follow these simple rules 1 Create a disk image of the disk on which volumes will be created or managed Having your most important data backed up to another hard disk or CD will allow you to work on disk volumes being reassured that your data is safe Acroni
345. happen if I delete the backup plan The plan s deletion deletes all its tasks Why can t I delete the backup plan The backup plan is in the Running state A backup plan cannot be deleted if at least one of its tasks is running Do not have the appropriate privilege Without the Administrator s privileges on the machine a user cannot delete plans owned by other users The backup plan has a centralized origin A centralized plan can be deleted by the management server administrator by revoking the backup policy that produced the plan Task Click XxX Delete Why can t I delete the task Task belongs to a backup plan A task belonging to a backup plan cannot be deleted separately from the plan Edit the plan to remove the task or delete the entire plan Do not have the appropriate privilege Without the Administrator privileges on the machine a user cannot delete tasks owned by other users o Click Refresh The management console will update the list of backup plans and tasks existing on the machine with the most recent information Though the list is refreshed automatically based on events the data may not be retrieved immediately from the managed machine due to some latency Manual refresh guarantees that the most recent data is displayed backup plans and tasks Click the column s header to sort the backup plans and tasks in ascending order Click it once again to sort the plans and tasks in descending o
346. hat was chosen as the target the user will receive a warning The selected target disk is not empty The data on its volumes will be overwritten meaning that all the data currently located on the chosen target disk will be lost irrevocably Cloning method and advanced options The Clone basic disk operation usually means that the information from the source disk is transferred to the target As is So if the destination disk is the same size and even if it is larger it is possible to transfer all the information there exactly as it is stored at the source But with the wide range of available hardware it is normal that the target disk would differ in size from the source If the destination is larger then it would be advisable to resize the source disk volumes to avoid leaving unallocated space on the target disk by selecting the Proportionally resize volumes option The option to Clone basic disk as is remains but the default method of cloning will be carried out with proportional enlargement of all the source disk volumes so that no unallocated space remains on the target disk If the destination is smaller then the As is option of cloning will be unavailable and proportional resizing of the source disk volumes will be mandatory The program analyzes the target disk to establish whether its size will be sufficient to hold all the data from the source disk without any loss If such transfer with proportional resizing of the so
347. he current user account does not have access permissions to the location You might need to provide special credentials for a network share or a storage node vault Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account 2 Click OK According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer 6 5 4 Volume selection Select the volumes to mount and configure the mounting parameters for each of the selected volumes as follows 1 Select the check box for each volume you need to mount 2 Click on the selected volume to set its mounting parameters Access mode choose the mode you want the volume to be mounted in Read only enables exploring and opening files within the backup without committing any changes Read write with this mode the program assumes that the backup content will be modified and creates an incremental backup to capture the changes Assign letter in Windows Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 will assign an unused letter to the mounted volume If required select another letter to assign from the drop down list Mount point in Linux specify the directory where you want
348. he Group Policy is disabled on the machine 3 4 Default backup and recovery options 3 4 1 Default backup options Each Acronis agent has its own default backup options Once an agent is installed the default options have pre defined values which are referred to as presets in the documentation When creating a backup plan you can either use a default option or override the default option with the custom value that will be specific for this plan only You can also customize a default option itself by changing its value against the pre defined one The new value will be used by default in all backup plans you will create later on this machine To view and change the default backup options connect the console to the managed machine and then select Options gt Default backup and recovery options gt Default backup options from the top menu Availability of the backup options The set of available backup options depends on The environment the agent operates in Windows Linux bootable media The type of the data being backed up disk file The backup destination networked location or local disk The backup scheme Back up now or using the scheduler The following table summarizes the availability of the backup options Agent for Windows Agent for Linux Bootable media Linux based or PE based Disk backup File backup Disk backup File backup Disk backup File backup Archive protection p 99 password encryption
349. he Log p 193 view containing the list of the plan related log entries Task Click L View log You will be taken to the Log p 193 view containing the list of the task related log entries Backup plan Click gt Run In the Run Backup Plan p 190 window select the task you need to run Running the backup plan starts the selected task of that plan immediately in spite of its schedule and conditions Task Click b Run The task will be executed immediately in spite of its schedule and conditions Backup plan Click m Stop Stopping the running backup plan stops all its tasks Thus all the task operations will be aborted Task Click J Stop What will happen if stop the task Generally stopping the task aborts its operation backup recovery validation exporting conversion migration The task enters the Stopping state first then becomes Idle The task schedule if created remains valid To complete the operation you will have to run the task again recovery task from the disk backup The target volume will be deleted and its space unallocated you will get the same result if the recovery is unsuccessful To recover the lost volume you will have to run the task once again recovery task from the file backup The aborted operation may cause changes in the destination folder Some files may be recovered but some not depending when you stopped the task To recover all the files you will have
350. he OU but it has some of the data the sales machines have To back up this data the administrator has to add the laptop to G2 by force This can be done by creating a static group G3 and moving the static group into the dynamic one The policy applied to the parent group G2 will be applied to the child group G3 but members of G3 are not considered as members of G2 and so its dynamic nature is considered intact In real life the administrator would most likely prefer to protect the manager s machine by applying the policy directly to the machine without including it in any group so this case is just an illustration of nesting different types of groups With multiple group members nesting of the groups comes in handy Operations with custom groups You create empty groups in the generic root Physical machines or Virtual machines or within existing groups and populate them by manual adding machines static groups or by adding criteria of dynamic group membership You can also edit a group that is change the group name change the group description change the dynamic membership criteria transform a static group into a dynamic one by adding membership criteria transform a dynamic group into a static one with two options keep the group members remove the group members move a group from the root to another group any group type to any group type move a group from the parent group to the root move a group from one
351. he Refresh button to refresh the list of archives Click OK 6 4 3 Backup selection To specify a backup to validate 1 In the upper pane select a backup by its creation date time The bottom part of the window displays the selected backup content assisting you to find the right backup Click OK 6 4 4 Location selection To select a location Enter the full path to the location in the Path field or select the desired location in the folders tree To select a centralized vault expand the Centralized group and click the appropriate vault To select a personal vault expand the Personal group and click the appropriate vault To select a local folder CD DVD drive or locally attached tape device expand the Local folders group and click the required folder To select a network share expand the Network folders group select the required networked machine and then click the shared folder If the network share requires access credentials the program will ask for them To select FTP or SFTP server expand the corresponding group and click the appropriate folder on the server According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer Using the archives table To assist you with choosing the right location the table displays the names of t
352. he archives contained in each location you select While you are reviewing the location content archives can be added deleted or modified by another user or by the program itself according to scheduled operations Use the Refresh button to refresh the list of archives 6 4 5 Access credentials for source Specify the credentials required for access to the location where the backup archive is stored To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Use the task credentials The program will access the location using the credentials of the task account specified in the General section Use the following credentials The program will access the location using the credentials you specify Use this option if the task account does not have access permissions to the location You might need to provide special credentials for a network share or a storage node vault Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account 2 Click OK According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer 6 4 6 When to validate As validation is a resource intensive operation it makes sense to schedule validation to
353. he attempts will be stopped as soon as the connection is resumed OR the specified number of attempts is performed depending on which comes first Additional settings Specify the additional settings for the recovery operation by selecting or clearing the following check boxes Set current date and time for recovered files This option is effective only when recovering files The preset is Enabled This option defines whether to recover the files date and time from the archive or assign the files the current date and time Validate backup before recovery The preset is Disabled This option defines whether to validate a backup to ensure that the backup is not corrupted before data is recovered from it Check file system after recovery This option is effective only when recovering disks or volumes When operating under bootable media this option is not effective for the NTFS file system The preset is Disabled This option defines whether to check the integrity of the file system after a disk or volume recovery Restart machine automatically if it is required for recovery This option is effective when recovery takes place on a machine running an operating system The preset is Disabled The option defines whether to reboot the machine automatically if it is required for recovery Such might be the case when a volume locked by the operating system has to be recovered Reboot machine after recovery This option is effective wh
354. he backup policies OK Warning and or Error Schedule The types of the backup policies schedules Manual and or Scheduled Manual schedule means that the corresponding centralized backup plan runs only when you start it manually Owner The list of users who created the backup policies With the default filter settings the report includes all backup policies Report view Under Report view choose how the report will look Select whether to show all items in a single table or to group them by a particular column Specify which table columns to show and in which order Specify how to sort the table Report about the backup plans In this view you can generate a report about backup plans existing on registered machines This report consists of one or more tables Filters Under Filters choose which backup plans to include in the report Only the backup plans that meet all filter criteria are included Origin The types of origin of the backup plans Local and or Centralized Backup policies available only for centralized backup plans The backup policies on which the centralized backup plans are based Machines The list of machines on which the backup plans exist Execution state The execution states of the backup plans for example Running Status The statuses of the backup plans OK Warning and or Error Last finish time The period within which the last backup finished under each of
355. he items in this section to obtain the relevant information This will take you to the Backup plans and tasks p 182 view with pre filtered plans or tasks For instance if you click Local under Backup plans the Backup plans and tasks view will be opened with backup plans filtered by the Local origin Tasks need interaction This window accumulates all the tasks that require user interaction in one place It enables you to specify your decision such as to confirm reboot or to retry after freeing up the disk space on each of the tasks Until at least one task requires interaction you can open this window at any time from the managed machine s Dashboard p 180 If you select the check box for the Do not show this window when tasks require interaction will see this information in the tasks details and dashboard parameter the tasks will be displayed on the Dashboard among other alerts and warnings Alternatively you can review the task execution states in the Backup plans and tasks p 182 view and specify your decision on each task in the Information panel or in the Task details p 190 window 6 1 2 Backup plans and tasks The Backup plans and tasks view keeps you informed of data protection on a given machine It lets you monitor and manage backup plans and tasks A backup plan is a set of rules that specify how the given data will be protected on a given machine Physically a backup plan is a bundle of tasks configured for exe
356. he machine where the agent is installed and create bootable media with this functionality Universal Restore handles differences in devices that are critical for Windows start up such as storage controllers motherboard or chipset Deduplication This add on enables the agent to back up data to deduplicating vaults managed by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node Agent for Hyper V Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Hyper V protects virtual machines residing on a Hyper V virtualization server The agent allows for backing up virtual machines from the host without having to install agents on each virtual machine The agent installs on Windows 2008 Server x64 any edition or Microsoft Hyper V Server 2008 as an add on to Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows Integration services p 49 have to be installed on the guest systems 1 3 2 Agent for Linux This agent enables disk level and file level data protection under Linux Disk backup Disk level data protection is based on backing up either a disk or a volume file system as a whole along with all information necessary for the operating system to boot or all the disk sectors using the sector by sector approach raw mode A backup that contains a copy of a disk or a volume in a packaged form is called a disk volume backup or a disk volume image It is possible to recover disks or volumes as a whole from such backup as well as individual folders or files
357. he program suggests the cluster size best suited to the volume with the chosen file system 3 If you click OK to proceed with the Format Volume operation you ll add a pending operation of formatting a volume To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 283 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them The new volume structure will be graphically represented in the Disk management view If you set a 64K cluster size for FAT16 FAT32 or an 8KB 64KB cluster size for NTFS Windows can mount the volume but some programs e g Setup programs might calculate its disk space incorrectly 6 11 7 Pending operations All operations which were prepared by the user in manual mode or with the aid of a wizard are considered pending until the user issues the specific command for the changes to be made permanent Until then Acronis Disk Director Lite will only demonstrate the new volume structure that will result from the operations that have been planned to be performed on disks and volumes This approach enables you to control all planned operations double check the intended changes and if necessary cancel operations before they are executed To prevent you from performing any unintentional change on your disk the program will first display the list of all pending operations The Disk management view contains the toolbar with icons to launch the Undo Redo and Commit actions
358. he unneeded columns and show the hidden ones See the Filtering and sorting log entries p 194 section for details Inthe log table select the log entry or log entries to take action on it See the Actions on log entries p 193 section for details Use the Information panel to review detailed information on the selected log entry The panel is collapsed by default To expand the panel click the Al chevron The content of the panel is also duplicated in the Log entry details p 195 window Opening the Log with pre filtered log entries Having selected items in other administration views Dashboard Backup plans and tasks you can open the Log view with pre filtered log entries for the item in question Thus you do not have to configure filters in the log table yourself C Dashboard In the calendar right click on any highlighted date and then select L View log The Log view appears with the list of log entries already filtered by the date in question Backup plans and tasks select a backup plan or a task and then click L View log The Log view will display a list of the log entries related to the selected plan or task Actions on log entries All the operations described below are performed by clicking the corresponding items on the log toolbar All these operations can also be performed with the context menu by right clicking the log entry or with the Log actions bar on the Actions and tools pane The
359. heck if the command is correct Check box Selection Fail the task if the command Selected Cleared Selected Cleared execution fails Do not back up until the Selected Selected Cleared Cleared command execution is complete Result Preset Continue the N A Continue the backup after the backup concurrently Continue the backup command is with the command only after the 2 executed despite execution and command is A i command irrespective of the successfully execution failure command execution executed Delete the or success result TIB file and temporary files and fail the task if the command execution fails File level backup snapshot This option is effective only for file level backup in Windows and Linux operating systems This option defines whether to back up files one by one or by taking an instant data snapshot Note Files that are stored on network shares are always backed up one by one The preset is Create snapshot if it is possible Select one of the following Always create a snapshot The snapshot enables backing up of all files including files opened for exclusive access The files will be backed up at the same point in time Choose this setting only if these factors are critical that is backing up files without a snapshot does not make sense To use a snapshot the backup plan has to run under the account with the Administrator or Backup Operator privileges If a snapshot
360. heme is used it is not possible to change the number of levels In all other cases the scheme can be changed and should continue to operate as if existing archives were created by a new scheme For empty archives all changes are possible Why can t edit the backup plan The backup plan is currently running Editing of the currently running backup plan is impossible Do not have the appropriate privilege Without the Administrator privileges on the machine a user cannot edit plans owned by other users The backup plan has a centralized origin Direct editing of centralized backup plans is not possible You need to edit the original backup policy Why can t edit the task Task belongs to a backup plan Only tasks that do not belong to a backup plan such as a recovery task can be modified by direct editing When you need to modify a task belonging to a local backup plan edit the backup plan A task belonging to a centralized backup plan can be modified by editing the centralized policy that spawned the plan Only the management server administrator can do so Do not have the appropriate privilege Without the Administrator privileges on the machine a user cannot modify tasks owned by other users Delete a plan task Refresh table Filtering and sorting Sort backup plans and tasks by name state status type origin etc Filter plans tasks by name or owner Backup plan Click XxX Delete What will
361. hine or group to which the policy was applied directly is boldfaced and marked with an icon All items are interactive i e when you click on a machine or a group its parent group view will be opened Filtering and sorting machines To Do Sort machines by any column _ Click the column s header to sort the machines in ascending order Click it once again to sort the machines in descending order Filter machines by name Type a machine s name in the field below the corresponding column s header As a result you will see the list of machines whose names fully or just partly coincide with the entered value Filter machines by status last In a field below the corresponding column s header select the required value connect last backup from the list availability Configuring the machines table By default the table has five columns that are displayed others are hidden If required you can hide the shown columns and show the hidden ones To show or hide columns 1 Right click any column header to open the context menu The menu items that are ticked off correspond to the column headers presented in the table 2 Click the items you want to be displayed hidden Actions on groups Actions are available when you select the Ge Physical machines view in the Navigation tree and then click on a group The following is a guideline for you to perform actions on selected groups To Do Create a custom static ora dynamic group
362. hine or its disks install Agent for Windows or Agent for Linux on the machine A SAN LUN disk attached to an ESX ESXi virtual machine in the Physical compatibility mode cannot be backed up from the host while the virtual machine is online running To back up such disk either stop the machine or install Agent for Windows or Agent for Linux on the machine Selecting a virtual machine s disks and volumes To back up individual disks or volumes within a virtual machine residing on a virtualization server 1 Select the virtual machine whose volumes you need to back up Use the right part of the window to view details on the selected virtual machine Click OK In the Selecting disks and volumes p 199 window select the virtual machine disks or volumes Backing up volumes within a virtual machine is similar to backing up a physical machine s volumes The virtual machine configuration will be also backed up Backing up a virtual machine s volumes yields a standard disk backup p 372 Having Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows or for Linux you can mount its volumes recover individual files from this backup and recover disks and volumes from the backup to a physical machine The virtual machine configuration stored in a virtual machine backup will be suggested by default at recovering the backup content to a new virtual machine Limitations A Hyper V virtual machine that uses at least one pass through disk a physical disk
363. hine will be created on 1 Choose the Place on the virtualization server that select option 2 Inthe left part of the window select the virtualization server Use the right part of the window to review details on the selected server 3 Click OK to return to the Data recovery page To select the type of virtual machine 1 Choose the Save as files of the VM type that I select to the folder that I specify option 2 Inthe left part of the window select the virtual machine type Use the right part of the window to review details on the selected virtual machine type 3 Click OK to return to the Data recovery page Virtual machine settings The following virtual machine settings can be configured Storage Initial setting the default storage of the virtualization server if the new machine is created on the virtualization server Otherwise the current user s documents folder This is the place where the new virtual machine will be created Whether you can change the storage on the virtualization server or not depends on the virtualization product brand and settings VMware ESX may have multiple storages A Microsoft Hyper V server enables creating a new virtual machine in any local folder Memory Initial setting if not contained in the backup the default setting of the virtualization server This is the amount of memory allocated to the new virtual machine The memory adjustment range depends on the host hardware the host opera
364. hive is different on different days The minimum number of days we are guaranteed to have is called the roll back period The following table shows full backup and roll back periods for schemes of various levels Number of Full backup On different Roll back levels every days can go period back 2 2 days 1 to 2 days 1 day 3 4 days 2 to 5 days 2 days 4 8 days 4 to 11 days 4 days 5 16 days 8 to 23 days 8 days 6 32 days 16 to 47 days 16 days Adding a level doubles the full backup and roll back periods To see why the number of recovery days varies let us return to the previous example Here are the backups we have on day 12 numbers in gray denote deleted backups pa 2 34 5 ei7 3 9 10 14 12 _ ESRSESESESESES W 2 A new level 3 differential backup has not yet been created so the backup of day five is still stored Since it depends on the full backup of day one that backup is available as well This enables us to go as far back as 11 days which is the best case scenario The following day however a new third level differential backup is created and the old full backup is deleted pai 2 3i4 sie 7 3 fio io 14 12 13 This gives us only a four day recovery interval which turns out to be the worst case scenario On day 14 the interval is five days It increases on subsequent days before decreasing again and so on P21 2 3 a4 s5 e6 7 89 10 12 22 13 14 ee ee ee ee The roll back per
365. host where the virtual appliance will be stored When deploying the agent onto a vCenter cluster this is the datastore shared by all the servers included into the cluster For more information please see Support for vCenter clusters p 312 Network interface This is the host s internal network the virtual appliance will be included in If there are multiple networks on the host the program selects the one that is more suitable for the agent operation and specifies this network as default Only those networks that have a connection to the host s Service Console or Management Network in terms of the VMware Infrastructure are available for selection This is critical to the operation of the agent The next setting appears differently depending on how you are going to deploy the agent When deploying through the vCenter server The account that will be used for agent connection to the vCenter server When deploying directly to the ESX ESXi server The account that will be used for agent connection to the ESX server The management server will use this account to establish a trusted relationship with the agent during registration Centralized backup plans and recovery tasks originating from the management server will run under this account by default This means the account must have the necessary privileges p 313 on the vCenter Server By default the software will use the account that you have already specified either when configuring
366. how the machine will be registered on the management server by its name recommended or by its IP address 5 Click OK and the machine will be registered on the management server To disable centralized management select Stand alone management 3 3 2 Event tracing It is possible to duplicate log events generated by the agent s operating on the managed machine in the Application Event Log of Windows or send the events to the specified SNMP managers If you do not modify the event tracing options anywhere except for here your settings will be effective for each local backup plan and each task created on the machine You can override the settings set here exclusively for the events that occur during backup or during recovery in the Default backup and recovery options p 97 In this case the settings set here will be effective for operations other than backup and recovery such as archive validation or cleanup You can further override the settings set in the default backup and recovery options when creating a backup plan or a recovery task The settings you obtain in this case will be plan specific or task specific Windows event log This option is effective only in Windows operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media This option defines whether the agent s operating on the managed machine have to log events in the Application Event Log of Windows to see this log run eventvwr exe
367. iate options as follows Types of events to send choose the types of events All events Errors and warnings or Errors only Server name IP type the name or IP address of the host running the SNMP management application the messages will be sent to Community type the name of the SNMP community to which both the host running SNMP management application and the sending machine belong The typical community is public To disable sending SNMP messages clear the Send messages to SNMP server check box The messages are sent over UDP 3 2 4 Domain access credentials This option determines the user name and password that the management server will use to access the domain The preset is No credentials The management server needs domain access credentials when working with a dynamic group that is based on the Organizational unit criterion p 305 When you are creating such group and no credentials are given by this option the program will ask you for credentials and save them in this option It is sufficient to specify the credentials of a user who is a member of the Domain Users group on the domain EFA Acronis WOL Proxy This option works in combination with the Use Wake On LAN p 174 advanced scheduling setting Use this option if the management server has to wake up for backup machines located in another subnet When the scheduled operation is about to start the management server sends out magic packets
368. icy can be applied to a machine 2 A policy can be revoked from a machine Policy on a group 1 A policy can be applied to a group 2 A policy can be revoked from a group 3 A policy applied to a group cannot be revoked from a machine 4 To revoke the policy from the machine remove the machine from the group The same policy on a group and on a machine 1 The same policy can be applied to a group and to a machine Nothing changes on the machine at the second application of the same policy but the server remembers that the policy has been applied twice A policy revoked from the group remains on the machine A policy revoked from the machine remains on the group and therefore on the machine To completely revoke the policy from the machine revoke it from both the group and the machine Operations with a machine This section is a simplified illustration of what happens with the policies on a machine when the machine is moved copied or deleted from a group In the diagram below the container stands for a group the one color circle stands for a machine with one applied policy the two color circle stands for a machine with two applied policies the white circle stands for a machine with no policy applied 1 Here is the initial state two custom groups contain different machines A policy is applied to one group another policy is applied to another group The next schemes illustrate results of the specified act
369. ie 118 i scal IDseaL INGE 63 208782 BTCS 1 2 sda2 Pri 208845 15550920 ReiserFS l 3 gedas Pri 15759765 1A120895 Linux Swap Dalsile Be Table 0 Table Unallocated 1 LG PELE SS Unallocated Disk 3 3 1 scel Pri 63 LO 7SSVS2 EXt3 Unallocated L655 795 16063 Unallocated Disk 4 AS lee sacell Pri 63 LG ISS 1 SZ None Unallocated LG 755 795 16065 Unallocated pisk 5 Table 0 Table Unallocated il 1G 77S 9 Unallocated Dynamic amp GPT Volumes DYN1 mdo SIS LAL Aarts Ext3 DISKER 0 63 Daisies al 0 63 You can back up the RAID array as follows trueimagecmd creat partition DYN1 filename tmp raid tib progress on In the Graphical User Interface you can select the DYN1 check box Recovery Parameters of software RAID arrays are not backed up so they can only be recovered over a basic volume to unallocated space or to a previously configured array Recovery can be performed in Linux or a Linux based bootable media When started from bootable media the bootable agent tries to access parameters of a software disk array and configure it However if the necessary information is lost the array cannot be configured automatically In this case create a software array manually by using a command such as mdadm and then restart the recovery procedure For example the following command creates an MD device dev mdO in the RAID 1 configuration on the basic volumes dev sdc1 and dev sdd1 mdadm create dev md level 1 raid devi
370. iews underneath the Information bar After a virtual appliance is created and registered a corresponding group of virtual machines appears on the management server If the deployment completed but the group of virtual machines is missing Access the virtual appliance console using the vSphere VMware Infrastructure client and check the agent configuration Configure the agent manually if required as described in Installing ESX ESXi virtual appliance Add the virtual appliance to the management server manually as described in Adding a machine to the management server p 294 Support for vCenter clusters In a vCenter cluster a single Agent for ESX ESXi backs up virtual machines hosted on all the cluster s hosts Deploying Agent for ESX ESXi to a cluster When configuring the agent deployment from a management server you can select a cluster as a regular ESX host The agent virtual appliance VA is deployed to a storage shared by all the cluster s hosts Normally this is an NFS share or a SAN LUN attached to each of the hosts Let s assume that the cluster contains three servers Server 1 uses storages A B C D Server 2 uses storages C D E Server 3 uses storages B C D The VA can be deployed to either C or D If there is no storage shared by all the servers you can import the VA manually into any of the hosts This will work but backup performance will be far from optimal After deployment the agent virtua
371. iguration After a volume is deleted its space is added to unallocated disk space It can be used for creation of a new volume or to change another volume s type If you need to delete a volume 1 Select a hard disk and a volume to be deleted 2 Select Delete volume or a similar item in the Operations sidebar list or click the Delete the selected volume icon on the toolbar If the volume contains any data you will receive the warning that all the information on this volume will be lost irrevocably 3 By clicking OK in the Delete volume window you ll add the pending operation of volume deletion To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 283 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them Set active volume If you have several primary volumes you must specify one to be the boot volume For this you can set a volume to become active A disk can have only one active volume so if you set a volume as active the volume which was active before will be automatically unset If you need to set a volume active 1 Select a primary volume on a basic MBR disk to set as active 2 Right click on the selected volume and then click Mark as active in the context menu If there is no other active volume in the system the pending operation of setting active volume will be added Please note that due to setting the new active volume the former active volume let
372. il 10 00 00 PM allows the task to be run 12 times from 10 AM to 10 PM during one day From lt gt Until lt gt In the Effective area set the following settings From lt gt Set up a date when this schedule will be enabled an effective date If this check box is cleared the task will be started on the nearest day and time you have specified above To lt gt Set up a date when this schedule will be disabled If this check box is cleared the task will be run for an indefinite number of months Advanced scheduling settings p 174 are available only for machines registered on Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server To specify these settings click Change in the Advanced settings area All the settings you made are displayed in the Result field at the bottom of the window Examples Last day of every month schedule Run the task once at 10 PM on the last day of every month The schedule s parameters are set up as follows Months lt All months gt 2 Days Last The task will run on the last day of every month despite its actual date 3 Once at 10 00 00 PM 4 Effective From empty To empty This schedule is widely used when creating a custom backup scheme The Last day of every month schedule is added to the full backups while the differential backups are scheduled to be performed once a week and incremental on workdays For more details see the Monthly full weekly differen
373. ile level security This option is effective only for recovery from file level backup of Windows files This option defines whether to recover NTFS permissions for files along with the files The preset is Recover files with their security settings If the file NTFS permissions were preserved during backup p 111 you can choose whether to recover the permissions or let the files inherit the NTFS permissions from the folder to which they are recovered Notifications Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 provides the ability of notifying users about recovery completion through e mail or the messaging service E mail This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media The option enables you to receive e mail notifications about the recovery task s successful completion failure or need for interaction along with the full log of the task The preset is Disabled To configure e mail notification 1 Select the Send e mail notifications check box to activate notifications 2 Inthe E mail addresses field type the e mail address to which notifications will be sent You can enter several addresses separated by semicolons 3 Under Send notifications select the appropriate check boxes as follows When backup completes successfully to send a notification when the backup task has completed successfully When backup fails to send a notification whe
374. ill 9 PM Friday twice at 12 PM and 9 PM i e same as on Monday Saturday once at 9 PM Sunday once at 9 PM Combining the identical times the following three schedules can be added to the task First schedule 1 Every 1 week s on Mon Fri 2 Every 9 hours From 12 00 00 PM Until 09 00 00 PM 3 Effective From not set To not set Second schedule 1 Every 1 week s on Tue Wed Thu 2 Every 3 hours From 09 00 00 AM until 09 00 00 PM 3 Effective From not set To not set Third schedule 1 Every 1 week s on Sat Sun 2 Once at 09 00 00 PM 3 Effective From not set To not set 5 3 Monthly schedule Monthly schedule is effective in Windows and Linux operating systems To specify a monthly schedule In the Schedule area select the appropriate parameter as follows Months lt gt Select a certain month s you want to run the task in Days lt gt Select specific days of the month to run the task on You can also select the last day of the month irrespective of its actual date On lt gt lt gt Select specific days of the weeks to run the task on In the During the day execute the task area select one of the following Once at lt gt Set up the time at which the task will be run once Every lt gt Set up how many times the task will be run during the specified time interval For example setting the task frequency to Every 1 hour From 10 00 00 AM unt
375. ill be launched as soon as any of the events occurs The table below lists the events available under Windows and Linux operating systems Event Windows Linux Time Daily Weekly Monthly Time passed since the last successful backup has completed ii specify the length of time User logon 5 any user current user specify the user s account User logoff j any user current user specify the user s account System startup t T Free space change g specify the amount of free space change on any volume selected for backup or containing data selected for backup An event in Windows event log specify the parameters of the event Condition For backup operations only you can specify a condition or multiple conditions in addition to the events Once any of the events occurs the scheduler checks the condition and runs the task if the condition is met With multiple conditions all of them must be met simultaneously to enable task execution The table below lists the conditions available under Windows and Linux operating systems Condition run the task only if Windows Linux User is idle a screen saver is running or the machine is locked t 7 Location s host is available t t The task run time is within the specified time interval i r All users are logged off t The specified period of time has passed since the last successful backup completed The scheduler behavior in case the event occurs but the condition
376. ing a backup plan Before creating your first backup plan p 368 please familiarize yourself with the basic concepts p 26 used in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 To create a backup plan perform the following steps General Plan name Optional Enter a unique name for the backup plan A conscious name lets you identify the plan among others Plan s credentials p 197 Optional The backup plan will run on behalf of the user who is creating the plan You can change the plan account credentials if necessary To access this option select the Advanced view check box Comments Optional Type a description of the backup plan To access this option select the Advanced view check box What to backup Source type p 198 Select the type of data to back up The type of data depends on the agents installed on the machine Items to backup p 199 Specify the data items to back up A list of items to backup depends on the data type specified previously Access credentials p 201 Optional Provide credentials for the source data if the plan s account does not have access permissions to the data To access this option select the Advanced view check box Exclusions p 201 Optional Set up exclusions for the specific types of files you do not wish to back up To access this option select the Advanced view check box Where to back up Archive p 202 Specify path to the location where the backup archive wil
377. ing a backup policy for backing up multiple machines to a network location to avoid excessive network load Delay values range from zero to the specified maximum delay value and are determined according to the chosen distribution method The delay value for each machine is determined when the policy is deployed to the machine and remains the same until you edit the policy and change the maximum delay value The conditions if any will be checked at the task s actual start time on each machine The following examples illustrate this setting Example 1 Suppose that you are deploying a backup policy with the following schedule to three machines Run the task Daily Once at 09 00 00 AM Distribute start time within the time window Maximum delay 1 Hour s Distribution method Random Then the task s start time on each machine may be any time between 09 00 00 AM and 09 59 59 AM for instance First machine Every day at 09 30 03 AM Second machine Every day at 09 00 00 AM Third machine Every day at 09 59 59 AM Example 2 Suppose that you are deploying a backup policy with the following schedule to three machines Run the task Daily Every 2 Hour s From 09 00 00 AM Until 11 00 00 AM Distribute start time within the time window Maximum delay 1 Hour s Distribution method Random Then the time of the task s first run on each machine may be any time between 09 00 00 AM and 09 59 59 AM the interval between the first and
378. ing a policy to a group of machines the administrator deploys multiple backup plans with a single action The workflow when using policies is as follows 1 The administrator creates a backup policy 2 The administrator applies the policy to a group of machines or a single machine p 375 3 The management server deploys the policy to the machines 4 On each machine the agent p 366 installed on the machine finds data items using the selection rules For example if the selection rule is All volumes the entire machine will be backed up 5 Oneach machine the agent installed on the machine creates a backup plan p 368 using other rules specified by the policy Such backup plan is called a centralized plan p 370 6 On each machine the agent installed on the machine creates a set of centralized tasks p 370 that will carry out the plan Backup scheme A part of the backup plan p 368 that includes the backup schedule and optionally the retention rules and the cleanup p 370 schedule For example perform full backup p 374 monthly on the last day of the month at 10 00AM and incremental backup p 375 on Sundays at 10 00PM Delete backups that are older than 3 months Check for such backups every time the backup operation is completed Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 provides the ability to use well known optimized backup schemes such as GFS p 374 and Tower of Hanoi p 378 to create a custom backup scheme o
379. ing bootable media Recovery over a volume locked by the operating system such as the volume where the operating system resides requires a reboot to the bootable environment which is a part of the agent After the recovery is completed the recovered operating system goes online automatically Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2010 29 If the machine fails to boot or you need to recover data to bare metal you boot the machine using the bootable media and configure the recovery operation in the same way as the recovery task The following diagram illustrates the recovery using the bootable media Managed Machine J A i Bootable Agent RAM Archive 1 Console F Backup 0 F Backup 1 F Backup 2 F Backup 0 l Backup 1 Restore p operation D Backup 3 J Backup 4 Restore Data2 from Backup 4 F Backup 5 2 2 User privileges on a managed machine Windows When managing a machine running Windows the scope of a user s management rights depends on the user s privileges on the machine Regular users A regular user such as a member of the Users group has the following management rights Perform file level backup and recovery of the files that the user has permissions to access but without using a file level backup snapshot Create backup plans and tasks and manage them View but not manage backup plans and tasks created by other users View the local event log Administrative
380. ing the respective Change links to the right Others are selected from the drop down list or typed manually in the page s fields General Plan name Backup 2 25 2009 7 41 21 AM Plan s credentials Run as Administrator current user Change L Comments a Action page Controls Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 remembers the changes you made on the action pages For example if you started to create a backup plan and then for any reason switched to another view without accomplishing the plan creation you can click the Back navigation button on the menu Or if you have passed several steps forward click the Down arrow and select the page where you started the plan creation from the list Thus you can perform the remaining steps and accomplish the backup plan creation Qj gt M Gonnect v Actions Start page Machine start page Create backup plan Create personal vault ls Vv Machine log Machine dashboard Navigation buttons 1 3 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components This section contains a full list of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components with a brief description of their functionality Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 includes the following main types of components Components for a managed machine agents These are applications that perform data backup recovery and other operations on the machines managed with Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10
381. initial size of the snapshot storage as a percentage of the disk space that is available at the time of starting the backup Possible values Any integer number between 0 and 100 Default value 50 If this setting is 0 the snapshot storage will not be created The initial size will not exceed the available space minus 50 MB Without the snapshot storage taking snapshots is still possible The size of the snapshot storage does not affect the size of the backup Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 This section of the administrative template specifies the connection parameters and event tracing parameters for the following Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node Connection parameters Remote Agent ports Specifies the port that the component will use for incoming and outgoing communication with other Acronis components Select one of the following Not Configured The component will use the default TCP port number 9876 Enabled The component will use the specified port type the port number in the Server TCP Port box Disabled The same as Not configured Client Encryption options Specifies whether to encrypt the transferred data when the component acts as a client application and whether to trust self signed SSL certificates Select one of the following Not Configured The component will use
382. intended for pending operations These actions might also be launched from the Disk management menu of the console All planned operations are added to the pending operation list The Undo action lets you undo the latest operation in the list While the list is not empty this action is available The Redo action lets you reinstate the last pending operation that was undone The Commit action forwards you to the Pending Operations window where you will be able to view the pending operation list Clicking Proceed will launch their execution You will not be able to undo any actions or operations after you choose the Proceed operation You can also cancel the commitment by clicking Cancel Then no changes will be done to the pending operation list Quitting Acronis Disk Director Lite without committing the pending operations effectively cancels them so if you try to exit Disk management without committing the pending operations you will receive the appropriate warning 6 12 Collecting system information The system information collection tool gathers information about the machine to which the management console is connected and saves it to a file You may want to provide this file when contacting Acronis technical support This option is available under bootable media and for machines where Agent for Windows Agent for Linux or Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server is installed To collect system information 1 Inthe managem
383. intensive operation it makes sense to schedule the validation to the managed machine s off peak period On the other hand if the validation is a major part of your data protection strategy and you prefer to be immediately informed whether the backed up data is not corrupted and can be successfully recovered think of starting the validation right after backup creation 2 What to validate select either to validate the entire archive or the latest backup in the archive Validation of a file backup imitates recovery of all files from the backup to a dummy destination Validation of a volume backup calculates a checksum for every data block saved in the backup Validation of the archive will validate all the archive s backups and may take a long time and a lot of system resources 3 Validation schedule appears only if you have selected the on schedule in step 1 set the schedule of validation For more information see the Scheduling p 165 section 6 2 11 Setting up regular conversion to a virtual machine When creating a backup plan p 195 you can set up regular conversion of a disk or volume backup to a virtual machine This section provides information that helps you make the appropriate settings Setting up a conversion schedule A disk backup p 372 created while executing a backup plan can be converted to a virtual machine immediately or on schedule or you can combine both methods The conversion task will be created on the
384. iod shows how many days we are guaranteed to have even in the worst case For a four level scheme it is four days Custom backup scheme At a glance m Custom schedule and conditions for backups of each type m Custom schedule and retention rules Parameters Parameter Full backup Incremental Differential Clean up archive Apply the rules only if the retention rules are set Meaning Specifies on what schedule and under which conditions to perform a full backup For example the full backup can be set up to run every Sunday at 1 00 AM as soon as all users are logged off Specifies on what schedule and under which conditions to perform an incremental backup If the archive contains no backups at the time of the task run a full backup is created instead of the incremental backup Specifies on what schedule and under which conditions to perform a differential backup If the archive contains no full backups at the time of the task run a full backup is created instead of the differential backup Specifies how to get rid of old backups either to apply retention rules p 39 regularly or clean up the archive during a backup when the destination location runs out of space By default the retention rules are not specified which means older backups will not be deleted automatically Using retention rules Specify the retention rules and when to apply them This setting is recommended for backup destination
385. ion click Options and then type the user name and password in the User name and Password boxes respectively In Windows if you leave the User name box empty the credentials under which the console is running will be used 4 To save the password for the specified user name select the Save password check box the password will be saved in a secure storage on the machine where the console is running Privileges for local connection Windows Local connection on a machine running Windows can be established by any user who has the Log on locally user right on the machine Linux Establishing a local connection on a machine running Linux and managing such machine requires the root privileges on it To establish a local connection as the root user 1 If you are logged on as the root user run the following command usr sbin acronis_console Otherwise run the following command su c usr sbin acronis_ console 2 Click Manage this machine To allow a non root user to start the console As a root user add the name of the non root user whom you want to allow to start the console to the file etc sudoers for example by using the visudo command Caution As a result of this procedure the non root user will not only be allowed to start the console with the root privileges but also may be able to perform other actions as the root user To establish a local connection as a non root user 1 Make sure that the root user has allo
386. ions 2 Move to another group Machine 3 is moved from one group to another The orange policy is revoked the blue policy is applied to the machine 3 Add to another group Machine 3 is added to another group It becomes a member of both groups The blue policy is applied but the orange policy remains on the machine 4 Remove from the group Machine 3 is removed from the group The orange policy is revoked from the machine The machine remains in the All machines group Machines machines Machines Machines Machines aii ee Move Add 2 3 4 All machines Delete Inheritance of policies Policy inheritance can be easily understood if we assume that a machine can be a member of only one group besides the All machines group Let s start from this simplified approach In the diagram below the container stands for a group the two color circle stands for a machine with two applied policies the three color circle stands for a machine with three applied policies and soon Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2010 Machines All machines Besides the All machines group we have the custom G1 group in the root and the custom G2 group which is G1 s child The green policy applied to the All machines group is inherited by all machines The orange policy applied to G1 is inherited by the G1 members and all its child groups both immediate and indirect The blue policy applied to G2 is i
387. irtual Machine Name this means that the name contain variables Such might be the case when you have selected virtual machines to back up Virtualization Server Type stands for the virtualization server type ESX Hyper V or other Virtual Machine Name stands for the virtual machine name You can add suffixes to the name but never delete the variables since each virtual machine has to back up to a separate archive with the unique name Backing up to an existing archive You can configure the backup plan to back up to an existing archive To do so select the archive in the archives table or type the archive name in the Name field If the archive is protected with a password the program will ask for it in the pop up window By selecting the existing archive you are meddling in the area of another backup plan that uses the archive This is not an issue if the other plan is discontinued but in general you should follow the rule one backup plan one archive Doing the opposite will not prevent the program from functioning but is not practical or efficient except for some specific cases Why two or more plans should not back up to the same archive Backing up different sources to the same archive makes using the archive difficult from the usability standpoint When it comes to recovery every second counts but you might be lost in the archive content Backup plans that operate with the same archive should back up the same data items
388. irtual machine that is currently available can be added to a static group You cannot create groups that contain both physical and virtual machines The dynamic membership criteria for virtual machines are as follows Virtualization server type Hyper V ESX ESXi Using this criterion you can create a dynamic group of virtual machines hosted on all registered Hyper V or ESX ESXi respectively servers Any machine added to the servers will appear in this group Any machine deleted from the servers will disappear from this group Host VA Using this criterion you can create a dynamic group of virtual machines hosted on a specified virtualization server or managed by the specified virtual appliance VMware vCenter integration If you are using VMware vSphere it is recommended that you integrate the management server with your vCenter Server To integrate the management server with a VMware vCenter Server In the Navigation tree right click Virtual machines and select VMware vCenter Integration Click Configure integration Select the Enable VMware vCenter integration check box Specify the vCenter Server s IP address or name and provide access credentials for the server Click OK OT ee ae As a result a group that has the same name as the vCenter Server appears on the management server under Virtual machines For more information please refer to VMware vCenter integration p 93 To remove integration with a VMware vCenter S
389. is based on a mathematical puzzle of the same name In the puzzle a series of rings are stacked in size order the largest on the bottom on one of three pegs The goal is to move the ring series to the third peg You are only allowed to move one ring at a time and are prohibited from placing a larger ring above a smaller ring The solution is to shift the first ring every other move moves 1 3 5 7 9 11 the second ring at intervals of four moves moves 2 6 10 the third ring at intervals of eight moves moves 4 12 and so on For example if there are five rings labeled A B C D and E in the puzzle the solution gives the following order of moves Pee AS Wee RCS eee eeaaaiee hat fet Pal Pal al Ta fat Ta fat Tat Pal fat Jal al The Tower of Hanoi backup scheme is based on the same patterns It operates with Sessions instead of Moves and with Backup levels instead of Rings Commonly an N level scheme pattern contains N th power of two sessions So the five level Tower of Hanoi backup scheme cycles the pattern that consists of 16 sessions moves from 1 to 16 in the above figure The table shows the pattern for the five level backup scheme The pattern consists of 16 sessions The Tower of Hanoi backup scheme implies keeping only one backup per level All the outdated backups have to be deleted So the scheme allows for efficient data storage more backups accumulate toward the present time Having four backups
390. isk partitioning style create a disk group and perform other disk management operations on the target hardware both under the operating system and on bare metal To find out more about Acronis Disk Director LV see the Disk management p 268 section To create a recovery task perform the following steps General Task name Optional Enter a unique name for the recovery task A conscious name lets you quickly identify the task among the others Task credentials p 218 Optional The task will run on behalf of the user who is creating the task You can change the task account credentials if necessary To access this option select the Advanced view check box What to recover Archive p 218 Select the archive to recover data from Data type p 219 Applies to disk recovery Choose the type of data you need to recover from the selected disk backup Content p 219 Select the backup and content to be recovered Access credentials p 220 Optional Provide credentials for the archive location if the task account does not have the right to access it To access this option select the Advanced view check box Where to recover This section appears after the required backup is selected and the type of data to recover is defined The parameters you specify here depend on the type of data being recovered Disks p 220 Volumes p 222 Acronis Active Restore OPTIONAL The Acronis Active Restore check box is available when
391. its for the total size of data that is currently stored in each of the archives This size may differ from the occupied space because of compression or deduplication Number of backups The limits for the number of backups that each of the archives contains With the default filter settings the report includes all archives that are stored in the centralized managed vaults Report view Under Report view choose how the report will look Select whether to show all items in a single table or to group them by a particular column Specify which table columns to show and in which order Specify how to sort the table Report about the vaults statistics In this view you can generate a report about the use of the centralized managed vaults that are currently added to the management server This report consists of one or more tables and diagrams Report coverage Under Report coverage choose the time interval for which you want to generate the report The report will show the state of the selected vaults at the specified time on each day in the report period Filters Under Filters select which centralized managed vaults to include in the report and whether to include information about the combined total of all the selected vaults A combined total is the total free and occupied space total amount of backed up data total number of archives and backups and average ratios across the selected vaults With the default filter
392. ix XenServer virtual appliance Files of the new virtual machine will be placed in the folder you select You can start the machine using the respective virtualization software or prepare the machine files for further usage The Citrix XenServer virtual appliance can be imported to a XenServer using Citrix XenCenter The VMware Workstation machine can be converted to the open virtualization format OVF using the VMware OVF tool With Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Hyper V or Agent for ESX ESXi you can recover a disk volume backup to a new virtual machine on the respective virtualization server To convert a disk backup to a virtual machine 1 Connect the console to a machine where Agent for Windows Agent for Hyper V or Agent for ESX ESXi is installed 2 Do any of the following Click Recover to open the Recover data page Start creating a recovery task as described in Recovering data p 215 Select the archive and then select the disk or volume backup you want to convert Use the Navigation pane to navigate to the vault where the archive is stored Select the archive and then select the disk or volume backup you want to convert Click Recover as virtual machine The Recover data page opens with the pre selected backup 3 In Data type select Disks or Volumes depending on what you need to convert In Content select the disks to convert or the volumes with the Master Boot Records MBR of the corresponding disks
393. k OK Volume destination To specify a destination volume 1 Select a volume or unallocated space where you want the selected volume to be recovered to The destination volume unallocated space should be at least the same size as the uncompressed image data 2 Click OK All the data stored on the target volume will be replaced by the backed up data so be careful and watch out for non backed up data that you might need When using bootable media Disk letters seen under Windows style bootable media might differ from the way Windows identifies drives For example the D drive in the rescue utility might correspond to the E drive in Windows Be careful To be on the safe side it is advisable to assign unique names to the volumes The Linux style bootable media shows local disks and volumes as unmounted sda1 sdaz2 Volume properties Resizing and relocating When recovering a volume to a basic MBR disk you can resize and relocate the volume by dragging it or its borders with a mouse or by entering corresponding values in the appropriate fields Using this feature you can redistribute the disk space between the volumes being recovered In this case you will have to recover the volume to be reduced first Tip A volume cannot be resized when being recovered from a backup split into multiple removable media To be able to resize the volume copy all parts of the backup to a single location on a hard disk Pro
394. k is full and the size of its volumes cannot be decreased automatically the basic disk to dynamic conversion operation will fail Should you decide to revert your dynamic disks back to basic ones e g if you want to start using an OS on your machine that does not support dynamic disks you can convert your disks using the same menu items though the operation now will be named Convert to basic System disk conversion Acronis Disk Director Lite does not require an operating system reboot after basic to dynamic conversion of the disk if 1 There is a single Windows 2008 Vista operating system installed on the disk 2 The machine runs this operating system Basic to dynamic conversion of the disk comprising of system volumes takes a certain amount of time and any power loss unintentional turning off of the machine or accidental pressing of the Reset button during the procedure could result in bootability loss In contrast to Windows Disk Manager the program ensures bootability of an offline operating system on the disk after the operation Disk conversion dynamic to basic You would want to convert dynamic disks back to basic ones e g if you want to start using an OS on your machine that does not support dynamic disks If you need to convert a dynamic disk to basic 1 Select the dynamic disk to convert to basic 2 Right click on the selected volume and then click Convert to basic in the context menu You will receiv
395. kup policies in ascending order column Click it once again to sort the backup policies in descending order Filter backup policies by Type a policy s name owner s name in the fields below the corresponding name owner column s header As a result you will see the list of the backup policies whose names or their owners names fully or just partly coincide with the entered value Filter backup policies by In the field below the corresponding column s header select the required deployment state status value from the list source type last result schedule Configuring the backup policies table By default the table has seven columns that are displayed others are hidden You can adjust presentation of the columns to your needs and preferences To show or hide columns 1 Right click any column header to open the context menu The menu items that are ticked off correspond to the column headers presented in the table 2 Click the items you want to be displayed hidden Policy details The Policy details window accumulates in five tabs all information on the selected backup policy and lets you perform operations with the machines and groups of machines the policy is applied to This information is also duplicated on the Information pane Backup policy The tab displays information about the selected policy Source The tab displays information about the type of source to be backed up and the source selection rules D
396. l Conditions User is logged off Differential Conditions User is idle As a result a full backup originally scheduled at 9 00 PM may actually start later as soon as the backup location becomes available Likewise backup tasks for incremental and differential backups will wait until all users are logged off and users are idle respectively Finally we create retention rules for the archive let us retain only backups that are no older than six months and let the cleanup be performed after each backup task and also on the last day of every month Retention rules Delete backups older than 6 months Apply the rules After backing up On schedule Cleanup schedule Monthly on the Last day of All months at 10 00 PM By default a backup is not deleted as long as it has dependent backups that must be kept For example if a full backup has become subject to deletion but there are incremental or differential backups that depend on it the deletion is postponed until all the dependent backups can be deleted as well For more information see Retention rules p 39 Resulting tasks Any custom scheme always produces three backup tasks and in case the retention rules are specified a cleanup task Each task is listed in the list of tasks either as Scheduled if the schedule has been set up or as Manual if the schedule has not been set up You can manually run any backup task or cleanup task at any time regardless of whether it has a
397. l access the location using the credentials you specify Use this option if the task account does not have access permissions to the location You might need to provide special credentials for a network share or a storage node vault Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account 2 Click OK According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer 6 7 5 Location selection Specify a destination where the exported object will be stored Exporting backups to the same archive is not allowed 1 Selecting the export destination Enter the full path to the destination in the Path field or select the desired destination in the folders tree To export data to a centralized unmanaged vault expand the Centralized vaults group and click the vault To export data to a personal vault expand the Personal vaults group and click the vault To export data to a local folder on the machine expand the Local folders group and click the required folder To export data to a network share expand the Network folders group select the required networked machine and then click the shared folder If the network
398. l adapter for the hard disk you can install the appropriate driver manually bypassing the automatic driver search and install procedure 3 Installing drivers for Plug and Play devices Universal Restore relies on the built in Plug and Play discovery and configuration process to handle hardware differences in devices that are not critical for the system start such as video audio and USB Windows takes control over this process during the logon phase and if some of the new hardware is not detected you will have a chance to install drivers for it later manually Universal Restore and Microsoft Sysprep Universal Restore is not a system preparation tool You can apply it to any Windows image created by Acronis products including images of systems prepared with Microsoft System Preparation Tool Sysprep The following is an example of using both tools on the same system Universal Restore does not strip the security identifier SID and user profile settings in order to run the system immediately after recovery without re joining the domain or re mapping network user profiles If you are going to change the above settings on a recovered system you can prepare the system with Sysprep image it and recover if need be using the Universal Restore Limitations Universal Restore is not available when a computer is booted with Acronis Startup Recovery Manager using F11 or the backup image is located in the Acronis Secure Zone or wh
399. l appliance can appear on any of the hosts included in the cluster depending on how the load balancing is configured Moving the agent VA around the cluster The agent s work is not affected when the Distributed Resource Scheduler DRS migrates the virtual appliance to another host Creating a cluster of servers that already have agents It is recommended that you remove Agents for ESX ESXi from all but one of the servers Retain the agent whose VA resides on the shared storage Restart the VA so that it becomes aware of the cluster Privileges for VM backup and recovery Once Agent for ESX ESXi is deployed to a vCenter s host or cluster any user of the vCenter Server can connect a management console to the agent The scope of available operations depends on the privileges a user has on the vCenter Server Only those actions are available that the user has permission to perform The below tables contain the privileges required for backup and recovery of ESX virtual machines and additionally for virtual appliance deployment If the agent was deployed directly to an ESX ESXi host or manually imported to the host and you want the vCenter users to be able to connect to the agent and the below privileges to take effect connect the agent to the vCenter Server rather than to the ESX ESXi host To change the connection access the virtual appliance GUI using the vSphere Client and specify access credentials for the vCenter Server in the ESX i v
400. l backup option is cleared the Always use a free tape For each incremental backup option is cleared the Always use a free tape For each differential backup option is cleared tape size is T_GB The Tower of Hanoi scheme with four levels A B C and D specifies the following line of backups on the tapes before the first backup will be deleted D full A B A C A B A D A B A C The specified tape options do not require using a free tape for any backup so the backup line will be automatically split and continued on a new tape when the end of the current tape is reached There is one tape set to calculate Total number of required tapes round up 2 F_GB 6 I_GB 5 D_GB CL T_GB 1 The above described ToH Example 1 p 152 is based on the five level Tower of Hanoi backup scheme with the same tape options Its backup line was the following E full A B A C A B A D A B A C A B A E A B A C A B A D Total number of required tapes round up 2 F_GB 12 I_GB 11 D_GB CL T_GB 1 round up 2 320 12 16 11 40 1 400 1 round up 3 18 1 5 tapes Tape planning Example 2 Imagine the case with the following features full backup size is F_GB average size of incremental backups is I_GB average size of differential backups is D_GB compression level provides CL average reduction coefficient selected tape rotation scheme is Custom with the following settings
401. l backup to recover the data from a differential backup A differential backup is most useful when you are interested in saving only the most recent data state the data changes tend to be small as compared to the total data size The typical conclusion is differential backups take longer to do and are faster to restore while incremental ones are quicker to do and take longer to restore In fact there is no physical difference between an incremental backup appended to a full backup and a differential backup appended to the same full backup at the same point of time The above mentioned difference implies creating a differential backup after or instead of creating multiple incremental backups An incremental or differential backup created after disk defragmentation might be considerably larger than usual because defragmentation changes file locations on the disk and the backup reflects these changes It is recommended that you re create a full backup after disk defragmentation The following table summarizes the advantages and shortcomings of each backup type as they appear based on common knowledge In real life these parameters depend on numerous factors such as the amount speed and pattern of data changes the nature of the data the physical specifications of the devices the backup recovery options you set to name a few Practice is the best guide to selecting the optimal backup scheme Parameter Full backup Differential ba
402. l be stored The user whose name is specified will be considered as the archive owner To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following m Use the task credentials The program will access the location using the credentials of the task account specified in the General section Use the following credentials The program will access the location using the credentials you specify Use this option if the task account does not have access permissions to the location You might need to provide special credentials for a network share or a storage node vault Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account 2 Click OK According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer 6 8 Acronis Secure Zone Acronis Secure Zone is a secure partition that enables keeping backup archives on a managed machine disk space and therefore recovery of a disk to the same disk where the backup resides Certain Windows applications such as Acronis disk management tools can access the zone To learn more about the advantages and limitations of the Acronis Secure Zone see the Acronis Secure Zone p 51 topic in the
403. l be stored and the archive name It is advisable that the archive name be unique within the location The default archive name is Archive N where N is the sequence number of the archive in the location you have selected Access credentials p 204 Optional Provide credentials for the location if the plan account does not have access permissions to the location To access this option select the Advanced view check box Archive comments Optional Enter comments on the archive To access this option select the Advanced view check box How to back up Backup scheme p 204 Specify when and how often to back up your data define for how long to keep the created backup archives in the selected location set up schedule for the archive cleanup procedure Use well known optimized backup schemes such as Grandfather Father Son and Tower of Hanoi create a custom backup scheme or back up data once Archive validation When to validate p 213 Optional Define when and how often to perform validation and whether to validate the entire archive or the latest backup in the archive Backup options Settings Optional Configure parameters of the backup operation such as pre post backup commands maximum network bandwidth allocated for the backup stream or the backup archive compression level If you do nothing in this section the default values p 97 will be used After any of the settings is changed against the default value a
404. l machines built in group p 369 By applying a backup policy to this group you protect all the registered machines The thing is that a single policy may not be satisfactory because of the different roles of the machines The backed up data is specific for each department some data has to be backed up frequently other twice a year so you may want to create various policies applicable to different sets of machines In this case consider creating custom groups Static and dynamic groups You can explicitly specify which machines the custom group has to include for example let s say select each of the accountants machines Once you apply the accounting department policy to the group the accountants machines become protected If a new accountant is hired you will have to add the new machine to the group manually Such groups are called static p 377 since their content never changes unless the administrator explicitly adds or deletes a machine Manual operation is not required though if the accounting department forms a separate Active Directory organization unit You specify the accounting OU as the group membership criterion If a new accountant is hired the new machine will be added to the group as soon as it is added to the OU and thus will be protected automatically Such groups are called dynamic p 373 since their content changes automatically Dynamic grouping criteria Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server off
405. l vault p 379 Once created on a managed machine the zone is always present in the list of Personal vaults Centralized backup plans p 370 can use Acronis Secure Zone as well as local plans p 375 If you have used Acronis Secure Zone before please note a radical change in the zone functionality The zone does not perform automatic cleanup that is deleting old archives anymore Use backup schemes with automatic cleanup to back up to the zone or delete outdated backups manually using the archive management functionality With the new Acronis Secure Zone behavior you obtain the ability to list archives located in the zone and backups contained in each archive examine a backup s content mount a disk backup to copy files from the backup to a physical disk safely delete archives and backups from the archives For more information about operations available in Acronis Secure Zone see the Personal vaults p 158 section Upgrade from Acronis True Image Echo When upgrading from Acronis True Image Echo to Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Acronis Secure Zone will keep the archives created with Echo The zone will appear in the list of personal vaults and the old archives will be available for recovery 2 13 2 Acronis Startup Recovery Manager A modification of the bootable agent p 369 can be placed on a system disk and configured to start at boot time when F11 is pressed This eliminates the need for rescue media or net
406. lated sections Operations with archives stored in a vault p 161 Operations with backups p 162 Filtering and sorting archives p 163 Bars of the Actions and tools pane Vault Name The Actions bar is available when clicking the vault in the vaults tree Duplicates actions of the vault s toolbar Archive Name The Actions bar is available when you select an archive in the archives table Duplicates actions of the archives toolbar Backup Name The Actions bar is available when you expand the archive and click on any of its backups Duplicates actions of the archives toolbar 4 1 2 Actions on centralized vaults All the operations described here are performed by clicking the corresponding buttons on the vaults toolbar These operations can be also accessed from the Vault name actions bar on the Actions and tools pane and from the Vault name actions item of the main menu The following is a guideline for you to perform operations with centralized vaults To Do Create a managed oran 1 Click BS Create unmanaged vault 2 Inthe Type field select the vault type Managed or Unmanaged The procedure of creating centralized vaults is described in depth in the following sections Create a managed centralized vault p 132 Create an unmanaged centralized vault p 134 Edit a managed or an 1 Select the vault unmanaged vault 2 Click Edit Depending on the vault you select managed or unmanaged
407. le when operating under the bootable media The option defines whether the agent s operating on the managed machine have to send the log events of the recovery operations to the specified Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP managers You can choose the types of events to be sent Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 provides the following Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP objects to SNMP management applications 1 3 6 1 4 1 24769 100 200 1 0 string identifying the type of event Information Warning Error 1 3 6 1 4 1 24769 100 200 2 0 string containing the text description of the event it looks identical to messages published by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 in its log The preset is Use the setting set in the Machine options To select whether to send the recovery operations events to the SNMP managers Choose one of the following Use the setting set in the Machine options to use the setting specified for the machine For more information refer to Machine options p 93 Send SNMP notifications individually for recovery operation events to send the events of the recovery operations to the specified SNMP managers Types of events to send choose the types of events to be sent All events Errors and warnings or Errors only Server name IP type the name or IP address of the host running the SNMP management application the messages will be sent to Community type the name of SNMP com
408. leanup FUIES sceszessciciesssesaesatesivasstescatestastarserassatvorasvarsatomens siatzonenaamiieesnetesteintoney 3 2 3 EVEMUtA GING ansie a oreore a eea uisasetateesee Sees ey tabavsuneashtenrartcoleaaysine eeanncnvivees 3 2 4 Domain access Credentials ccccscecsssssssesecessecescesssesceseseescsceeeseeeseceeeesseseeseeeeseeesaeerees 3 2 5 Acronis WOL POX Yciercccscscctececsecuedksccicextsstsencdcacsetvsseesecddsaudesntsthcensacoudedesdeduevabseuccgeasarvenes 3 2 6 VM Protection Options sc deccces secciced tesecoasseschies dats eneh vecenges aeaaea aa erais 3 3 Machine Options ne sess ence nc a ed ots Laden bees Fea esata Le bees es 3 3 1 Machitie Management iicscccicccccsccctseecsecerceccctcccenvaneyes cesuceesevtsnecacsnserestussoucosedeesstbascersrsitestiavivsoresden ulsvlbacvetdie 3 3 2 Event tracihg Sissi ses sss icicseca ctesaesescunccscevactaseontsoueshtesnase dunessecdncadcadntsnasintes codecs Ena EAEra iaaa EAEE SEAE AANE AENEAS 3 3 3 togicleanup rule Sinnani arnan a n a a n ea irar 3 3 4 Customer Experience ProgramMisisinsactiiat a aaa a aa ee A ai E E A Eae aa 3 4 Default backup and recovery options 3 4 1 Default backup Options s cccccccsNbasechentuncesiehstadeekenseyeonsbucyselesunStaventy sata ndoucodiacetavanadetdaslasdt sus cutencondaresavtaverearsin 3 4 2 Default recOVERY OPtiOns i e ccseiccasesdek ccc sUekecdal eek ada S AE AUNTS PINTRE A ADE N E den cdcebeasecaeudes due seddenscte den dissed duc sesdcncceedesd
409. les All Profiles Folder In the Files and folders column type or select dev hda3 file txt or home usr docs file txt home root usr etc Points to all files on all volumes of the machine Points to the folder where all user profiles are located typically C Documents and Settings in Windows XP and C Users in Windows Vista Access credentials for source Specify credentials required for access to the data you are going to back up To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Use the policy credentials The program will access the source data using the credentials of the backup policy account specified in the General section Use the following credentials The program will access the source data using the credentials you specify Use this option if the policy credentials do not have access permissions to the data Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account 2 Click OK 7 3 4 Exclusions Set up exclusions for the specific types of files you do not wish to back up For example you may not want database hidden and system files and folders as well as files with specific extensions to be stored in the archive To specify which files and folders to exclude Set up any of the following parameters Exclude
410. les and tape options by default Criteria of the choice Every time you are about to design a tape rotation scheme for a backup policy plan to be created you ought to come from the following arguments full size of the data to protect approximate size of the daily changes of data approximate size of the weekly changes of data requirements for the backup scheme frequency performance and duration of backup operations requirements for keeping backups minimal maximal period of backup keeping need to store tape cartridges off site capability of the tape library number of drives loaders slots and available tapes capacity of tapes requirements for performing data recovery maximal duration You need to analyze every argument that is relevant for your case and select the main criteria for the choice Then choose a backup scheme and specify the tape options Note that any backup scheme in combination with different tape options will have quite different results for efficient use of both tapes and devices Case to analyze Suppose you need to automate a tape rotation for the case if the full size of the data to protect is approximately 320 GB the approximate size of daily changes of data is about 16 GB the approximate size of weekly changes of data is no more than 40 GB tape capacity is 400 GB Let s analyze the results of a combination of GFS and ToH schemes with different tape options for the c
411. les of the new virtual machine will be placed in the folder you select Agent for ESX ESXi is installed on the host A VMware virtual machine will be created on the ESX ESXi server Virtual machines resulting from backup are not supposed to be backed up and so do not appear on the management server unless its integration with VMware vCenter Server is enabled If the integration is enabled such machines appear as unmanageable A backup policy cannot be applied to them Agent for Hyper V is installed on the host You can choose between creating a virtual machine on the Hyper V server and creating a VMware Workstation Microsoft Virtual PC or Parallels Workstation machine in the folder you select Virtual machines created on the Hyper V server as a result of backup will not appear on the management server because such machines are not supposed to be backed up What is the host s processing power The conversion task will be created on the machine being backed up and will use this machine s date and time In fact the task will be executed by the host that you select and so will take that host s CPU resource If multiple backup plans use the same host multiple conversion tasks will be queued on that host and it may take considerable time to complete them all What storage will be used for the virtual machines Network usage As opposed to ordinary backups TIB files virtual machine files are transferred uncompressed through the n
412. leted from the machine If the machine is not available at the moment these Other actions actions will be performed on the machine as soon as the machine becomes available to the management server Direct management operations Create a backup plan ona machine Recover data Connect to a machine directly Other operations View detailed information on a machine View tasks existing on a machine View log entries of a machine Update all information related to the machine Refresh a list of machines Click t Backup This operation is described in depth in the Creating a backup plan p 195 section Click Recover This operation is described in depth in the Recovering data p 215 section Click p Connect directly Establishes a direct connection to the managed machine Enables to administer a managed machine and perform all the direct management operations Click View details In the Machine details p 298 window examine information on the machine Click Ge View tasks The Tasks p 319 view will display a list of the tasks existing on the machine Click L View log The Log p 321 view will display a list of the machine s log entries oe R Click 8 Synchronize The management server will query the machine and update the database with the most recent information Along with synchronizing the refresh operation will be performed automatically in order to update the list of the machi
413. letters all paths will be invalid on the disk and programs won t find their files The operating system on that disk will be unbootable You have the following two alternatives to retain system bootability on the target disk volume 1 Copy NT signature to provide the target disk with the source disk NT signature matched with the Registry keys also copied on the target disk 2 Leave NT signature to keep the old target disk signature and update the operating system according to the signature If you need to copy the NT signature 1 Select the Copy NT signature check box You receive the warning If there is an operating system on the hard disk uninstall either the source or the target hard disk drive from your machine prior to starting the machine again Otherwise the OS will start from the first of the two and the OS on the second disk will become unbootable The Turn off the machine after the cloning operation check box is selected and disabled automatically Click Finish to add the pending operation Click Commit on the toolbar and then click Proceed in the Pending Operations window Wait until the task is finished Wait until the machine is turned off Ore eae iS Disconnect either the source or the target hard disk drive from the machine 7 Start up the machine If you need to leave an NT signature 1 Click to clear the Copy NT signature check box if necessary Click to clear the Turn off the machine aft
414. lied that the Use a separate tape set option is enabled To calculate the number of tapes you should take into account the following considerations full backup size average size of incremental backups average size of differential backups Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2010 155 compression level specified for backing up the data tape rotation scheme frequency of backups retention rules tape append options requirements to support off site tape cartridge archives There is no common formula to calculate a number of tapes required in all possible combinations of above listed considerations But the general way to get a number of tapes for a case includes the following steps 1 Draw or write a chain of backups until the first backup can be deleted 2 Take into account the tape append options the chain might be sectioned onto tape sets 3 Calculate the number of tapes in each tape set 4 The sum of the calculated values gives the total number of tapes required for the case Tape planning Example 1 Imagine the case with the following features full backup size is F_GB average size of incremental backups is _GB average size of differential backups is D_GB compression level provides CL average reduction coefficient selected tape rotation scheme is Tower of Hanoi with four levels tape options are the following the Use a separate tape set option is selected the Always use a free tape For each ful
415. ll anyway Optional Specify the mass storage drivers manually if the automatic drivers search has not found the appropriate drivers To access this option select the Advanced view check box Recovery options Settings Optional Customize the recovery operation by configuring the recovery options such as pre post recovery commands recovery priority error handling or notification options If you do nothing in this section the default values p 119 will be used After any of the settings is changed against the default value a new line that displays the newly set value appears The setting status changes from Default to Custom Should you modify the setting again the line will display the new value unless the new value is the default one When the default value is set the line disappears and so you always see only the settings that differ from the default values in the Settings section Clicking Reset to default resets all the settings to default values After you complete all the required steps click OK to create the commit creating of the recovery task 6 3 1 Task credentials Provide credentials for the account under which the task will run To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Run under the current user The task will run under the credentials with which the user who starts the tasks is logged on If the task has to run on schedule you will be asked for the current user s password on completing the task
416. ll open the Backup plans and Tasks view tasks with failed tasks where you can examine the reason of failure Q Tasks that need interaction X Resolve When at least one task existing in the management server s database needs human interaction the Dashboard shows an alert Click Resolve to open the Tasks Need Interaction window where you can examine every case and specify your decision Q Failed to check licensesonX View log Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 agent connects to Acronis machine s License Server at the start and then every 1 5 days as specified by the agent configuration parameters The alert is displayed if the license check was unsuccessful on at least one agent This might happen if the license server was unavailable or the license key data was corrupted Click View log to find out the cause of the unsuccessful check If the license check does not succeed for 1 60 days as specified by the agent configuration parameters the agent will stop working until a successful license check Q Vaults with low free space X View vaults The alert is displayed if at least one centralized vault has Bootable media was not Create now created No backups have been Show list created for X day s on Y machine s Not connected to View the management server for X machines day s Y machine s It is recommended to back up Install the management server to Acronis protect its configuration components Install the agent on th
417. ll take you to Create a Backup Plan page where you can instantly configure and run the backup operation To configure the time interval that is considered as critical select Options gt Console options gt Time based alerts A Not connected to View the This type of message can appear ona machine that is management server for X days machines registered on a management server The Dashboard warns you that the connection might be lost or the server might be unavailable and the machine is not centrally managed as a result Activities The calendar lets you explore the history of the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 agent s activities on the machine Right click on any highlighted date and select View log to see the list of log entries filtered by date On the View section at the right of the calendar you can select the activities to highlight depending on the presence and severity of the errors How it is determined Errors Highlight the date in red if at least one Error entry appeared in the log on this date Highlight the date in yellow if no Error entries appeared and at least one Warning entry appeared in the log on this date oa Highlight the date in green if only Information log entries appeared on this date normal activity The Select current date link focuses selection to the current date System view Shows summarized statistics of backup plans tasks and brief information on the last backup Click t
418. lowing is a guideline for you to filter and sort log entries Display log entries fora 1 In the From field select the date starting from which to display the log entries given time period 2 Inthe To field select the date up to which to display the log entries Filter log entries by type Press or release the following toolbar buttons x to filter error messages A to filter warning messages to filter information messages Filter log entries by the Under the Backup plan or Managed entity type column header select the backup plan original backup plan or or the type of managed entity from the list managed entity type Filter log entries by task Type the required value task name machine name owner name etc in the field below managed entity the respective column header machine code owner N gt d As a result you will see that the list of log entries fully or just partly coincide with the entered value Sort log entries by date Click the column s header to sort the log entries in ascending order Click it once again to and time sort the log entries in descending order Configuring the log table By default the table has seven columns that are displayed others are hidden If required you can hide the shown columns and show the hidden ones To show or hide columns 1 Right click any column header to open the context menu The menu items that are ticked off correspond to the column headers presen
419. lure Event ID Specifies the event number which typically identifies the particular kind of events among events from the same source For example an Error event with Event source disk and Event ID 7 occurs when Windows discovers a bad block on a disk whereas an Error event with Event source disk and Event ID 15 occurs when a disk is not ready for access yet Examples Bad block emergency backup One or more bad blocks that have suddenly appeared on a hard disk usually indicate that the hard disk drive will soon fail Suppose that you want to create a backup plan that will back up hard disk data as soon as such a situation occurs When Windows detects a bad block on a hard disk it records an event with the event source disk and the event number 7 into the System log the type of this event is Error When creating the plan type or select the following in the Schedule area Log name System Event source disk Event type Error Event ID 7 Important To ensure that such a task will complete despite the presence of bad blocks you must make the task ignore bad blocks To do this in Backup options go to Error handling and then select the Ignore bad sectors check box Pre update backup in Vista Suppose that you want to create a backup plan that will automatically perform a backup of the system for example by backing up the volume where Windows is installed every time that Windows is about to install updates H
420. ly incremental backups Then the backup schedule can look as follows Full backup Schedule Monthly every Last Sunday of the month at 9 00 PM Incremental Schedule Weekly every workday at 7 00 PM Differential Schedule Weekly every Saturday at 8 00 PM Further we want to add conditions that have to be satisfied for a backup task to start This is set up in the Conditions fields for each backup type Full backup Conditions Location available Incremental Conditions User is logged off Differential Conditions User is idle As a result a full backup originally scheduled at 9 00 PM may actually start later as soon as the backup location becomes available Likewise backup tasks for incremental and differential backups will wait until all users are logged off and users are idle respectively Finally we create retention rules for the archive let us retain only backups that are no older than six months and let the cleanup be performed after each backup task and also on the last day of every month Retention rules Delete backups older than 6 months Apply the rules After backing up On schedule Cleanup schedule Monthly on the Last day of All months at 10 00 PM By default a backup is not deleted as long as it has dependent backups that must be kept For example if a full backup has become subject to deletion but there are incremental or differential backups that depend on it the deletion is postponed until all the depen
421. m you want to allow to connect to the machine remotely to the Acronis_Trusted group For example to add the existing user user_a to the group run the following command usermod G Acronis Trusted user_a 3 Create the file etc pam d Acronisagent trusted with the following content SPAM 1 0 auth required pam_unix so auth required pam_succeed_if so user ingroup Acronis_Trusted account required pam_unix so Example 2 The above authentication policy might not work on Linux distributions with kernel version 2 4 including Red Hat Linux and VMware ESX 3 5 Upgrade 2 because the pam_succeed_if so module is not supported there In this case you can use the following authentication policy 1 As the root user create the file etc pam d Acronis_trusted_users 2 Add the names of the non root users whom you want to allow to manage the machine to this file one user name per line For example if you want to add the users user_a user_b and user_c add the following three lines to the file user _ a user_b user_c If necessary also add the root user to the file 3 Create the file etc pam d Acronisagent trusted with the following content PAM 1 0 auth required pam_unix so auth required pam_listfile so item user sense allow file etc pam d Acronis_trusted_users onerr fail account required pam_unix so Acronis security groups On a machine running Windows Acronis security groups determine who can manage the machine remotel
422. machine being backed up and will use this machine s date and time As a result of the first conversion a new virtual machine will be created Every subsequent conversion will re create this machine from scratch First a new temporary virtual machine is created If this operation succeeds the old machine is replaced If an error occurs during creation of the temporary machine the temporary machine is deleted This way the task always ends up with the single machine but extra storage space is required during conversion to keep the temporary machine The old virtual machine must be powered off by the time of conversion otherwise it will not be possible to delete it and the conversion task will fail If this happens you can restart the conversion task manually after powering off the machine Any changes made to the machine while it was powered on will be overwritten Selecting a host that will perform conversion Specify the machine that will perform the conversion The machine has to have Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows Agent for ESX ESXi or Agent for Hyper V installed Take into account the following considerations Which agent is installed on the host The resulting virtual machine type and location depend on the agent that resides on the selected host Agent for Windows is installed on the host You have a choice of virtual machine types VMware Workstation Microsoft Virtual PC or Parallels Workstation Fi
423. management server must also be a member of the Acronis Remote Users group No user even a member of the Administrators group can be an administrator of the management server without being a member of the Acronis Centralized Admins group By default this group includes all members of the Administrators group Acronis Remote Users A user who is a member of this group can connect to the management server remotely by using Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Console provided that the user is also a member of the Acronis Centralized Admins group By default this group includes all members of the Administrators group On a domain controller If a machine is a domain controller in an Active Directory domain the names and default contents of Acronis security groups are different Instead of Acronis Remote Users and Acronis Centralized Admins the groups are named DCNAME Acronis Remote Users and DCNAME Acronis Centralized Admins respectively here DCNAME stands for the NetBIOS name of the domain controller Each dollar sign is surrounded by a single space on either side Instead of explicitly including the names of all members of the Administrators group the Administrators group itself is included Tip To ensure proper group names you should install Acronis components in a domain controller after you have set up the domain controller itself If the components were installed before you set up the domain controller
424. me criteria are combined by logical addition OR For example the following set of criteria Operating system Windows Server 2008 Operating system Windows Server 2003 will add to the same group all the machines whose operating system is Windows 2000 OR Windows 2003 b Entries of different criteria are combined by logical multiplication AND For example the following set of criteria Operating system Windows Server 2008 Operating system Windows Server 2003 Organizational unit SERVERS IP range 192 168 17 0 192 168 17 55 will add to the same group all the machines whose operating system is Windows 2000 or Windows 2003 and belong to the SERVERS organizational unit and whose IP addresses are within the range 192 168 17 0 192 168 17 55 How long does a dynamic group member remain in the group A dynamic group member remains in the group as long as the member meets the criteria The member is removed from the group automatically as soon as the member changes so that it no longer meets the criteria the administrator changes the criteria so that the member no longer meets the criteria There is no way to remove a machine from a dynamic group manually except for deleting the machine from the management server Organizational unit criterion Organizational unit criterion is specified for the domain the management server is currently in as follows OU 0U1 Select an organizational unit from the Active Directory tree by clicking B
425. me of the original archive Because having multiple archives of the same names in the same location is not advisable the following actions are disabled with the default archive name exporting part of an archive to the same location exporting an archive or part of an archive to a location where an archive of the same name exists exporting an archive or part of an archive to the same location twice In any of the above cases provide an archive name that is unique to the destination folder or vault If you need to redo the export using the same archive name first delete the archive that resulted from the previous export operation The resulting archive s options The exported archive inherits the options of the original archive including encryption and the password When exporting a password protected archive you are prompted for the password If the original archive is encrypted the password is used to encrypt the resulting archive Source and destination locations When the console is connected to a managed machine you can export an archive or part of an archive to and from any location accessible to the agent residing on the machine These include personal vaults locally attached tape devices removable media and in the advanced product versions managed and unmanaged centralized vaults When the console is connected to a management server two export methods are available export from a managed vault The export is performed
426. me specific needs leave them unchanged An archive can occupy several tapes In such cases a so called tape set is used for keeping the data backups Tape set is a logical group of one or more tapes which contain backups of the specific protected data A tape set can contain backups of other data as well Separate tape set is a tape set which contains only backups of the specific protected data Other backups cannot be written to a separate tape set For the backup policy plan to be created Use a separate tape set The preset is Disabled If you leave this option unchanged then the backups belonging to the policy or plan being created might be written onto tapes containing backups written by different backup policies and comprising of data from different machines Similarly backups from other policies might be written onto the tapes containing this policy s backups You will not have a problem with such tapes as the program manages all the tapes automatically When this option is enabled the backups belonging to the policy or plan being created will be located on a separate tape set Other backups will not be written to this tape set If the console is connected to the management server The Use a separate tape set option has more precise definitions So for the backup policy to be created you can use a separate tape set for all machines or for each single machine The A single tape set for all machines option is selected by
427. ment application the messages will be sent to Community type the name of the SNMP community to which both the host running the SNMP management application and the sending machine belong The typical community is public Click Send test message to check if the settings are correct Do not send SNMP notifications to disable sending the log events of the backup operations to SNMP managers Fast incremental differential backup The option is effective in Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media This option is effective for incremental and differential disk level backup This option defines whether a file change is detected using the file size and time stamp or by comparing the file contents to those stored in the archive The preset is Enabled Incremental or differential backup captures only data changes To speed up the backup process the program determines whether a file has changed or not by the file size and the date time when the file was last modified Disabling this feature will make the program compare the entire file contents to those stored in the archive Backup splitting This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media The option defines how a backup can be split The preset is Automatic The following settings are available Automatic With this setting Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 will act as follows When backing up to a hard disk A single
428. mes from a disk backup Master boot record recovery Recovery of a disk volume backup to an existing virtual machine Recovery of a disk volume backup to a new virtual machine Recovery of a virtual machine backup to an existing virtual machine Recovery of a virtual machine backup to a new virtual machine Validation of a single archive Validation of backups Validation of all archives stored in a vault Deleting backups from a backup archive in accordance with retention rules Creating Acronis Secure Zone Resizing changing password deleting Acronis Secure Zone Disk management operations Service task performed on a storage node Deduplication task performed by the storage node in the vault after a backup is completed Depending on the type of task and whether it is running or not a combination of the following tabs will appear Task The Task tab is common for all types of tasks It provides general information on the selected task Archive The Archive tab is available for backup archive validation and cleanup tasks Provides information on the archive its name type size where it is stored etc Backup The Backup tab is available for recovery backup validation and export tasks Provides details on the selected backup when it was created its type full incremental differential information on the archive and the vault the backup is stored in Settings The Settings tab displays information on schedulin
429. mes on the selected GPT disk will not be accessible with MBR e g volumes located more than 2 TB from the beginning of the disk you will be warned here about such damage Please note a volume belonging to a GPT disk to convert will be a logical one after the operation and is irreversible 3 By clicking OK you ll add a pending operation of GPT to MBR disk conversion To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 283 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them Disk conversion basic to dynamic You would want to convert a basic disk to dynamic in the following cases If you plan to use the disk as part of a dynamic disk group If you want to achieve additional disk reliability for data storage If you need to convert a basic disk to dynamic 1 Select the basic disk to convert to dynamic 2 Right click on the selected volume and then click Convert to dynamic in the context menu You will receive a final warning about the basic disk being converted to dynamic 3 If you click OK in this warning window the conversion will be performed immediately and if necessary your machine will be restarted Please note A dynamic disk occupies the last megabyte of the physical disk to store the database including the four level description Volume Component Partition Disk for each dynamic volume If during the conversion to dynamic it turns out that the basic dis
430. milar to the file and folder structure in Windows For example let a Linux machine contain a hard disk which is split into three volumes or partitions the first second and third partitions These partitions are available in the tree as dev hda1 dev hda2 and dev hda3 respectively To perform a disk backup of the say third partition one can type dev hda3 in the row of the Volumes to back up selection rules dialog box Furthermore a Linux partition can be mounted anywhere inside the tree Say dev hda3 can be mounted as a subdirectory inside the tree such as home usr docs In this case one can type either dev hda3 or home usr docs in the Volume field to perform a disk backup of the third partition In general when setting up a centralized policy to perform volume backups of Linux machines make sure that the paths entered in the Volume field correspond to partitions such as dev hda2 or home usr docs in the previous example and not to directories Standard names for Linux partitions Names such as dev hda1 reflect the standard way of naming IDE hard disk partitions in Linux The prefix hd signifies the disk type IDE a means that this is the first IDE hard disk on the system and 1 denotes the first partition on the disk In general the standard name for a Linux partition consists of three components Disk type hd for IDE drives sd for SCSI drives md for software RAID drives for example dynamic volumes
431. much as possible The backup duration will be maximal You may want to select maximum compression when backing up to removable media to reduce the number of blank disks required Backup performance Use this group of options to specify the amount of network and system resources to allocate to the backup process Backup performance options might have a more or less noticeable effect on the speed of the backup process This depends on the overall system configuration and the physical characteristics of devices the backup is being performed from or to Backup priority This option is effective for both Windows and Linux operating systems The priority of a process running in a system determines the amount of CPU and system resources allocated to that process Decreasing the backup priority will free more resources for other applications Increasing the backup priority might speed up the backup process by requesting the operating system to allocate more resources like the CPU to the backup application However the resulting effect will depend on the overall CPU usage and other factors like disk in out speed or network traffic The preset is Low To specify the backup process priority Select one of the following Low to minimize resources taken by the backup process leaving more resources to other processes running on the machine Normal to run the backup process with normal speed allocating resources on a par with other processes
432. munity to which both the host running SNMP management application and the sending machine belong The typical community is public Click Send test message to check if the settings are correct Do not send SNMP notifications to disable sending the log events of the recovery operations to SNMP managers Error handling These options are effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media These options enable you to specify how to handle errors that might occur during recovery Do not show messages and dialogs while processing silent mode The preset is Disabled With the silent mode enabled the program will automatically handle situations requiring user interaction where possible If an operation cannot continue without user interaction it will fail Details of the operation including errors if any can be found in the operation log Re attempt if an error occurs The preset is Enabled Number of attempts 5 Interval between attempts 30 seconds When a recoverable error occurs the program re attempts to perform the unsuccessful operation You can set the time interval and the number of attempts The attempts will be stopped as soon as the operation succeeds OR the specified number of attempts is performed depending on which comes first For example if the network location becomes unavailable or not reachable the program will attempt to reach the location every 30 seconds but no more than 5 times T
433. n Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components use the 9876 TCP network communication port by default The server listens to this port for incoming connection This port is also used as default by the Acronis client During component installation you might be asked to confirm the port opening or to open the port manually in case you are using a firewall other than Windows Firewall After installation you can change the ports at any time to match your preferable values or for the purpose of security This operation requires the restart of Acronis Remote Agent in Windows or the Acronis_agent in Linux service After the port is changed on the server side connect to the server using the lt Server IP gt lt port gt or the lt Server hostname gt lt port gt URL notation Note If you use network address translation NAT you can also configure the port by setting up port mapping Configuring the port in the operating system Windows To be able to change the ports numbers load and configure the Administrative Template provided by Acronis as described in Configuring communication settings p 83 under Remote Agent ports Linux Specify the port in the etc Acronis Policies Agent config file Restart the Acronis_agent daemon Configuring the port in a bootable environment While creating Acronis bootable media you have the option to pre configure the network port that will be used by the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 1
434. n credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer 6 2 9 Backup schemes Choose one of the available backup schemes Back up now to create a backup task for manual start and run the task immediately after its creation Back up later to create a backup task for manual start OR schedule one time task execution in the future Simple to schedule when and how often to backup data and specify retention rules Grandfather Father Son to use the Grandfather Father Son backup scheme The scheme does not allow data to be backed up more than once a day You set the days of week when the daily backup will be performed and select from these days the day of weekly monthly backup Then you set the retention periods for the daily referred to as sons weekly referred to as fathers and monthly referred to as grandfathers backups The expired backups will be deleted automatically Tower of Hanoi to use the Tower of Hanoi backup scheme where you schedule when and how often to back up sessions and select the number of backup levels up to 16 In this scheme the data can be backed up more than once a day By setting up the backup schedule and selecting backup levels you automatically obtain the rollback period the guaranteed number of sessions that you can go back at
435. n Kit WAIK is installed If you do not have such machine prepare as described in How to create bootable media p 253 Bootable Media Builder supports only x86 WinPE 2 x or 3 0 These WnPE distributions can also work on x64 hardware A PE image based on Win PE 2 0 requires at least 256MB RAM to work The recommended memory size for PE 2 0 is 512MB A PE image based on Win PE 3 0 requires at least 512MB RAM to work Adding Acronis Plug in to WinPE 2 x or 3 0 ISO To add Acronis Plug in to WinPE 2 x or 3 0 ISO 1 When adding the plug in to the existing Win PE ISO unpack all files of your Win PE ISO to a separate folder on the hard disk 2 Start the Bootable Media Builder either from the management console by selecting Tools gt Create Bootable Media or as a separate component 3 Select Bootable media type Windows PE When creating a new PE ISO Select Create Windows PE 2 x or 3 0 automatically The software runs the appropriate script and proceeds to the next window When adding the plug in to the existing PE ISO Select Use WinPE files located in the folder I specify m Specify path to the folder where the WinPE files are located 4 optional Specify Windows drivers to be added to Windows PE Once you boot a machine into Windows PE the drivers can help you access the device where the backup archive is located Click Add and specify the path to the necessary inf file for a corresponding SCSI RAID SATA controller
436. n My Computer check box under Security 3 Click OK in Mozilla Firefox 1 Onthe Options menu click Content 2 Make sure that the Enable JavaScript check box is selected 3 Click OK 7 2 Configuring Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components There are three ways to configure various parameters of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components in Windows By using Acronis Administrative Template By using the graphical user interface GUI By modifying the Windows registry In Linux instead of using the administrative template and modifying the registry parameters are configured by editing the corresponding configuration files If the values of any of these parameters set through the administrative template differ from those set through the graphical user interface the template based parameters take precedence and are effective immediately the parameters shown in the GUI will be changed accordingly The following subtopics describe each way of configuration and the parameters that can be configured through it 1 2 1 Parameters set through administrative template The following are the parameters of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components that can be set by using Acronis Administrative Template For information on how to apply the administrative template see How to load Acronis Administrative Template p 331 The administrative template contains the configuration parameters of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agen
437. n a tape library In combination with the tape options the backup schemes enable you to reuse in automatic mode the tapes that are considered as free after backup deletion See the Tape rotation p 144 section for more information Hardware A tape library robotic library is a high capacity storage device that contains the following one or more tape drives multiple up to several thousand slots to hold tape cartridges one or more loaders robotic mechanisms intended for relocating the tape cartridges between the slots and the tape drives barcode readers optional Each tape may have a special label attached to the side of a cartridge and comprise of a barcode to scan by a special reader that is usually mounted on a loader readable barcode digital value Such labels are used for tape identification in a tape library or especially in off site storage If all cartridges in a tape library have barcodes the library is ready to be automatically managed by software Tape libraries are a cost effective solution for data storages with huge capacity Moreover tape is perfect for archiving because cartridges can be stored off site for enhanced data security However reading even a small amount of data from a tape library takes much more time from several seconds to several minutes than from other types of data storages The best practice of tape usage is LESS requests to write read LARGER amount of data So systematic
438. n and context menus The Application setting affects the other GUI elements The preset is System Default font for both the menus and the application interface items To make a selection choose the font from the respective combo box and set the font s properties You can preview the font s appearance by clicking the button to the right 3 2 Management server options The management server options enable you to adjust the behavior of the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server To access the management server options connect the console to the management server and then select Options gt Management server options from the top menu EPA Logging level This option defines whether the management server has to collect log events from the registered machines to the centralized log that is stored in a dedicated database and is available in the Log view You can set the option for all the events at once or select the event types to be collected If you completely disable collection of the log events the centralized log will contain only the management server s own log The preset is Collect logs for All events Use the Types of events to log combo box to specify the types of events that will be collected All events all events information warnings and errors occurred on all the machines registered on the management server will be recorded to the centralized log Errors and warnings warnings and errors will be recorde
439. n experiencing problems with a particular hardware configuration vga ask Prompts for the video mode to be used by the bootable media s graphical user interface Without the vga parameter the video mode is detected automatically vga mode_number Specifies the video mode to be used by the bootable media s graphical user interface The mode number is given by mode_number in the hexadecimal format for example vga 0x318 Screen resolution and the number of colors corresponding to a mode number may be different on different machines We recommend using the vga ask parameter first to choose a value for mode_number quiet Disables displaying of startup messages when the Linux kernel is loading and starts the management console after the kernel is loaded This parameter is implicitly specified when creating the bootable media but you can remove this parameter while in the boot menu Without this parameter all startup messages will be displayed followed by a command prompt To start the management console from the command prompt run the command bin product nousb Disables loading of the USB Universal Serial Bus subsystem nousb2 Disables USB 2 0 support USB 1 1 devices still work with this parameter This parameter allows you to use some USB drives in the USB 1 1 mode if they do not work in the USB 2 0 mode nodma Disables direct memory access DMA for all IDE hard disk drives Prevents the kernel from freezing on some hardware n
440. n the backup task has failed The When user interaction is required check box is always selected 4 For the e mail message to include the log entries related to the backup select the Add full log to the notification check box 5 Click Additional e mail parameters to configure additional e mail parameters as follows then click OK From type the e mail address of the user from whom the message will be sent If you leave this field empty messages will be constructed as if they are from the destination address Use encryption you can opt for encrypted connection to the mail server SSL and TLS encryption types are available for selection Some Internet service providers require authentication on the incoming mail server before being allowed to send something If this is your case select the Log on to incoming mail server check box to enable a POP server and to set up its settings Incoming mail server POP enter the name of the POP server Port set the port of the POP server By default the port is set to 110 User name enter the user name Password enter the password Select the Use the specified outgoing mail server check box to enable an SMTP server and to set up its settings Outgoing mail server SMTP enter the name of the SMTP server Port set the port of the SMTP server By default the port is set to 25 User name enter the user name Password enter the password Click
441. nallocated space on an existing disk group This can be done by deleting volumes or converting basic disks to dynamic You might want to change the target volume type basic simple spanned striped mirrored RAID 0 1 RAID 5 This can be done by deleting the target volume and creating a new volume on the resulting unallocated space Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 includes a handy disk management utility which enables you to perform the above operations both under the operating system and on bare metal To find out more about Acronis Disk Director Lite see the Disk management p 268 section 2 9 Backing up LVM volumes Linux This section explains in brief how you would back up and recover volumes managed by Linux Logical Volume Manager LVM called logical volumes using Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Linux can access back up and recover such volumes when running in Linux with 2 6 x kernel or a Linux based bootable media You can back up data of one or more logical volumes and recover it to a previously created logical volume or a basic MBR disk or volume likewise it is also possible to recover the data of a basic volume to a logical volume In each case the program stores and recovers volume contents only The type or other properties of the target volume will not change A system recovered from a logical volume backup to a basic MBR disk cannot boot because its kernel tries to
442. nd limitations of each possible volume architecture If the current operating system installed on this machine does not support the selected type of volume you will receive the appropriate warning In this case the Next button will be disabled and you will have to select another type of volume to proceed with the new volume creation After you click the Next button you will proceed forward to the next wizard page Select destination disks p 278 Select destination disks The next wizard page will prompt you to choose the disks whose space will be used for the volume creation To create a basic volume Select a destination disk and specify the unallocated space to create the basic volume on To create a Simple Spanned volume Select one or more destination disks to create the volume on To create a Mirrored volume Select two destination disks to create the volume on To create a Striped volume Select two or more destination disks to create the volume on To create a RAID 5 volume Select three destination disks to create the volume on After you choose the disks the wizard will calculate the maximum size of the resulting volume depending on the size of the unallocated space on the disks you chose and the requirements of the volume type you have previously decided upon If you are creating a dynamic volume and select one or several basic disks as its destination you will receive a warning that the selected disk
443. nd task activities are interval based and provide historical information for the specified time interval that can last from days to years depending on the amount of data kept in the databases Generating reports To start generating a report select a report template in the Reports view and then click Generate on the toolbar There are two types of report templates customizable and predefined In a customizable report template you can specify which entries to include in the report by using filters A predefined report template is preset so that you can generate a report with one click The report will contain the information selected grouped and sorted according to the template settings The report appears in a separate interactive window that enables expanding and collapsing the tables You can export the report to an XML file and open it later using Microsoft Excel or Microsoft Access Report about the machines In this view you can generate a report about the machines that are registered on the management server This report consists of one or more tables Filters Under Filters choose which machines to include in the report Only the machines that meet all filter criteria are included Machines The list of machines Select either physical machines or virtual machines Status The machine statuses OK Warning and or Error Last connection physical machines only The period within which the last connection between
444. ne and advanced editions of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 3 1 Console options The console options define the way information is represented in the Graphical User Interface of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 To access the console options select Options gt Console options from the top menu Sal Startup page This option defines whether to show the Welcome screen or the Dashboard upon connection of the console to a managed machine or to the management server The preset is the Welcome screen To make a selection select or clear the check box for Show the Dashboard view upon connection of the console to a machine This option can also be set on the Welcome screen If you select the check box for At startup show the Dashboard instead of the current view on the Welcome screen the setting mentioned above will be updated accordingly Suda Pop up messages About tasks that need interaction This option is effective when the console is connected to a managed machine or to the management server The option defines whether to display the pop up window when one or more tasks require user interaction This window enables you to specify your decision such as to confirm reboot or to retry after freeing up the disk space on all the tasks in the same place Until at least one task requires interaction you can open this window at any time from the managed machine s Dashboard Alternatively you can review the task execution states in the
445. nes o Click amp Refresh The management console will update the list of machines from the management server with the most recent information Though the list of machines is refreshed automatically based on events the data may not be retrieved immediately from the management server due to some latency Manual refresh guarantees that the most recent data is displayed Adding a machine to the management server To be able to deploy backup policies from Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server to a managed machine and perform other centralized management operations you need to register the machine on the management server To add a machine 1 Inthe Navigation tree select Ge Physical machines 2 Click Add a machine to AMS on the toolbar 3 Inthe IP Name field enter the machine s name or its IP address or click Browse and browse the network for the machine 4 5 Note for Virtual Edition users When adding a VMware ESX ESXi host enter the IP of the virtual appliance running Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for ESX ESXi Specify the user name and password of a user who is a member of the Administrators group on the machine Note for Virtual Edition users When adding a VMware ESX ESXi host specify the user name and password for your vCenter or ESX ESXi host Click Options gt gt and specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also
446. new line that displays the newly set value appears The setting status changes from Default to Custom Should you modify the setting again the line will display the new value unless the new value is the default one When the default value is set the line disappears and so you always see only the settings that differ from the default values in this section of the Create backup plan page To reset all the settings to the default values click Reset to default Convert to VM Applies to Disk volume backup backup of Entire virtual machines or Volumes of a virtual machine Not available on machines running Linux By setting up regular conversion you obtain a copy of your server or workstation on a virtual machine which can be readily powered on in case the original machine fails The conversion can be performed by the same agent that performs the backup or by an agent installed on another machine If the latter is the case you need to store the archive in a shared location such as a network folder or a managed vault so that the other machine can access the archive When to convert p 214 Optional Specify whether to convert every full every incremental or every differential backup or convert the last created backup on schedule Specify the conversion schedule if required Host p 214 Specify the machine that will perform the conversion The machine has to have Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows Agent for ESX ESXi or Agen
447. ng recovery in the Default backup and recovery options p 97 In this case the settings set here will be effective for operations other than backup and recovery such as archive validation or cleanup You can further override the settings set in the default backup and recovery options when creating a backup plan or a recovery task The settings you obtain in this case will be plan specific or task specific Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 provides the following Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP objects to SNMP management applications 1 3 6 1 4 1 24769 100 200 1 0 string identifying the type of event Information Warning Error 1 3 6 1 4 1 24769 100 200 2 0 string containing the text description of the event it looks identical to messages published by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 in its log The preset is Disabled To set up sending SNMP messages 1 Select the Send messages to SNMP server check box 2 Specify the appropriate options as follows Types of events to send choose the types of events All events Errors and warnings or Errors only Server name IP type the name or IP address of the host running the SNMP management application the messages will be sent to Community type the name of the SNMP community to which both the host running SNMP management application and the sending machine belong The typical community is public To disable sending SNMP messages clear the Send messa
448. ng the vault Create Acronis Secure Click Di Create Acronis Secure Zone Zone The procedure of creating the Acronis Secure Zone is described in depth in the Creating Acronis Secure Zone p 248 section Explore a vault s Click Q Explore content In the appearing Explorer window examine the selected vault s content Validate a vault Click validate You will be taken to the Validation p 235 page where this vault is already pre selected as a source The vault validation checks all the archives stored in the vault Delete a vault Click x Delete The deleting operation actually removes only a shortcut to the folder from the Vaults view The folder itself remains untouched You have the option to keep or delete archives contained in the folder Refresh vault table Click s Refresh information While you are reviewing the vault content archives can be added to the vault deleted or modified Click Refresh to update the vault information with the most recent changes Creating a personal vault To create a personal vault 1 Inthe Name field type a name for the vault being created 2 Optional In the Comments field add a description of the vault 3 Inthe Path field click Change In the opened Personal Vault Path window specify a path to the folder that will be used as the vault A personal vault can be organized on detachable or removable media on a network share or on FTP 4 Click OK As a result the created v
449. nherited only by the G2 members since G2 does not have child groups The violet policy is applied straight to machine 4 It will exist on machine 4 irrespectively of this machine s membership in any group Let s assume we create the G3 group in the root If no policies are applied to the group all its members are supposed to be green But if we add say the 1 machine to G3 the machine will bear both orange and green policies in spite of the fact that G3 has nothing to do with the orange policy That s why it is difficult to track the policies inheritance from the top of the hierarchy if the same machine is included in multiple groups In real life it s much easier to view the inheritance from the machine s side To do so navigate to any group that contains the machine select the machine and then select the Backup policies tab on the Information pane The Inheritance column shows whether a policy is inherited or applied directly to the machine Click Explore inheritance to view the inheritance order of the policy In our example the policy names the Inheritance column and the inheritance order will be as follows For machine Name of the policy 1 0r 2o0r 3 green orange 4 green orange blue violet Inheritance Inherited Inherited Inherited Inherited Inherited Applied directly Inheritance order All machines gt 1 or 2 or 3 G1 gt 1 or 2 or 3 All machines gt 4 G1 g
450. nis Bootable Components WinPE If the plug in is installed in a folder other than the default folder change the path accordingly check the registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Acronis Bootable Components Settings WinPE for the plug in location 4 Run the following command export_license bat 5 Copy the contents of the current folder by default C Program Files Acronis Bootable Components WinPE to the BartPE folder plugins Acronis 6 Insert your Windows distribution CD if you do not have a copy of Windows installation files on the HDD Start the Bart PE builder Specify the path to the Windows installation files or Windows distribution CD Click Plugins and check whether the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 plug in is enabled Enable if disabled 10 Specify the output folder and the full path to the resulting ISO file including the file name or the media to create 11 Build the Bart PE 12 Burn the ISO to CD or DVD if this has not been done yet or copy to a flash drive Once the machine boots into the Bart PE and you configure the network connection select Go gt System gt Storage gt Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 to start 6 10 2 Connecting to a machine booted from media Once a machine boots from bootable media the machine terminal displays a startup window with the IP address es obtained from DHCP or set according to the pre configured values Remote connection To connect to the machine remot
451. nitial state this initial state does not change often so there is no need for regular backup Example An Internet cafe school or university lab where the administrator often undoes changes made by the students or guests but rarely updates the reference backup in fact after installing software updates only The backup time is not crucial in this case and the recovery time will be minimal when recovering the systems from the full backup The administrator can have several copies of the full backup for additional reliability Incremental backup An incremental backup stores changes to the data against the latest backup You need access to other backups from the same archive to recover data from an incremental backup An incremental backup is most useful when you need the possibility to roll back to any one of multiple saved states the data changes tend to be small as compared to the total data size It is widely accepted that incremental backups are less reliable than full ones because if one backup in the chain is corrupted the next ones can no longer be used However storing multiple full backups is not an option when you need multiple prior versions of your data because reliability of an oversized archive is even more questionable Example Backing up a database transaction log Differential backup A differential backup stores changes to the data against the latest full backup You need access to the corresponding ful
452. nized on detachable or removable media Acronis Secure Zone is considered as a personal vault available to all users that can log on the system Personal vaults can be used by local backup plans or local tasks Centralized backup plans cannot use personal vaults except for Acronis Secure Zone Sharing a personal vault Multiple machines can refer to the same physical location say to the same shared folder but each of the machines has its own shortcut in the Vaults tree Users that back up to a shared folder can see and manage each other s archives according to their access permissions for that folder To ease archive identification the Personal vault view has the Owner column that displays the owner of each archive To find out more about the owner concept see Owners and credentials p 31 Metadata The meta folder is created during backup in every personal vault This folder contains additional information about archives and backups stored in the vault such as archive owners or the machine name If you accidentally delete the meta folder it will be automatically recreated next time you access the vault But some information like owner names and machine names may be lost 4 2 1 Working with the Personal vault view This section briefly describes the main elements of the Personal vault view and suggests the ways to work with them Vault toolbar The toolbar contains operational buttons that let you perform operations with the select
453. nning on the vault Inventory A storage node needs information about a tape in its own database to be able to operate with the tape So after the vault is created generally the next step is to inventory tapes Inventorying is a procedure that allows the storage node recognize tapes that are currently loaded into the tape library slots It is relatively fast and normally requires reading the cartridge barcodes without reading the tape data If a barcode cannot be read the tape will be mounted to read its GUID identifier only The Inventory procedure can be run manually by a user or automatically when access to recently added tapes is required To launch the procedure select the tape library vault in the Navigation pane of the console click Manage tapes and then click Start inventory on the Tape Management window When inventorying is completed a user has the list of tapes currently loaded into the library Perform the procedure every time you load new tapes into tape library slots Rescan As stated above the storage node keeps information about tapes and their contents in a dedicated database The Rescan task reads information about the content of user selected tapes and updates the database The task can take a long time so it is only initiated manually You should select each slot with a tape you want to rescan before the task launch Run the Rescan task for tapes that are unknown for the storage node if the storage node
454. ns on the machine p 294 Use the Information panel s tabs to view detailed information about the selected machine and perform additional operations such as start stop tasks revoke policies explore the policy inheritance etc The panel is collapsed by default To expand the panel click the lAl chevron The content of the panel is also duplicated in the Machine details p 298 window Use filtering and sorting p 303 capabilities for easy browsing and examination of the machines in question Way of working with groups Inthe Physical machines view select the group Use the toolbar s operational buttons to perform actions on the selected group p 303 Use the Information panel s tabs to view detailed information about the selected group and perform additional operations such as revoke policies or explore policy inheritance The panel is collapsed by default To expand the panel click the lAl chevron The content of the panel is also duplicated in the Group details p 307 window Actions on machines Registering machines on the management server Once the machine is added or imported to the All physical machines group it becomes registered on the management server Registered machines are available for deploying backup policies and for performing other centralized management operations Registration provides a trusted relationship between the agent residing on the machine and the management server is Adding and im
455. nstant data recovery on the same machine Preparation Before recovering Windows to dissimilar hardware make sure that you have the drivers for the new HDD controller and the chipset These drivers are critical to start the operating system Use the CD or DVD supplied by the hardware vendor or download the drivers from the vendor s Web site The driver files should have the inf sys or oem extensions If you download the drivers in the exe cab or zip format extract them using a third party application such as WinRAR http www rarlab com or Universal Extractor http legroom net software uniextract The best practice is to store drivers for all the hardware used in your organization in a single repository sorted by device type or by the hardware configurations You can keep a copy of the repository on a DVD or a flash drive pick some drivers and add them to the bootable media create the custom bootable media with the necessary drivers and the necessary network configuration for each of your servers Or you can simply specify the path to the repository every time Universal Restore is used Universal Restore settings Automatic driver search Specify where the program will search for the Hardware Abstraction Layer HAL HDD controller driver and network adapter driver s If the drivers are on a vendor s disc or other removable media turn on the Search removable media If the drivers are located in a networked folder o
456. ntation of disks and volumes depends on which operating system is currently running A volume may have a different letter in different Windows operating systems For example volume E might appear as D or L when you boot another Windows operating system installed on the same machine It is also possible that this volume will have the same letter E under any Windows OS installed on the machine A dynamic disk created in one Windows operating system is considered as a Foreign Disk in another Windows operating system or might be unsupported by this operating system When you need to perform a disk management operation on such machine it is necessary to specify for which operating system the disk layout will be displayed and the disk management operation will be performed The name of the currently selected operating system is shown on the console toolbar after The current disk layout is for Click the OS name to select another operating system in the Operating System Selection window Under bootable media this window appears after clicking Disk management The disk layout will be displayed according to the operating system you select 6 11 4 Disk management view Acronis Disk Director Lite is controlled through the Disk management view of the console The top part of the view contains a disks and volumes table enabling data sorting and columns customization and toolbar The table presents the numbers of the disks as well as assign
457. nu By right clicking the item and selecting the operation in the context menu Action pages An action page appears in the main area when clicking any action item in the Actions menu or in the Actions bar on the Actions and tools pane It contains steps you need to perform in order to create and launch any task or a backup plan or backup policy Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Connected to This Machine Local Connection SQ ee e HM ross E e fe Create backup plan Create a backup pin to protect data on this machine 7 Advanced vew General Plan name Backup 4 9 2009 4 31 48 AM Plan s credentials Run as Administrator arrent user Comments Some additonal infromation on the backup plan being cerated What to back up Source type Disks volumes Y Items to back up 13 99 GB Al 2 volumes NTFS C New Volume E Excuusions tmo bak Where to back up Archive Access crecent s Administrator plan s credentials Archive comments kg teo Action page Create backup plan Using controls and specifying settings The action pages offer two ways of representation basic and advanced The basic representation hides such fields as credentials comments etc When the advanced representation is enabled all the available fields are displayed You can switch between the views by selecting the Advanced view check box at the top of the action page Most settings are configured by click
458. o access this option select the Advanced view check box Policy comments Optional Type a description of the backup policy To access this option select the Advanced view check box What to back up Items to back up p 349 Specify which data items to back up on each machine the policy will be deployed to On each of the machines the agent will find the data items using the rules you specify For example if the selection rule is All volumes the entire machine will be backed up Access credentials p 353 Optional Provide credentials for the source data if the backup policy account does not have access permissions to the data To access this option select the Advanced view check box Exclusions p 353 Optional Set up exclusions for the specific types of files you do not wish to back up To access this option select the Advanced view check box Where to back up Archive p 354 Specify the path to the location where the backup archive will be stored and the archive name It is advisable that the archive name be unique within the location The location must be available at the time when the management server starts to deploy the policy Access credentials p 355 Optional Provide credentials for the location if the backup policy account does not have access permissions to the location To access this option select the Advanced view check box Archive comments Optional Enter comments to the archive To acce
459. o each of the machines On each machine the agents find the items to back up and create corresponding centralized backup plans p 370 You will be able to monitor the policies statuses on a single screen and navigate if required to each machine plan or task to see their status and log entries The management server also enables you to monitor and manage the agent s locally originated activities Since you connect the console to the management server rather than to each machine and perform all management operations through the central management unit this way of management is called centralized management p 370 Centralized management does not rule out the direct management p 371 of each machine You can connect the console to each machine and perform any direct management operation However centralized backup plans can be managed through the management server only since a well thought out policy functions automatically and rarely requires human intervention Using the management server you can create one or more centralized archive storages centralized vaults p 370 which will be shared by the registered machines A centralized vault can be used by any backup policy as well as by any backup plan created on the registered machines using direct management Organizing a managed archive storage What should the capacity of your centralized vault be What if transferring sizeable backups to the vault will cause network congestion
460. ocal to the storage node Database path p 133 Specify a local folder on the storage server to create a vault specific database This database will store the metadata required for cataloguing the archives and performing deduplication Deduplication Optional Select whether to enable archive deduplication in the vault Deduplication minimizes storage space taken by the archives and backup traffic It reduces the size of archives in the vault by eliminating redundant data such as duplicate files or disk blocks Deduplication is not possible on tape devices To learn more about how deduplication works see the Deduplication p 71 section Compression Optional Select whether to compress the deduplication data store This setting is available only if deduplication is enabled Encryption p 134 Optional Select whether to protect the vault with encryption Anything written to the vault will be encrypted and anything read from it will be decrypted transparently by the storage node using a vault specific encryption key stored on the storage node After you have performed all the required steps click OK to commit creating the managed vault Vault path To specify the path where the managed vault will be created 1 Enter the full path to the folder in the Path field or select the desired folder in the folders tree Managed vaults can be organized onthe hard drives local to the storage node on a network share ona Stor
461. ofw Disables the FireWire IEEE1394 interface support nopcmcia Disables detection of PCMCIA hardware nomouse Disables mouse support module_name off Disables the module whose name is given by module_name For example to disable the use of the SATA module specify sata_sis off pci bios Forces the use of PCI BIOS instead of accessing the hardware device directly You may want to use this parameter if the machine has a non standard PCI host bridge pci nobios Disables the use of PCI BIOS only direct hardware access methods will be allowed You may want to use this parameter when the bootable media fails to start which may be caused by the BIOS pci biosirq Uses PCI BIOS calls to get the interrupt routing table You may want to use this parameter if the kernel is unable to allocate interrupt requests IRQs or discover secondary PCI buses on the motherboard These calls might not work properly on some machines But this may be the only way to get the interrupt routing table Network settings While creating Acronis bootable media you have an option to pre configure network connections that will be used by the bootable agent The following parameters can be pre configured IP address Subnet mask Gateway DNS server WINS server Once the bootable agent starts on a machine the configuration is applied to the machine s network interface card NIC If the settings have not been pre configured the agent uses DHCP auto
462. ol SNMP objects to a specified SNMP manager Windows event log This option defines whether the management server has to record its own log events in the Application Event Log of Windows to see this log run eventvwr exe or select Control Panel gt Administrative tools gt Event Viewer You can filter the events to be recorded The preset is Disabled To enable this option select the Log events check box Use the Types of events to log check box to filter the events to be logged in the Application Event Log of Windows All events all events information warnings and errors Errors and warnings Errors only To disable this option clear the Log events check box SNMP notifications This option defines whether the management server has to send its own log events to the specified Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP managers You can choose the types of events to be sent Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 provides the following Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP objects to SNMP management applications 1 3 6 1 4 1 24769 100 200 1 0 string identifying the type of event Information Warning Error 1 3 6 1 4 1 24769 100 200 2 0 string containing the text description of the event it looks identical to messages published by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 in its log The preset is Disabled To set up sending SNMP messages 1 Select the Send messages to SNMP server check box 2 Specify the appropr
463. olicy for some reason Once you confirm the changes the management server updates the policy on all machines the policy was deployed to While the changes are transferred to the machine and the agent updates the backup plan the policy state on the machine is Updating Once the policy is updated its state becomes Deployed again This state means that the policy is functioning and no changes are currently being made to it A policy that was modified while being deployed remains in the Deploying state The management server just starts to deploy the modified policy from the beginning You may need to revoke the policy from the machine or from the group the machine is included in Once you confirm the changes the management server revokes the policy from the machine While the changes are transferred to the machine and the agent deletes the backup plan from it the policy state on the machine is Revoking You may change grouping conditions or the machine may change its properties so that the machine leaves one group and is included into another This may result in revoking one policy and deploying another policy In this case the first policy s state on the machine will be Revoking and the second policy s state will be Deploying The policies can appear in the GUI simultaneously or one after another Backup policy state diagram Successful revoke Revoke Deployed Revoke Successful deployment Update completed P
464. olicy status on a machine To see this parameter select any group of machines in the tree then select the machine and then select the Backup policies tab on the Information pane In each of the states the backup policy can have one of the following statuses Error Warning OK While the policy is in the Deployed state its status reflects how successfully the policy is executed While the policy is in any other state its status reflects how successfully the policy is being modified Policy status when data to back up is not found on a machine A backup policy can be applied to a machine that does not have data meeting the selection rules p 377 No error or warning will be logged during the policy deployment because it is assumed that the data may appear in the future A backup plan is created as usual and the policy state is changed to Deployed If no data to back up is found at the time when the backup task starts the task will fail and the policy status will turn to Error If at least one of the data items is found the backup task will succeed with a warning The policy status will change accordingly The backup tasks will start on schedule as specified by the policy and produce a similar result until all data items appear on the machine or the policy is edited to exclude the non existent data items Examples Assume the selection rule states that the policy has to back up volumes D and F The policy is applied to both Linux and
465. ols a2 Gui Py Create bootable meds x Instal Acroris components Bg cote ret ene TN Manage mounted imapas a try for hage DL Creste Acronis Secure Zone Run Acronis Recovery for Microsoft SQL Server g Manage bernas Tools Q Ling the minsgimart i Create bootable media a Ran Acronis Recovery for Microsef SQL Server console Q rt misgar E innan arosis components 2 Manage licenses E v Q oa Ran Acronis Recovery ler Micresalt Exchange C A tatuo show the Oathdoard instead of the current view Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Console Welcome screen Key elements of the console workspace Name Description gt Navigation pane Contains the Navigation tree and the Shortcuts bar and lets you navigate to the different views see the Navigation pane p 11 section 2 Actions and tools pane Contains bars with a set of actions that can be performed and tools see the Actions and Tools pane p 12 section amp Main area The main place of working where you create edit and manage backup plans policies tasks and perform other operations Displays the different views and action pages p 14 depending on items selected in the menu Navigation tree or on the Actions and Tools pane 4 Menu bar Appears across the top of the program window and lets you perform all the operations available on both panes Menu items change dynamically 1024x768 or higher display resolution is required for comfortable work
466. olume resize capability particular files cannot be recovered from disk backups located on Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node XFS volume recovery without the volume resize capability particular files cannot be recovered from disk backups located on Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node JFS particular files cannot be recovered from disk backups located on Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node Linux SWAP Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 can back up and recover corrupted or non supported file systems using the sector by sector approach 1 5 Supported operating systems Acronis License Server Windows 2000 Professional SP4 XP Professional SP2 Windows 2000 Server 2000 Advanced Server Server 2003 Server 2008 Windows SBS 2003 SBS 2008 Windows XP Professional x64 Edition Windows Server 2003 2008 x64 Editions Windows Vista all editions except for Vista Home Basic and Vista Home Premium Windows 7 all editions except for the Starter and Home editions Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Console Windows 2000 Professional SP4 XP Home Editions XP Professional SP2 Windows 2000 Server 2000 Advanced Server Server 2003 Server 2008 Windows SBS 2003 SBS 2008 Windows XP Professional x64 Edition Windows Server 2003 2008 x64 Editions Windows Vista all editions Windows 7 all editions Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server and Acronis Backup amp Recovery
467. omponent Win32 Trace Minimal Level Description Specifies the minimum severity level of events to be recorded in the System event log Only events of levels greater than or equal to Win32 Trace Minimal Level will be recorded Possible values Any severity level from Unknown through Critical or Blocked to not record any events Default value 4 meaning that events about errors and critical errors will be recorded Customer Experience Program Specifies whether the machine where the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 component is installed will participate in the Customer Experience Program Select one of the following Not Configured By default the machine does not participate in the Customer Experience Program Enabled In Enable sending reports to Acronis select one of the following Enable Information about the hardware configuration the most and least used features and about any problems will be automatically collected from the machine and sent to Acronis ona regular basis The end results are intended to provide software improvements and enhanced functionality to better meet the needs of Acronis customers Acronis does not collect any personal data The terms of participation can be found on the Acronis Web site Disable The information will not be sent Disabled The same as Not configured Ide Parameters set through GUI The following parameters can be set through the graphical user interface GUI For Acronis Backu
468. on 1 3 2 Items to back up Specify selection rules for backing up items selected in the Source type field of the General section Volumes to back up selection rules p 349 Files to back up selection rules p 352 Volumes to back up selection rules Define volume selection rules according to which the volumes will be backed up on the machines the policy will be applied to To define volume selection rules In the first line select the rule from the list or type it manually To add another rule click the next empty line and select the rule from the list or type it manually The program remembers the rules typed manually and the next time you open the window these rules will be available for selection in the list The following table explains the pre defined rules that can be selected from the list To include In the Volumes column Comments Windows and Linux volumes All volumes Type or select All Volumes Refers to all volumes on machines running Windows and all mounted volumes on machines running Linux Windows volumes Volume C Type C or select it from the list System volume Type or select SYSTEM The system volume contains the hardware specific files that are needed to start Windows such as Ntldr Boot ini and Ntdetect com There is only one system volume even if multiple Windows operating systems are installed on the computer For more details see Note on Windows machines below Boot volume Typ
469. on 3 Warning 4 Error or 5 Critical error Default value 4 only errors and critical errors will be recorded if Trace State is set to True SNMP Specifies the types of the agent s events to send notifications about by means of Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP This parameter has the following settings Trace State Description Specifies whether to send the SNMP notifications Possible values True or False Default value False Trace Level Description Specifies the minimum level of severity of events for sending SNMP notifications about them Only notifications about events of levels greater than or equal to Trace Level will be sent Possible values 0 Internal event 1 Debugging information 2 Information 3 Warning 4 Error or 5 Critical error Default value 4 only errors and critical errors will be recorded if Trace State is set to True SNMP Address Description Specifies the network name or IP address of the SNMP server Possible values Any string 0 to 32765 characters long Default value Empty string SNMP Community Description Specifies the community name for the SNMP notifications Possible values Any string 0 to 32765 characters long Default value public Backup Specifies the location and initial size of the snapshot storage a temporary file that is used when backing up data by taking a snapshot This file is deleted as soon as the backup is complete With the default settings the
470. on the license server will not be freed up automatically Revoke it manually from this host using the Manage licenses tool if you need to free up the license 7 1 5 Storage nodes Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node helps you to optimize usage of various resources required for the enterprise data protection This goal is achieved through organizing managed vaults p 375 that serve as dedicated storages of the enterprise backup archives Storage node enables you to relieve managed machines of unnecessary CPU load by using the storage node side cleanup p 377 and storage node side validation p 378 drastically reduce backup traffic and storage space taken by the archives by using deduplication p 71 prevent access to the backup archives even in case the storage medium is stolen or accessed by a malefactor by using encrypted vaults p 374 To learn more about Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node see the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node p 20 section The key elements of the Storage nodes view Storage nodes list with toolbar The toolbar lets you perform operations p 317 with the selected storage node The list of storage nodes displays online and offline storage nodes added to the management server It also informs you about the total number of backups and archives on the storage node Information panel Contains the detailed information about the selected storage node and lets you
471. ons except for centralized backup plans to obtain the relevant information This will take you to the appropriate view with pre filtered machines tasks or backup policies respectively For instance if you click Idle under Tasks the Tasks view will be opened with tasks filtered by the Idle state Information presented in the System view section is refreshed every time the management server synchronizes with the machines Information in other sections is refreshed every 10 minutes and every time you access the Dashboard Vaults The Vaults section displays information about centralized managed vaults You can sort vaults by name or by used space In some cases information about free space in a vault might be not available for example if the vault is located on a tape library If the vault itself is not available offline the Vault is not available message will be displayed pe Backup policies To be able to manage and protect multiple machines as a whole you can create a backup plan template called a backup policy By applying this template to a group of machines you will deploy multiple backup plans with a single action Backup policies exist only on the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server You do not have to connect to each machine separately to check whether the data is successfully protected Instead check the cumulative status of the policy p 287 on all managed machines the policy is applied to To find ou
472. ontiguous select a single log entry then hold down SHIFT and click another entry All the entries between the first and last selections will be selected too View a log entry s details 1 Select a log entry Do one of the following Click View Details The log entry s details will be displayed in a separate window Expand the Information panel by clicking the chevron Save the selected log Select a single log entry or multiple log entries entries to a file Click A Save Selected to File In the opened window specify a path and a name for the file Save all the log entries Make sure that the filters are not set to a file 5 Click A Save All to File In the opened window specify a path and a name for the file Save all the filtered log Set filters to get a list of the log entries that satisfy the filtering criteria entries to a file 5 Click A Save All to File In the opened window specify a path and a name for the file As a result the log entries of that list will be saved Delete all the log entries Click amp Clear Log All the log entries will be deleted from the log and a new log entry will be created It will contain information about who deleted the entries and when Set up the logging level Click Configure logging level In the Logging level p 90 window specify whether to collect log events from the registered machines to the centralized log Filtering and sorting log
473. operating system found during the backup scan Do not try to recover more than one operating system using Active Restore if you want the result to be predictable When recovering a multi boot system choose only one system volume and boot volume at a time Once the system recovery is started the operating system boots from the backup The Acronis Active Restore icon appears in the system tray The machine becomes operational and ready to provide necessary services The immediate user sees the drive tree and icons and can open files or launch applications even though they were not yet recovered The Acronis Active Restore drivers intercept system queries and set the immediate priority for recovery of the files that are necessary to serve the incoming requests While this on the fly recovery proceeds the continuing recovery process is transferred to the background If you try to log off shut down or hibernate the machine using the Start Menu commands the end of the current session will be automatically postponed until the recovery is completed Should you decide to switch off the machine with the Power button though all the changes made to the system since the last boot up would be lost the system will not be recovered not even partially and the only possible solution in this case will be to start the recovery process anew from a bootable media The background recovery continues until all the selected volumes are recovered the log entry
474. ordinary user and then switch user as required Start the console with the command usr sbin acronis_console 3 Connect the console to the machine where the agent is installed Where to go from here For what to do next see Basic concepts p 26 For understanding of the GUI elements see Using the management console p 10 For how to enable non root users to start the console under Linux see Privileges for local connection p 76 For how to enable remote connection to a machine running Linux see Privileges for remote connection in Linux p 77 Centralized management We recommend that you first try to manage the single machine using direct management as described above To start with centralized management 1 Install Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server p 19 2 Install Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agents on the machines that need data protection When installing the agents register each of the machines on the management server To do so enter the server s IP or name and the centralized administrator s credentials in one of the installation wizard s windows 3 Install Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Console p 21 on the machine from which you prefer to operate We recommend that you use the console that installs on Windows if you have a choice between Windows and Linux console distributions Install Acronis Bootable Media Builder 4 Start the console Create the bootable media
475. ory where the command batch file will be executed In the Arguments field specify the command s execution arguments if required Depending on the result you want to obtain select the appropriate options as described in the table below 5 Click Test command to check if the command is correct Check box Selection Fail the backup task if the Selected Cleared Selected Cleared command execution fails Do not perform the data Selected Selected Cleared Cleared capture until the command execution is complete Result Preset Perform the data N A Perform the data set ee thedats capture after the capture concurrently command is with the command capture only after the A h executed despite and irrespective of command is execution failure the command successfully executed k or success execution result Fail the task if the command execution fails Post data capture command To specify a command batch file to be executed after data capture 1 Inthe Command field type a command or browse to a batch file The program does not support interactive commands i e commands that require user input for example pause 2 In the Working directory field specify a path to a directory where the command batch file will be executed 3 Inthe Arguments field specify the command s execution arguments if required Depending on the result you want to obtain select the appropriate options as described in the table below 5 Click Test command to c
476. ote When backing up virtual machines by using Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for ESX ESXi All Volumes is the only template that can be used What does a disk or volume backup store For supported file systems a disk or volume backup stores only those sectors that contain data This reduces the resulting backup size and speeds up the backup and recovery operations Windows The swap file pagefile sys and the file that keeps the RAM content when the machine goes into hibernation hiberfil sys are not backed up After recovery the files will be re created in the appropriate place with the zero size A volume backup stores all other files and folders of the selected volume independent of their attributes including hidden and system files the boot record the file allocation table FAT if it exists the root and the zero track of the hard disk with the master boot record MBR The boot code of GPT volumes is not backed up A disk backup stores all volumes of the selected disk including hidden volumes such as the vendor s maintenance partitions and the zero track with the master boot record Linux A volume backup stores all files and folders of the selected volume independent of their attributes a boot record and the file system super block A disk backup stores all disk volumes as well as the zero track with the master boot record Volumes with unsupported file systems will be backed up sector by sector Note on Wind
477. out help of an operating system Operations can be configured and controlled either locally through the GUI or remotely using the console p 371 Acronis Secure Zone A secure volume for storing backup archives p 367 within a managed machine p 375 Advantages enables recovery of a disk to the same disk where the disk s backup resides offers a cost effective and handy method for protecting data from software malfunction virus attack operator error eliminates the need for a separate media or network connection to back up or recover the data This is especially useful for mobile users can serve as the primary location for dual destination backup Limitation Acronis Secure Zone cannot be organized on a dynamic disk p 372 or a disk using the GPT partitioning style Acronis Secure Zone is considered as a personal vault p 376 Acronis Startup Recovery Manager ASRM A modification of the bootable agent p 369 residing on the system disk and configured to start at boot time when F11 is pressed Acronis Startup Recovery Manager eliminates the need for rescue media or network connection to start the bootable rescue utility Acronis Startup Recovery Manager is especially useful for mobile users If a failure occurs the user reboots the machine hits F11 on prompt Press F11 for Acronis Startup Recovery Manager and performs data recovery in the same way as with ordinary bootable media Limitation requires re ac
478. out the reason of the warning do one or more of the following Click the Warning hyperlink to see the log entry of the latest warning Select the policy and click View tasks Check the tasks that have Succeeded with warnings as their last result select a task and then click View log This approach comes in handy if the policy state is Deployed that is the policies tasks already exist on the managed machines Select the policy and click View log Check the warning log entries to find out the reason for the warnings select a log entry and then click View details This approach comes in handy if the policy has warnings while being deployed revoked or updated In the Tasks view apply the Last result gt Succeeded with warnings filter if there are too many tasks You can also sort the tasks succeeded with warnings by backup plans or by machines In the Log view apply the Warning amp filter if there are too many log entries You can also sort the warning entries by backup plans managed entities or machines 2 Once the reason of the warning is clear you might want to perform actions to prevent future warnings or failure Use the Activities section of the Dashboard to quickly access the warning log entries What to do if a policy status is OK No action is required Actions on backup policies All the operations described below are performed by clicking the corresponding items on the tasks toolbar The opera
479. overy p 122 of the security settings even if they are available in the archive The result will be the same the files will inherit the permissions from the parent folder To access file or folder NTFS permissions select Properties gt Security Media components This option is effective for both Windows and Linux operating systems when the backup destination is removable media When backing up to removable media you can make this media work as regular Linux based bootable media p 369 by writing additional components to it As a result you will not need a separate rescue disc The preset is None selected Select the check boxes for the components you want to put on the bootable media One Click Restore is the minimal addition to a disk backup stored on removable media allowing for easy recovery from this backup If you boot a machine from the media and click Run Acronis One click Restore the disk will be immediately recovered from the backup contained on the same media Caution Because the one click approach does not presume user selections such as selecting volumes to recover Acronis One Click Restore always recovers the entire disk If your disk contains several volumes and you are planning to use Acronis One Click Restore include all the volumes in the backup Any volumes missing from the backup will be lost Bootable agent is a bootable rescue utility based on Linux kernel that includes most of the
480. overy 10 Agent for Windows On Hyper V Server 2008 only remote installation is available Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows Windows 2000 Professional SP4 XP Professional SP2 Windows 2000 Server 2000 Advanced Server Server 2003 Server 2008 Windows SBS 2003 SBS 2008 Windows XP Professional x64 Edition Windows Server 2003 2008 x64 Editions Windows Vista all editions except for Vista Home Basic and Vista Home Premium Windows 7 all editions except for the Starter and Home editions Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Linux Linux with kernel 2 4 20 or later including 2 6 x kernels and glibc 2 3 2 or later Various Linux distributions including Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 and 5 CentOS 4and5 Fedora 9 and 10 Ubuntu 8 10 Intrepid Ibex and 9 04 Jaunty Jackalope Debian 4 Lenny and 5 Etch SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 OpenSUSE m Asianux x64 versions of the above Linux distributions and other Linux distributions are also supported The agent for Linux is in fact a 32 bit executable For authentication the agent uses system libraries 32 bit versions of which are not always installed by default with 64 bit distributions When using the agent on a 64 bit RedHat based distribution such as RHEL CentOS Fedora or Scientific Linux make sure that the following 32 bit packages are installed in the system pam i386 libselinux i386 libsepol i386 These packages sho
481. overy 10 Agent for ESX ESXi provides the flexibility to protect virtual machines in multiple ways Connect the console to the virtual appliance Agent for ESX ESXi and create a backup plan that will back up all or some of the virtual machines Connect the console to the virtual appliance Agent for ESX ESXi and create an individual backup plan for each machine The plan will back up the volumes you specify Register the virtual appliance Agent for ESX ESXi on the management server All virtual machines except for the virtual appliance will appear in the All virtual machines group You can group these machines and apply any policy that backs up disks or volumes to them Install Agent for Windows or Agent for Linux on each virtual machine Register the machines on the management server The machines will be considered as physical machines You can apply a backup policy to these machines or create a backup plan on each machine separately If any of the machines meets membership criteria set for a dynamic group of physical machines the machine will be protected by the policy applied to this group Advanced product editions other than Virtual Edition Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Advanced Server Advanced Server SBS Edition and Advanced Workstation allow using only the last of the above methods 2 14 3 Grouping the registered machines As soon as a machine is registered p 377 on the management server the machine appears in the Al
482. overy 10 from Acronis True Image Echo and Acronis True Image 9 1 product families 2 13 1 Acronis Secure Zone Acronis Secure Zone is a secure partition that enables keeping backup archives on a managed machine disk space and therefore recovery of a disk to the same disk where the backup resides Certain Windows applications such as Acronis disk management tools can access the zone Should the disk experience a physical failure the zone and the archives located there will be lost That s why Acronis Secure Zone should not be the only location where a backup is stored In enterprise environments Acronis Secure Zone can be thought of as an intermediate location used for backup when an ordinary location is temporarily unavailable or connected through a slow or busy channel Advantages Acronis Secure Zone Enables recovery of a disk to the same disk where the disk s backup resides Offers a cost effective and handy method for protecting data from software malfunction virus attack operator error Being an internal archive storage eliminates the need for a separate media or network connection to back up or recover the data This is especially useful for mobile users Can serve as a primary destination when using dual destination p 113 backup Limitation The zone cannot be organized on a dynamic disk or a disk using the GPT partitioning style Managing the Acronis Secure Zone Acronis Secure Zone is considered as a persona
483. ows machines Windows operating systems prior to Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 keep system files and the loader on the same volume unless a different volume has been specified during the system installation If Windows files and the loader are on the same volume selecting either SYSTEM or BOOT is enough to back up the entire operating system Otherwise select both SYSTEM and BOOT Operating systems starting from Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 create a dedicated system volume called System Reserved If you select SYSTEM only this dedicated volume will be backed up Always select both SYSTEM and BOOT when backing up machines running these operating systems Since backup policies are commonly applied to multiple machines with various operating systems Acronis recommends that you always select both the system and the boot volumes for backup to ensure the integrity of every operating system Note on Linux machines You can include both Windows and Linux volumes partitions in one centralized backup policy For instance it is possible to set up a policy to back up volume C on Windows machines and partition dev hda1 on Linux machines Unlike Windows there is no clear distinction between a volume partition and a folder directory in Linux Linux has the root partition denoted as to which elements of various types including hard disks directories and system devices are attached mounted forming a tree si
484. p To back up the logical DYN1 volume by using the command line interface run the following command here the name of the backup is assumed to be home backup tib trueimagecmd partition dyn1 filename home backup tib create Helpful link http tldp org HOWTO LVM HOWTO 2 10 Backing up RAID arrays Linux Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Linux can back up and recover Linux Software RAID devices known as multiple disk devices or MD devices and hardware RAID arrays Software RAID arrays Software RAID arrays or MD devices combine several volumes and make solid block devices dev mdoO dev md1 dev md31 information of which is stored in etc raidtab or in dedicated areas of those volumes Backup You can back up active mounted software arrays in the same way as logical volumes The arrays appear at the end of the list of volumes available for backup Basic volumes included in software arrays are listed as if they had a corrupted file system or do not have a file system at all Backing up such volumes does not make sense when a software array is mounted as it won t be possible to recover them Example Here is an example of a volumes list obtained with the list command The GUI displays a similar table The system has RAID 1 configured on two basic volumes sdc1 sdd1 Num Partition Flags Start Size Type iDaLs
485. p 380 384 Direct management 58 184 379 384 388 389 Disk backup Image 49 206 220 379 385 388 Disk conversion basic to dynamic 277 280 dynamic to basic 277 280 281 GPT to MBR 277 280 MBR to GPT 277 279 Disk destination 227 Disk group 43 385 387 Disk initialization e 276 277 Disk management 45 222 274 Disk operations 276 Disks 222 226 Disks volumes selection 225 Domain access credentials 94 314 Drivers for Universal Restore 261 263 Dual destination 53 100 115 Dynamic disk 43 379 385 386 387 Dynamic group 62 383 386 Dynamic grouping criteria 62 Dynamic volume 43 382 387 E Editing custom groups 312 314 E mail e 101 110 123 126 Encrypted archive 387 Encrypted vault 325 387 390 Error handling 100 115 123 128 Event tracing 93 96 111 127 Example 63 Exclusions 201 207 356 365 Export 387 Exporting archives and backups 166 167 248 F Fast incremental differential backup 100 113 File destination 223 232 File level backup snapshot 100 106 107 File level security 100 113 114 123 125 Files selection 226 Files to back up selection rules 359 362 Filtering and sorting archives 134 163 168 Filtering and sorting backup plans and tasks 186 195 309 Filtering and sorting backup policies 292 296 306 316 Filtering and sorting log entries 198 199 3
486. p The default value is 12 00 PM Back up on Specifies the days on which to perform a backup The default value is Workdays Weekly Monthly Specifies which of the days selected in the Back up on field you want to reserve for weekly and monthly backups A monthly backup will be performed every fourth such day The default value is Friday Keep backups Specifies how long you want the backups to be stored in the archive A term can be set in hours days weeks months or years For monthly backups you can also select Keep indefinitely if you want them to be saved forever The default values for each backup type are as follows Daily 7 days recommended minimum Weekly 4 weeks Monthly indefinitely The retention period for weekly backups must exceed that for daily backups the monthly backups retention period must be greater than the weekly backups retention period We recommend setting a retention period of at least one week for daily backups At all times a backup is not deleted until all backups that directly depend on it become subject to deletion as well This is why you might see a weekly or a monthly backup remain in the archive for a few days past its expected expiration date If the schedule starts with a daily or a weekly backup a full backup is created instead Examples Each day of the past week each week of the past month Let us consider a GFS backup scheme that many may find useful Back up files e
487. p amp Recovery 10 Management Server Collecting Logs Windows Event Log SNMP SNMP Address and SNMP Community For Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent Windows Event Log SNMP SNMP Address SNMP Community and Customer Experience Program You will find the description of these parameters in the correspondent topic about configuration through the administrative template Tka Parameters set through Windows registry The following two parameters determine paths to Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node s internal databases which contain information about managed vaults They can be modified only by editing the registry When to modify While the database located in the folder determined by DatabasePath is typically small the tape database located at TapeDatabasePath may be large if the tape library contains thousands of archives and you may want to store the tape database on a volume other that the system volume Parameters Important We do not recommend modifying these parameters If you do need to modify either of them you should do this before creating any correspondent tape or non tape managed vaults Otherwise the storage node will lose access to those vaults until you re attach them and re attaching a vault especially a deduplicating one may take a considerable amount of time DatabasePath Description Specifies the folder where Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node stores its non tape vaults d
488. p operation the registered machines default backup options are ignored Convert to VM Applies to Disk volume backup Not effective for machines running Linux By setting up regular conversion you obtain a copy of your server or workstation on a virtual machine which can be readily powered on in case the original machine fails The conversion can be performed by any machine that is registered on the management server and has Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent with the corresponding functionality The archive has to be stored in a shared location such as a network folder or a managed vault so that the selected machine can access the archive When to convert p 214 Optional Specify whether to convert every full every incremental or every differential backup or convert the last created backup on schedule Specify the conversion schedule if required Host p 214 Specify the machine that will perform the conversion The machine has to have Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows Agent for ESX ESXi or Agent for Hyper V installed Virtualization server p 214 Here you select the resulting virtual machine type and location Available options depend on the host you selected in the previous step Storage p 214 Choose the storage on the virtualization server or the folder to place the virtual machine files in Resultant VMs Specify a name for the virtual machines to be created The default name consists of v
489. p type field select whether you want to create a full incremental or differential backup p 32 Back up later scheme With the Back up later scheme the backup will be performed only once at the date and time you specify Specify the appropriate settings as follows Backup type Select the type of backup full incremental or differential If there is no full backup in the archive a full backup will be created regardless of your selection Date and time Specify when to start the backup The task will be Select this check box if you do not need to put the backup task on a schedule and started manually wish to start it manually afterwards Simple scheme With the simple backup scheme you just schedule when and how often to back up data and set the retention rule At the first time a full backup will be created The next backups will be incremental To set up the simple backup scheme specify the appropriate settings as follows Backup Set up the backup schedule when and how often to back up the data To learn more about setting up the schedule see the Scheduling p 165 section Retention rule With the simple scheme only one retention rule p 39 is available Set the retention period for the backups Grandfather Father Son scheme At a glance Daily incremental weekly differential and monthly full backups Custom day for weekly and monthly backups Custom retention periods for backups of each type Description
490. p will be deleted if the maximum archive size is set improperly too small or a regular backup turns out to be too large To protect the recent backups from deletion select the Never delete backups younger than check box and specify the maximum age of backups that must be retained The diagram below illustrates the resulting rule Never delete backups younger than l l t Delete if the maximum archive size is exceeded Do not delete 40 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2010 Combination of rules 1 and 2 You can limit both the backups lifetime and the archive size The diagram below illustrates the resulting rule Retention rules 1 and 2 are applied i Never delete backups younger than AM aa Delete backups older than Z P P F 4 1 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 I t f elet gt ge _ __ De ete l the maximum a not delete p archive size is exceeded Example Delete backups older than 3 Months Keep the archive size within 200GB Never delete backups younger than 10 Days Every time the retention rules are applied the program will delete all backups created more than 3 months or more exactly 90 days ago If after the deletion the archive size is more than 200GB and the oldest backup is older than 10 days the program will delete that backup Then if necessary the next old backup will be deleted until the archive size decreases to the
491. perties Type A basic MBR disk can contain up to four primary volumes or up to three primary volumes and multiple logical drives By default the program selects the original volume s type You can change this setting if required Primary Information about primary volumes is contained in the MBR partition table Most operating systems can boot only from the primary volume of the first hard disk but the number of primary volumes is limited If you are going to recover a system volume to a basic MBR disk select the Active check box Active volume is used for loading an operating system Choosing active for a volume without an installed operating system could prevent the machine from booting You cannot set a logical drive or dynamic volume active Logical Information about logical volumes is located not in the MBR but in the extended partition table The number of logical volumes on a disk is unlimited A logical volume cannot be set as active If you recover a system volume to another hard disk with its own volumes and operating system you will most likely need only the data In this case you can recover the volume as logical to access the data only File system Change the volume file system if required By default the program selects the original volume s file system Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 can make the following file system conversions FAT 16 gt FAT 32 and Ext2 gt Ext3 For volumes with other native file systems
492. pes required for the case What if What if have to move tapes with backups from one tape library to another 1 If both tape libraries are attached to the same machine with Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node installed i e the libraries are managed by the same storage node the storage node database has all the required information about the content of the moved tapes So all you need to do is to perform the inventory p 141 procedure for the managed vault on the library where the tapes were placed to 2 If you move tapes to a tape library managed by another storage node you should rescan p 142 each relocated tape to provide the storage node with information about backups contained on the tape What if need to use a tape from the tape library in the local tape device and vice versa Acronis agents create backups on tapes in a format that differs from the format used by the storage node It is the reason why it is impossible to interchange tapes between tape devices attached to a storage node and attached to a managed machine a tape written by a storage node cannot be read by an agent in a locally attached tape device However the storage node can read tapes written by an agent Please refer to the tape compatibility table p 50 to get comprehensive information about the compatibility of tape formats in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 What if have to reinstall the storage node or attach the tape library to
493. pite of its schedule and conditions Stop a plan task Backup plan Click J Stop Stopping the running backup plan stops all its tasks Thus all the task operations will be aborted Task Click LJ Stop What will happen if stop the task Generally stopping the task aborts its operation backup recovery validation exporting conversion migration The task enters the Stopping state first then becomes Idle The task schedule if created remains valid To complete the operation you will have to run the task over again recovery task from the disk backup The target volume will be deleted and its space unallocated you will get the same result if the recovery is unsuccessful To recover the lost volume you will have to run the task once again recovery task from the file backup The aborted operation may cause changes in the destination folder Some files may be recovered but some not depending on the moment when you stopped the task To recover all the files you will have to run the task once again Edit a plan task Backup plan Click 7 Edit Backup plan editing is performed in the same way as creation p 195 except for the following limitations It is not always possible to use all scheme options when editing a backup plan if the created archive is not empty i e contains backups 1 It is not possible to change the scheme to Grandfather Father Son or Tower of Hanoi 2 If the Tower of Hanoi sc
494. ple increasing the number of machines would lead to ratios of 3 1 4 1 etc a reasonable expectation for a typical environment is a ratio between 1 2 1 and 1 6 1 As a more realistic example suppose that you are performing a file level or disk level backup of two machines with similar disks On each machine the files common to all the machines occupy 50 of disk space say 1 GB the files that are specific to each machine occupy the other 50 another 1 GB In a deduplicating vault the size of the first machine s backup in this case will be 2 GB and that of the second machine will be 1 GB In a non deduplicating vault the backups would occupy 4 GB in total As a result the deduplication ratio is 4 3 or about 1 33 1 Similarly in case of three machines the ratio becomes 1 5 1 for four machines it is 1 6 1 It approaches 2 1 as more such machines are backed up to the same vault This means that you can buy say a 10 TB storage device instead of a 20 TB one The actual amount of capacity reduction is influenced by numerous factors such as the type of data that is being backed up the frequency of the backup and the backups retention period Deduplication restrictions Block level deduplication restrictions During a disk backup to an archive in a deduplicating vault deduplication of a volume s disk blocks is not performed in the following cases f the volume is a compressed volume f the volume s allocation unit size
495. policies that back up files This approach comes in handy when the machine is not hosted on a virtualization server the virtualization product installed on the host server is not supported by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Advanced Server Virtual Edition you want to use pre post backup or pre post data capture commands on the machine you want to apply file backup policies to the machine Adding a virtual machine as a virtual machine On Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server a machine is considered virtual if it can be backed up from the virtualization host without installing an agent on the machine This is possible when using Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Advanced Server Virtual Edition A virtual machine appears on the management server after registration of the virtualization server that hosts the machine provided that Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 agent for virtual machines is installed on that server Adding Hyper V virtual machines 1 Integration services p 49 have to be installed in the guest systems 2 Install Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Hyper V on the Hyper V host The agent is installed as an add on to Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows 3 Register p 294 the Hyper V host on the management server If the machine is already registered skip this step 4 The virtual machines hosted on the Hyper V server appear in the All virtual machines group Adding ESX
496. porting actions are available when you select the E Physical machines view or the al All physical machines group in the navigation tree To Do Add a new machine tothe Click S Add a machine to AMS management server In the Add machine p 294 window select the machine that needs to be added to the management server Import machines from Active Click i Import machines from Active Directory Directory In the Import machines from Active Directory p 295 window specify the machines or organizational units whose machines you need to import to the management server Import machines from a text Click 4 Import machines from file file In the Import machines from file p 297 window browse for a txt or csv file containing the names or IP addresses of machines to import to the management server The management console addresses to the agent and initiates the registration procedure Because registration requires the agent s participation it cannot take place when the machine is offline An additional agent installed on a registered machine becomes registered on the same management server automatically Multiple agents are jointly registered and deregistered Applying policies To Apply a backup policy to a machine Grouping actions To Create a custom static or dynamic group Add a machine to another static group For machines in custom groups Add machines to a static group Move a machine to anothe
497. pped These situations are considered as normal Task states A task can be in one of the following states Idle Waiting Running Stopping Need interaction The initial task state is Idle Once the task is started manually or the event specified by the schedule occurs the task enters either the Running state or the Waiting state Running A task changes to the Running state when the event specified by the schedule occurs AND all the conditions set in the backup plan are met AND no other task that locks the necessary resources is running In this case nothing prevents the task from running Waiting A task changes to the Waiting state when the task is about to start but another task using the same resources is already running In particular more than one backup or recovery task cannot run simultaneously on a machine A backup task and a recovery task also cannot run simultaneously Once the other task unlocks the resource the waiting task enters the Running state A task may also change to the Waiting state when the event specified by the schedule occurs but the condition set in the backup plan is not met See Task start conditions p 114 for details Need interaction Any running task can put itself into the Need interaction state when it needs human interaction such as changing media or ignoring a read error The next state may be Stopping if the user chooses to stop the task or Running on selecting Ignore Retry or anothe
498. preset limit or the oldest backup age reaches 10 days Deleting backups with dependencies Both retention rules presume deleting some backups while retaining the others What if the archive contains incremental and differential backups that depend on each other and on the full backups they are based on You cannot say delete an outdated full backup and keep its incremental children When deletion of a backup affects other backups one of the following rules is applied Retain the backup until all dependent backups become subject to deletion The outdated backup will be kept until all backups that depend on it also become outdated Then all the chain will be deleted at once during the regular cleanup This mode helps to avoid the potentially time consuming consolidation but requires extra space for storing backups whose deletion is postponed The archive size and or the backup age can exceed the values you specify Consolidate the backup The program will consolidate the backup that is subject to deletion with the next dependent backup For example the retention rules require to delete a full backup but retain the next incremental one The backups will be combined into a single full backup which will be dated the incremental backup date When an incremental or differential backup from the middle of the chain is deleted the resulting backup type will be incremental This mode ensures that after each cleanup the archive size and the backu
499. propriate procedure There is also the corresponding Knowledge Base article on the Acronis Web site The following is an example of how to reactivate GRUB in case the system disk volume is recovered to identical hardware 1 2 Start Linux or boot from the bootable media and then press CTRL ALT F2 Mount the system you are recovering mkdir mnt system mount t ext3 dev sda2 mnt system root partition mount t ext3 dev sdal mnt system boot boot partition Mount the proc and dev file systems to the system you are recovering mount t proc none mnt system proc mount o bind dev mnt system dev Save a copy of the GRUB menu file by running one of the following commands cp mnt system boot grub menu 1lst mnt system boot grub menu 1st backup or cp mnt system boot grub grub conf mnt system boot grub grub conf backup Edit the mnt system boot grub menu Ist file for Debian Ubuntu and SUSE Linux distributions or the mnt system boot grub grub conf file for Fedora and Red Hat Enterprise Linux distributions for example as follows vi mnt system boot grub menu 1st 6 Inthe menu lst file respectively grub conf find the menu item that corresponds to the system you are recovering This menu items have the following form title Red Hat Enterprise Linux Server 2 6 24 4 root hd kernel vmlinuz 2 6 24 4 ro root dev sda2 rhgb quiet initrd initrd 2 6 24 4 img The lines starting with title root kernel and
500. ps age are within the bounds you specify The consolidation however may take a lot of time and system resources And you still need some extra space in the vault for temporary files created during consolidation What you need to know about consolidation Please be aware that consolidation is just a method of deletion but not an alternative to deletion The resulting backup will not contain data that was present in the deleted backup and was absent from the retained incremental or differential backup Backups resulting from consolidation always have maximum compression This means that all backups in an archive may acquire the maximum compression as a result of repeated cleanup with consolidation Best practices Maintain the balance between the storage device capacity the restrictive parameters you set and the cleanup frequency The retention rules logic assumes that the storage device capacity is much more than the average backup size and the maximum archive size does not come close to the physical storage capacity but leaves a reasonable reserve Due to this exceeding the archive size that may occur between the cleanup task runs will not be critical for the business process The rarer the cleanup runs the more space you need to store backups that outlive their lifetime The Vaults p 128 page provides you with information about free space available in each vault Check this page from time to time If the free space which in fact is th
501. r Otherwise the machine will not be added to the group The registration address of each machine can be found in the Registration address column in any management server view that contains the machine the column is hidden by default Move one group to another To move the selected group to another group or to the root 1 Inthe groups tree click the group to move the selected group to You can move any type of custom group either static or dynamic to another custom group of any type or to the root folder The root folder of the machines tree contains groups of the first level Groups that include other groups are called parent groups Groups that are in parent groups are called child groups All the backup policies applied to the parent group will be applied to its child groups as well 2 Click OK Editing custom groups Editing a custom group is performed in the same way as creating p 304 one Changing the type of group will result in its conversion Any custom group can be converted to a dynamic group if it was static and vice versa When converting a static group to dynamic provide grouping criteria All the members that exist in the static group that do not match the provided criteria will be removed from the dynamic group When converting a dynamic group to static two options are available either to leave the current content of the group or to empty the group Group details Aggregates in two tabs all informa
502. r static group Remove a machine from the current static group Do Click Apply backup policy In the Policy selection window specify the backup policy you need to apply to the selected machine Do Click amp Create group In the Create group p 304 window specify the required parameters of the group The new group will be created in the group the selected machine is a member of except for the built in fy All physical machines group Click 5 Add to another group In the Add to group p 297 window specify the group to copy the selected machine to The backup policies applied to the groups the machine is a member of will be applied to the machine Click E Add machines to group In the Add machines to group p 297 window select the machines that you need to add Click ka Move to another group In the Move to group p 297 window select the group to move the machine to All the backup policies applied to the group the machine was in will be revoked The backup policies applied to the group the machine is now a member of will be deployed to the machine Click E Remove from group The backup policies applied to the group will be revoked from the machine automatically Deleting the selected machine from the management server To Delete a machine from the management server Do Click x Delete machine from AMS As a result backup policies are revoked and shortcuts to centralized vaults are de
503. r action such as Reboot that can put the task to the Running state Stopping The user can stop a running task or a task that needs interaction The task changes to the Stopping state and then to the Idle state A waiting task can also be stopped In this case since the task is not running stop means removing it from the queue Task state diagram Continue Ignore Retry Need user interaction Task completed The other task is completed 1 Waiting for condition 2 Waiting when another task locks the necessary resources Task statuses A task can have one of the following statuses Error Warning OK A task status is derived from the result of the last run of the task status How it is determined How to handle 1 Last result is Failed Identify the failed task gt Check the task log to find out the reason of the failure then do one or more of the following Remove the reason of the failure gt optionally Start the failed task manually Edit the failed task to prevent its future failure Edit the local plan to prevent its future failure in case a local plan has failed Edit the backup policy on the management server in case a centralized plan has failed 2 Last result is Succeeded View the log to read the warnings gt optionally Perform with warning actions to prevent the future warnings or failure 3 Last result is No action is required Succeeded or i u a The
504. r back up data once Bootable agent A bootable rescue utility that includes most of the functionality of the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent p 366 Bootable agent is based on Linux kernel A machine p 375 can be booted into a bootable agent using either bootable media p 369 or Acronis PXE Server Operations can be configured and controlled either locally through the GUI or remotely using the console p 371 Bootable media A physical media CD DVD USB flash drive or other media supported by a machine p 375 BIOS asa boot device that contains the bootable agent p 369 or Windows Preinstallation Environment WinPE p 379 with the Acronis Plug in for WinPE p 366 A machine can also be booted into the above environments using the network boot from Acronis PXE Server or Microsoft Remote Installation Service RIS These servers with uploaded bootable components can also be thought of as a kind of bootable media Bootable media is most often used to recover an operating system that cannot start access and back up the data that has survived in a corrupted system deploy an operating system on bare metal create basic or dynamic volumes p 374 on bare metal back up sector by sector a disk that has an unsupported file system back up offline any data that cannot be backed up online because of restricted access being permanently locked by the running applications or for any other reason Built in group
505. r on the bootable media specify the path to the folder in the Search folder field During recovery Universal Restore will perform the recursive search in all the sub folders of the specified folder find the most suitable HAL and HDD controller drivers of all those available and install them into the recovered system Universal Restore also searches for the network adapter driver the path to the found driver is then transmitted by Universal Restore to the operating system If the hardware has multiple network interface cards Universal Restore will try to configure all the cards drivers In case Universal Restore cannot find a compatible driver in the specified locations it will specify the problem device and ask for a disc or a network path to the driver Once Windows boots it will initialize the standard procedure for installing new hardware The network adapter driver will be installed silently if the driver has the Microsoft Windows signature Otherwise Windows will ask for confirmation whether to install the unsigned driver After that you will be able to configure the network connection and specify drivers for the video adapter USB and other devices Mass storage drivers to install anyway To access this option select the Advanced view check box If the target hardware has a specific mass storage controller such as RAID especially NVIDIA RAID or a fibre channel adapter specify the appropriate drivers in the Drivers field The driver
506. r the machine Use the fully qualified domain name FQDN of the storage node that is a completely specified domain name ending in a top level domain Do not enter 127 0 0 1 or localhost as the storage node IP name These settings are no good even if the management server and the storage node are on the same machine because after the policy using the storage node is deployed each agent will try to access the storage node as if it were installed on the agent s host To provide a valid user account for the machine click Options gt gt and specify User name When entering a name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain The user account has to be amember of the Administrators group on the machine Password The password for the account Select the Save password check box to store the password for the account Click OK Because registration requires the storage node s participation it cannot take place when the machine is offline Storage node details The Storage node details window accumulates in four tabs all information on the selected Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node This information is also duplicated on the Information pane Storage node properties The tab displays the following information about the selected storage node Name the name of the machine where the storage node is installed IP the IP address of the machin
507. rable time to complete You can see this task s state in the Tasks view on the management server Compacting task After one or more backups or archives have been deleted from the vault either manually or during cleanup the vault may contain items which are no longer referred to from any archive Such items are deleted by the compacting task which is a scheduled task performed by the storage node By default the compacting task runs every Sunday night at 03 00 You can re schedule the task as described in Operations with storage nodes p 317 under Change the compacting task schedule You can also manually start or stop the task from the Tasks view When deduplication is most effective The following are cases when deduplication produces the maximum effect When backing up in the full backup mode similar data from different sources Such is the case when you back up operating systems and applications deployed from a single source over the network When performing incremental backups of similar data from different sources provided that the changes to the data are also similar Such is the case when you deploy updates to these systems and apply the incremental backup Again it is recommended that you first back up one machine and then the others all at once or one by one When performing incremental backups of data that does not change itself but changes its location Such is the case when multiple pieces of data circulate over
508. ram will ask for them Note for Linux users To specify a Common Internet File System CIFS network share which is mounted on a mount point such as mnt share select this mount point instead of the network share itself f the archive is stored on an FTP or SFTP server type the server name or address in the Path field as follows ftp ftp_server port _number or sftp sftp_server port number If the port number is not specified port 21 is used for FTP and port 22 is used for SFTP After entering access credentials the folders on the server become available Click the appropriate folder on the server You can access the server as an anonymous user if the server enables such access To do so click Use anonymous access instead of entering credentials According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer If the archive is stored on a locally attached tape device expand the Tape drives group then click the required device In the table to the right of the tree select the archive The table displays the names of the archives contained in each vault folder you select While you are reviewing the location content archives can be added deleted or modified by another user or by the program itself according to scheduled operations Use t
509. rary slots inventory tapes in the slots and define labels for the tapes If you have a new label assigned to the tape the action enables you to eject the tape temporarily to make the same label outside the cartridge Rescan tapes displays the Tape Rescanning window which is useful for selecting slots and launching the Rescan p 142 procedure to read some special information on the content of the specified tapes Also the Edit Delete Validate and Refresh functions are allowed on a tape library vault It should be noted these functions have some specific features for a tape library So the Edit operation enables you to substitute a tape library device without the Rescan operation The Delete operation clears all the information on the selected tape library vault from the storage node database i e the operation deletes the content data of all the tapes when ever the data is used by the storage node on the tape library device At the Delete operation the vault content will be deleted from the storage node database without accessing the tapes The plans and tasks that use this vault will fail The backup archives belonging to a deleting centralized vault on a tape library will be deleted as well but these archives might be recovered by any storage node through the Rescan operation Actions with archives on tapes in a library The following are common functions for archive data management for a backup archive selected in the C
510. rded in the storage node s log and any backup to the vault becomes prohibited Possible values Any integer number between 0 and 2147483647 Default value 10 If the amount of free space on the disk containing a managed vault s database is less than the value of Vault Database Free Space Error Limit an error is recorded in the storage node s log Backups performed to the vault will keep failing until the amount of free space is above the limit You can view storage node errors in the Dashboard The database is stored on the storage node in a local folder whose name is specified in Database path when creating the vault Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server The following are the parameters of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server that can be set by using Acronis Administrative Template Collecting Logs Specifies when to collect log entries from machines managed by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server This parameter contains two settings Trace State Description Specifies whether to collect the log entries about the components events from the registered machines Possible values True or False Default value True Trace Level Description Specifies the minimum level of severity of collected entries Only entries of levels greater than or equal to the value in Trace Level will be collected Possible values 0 Internal event 1 Debugging information 2 Information 3 Warning 4 E
511. rder Type a plan s task s name or an owner s name in the field below the corresponding header name As a result you will see the list of tasks whose names owners names fully or just partly coincide with the entered value Filter plans and tasks by state In the field below the corresponding header select the required value from the status type origin last result list schedule Configuring backup plans and the tasks table By default the table has six columns that are displayed others are hidden If required you can hide the displayed columns and show hidden ones To show or hide columns 1 Right click any column header to open the context menu The menu items that are ticked off correspond to the column headers presented in the table 2 Click the items you want to be displayed hidden Run backup plan The backup plan is considered as running if at least one of its tasks is running The Run backup plan window lets you run the task of the selected backup plan manually in spite of its schedule To run a task of the selected backup plan 1 Select the task of the backup plan you need to run To make certain of your selection check the task information gathered in tabs at the bottom of the window This information is also duplicated in the Task details p 190 window 2 Click OK Temporarily disabling a backup plan Temporarily disabling a backup plan is needed when moving archives from one vault to another by
512. re stored When creating a backup plan or a task that requires selection of an archive or an archive destination place the list of vaults will be available for quick access without drilling down through the folders tree Easy archive management A vault is available for access from the Navigation pane Having selected the vault you can browse the archives stored there and perform the following archive management operations geta list of backups included in each archive recover data from a backup examine backup content validate all archives in the vault or individual archives or backups mount a volume backup to copy files from the backup to a physical disk safely delete archives and backups from the archives Creating vaults is highly recommended but is not obligatory You may choose not to use the shortcuts and always specify the full path to the archive vault All of the above operations except for archive and backup deletion can be performed without creating vaults The operation of creating a vault results in adding the vault name to the Vaults section of the Navigation pane Centralized and personal vaults A centralized vault is a networked location allotted by the management server administrator to serve as storage for the backup archives A centralized vault can be managed by a storage node managed vault or be unmanaged A vault is called personal if it was created using direct connection of the console to a manag
513. reates the dedicated LDM Metadata partition taking space from the Microsoft Reserved Partition MSR Disk 1 LDM database Disk2 Protec GpT Microsoft LDM tive Reserved database MBR Partition MSR LDM Metadata partition _ 1 MB Dynamic disks organized on MBR Disk 1 and GPT Disk 2 disks For more information about dynamic disks please refer to the following Microsoft knowledge base articles Disk Management Windows XP Professional Resource Kit http technet microsoft com en us library bb457110 aspx 816307 Best practices for using dynamic disks on Windows Server 2003 based computers http support microsoft com kb 816307 Dynamic group A group of machines p 375 which is populated automatically by the management server p 376 according to membership criteria specified by the administrator Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 offers the following membership criteria m Operating system m Active Directory organization unit P address range A machine remains in a dynamic group as long as the machine meets the group s criteria The machine is removed from the group automatically as soon as the machine s properties change so that the machine does not meet the criteria anymore OR the administrator changes the criteria so that the machine does not meet them anymore There is no way to remove a machine from a dynamic group manually except for deleting the machine from the management server Dyn
514. recovering Windows starting from Windows 2000 Acronis Active Restore brings a system online immediately after the recovery is started The operating system boots from the backup image and the machine becomes operational and ready to provide necessary services The data required to serve incoming requests is recovered with the highest priority everything else is recovered in the background See Acronis Active Restore p 55 for details Files p 226 You may have to specify credentials for the destination Skip this step when operating on a machine booted with bootable media Access credentials p 227 Optional Provide credentials for the destination if the task credentials do not enable recovery of the selected data To access this option select the Advanced view check box When to recover Recover p 227 Select when to start recovery The task can start immediately after its creation be scheduled for a specified date and time in the future or simply saved for manual execution Optional Acronis Universal Restore Applies to Windows OS and system volume recovery Universal Restore p 227 Use the Acronis Universal Restore when you need to recover and boot up Windows on dissimilar hardware Automatic drivers search Specify where the program should search for HAL mass storage and network adapter drivers Acronis Universal Restore will install drivers that better fit the target hardware Mass storage drivers to insta
515. rector Lite will detect that the disk is unusable by the system and needs to be initialized The Disk management view will show the newly detected hardware as a gray block with a grayed icon thus indicating that the disk is unusable by the system If you need to initialize a disk 1 Select a disk to initialize 2 Right click on the selected volume and then click Initialize in the context menu You will be forwarded to the Disk Initialization window that will provide the basic hardware details such as the disk s number capacity and state to aid you in the choice of your possible action 3 Inthe window you will be able to set the disk partitioning scheme MBR or GPT and the disk type basic or dynamic The new disk state will be graphically represented in the Disk Management view of the console immediately 4 By clicking OK you ll add a pending operation of the disk initialization To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 283 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them After the initialization all the disk space remains unallocated and so still impossible to be used for program installation or file storage To be able to use it proceed normally to the Create volume operation If you decide to change the disk settings it can be done later using the standard Acronis Disk Director Lite disk tools Basic disk cloning Sometimes it is necessary to transf
516. rectory where the command batch file will be executed 3 Inthe Arguments field specify the command s execution arguments if required 4 Depending on the result you want to obtain select the appropriate options as described in the table below 5 Click Test command to check if the command is correct Check box Selection Fail the task if the command Selected Cleared Selected Cleared execution fails Do not recover until the Selected Selected Cleared Cleared command execution is complete Result Preset Perform the N A Perform the recovery after the recovery Perform the recovery command is concurrently with only after the executed despite the command command is execution failure execution and successfully executed P i or success irrespective of the Fail the task if the command execution command execution result failed Post recovery command To specify a command executable file to be executed after the recovery is completed 1 Inthe Command field type a command or browse to a batch file 2 Inthe Working directory field specify a path to a directory where the command batch file will be executed 3 Inthe Arguments field specify the command execution arguments if required If successful execution of the command is critical for you select the Fail the task if the command execution fails check box In case the command execution fails the task run result will be set to Failed When the check box is
517. related to a group Remove machine from a group Hosted virtual machines Do Click View details You will be taken to the Group details window where you can examine all information related to this group Click Ge View tasks You will be taken to the Tasks view with pre filtered tasks related to the selected backup group Click View log This opens Log view with pre filtered log entries of the selected group Click Ez Remove The centralized plans which were deployed to the parent group will no longer affect this machine The tab displays a list of the machines hosted on the selected virtualization server or managed by the specified virtual appliance You can create a dynamic group based on the list of the hosted virtual machines To do this click Create a dynamic group The created group will be accessible in the Virtual machines view p 309 Inheritance order The Inheritance order window lets you examine where the policy applied to the machine came from The policy that was directly applied to the machine is displayed as follows Machine name The policy that is applied on the machine through inheritance is displayed as in the following example Group1 gt kl Group2 gt Group3 gt Machine Group in the root contains Group2 to which the policy is applied directly Group2 in turn contains child Group3 that inherits the policy from the parent and applies the policy to Machinel respectively The mac
518. requires access credentials the program will ask for them Note for Linux users To specify a Common Internet File System CIFS network share which is mounted on a mount point such as mnt share select this mount point instead of the network share itself If the archive is stored on an FTP or SFTP server type the server name or address in the Path field as follows ftp ftp_server port number or sftp sftp_server port number If the port number is not specified port 21 is used for FTP and port 22 is used for SFTP After entering access credentials the folders on the server become available Click the appropriate folder on the server You can access the server as an anonymous user if the server enables such access To do so click Use anonymous access instead of entering credentials According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer If the archive is stored on a locally attached tape device expand the Tape drives group then click the required device 2 Inthe table to the right of the tree select the archive The table displays the names of the archives contained in each vault folder you select While you are reviewing the location content archives can be added deleted or modified by another user or by the program itself ac
519. rnational sales manager s laptop Windows Vista 2 the server that holds the corporate database and the shared document storage Windows Server 2008 3 4 5 6 the salesmen s machines Windows XP from the Sales department AD organization unit Pa I Acronis Management Server N Root i Physical machines Virtual machines Generic root Other generic root l All physical I machines y l l l l l l i C_ Built in dynamic group International Custom dynamic groups a manager laptop i C_ Static group J ea pe a A a A An example of group hierarchy The backup policy on the server has to differ from that on the workstations The administrator creates the G1 dynamic group that contains machines with the server operating systems and applies a backup policy to the group Any server that is added to the network and registered on the management server will appear in this group and the policy will be applied to it automatically To protect the salesmen s workstations with a different policy the administrator creates the G2 dynamic group using the AD OU criterion Any change in the OU membership of a machine will be reflected in the G2 membership The appropriate policy will be applied to the new OU members and revoked from machines deleted from the OU The international sales manager s laptop is not included in t
520. roperties you want to view 3 Inthe Event Properties dialog box view the event s properties such as the event source shown in the Source field and the event number shown in the Event ID field When you are finished click OK to close the Event Properties dialog box 5 5 Advanced scheduling settings The following advanced settings are available when setting up a daily weekly or monthly schedule in a backup policy Use Wake On LAN When this setting is enabled Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server will use the Wake On LAN WOL functionality to wake up turned off registered machines when a backup cleanup or validation is scheduled to start If the backup task on each machine starts with a delay see the next setting the management server will wake up the machines according to those delays Before using this setting make sure that you have enabled Wake on LAN on the registered machines The machine s basic input output system BIOS configuration network adapter configuration and the operating system configuration must allow waking up the machine from the powered off state also known as the S5 or G2 power state Distribute start time within the time window When this setting is enabled the backup task on each registered machine will start with a specific delay from the start time set in the policy This distributes the tasks actual start times within a time interval You may want to use this setting when creat
521. rowse or typing it manually If the domain access credentials were not specified in the management server options the program will ask you to provide them The credentials will be saved in the Domain access credentials p 92 option For example suppose that the domain us corp example com has OU1 which is in the root OU1 has OU2 and OU2 has OU3 And you need to add the machines of OU3 So the criterion will be OU 0U3 OU OU2 OU OU1 If OU3 has child containers and you also need to add the machines of those containers to the group select the Include child containers check box Listed in txt csv file criterion When you use this criterion the dynamic group will include machines from the list given in the specified txt or csv file If you later modify the file the contents of the group will change accordingly The file is checked every 15 minutes If you later delete the file or if it becomes unavailable the contents of the group will correspond to the list that was last stored in the file Text file requirements The file should contain machine names or IP addresses one machine per line Example Machine_name_1 Machine_name_2 192 168 1 14 192 168 1 15 A registered machine has to be specified by its registration address that is you need to provide exactly the same host name fully qualified domain name FQDN or IP address as was specified when the machine was initially added to the management serve
522. rror or 5 Critical error Default value 0 all entries will be collected Log Cleanup Rules Specifies how to clean up the centralized event log stored in the management server s reporting database This parameter has the following settings Max Size Description Specifies the maximum size of the centralized event log in kilobytes Possible values Any integer number between 0 and 2147483647 Default value 1048576 that is 1 GB Percentage to Keep Description Specifies the percentage of the maximum log size to keep on cleanup Possible values Any integer number between 0 and 100 Default value 95 For details on how the centralized event log is cleaned up see Log cleanup rules p 90 Windows Event Log Specifies when to record Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server s events into the Application event log in Windows This parameter has two settings Trace State Description Specifies whether to record Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server s events into the event log Possible values True or False Default value False Trace Level Description Specifies the minimum level of severity of events to be recorded into the event log Only events of levels greater than or equal to the value in Trace Level will be recorded Possible values 0 Internal event 1 Debugging information 2 Information 3 Warning 4 Error or 5 Critical error Default value 4 only errors and critical errors will be r
523. rs In a workgroup create a local user account for each user that will back up to the node Members of the Administrators group become node administrators You can add more accounts later as required Run the console connect to the management server Create a managed vault as described in Operations with centralized vaults p 131 Enable deduplication when creating a managed vault Setting up groups and policies The detailed explanation of when and why you need to organize groups of machines can be found in the Grouping the registered machines p 61 section Here are some scenarios supported by the aforementioned Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 implementation Protecting the servers You will most likely create individual backup plans on each of the servers depending on their roles But it is necessary to perform a full backup of the entire server at least once You might want to back up the server during a maintenance window or backup window after installing or updating software before relocation etc In our example there is no need to back up entire servers on a regular basis You can manually delete old backups since they are not numerous 1 Create a policy that backs up All Volumes to the managed vault on the storage node Choose Back up later manual start and Full backup type 2 Create a static group named say S_1 Add all the servers to this group A storage node can be added in case the managed vault is not on th
524. rupted disconnected or powered off For information on how to bring a disk that is offline and missing back online please refer to the following Microsoft knowledge base article http technet microsoft com en us library cc732026 aspx 6 11 6 Volume operations Acronis Disk Director Lite includes the following operations that can be performed on volumes Create Volume p 277 Creates a new volume with the help of the Create Volume Wizard Delete Volume p 280 Deletes the selected volume Set Active p 281 Sets the selected volume Active so that the machine will be able to boot with the OS installed there Change Letter p 281 Changes the selected volume letter Change Label p 282 Changes the selected volume label Format Volume p 282 Formats a volume giving it the necessary file system The full version of Acronis Disk Director will provide more tools and utilities for working with volumes Acronis Disk Director Lite must obtain exclusive access to the target volume This means no other disk management utilities like Windows Disk Management utility can access it at that time If you receive a message stating that the volume cannot be blocked close the disk management applications that use this volume and start again If you can not determine which applications use the volume close them all Creating a volume You might need a new volume to Recover a previously saved backup copy in the
525. ry data block saved in the backup Both procedures are resource intensive Validation of an archive will validate all the archive s backups A vault or a location validation will validate all archives stored in this vault location While successful validation means high probability of successful recovery it does not check all factors that influence the recovery process If you back up the operating system only a test recovery in bootable environment to a spare hard drive can guarantee success of the recovery At least ensure that the backup can be successfully validated using the bootable media Different ways to create a validation task Using the Validation page is the most general way to create a validation task Here you can validate immediately or set up a validation schedule for any backup archive or location you have permission to access Validation of an archive or of the latest backup in the archive can be scheduled as part of the backup plan For more information see the Creating a backup plan p 195 section You can access the Validation page from the Vaults p 128 view Right click the object to validate archive backup or vault and select Validate from the context menu The Validation page will be opened with the pre selected object as a source All you need to do is to select when to validate and optionally provide a name for the task To create a validation task perform the following steps General Task name
526. s executing a recovery task will generate events logged in the local event log Physically a local event log is a collection of XML files stored on the machine The managed machine local event log is accessible when the console is connected to the machine Local event logging cannot be disabled Operations performed using bootable media are logged as well but the log s lifetime is limited to a current session Rebooting eliminates the log but you can save the log to a file while the machine is booted with the media Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node has its own local event log This log s events are accessible through the centralized log only Centralized event log Way of working with log entries The maximum number of entries stored in the centralized log is 50000 The maximum number of entries that can be displayed is 10000 In case the number of log entries is greater than 10000 use filtering and sorting capabilities to display the desired log entries in the table You can also hide the unneeded columns and show the hidden ones See the Filtering and sorting log entries p 323 section for details Select the log entry or log entries to take action on it them See the Actions on log entries p 323 section for details Use the Information panel to review the detailed information on the selected log entry The panel is collapsed by default To expand the panel click the Al chevron The content of the panel
527. s Backup amp Recovery 10 is an extremely effective comprehensive data backup and recovery solution It creates a data or disk backup copy stored in a compressed archive file that can be restored in case of any accident 2 Test your disk to make sure it is fully functional and does not contain bad sectors or file system errors 3 Do not perform any disk volume operations while running other software that has low level disk access Close these programs before running Acronis Disk Director Lite With these simple precautions you will protect yourself against accidental data loss 6 11 2 Running Acronis Disk Director Lite You can run Acronis Disk Director Lite under Windows or start it from a bootable media Running Acronis Disk Director Lite under Windows If you run Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Console and connect it to a managed machine the Disk management view will be available in the Navigation tree of the console with which you can start Acronis Disk Director Lite Running Acronis Disk Director Lite from a bootable media You can run Acronis Disk Director Lite on a bare metal on a machine that cannot boot or on a non Windows machine To do so boot the machine from a bootable media p 369 created with the Acronis Bootable Media Builder run the management console and then click Disk Management 6 11 3 Choosing the operating system for disk management On a machine with two or more operating systems represe
528. s Wake On LAN Proxy 22 Acronis WOL Proxy 94 Action pages 12 13 15 Actions on a tape library vault 143 Actions on backup plans and tasks 187 190 Actions on backup policies 292 294 Actions on centralized vaults 60 132 133 134 Actions on groups 65 298 311 Actions on log entries 198 199 331 332 Actions on machines 298 Actions on personal vaults 132 163 164 Actions on storage nodes 74 81 325 Actions on tasks 328 Actions with archives on tapes in a library 143 Adding a machine to another group 300 304 Adding a machine to the management server 298 299 301 317 321 Adding a storage node 325 326 327 Adding machines to a group 300 304 Adding the Acronis Plug in to WinPE 1 x 259 264 Adding the Acronis Plug in to WinPE 2 x or 3 0 259 264 Additional settings 52 101 119 123 129 Administering a managed machine 184 Administering Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server 290 Advanced scheduling settings 94 170 172 175 178 370 Agent Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent 20 27 58 380 381 382 384 387 388 390 391 392 393 Agent for ESX ESXi 18 Agent for Hyper V 18 Agent for Linux 18 Agent for Windows 17 Agent side cleanup 380 390 Agent side validation 380 391 Archive 201 208 357 365 379 380 Archive protection 100 101 Archive selection 222 224 241 242 24
529. s and statuses Backup plan execution states A backup plan can be in one of the following execution states Idle Waiting Running Stopping Need Interaction Plan states names are the same as task state names because a plan state is a cumulative state of the plan s tasks ie How it is determined How to handle Need interaction Atleast one task needs Identify the tasks that need interaction the program will user interaction display what action is needed gt Stop the tasks or enable the tasks to run change media provide additional space on the vault ignore the read error create the missing Acronis Secure Zone Otherwise see 2 At least one task is No action is required running Otherwise see 3 At least one task is Waiting for condition This situation is quite normal but waiting delaying a backup for too long is risky The solution may be to set the maximum delay or force the condition tell the Otherwise see 4 z user to log off enable the required network connection Waiting while another task locks the necessary resources A one time waiting case may occur when a task start is delayed or a task run lasts much longer than usual for some particular reason and this way prevents another task from starting This situation is resolved automatically when the obstructing task comes to an end Consider stopping a task if it hangs for too long to enable the next task to start Persistent task overlapping may
530. s defined here will have priority They will be installed with appropriate warnings even if the program finds a better driver Use this option only if the automatic drivers search does not help to boot the system Drivers for a virtual machine When recovering a system to a new virtual machine the Universal Restore technology is applied in the background because the program knows what drivers are required for the supported virtual machines When recovering the system to an existing virtual machine that uses SCSI hard drive controller be sure to specify SCSI drivers for the virtual environment in the Mass storage drivers to install anyway step Use drivers bundled with your virtual machine software or download the latest drivers versions from the software manufacturer Web site 6 3 10 How to convert a disk backup to a virtual machine Rather than converting a TIB file to a virtual disk file which requires additional operations to bring the virtual disk into use Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 performs the conversion by recovery of a disk backup to a fully configured and operational new virtual machine You have the ability to adapt the virtual machine configuration to your needs when configuring the recovery operation With Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows you can recover a disk volume backup to a new virtual machine of any of the following types VMware Workstation Microsoft Virtual PC Parallels Workstation or Citr
531. s such as shared folders or centralized vaults When there is insufficient space while backing up The archive will be cleaned up only during backup and only if there is not enough space to create a new backup In this case the program will act as follows Delete the oldest full backup with all dependent incremental differential backups If there is only one full backup left and a full backup is in progress then delete the last full backup with all dependent incremental differential backups If there is only one full backup left and an incremental or differential backup is in progress an error occurs saying there is a lack of available space This setting is recommended when backing up to a USB drive or Acronis Secure Zone This setting is not applicable to managed vaults This setting enables deletion of the last backup in the archive in case your storage device cannot accommodate more than one backup However you might end up with no backups if the program is not able to create the new backup for some reason Specifies when to apply the retention rules p 39 For example the cleanup procedure can be set up to run after each backup and also on schedule This option is available only if you have set at least one retention rule in Retention rules Cleanup schedule Specifies a schedule for archive cleanup only if On schedule is For example the cleanup can be scheduled to start on the last day of each selected mont
532. s to a backup plan A task belonging to a backup plan cannot be deleted separately from the plan Edit the plan to remove the task or delete the entire plan Do not have the appropriate privilege Without Administrator privileges on the machine a user cannot delete tasks owned by other users This is a built in compacting task Each storage node has a built in service task called a compacting task This task cannot be deleted Refresh tasks table Click O Refresh The management console will update the list of tasks existing on the machines with the most recent information Though the list of tasks is refreshed automatically based on events the data may not be retrieved immediately from the managed machine due to some latency Manual refresh guarantees that the most recent data is displayed Filtering and sorting tasks The following is a guideline for you to filter and sort tasks Set a number of tasks to Select Options gt Console options gt Number of tasks p 89 and set the desired display value The maximum number of tasks that can be displayed is 500 If the number of tasks exceeds the specified value use filters to display the tasks that are beyond the scope Sort tasks by column Click the column s header to sort the tasks in ascending order Click it once again to sort the tasks in descending order Filter tasks by name owner Type the task s name owner name or the backup plan name in the field below or
533. sage during the first year figure two 65 or three 32 tapes 22 tapes are used to store 13 monthly full backups when the monthly backup size is less than the size of a tape so keeping data is more expensive 25 tapes are required for full year rotation of the data backups GFS Example 2 Suppose the backup plan has the following tape options the Use a separate tape set option is selected the Always use a free tape For each full backup option is selected the Always use a free tape For each incremental backup option is cleared the Always use a free tape For each differential backup option is cleared The example has only one difference from the previous one That is selection of the Always use a free tape For each full backup option Below the figure shows the deleted backups as actual but demonstrates tape usage during the whole year for the GFS backup scheme in combination with the specified tape options A number in the green rectangle marks an incremental backup created on Monday of the corresponding week of the year If all the backups have to be kept during the year the archive will require 28 tapes B WOE E E E E EEEE nn As the GFS backup scheme forces automatic deletion of the outdated backups on the first Friday of the second year the tapes keep only the backups displayed in the next figure 150 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2010 This figure demonstrates that th
534. say both plans back up volume C 2 Applying multiple retention rules to an archive makes the archive content in some way unpredictable Since each of the rules will be applied to the entire archive the backups belonging to one backup plan can be easily deleted along with the backups belonging to the other You should especially not expect the classic behavior of the GFS and Tower of Hanoi backup schemes Normally each complex backup plan should back up to its own archive 6 2 8 Access credentials for archive location Specify credentials required for access to the location where the backup archive will be stored The user whose name is specified will be considered as the archive owner To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Use the plan s credentials The program will access the source data using the credentials of the backup plan account specified in the General section Use the following credentials The program will access the source data using the credentials you specify Use this option if the plan account does not have access permissions to the location You might need to provide special credentials for a network share or a storage node vault Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account 2 Click OK Warning According to the original FTP specificatio
535. seessessussessseseseseeesesaesseeaeeaseasenees 6 3 12 Recovering MD devices LINUX ccccccsscsescsscscsscscsssscssssesessesesscscssesesscccsssecsessesesscsesscseseecaeseesesecseseeeesees 6 3 13 Recovering a vast number of files from a file backup 6 3 14 Recovering the storage node cccccscssesscssessesssssssessesscsecseesessessessesesesosesssseesessussesseeessseeesesaesaesaesaseesonees 6 4 Validating vaults archives ANd backups cc cccccccessssssssseeececeseeseaeseeeeecesseseaaeeeeeessessesseaeees 64 41 Task Credentials xccc ssisssacieeiescusocetccnetaadovsuctbnsshehnaseveosvesnenanceeutand Masui iresrdlassddenduest Cotta AE a E 64 2 Archive s lectioni nonmen nne a a a i aan ia aa Ns 6 4 3 Backup selectii sirnaan aaa a a a a e ER 6 4 4 Location selectio Menr e EE E A A e EA 6 4 5 Access credentials for SOUFCe ccsssscsscsscssessessessesessesscecsecsessessesseecsesesesesseesessusaessesseseseeesesausaesseeaeeasenees 6 4 6 When t validat nn mennenk iare aa a a A A E O ia E EREE 6 5 MOUNTING ANIMA aeee anaa este actu ceed airian araia e inaona aeaa ues e aaaea a ea ee kiona naa aesa cates Oe SA rChIVe selection sninn a e A A a a e a and 6 5 2 1e o EEIE Ee a OAOA AAA EA E SEa Re SEREY e eRe A EE 1 EE EE E EEN A A R EE ANA 6 5 4 Noluime selection mennaan a a a a A a n naa ai aa teat 6 6 Managing mounted imagis iaeiiai a eieaa eae aea aaa i ea anetares 6 7 Exporting archives and b ck ps c cccccc
536. settings the report includes information about all centralized managed vaults plus the combined total Report view Under Report view choose how the report will look Specify which table columns to show and in which order Select which diagrams to include in the report The diagrams show space usage in the vaults Report about the task activities In this view you can generate a report about the tasks that existed on registered machines within a chosen period This report consists of one or more diagrams one diagram per machine The diagrams show how many times each task finished on a particular day with each of these results Succeeded Succeeded with warnings and Failed Report coverage Under Report coverage choose the time interval for which you want to generate the report Filters Under Filters choose which tasks to include in the report Only the tasks that meet all filter criteria are included Origin The types of origin of the tasks Centralized Local and or Local without backup plan A centralized task belongs to a centralized backup plan A local task might not belong to a backup plan for example a recovery task Backup policies centralized tasks only The backup policies on which the tasks are based The default setting means all backup policies that ever existed during the report period m Machines The list of machines on which the tasks exist Type The task types for e
537. sic simple or mirrored volume A system volume was recovered to a disk that does not have an MBR When you configure recovery of a system volume to a disk that does not have an MBR the program prompts whether you want to recover the MBR along with the system volume Opt for not recovering only if you do not want the system to be bootable Solution Recover the volume once again along with the MBR of the corresponding disk The system uses Acronis OS Selector Because the Master Boot Record MBR can be changed during the system recovery Acronis OS Selector which uses the MBR might become inoperable If this happens reactivate Acronis OS Selector as follows Solution Boot the machine from the Acronis Disk Director s bootable media and select in the menu Tools gt Activate OS Selector The system uses GRand Unified Bootloader GRUB and was recovered from a normal not from a raw that is sector by sector backup One part of the GRUB loader resides either in the first several sectors of the disk or in the first several sectors of the volume The rest is on the file system of one of the volumes System bootability can be recovered automatically only when the GRUB resides in the first several sectors of the disk and on the file system to which direct access is possible In other cases the user has to manually reactivate the boot loader Solution Reactivate the boot loader You might also need to fix the configuration file The s
538. sical MAGHINGS anecs iaicaraiean inaani a Widder entediteeties 291 74 E i aS aE E E E A AE O EN AEEA ee 308 A e R e E S EAO EE AE EEEE devine siouivateadsalasbine varies vues 316 AE o E T E EE A E T E E 319 7 1 7 OB AAA A ARS NA E tds EAE E E A 321 7 1 8 elol Ea PE E AOA TA E TOE IE AERON 325 7 2 Configuring Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components sssssssssssssssseesrssssesereesnssssesereene 330 7 2 1 Parameters set through administrative template ccccccsseseccsscsscsscsecssssesecssessessesesaesseeaeesessssacsesers 331 7 2 2 Parameters set through GUL c ccccscccsscssesesssssssscsscsscsecsssssesesscseceessessessessesseeaeseseeees 7 2 3 Parameters set through Windows registry 7 3 Greating a backup PoliCYs caoine i ton a a a i aaae 7 3 1 Policy credentialSaniion a ed Wit Ans GN ed a A EE 7 3 2 IREIMS TO DACK Up E E TAE E duksdtora thant suavereccbass 7 3 3 Access credentials for SOUrCE cecsscesessesesseeeseseeeseeeeseseeseseeceaceecscsesacseeaeseeeeaeeesseeesaes 7 3 4 Exclusions 7 3 5 Archive 7 3 6 Access Credentials for lOCatiON cccccccssccsscsssesscssecessesesscssecsecsescsecssecseseeseseesaeceneaes 7 3 7 Backup Scheme selection cccccscseesesscssessesessseseesessceesessesssesesscsscoesseseessessesaeeaeeesenees 7 3 8 Arhive validatie naninira niai a n dancbivilia a a e i a e E e ET E TEE OEA E S AE E O E E E E 1 Introducing Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 1 1 Acronis Backup amp
539. sing the signature of the source hard disk If you recover the same disk signature you don t need to re create or edit the tasks created previously Some installed applications use disk signature for licensing and other purposes This enables to keep all the Windows Restore Points on the recovered disk To recover VSS snapshots used by Windows Vista s Previous Versions feature Keep existing The program will leave the existing NT signature of the target hard disk as is Volumes Available volume destinations depend on the agents operating on the machine Recover to Physical machine Available when the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows or Agent for Linux is installed The selected volumes will be recovered to the physical disks of the machine the console is connected to On selecting this you proceed to the regular volume mapping procedure described below New virtual machine p 224 If Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows is installed The selected volumes will be recovered to a new virtual machine of any of the following types VMware Workstation Microsoft Virtual PC Parallels Workstation or Citrix XenServer virtual appliance The virtual machine files will be saved to the destination you specify If Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Hyper V or Agent for ESX ESXi is installed These agents enable creating a new virtual machine on the virtualization server you specify The new virt
540. sion Mask my log Excludes all log files with names consisting of five symbols and starting with my The above settings are not effective for the files or folders that were explicitly selected for recovery For example assume that you selected the folder MyFolder and the file MyFile tmp outside that folder and selected to skip all tmp files In this case all tmp files in the folder MyFolder will be skipped during the recovery process but the file MyFile tmp will not be skipped Overwriting Choose what to do if the program finds in the target folder a file with the same name as in the archive Overwrite existing file this will give the file in the backup priority over the file on the hard disk Overwrite existing file if it is older this will give priority to the most recent file modification whether it be in the backup or on the disk Do not overwrite existing file this will give the file on the hard disk priority over the file in the backup If you allow files to be overwritten you still have an option to prevent overwriting of specific files by excluding p 226 them from the recovery operation 6 3 7 Access credentials for destination To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Use the task credentials The program will access the destination using the credentials of the task account specified in the General section Use the following credentials The program will access the
541. sk First schedule 1 2 3 4 Months December January February On lt All gt lt All workdays gt Once at 10 00 00 PM Effective From 11 01 2009 To not set Second schedule Months March April May September October November On lt All gt lt All workdays gt Every 12 hours From 12 00 00 AM Until 12 00 00 PM Effective From 11 01 2009 To not set Third schedule 1 2 3 4 Months June July August Days 1 15 Once at 10 00 00 PM Effective From 11 01 2009 To not set 5 4 At Windows Event Log event This type of schedule is effective only in Windows operating systems You can schedule a backup task to start when a certain Windows event has been recorded in one of the event logs such as the Application Security or System log For example you may want to set up a backup plan that will automatically perform an emergency full backup of your data as soon as Windows discovers that your hard disk drive is about to fail Parameters Log name Specifies the name of the log Select the name of a standard log Application Security or System from the list or type a log name for example Microsoft Office Sessions Event source Specifies the event source which typically indicates the program or the system component that caused the event for example disk Event type Specifies the event type Error Warning Information Audit success or Audit fai
542. sk failure handling This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media This option determines the program behavior when any of the backup plan s tasks fails The preset is not to restart a failed task The program will try to execute the failed task again if you select the Restart a failed task check box and specify the number of attempts and the time interval between the attempts The program stops trying as soon as an attempt completes successfully OR the specified number of attempts is performed depending on which comes first Failed Failed Succeded Idle Idle rie idle Running Task state pe Interval between attempts t N 3 _none of attempts succeeded Failed Failed Failed Failed lde Running Idle Running Ide Running idle Task state a If the task fails because of a mistake in the backup plan you can edit the plan while the task is in the Idle state While the task is running you have to stop it prior to editing the backup plan Tape support These options are effective when the backup destination is a managed vault located on a tape library Tape support options enable you to specify how the backup tasks will distribute backups among the tapes Some combinations of tape options might degrade usage efficiency of both the whole tape library and each tape If you are not forced to modify these options by so
543. sks can be delegated to the storage node Since the tasks schedule exists on the machine the agent resides on and therefore uses that machine s time and events the agent has to initiate the storage node side cleanup p 377 and the storage node side validation p 378 according to the schedule To do so the agent must be online Further processing is performed by the storage node This functionality cannot be disabled in a managed vault The next two operations are optional Deduplication A managed vault can be configured as a deduplicating vault This means that identical data will be backed up to this vault only once to minimize the network usage during backup and storage space taken by the archives For more information please see the Deduplication p 71 section in the User Guide Encryption A managed vault can be configured so that anything written to it is encrypted and anything read from it is decrypted transparently by the storage node using a vault specific encryption key stored on the node server In case the storage medium is stolen or accessed by an unauthorized person the malefactor will not be able to decrypt the vault contents without access to this specific storage node If the archive is already encrypted by the agent the storage node side encryption is applied over the encryption performed by the agent PXE Server Acronis PXE Server allows for booting machines into Acronis bootable components through the ne
544. solidation is impossible for archives located on tapes Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 provides automation of tape rotation for Grandfather Father Son Tower of Hanoi and Custom backup schemes Grandfather Father Son p 34 GFS and Tower of Hanoi p 37 ToH are the most popular backup schemes to use on tape library devices These schemes are optimized to maintain the best balance between a backup archive size the number of recovery points available from the archive and the quantity of required tapes for archiving If your backup archive must provide recovery with daily resolution for the last several days weekly resolution for the last several weeks and monthly resolution for any time in the past the most preferred scheme for you is the Grandfather Father Son scheme If the main goal is to provide data protection for the longest period with the minimal number of used tapes permanently loaded into a small tape library e g autoloader the best solution is to probably choose the Tower of Hanoi scheme The Custom backup scheme enables you to specify a backup schedule and retention rules to define a desired tape rotation Use this scheme when the Grandfather Father Son and the Tower of Hanoi schemes usage is not enough For example if the full size of protected data is considerably less than the size of a tape the best choice is to use the Custom backup scheme with regular daily weekly monthly full backups some simple retention ru
545. specify the appropriate settings as follows Backup Set up the backup schedule when and how often to back up the data To learn more about setting up the schedule see the Scheduling p 165 section Retention rule With the simple scheme only one retention rule p 39 is available Set the retention period for the backups Grandfather Father Son scheme At a glance Daily incremental weekly differential and monthly full backups Custom day for weekly and monthly backups Custom retention periods for backups of each type Description Let us suppose that we want to set up a backup plan that will regularly produce a series of daily D weekly W and monthly M backups Here is a natural way to do this the following table shows a sample two month period for such a plan ie Te Te ee e mm Pe a femme e e pet msma fe pl mama gt f 1 gt fl mare p gt fmt fosron fo fa romeo fot gt fmt eons fo gt fi eos fe fe bw Daily backups run every workday except Friday which is left for weekly and monthly backups Monthly backups run every fourth Friday and weekly backups run on all other Fridays Monthly Grandfather backups are full Weekly Father backups are differential Daily Son backups are incremental Parameters You can set up the following parameters of a Grandfather Father Son GFS scheme Start backup at Specifies when to start a backu
546. specify the domain name DOMAIN Username Password The password for the account Select the Save password check box to store the password for future connections Click OK Initiating registration on the machine side The registration procedure can be initiated on the machine side 1 Connect the console to the machine where Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 agent is installed If prompted for credentials specify credentials of a member of the Administrators group on the machine Select from the menu Options gt Machine options gt Machine management Select Centralized management and specify the management server where to register the machine Refer to Machine management p 94 for details Importing machines from Active Directory To import machines from Active Directory 1 2 3 4 In the Navigation tree select is Physical machines or E All physical machines Click Import machines from Active Directory on the toolbar In the Search for field type the machine s or the organizational unit name then click Search You can use the asterisk to substitute for zero or more characters in a machine or an organizational unit name The left part of the window displays the machine or organizational unit names that fully or just partly coincide with the entered value Click the item you want to add for import then click Add gt gt The item will be moved to the right part of the window To add all the found
547. ss and then will start the task 2 if the free space changes by more than 1GB after 12 hours pass since the last backup successful completion the backup task will start immediately 3 if the free space never changes by more than 1GB the task will never start You can start the backup manually if need be in the Backup plans and tasks view 6 Direct management This section covers operations that can be performed directly on a managed machine by using the direct console agent connection The content of this section is applicable to both stand alone and advanced editions of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 6 1 G1 Administering a managed machine This section describes the views that are available through the navigation tree of the console connected to a managed machine and explains how to work with each view Dashboard Use the Dashboard to estimate at a glance whether the data is successfully protected on the machine The dashboard shows the summary of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 agent s activities and enables you to rapidly identify and resolve any issues Alerts The alerts section draws your attention to issues that have occurred on the machine and offers you ways of fixing or examining them The most critical issues are displayed on the top If there are no alerts or warnings at the moment the system displays No alerts or warnings Types of alerts The table below illustrates the types of messages you may obs
548. ss this option select the Advanced view check box How to back up Backup scheme p 356 Specify when and how often to back up your data define for how long to keep the created backup archives in the selected location set up a schedule for the archive cleanup procedure Use well known optimized backup schemes such as Grandfather Father Son and Tower of Hanoi create a custom backup scheme or back up data once Archive validation When to validate Optional Define when and how often to perform validation and whether to validate the entire archive or the latest backup in the archive Backup options Settings Optional Configure parameters of the backup operation such as pre post backup commands maximum network bandwidth allocated for the backup stream or the backup archive compression level If you do nothing in this section the default values p 97 as set in the management server will be used After any of the settings is changed against the default value a new line that displays the newly set value appears The setting status changes from Default to Custom Should you modify the setting again the line will display the new value unless the new value is the default one When the default value is set the line disappears and so you always see only the settings that differ from the default values in this section of the Create Backup Policy page To reset all the settings to the default values click Reset to default During the backu
549. ssword can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer To create a new folder for the vault click Fs Create folder A vault can be created in an empty folder only 2 Click OK Attaching a managed vault A vault managed by a storage node can be attached to another storage node You might need to do so when retiring storage node hardware when the storage node is lost or when balancing loads between storage nodes As a result the first node stops managing the vault The second node scans archives in the vault creates and fills up the database corresponding to the vault and starts managing the vault When deleting a managed vault you have the option to retain archives contained in the vault The location resulting from such deletion can also be attached to the same or another storage node Personal or centralized unmanaged vaults cannot be attached To attach a managed vault to a storage node perform the following steps Vault Storage node Select the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node that will manage the vault Path Specify the path to the location where the archives are stored Database path Specify a local folder on the storage server to create a vault specific database This database will store the metadata required for cataloguing the archives and performing deduplication Password For the vault that was encrypted provide the encryption password After you have performed all th
550. st log Excludes the file named test log located in the folder C Finance Mask Excludes all files with the log extension Mask my log Excludes all log files with names consisting of five symbols and starting with my 6 2 7 Archive Specify where the archive will be stored and the name of the archive 1 Selecting the destination Enter the full path to the destination in the Path field or select the desired destination in the folders tree To back up data to a centralized vault expand the Centralized group and click the vault To back up data to a personal vault expand the Personal group and click the vault To back up data to a local folder on the machine expand the Local folders group and click the required folder To back up data to a network share expand the Network folders group select the required networked machine and then click the shared folder If the network share requires access credentials the program will ask for them Note for Linux users To specify a Common Internet File System CIFS network share which is mounted ona mount point such as mnt share select this mount point instead of the network share itself To back up data to an FTP or SFTP server type the server name or address in the Path field as follows ftp ftp_server port _number or sftp sftp_server port number If the port number is not specified port 21 is used for FTP and port 22 is used for SFTP After
551. state and statuses p 68 section Backup policy statuses A backup policy status is the cumulative status of the policy statuses on all machines the policy is applied to For example if the policy is applied to three machines and has the OK status on the 1st machine the Warning status on the 2nd machine and the Error status on the 3rd machine the status of the policy will be Error A backup policy status on a group of machines is the cumulative status of the policy statuses on the machines included in the group The following table shows a summary of possible backup policy statuses Status How it is determined How to handle 1 Error The policy status on at least View the log or identify the failed tasks to find out the reason one machine is Error of the failure then do one or more of the following Otherwise see 2 Remove the reason of the failure gt optionally Start the failed task manually m Edit the backup policy to prevent future failure 2 Warning The policy status on at least View the log to read the warnings gt optionally Perform one machine is Warning actions to prevent future warnings or failure Otherwise see 3 3 OK The policy status on all No action is required Note that if a backup policy is not machines is OK applied to any machine its state is also OK What to do if a policy has the Error status 1 To find out the reason of the failure do one or more of the following m Cli
552. state means that the task has never been started or has Stopped H been started but has not finished yet and so its result is not available Working with backup plans and tasks Actions on backup plans and tasks The following is a guideline for you to perform operations with backup plans and tasks To Create a new backup plan ora task View details of a plan task View plan s task s log Run a plan task Do Click a New then select one of the following Backup plan p 195 Recovery task p 215 m Validation task p 235 Backup plan Click View details In the Plan Details p 192 window review the plan details Task e Click View details In the Task Details p 190 window review the task details Backup plan Click L View log You will be taken to the Log p 193 view containing the list of the plan related log entries Task Click L View log You will be taken to the Log p 193 view containing the list of the task related log entries Backup plan Click gt Run In the Run Backup Plan p 190 window select the task you need to be run Running the backup plan starts the selected task of that plan immediately in spite of its schedule and conditions Why can t I run the backup plan Do not have the appropriate privilege Without the Administrator privileges on the machine a user cannot run plans owned by other users The task will be executed immediately in s
553. t Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server and Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node as described in the correspondent subtopics of this topic How to load Acronis Administrative Template The Administrative Template provided by Acronis enables the fine tuning of some security related features including encrypted communication settings Through the Microsoft Group Policy mechanism the template policy settings can be applied to a single computer as well as to a domain To load the Acronis Administrative Template Run Windows Group Policy Objects Editor windir system32 gpedit msc Open the Group Policy object GPO you want to edit Expand Computer Configuration Right click Administrative Templates Click Add Remove Templates Click Add Browse to the Acronis Administrative Template Program files Common Files Acronis Agent Acronis_agent adm or Program files Acronis BackupAndRecovery Acronis_agent adm and click Open So Se oe a Once the template is loaded you can open it and edit the desired settings After loading the template or editing its settings you should restart the configured component s or some of their services For detailed information about Windows GPO Editor please see http msdn2 microsoft com en us library aa374163 aspx For detailed information about Group Policies please see http msdn2 microsoft com en us library aa374177 aspx fre Group Policy Object Editor aio x fie Be
554. t G2 gt 4 G2 gt 4 5 or 6 green Inherited All machines gt 5 or 6 orange Inherited G1 gt G2 gt 5 or 6 blue Inherited G2 gt 5 or 6 2 14 5 Backup policy s state and statuses Centralized management presumes that the administrator can monitor the health of the entire product infrastructure using a few easily understandable parameters The state and status of a backup policy are included in such parameters Issues if any arise from the very bottom of the infrastructure tasks on managed machines to the cumulative policy status The administrator checks the status at a glance If the status is not OK the administrator can navigate down to the issue details in a few clicks This section helps you understand the policies states and statuses displayed by the management server Policy deployment state on a machine To see this parameter select any group containing the machine in the tree then select the machine and then select the Backup policies tab on the Information pane Once you apply a policy to a machine or a group of machines the server deploys the policy to the machines On each of the machines the agent creates a backup plan While the policy is transferred to the machine and the backup plan is being created the policy s deployment state on the machine is Deploying Once the backup plan is successfully created the policy state on the machine becomes Deployed You may need to modify the p
555. t for Hyper V installed Virtualization server p 214 Here you select the resulting virtual machine type and location Available options depend on the host you selected in the previous step Storage p 214 Choose the storage on the virtualization server or the folder to place the virtual machine files in Resultant VMs Specify the name of the virtual machine After you have performed all the required steps click OK to create the backup plan After that you might be prompted for the password p 197 The plan you have created will be accessible for examination and managing in the Backup plans and tasks p 182 view 6 2 1 Why is the program asking for the password A scheduled or postponed task has to run regardless of users being logged on In case you have not explicitly specified the credentials under which the task s will run the program proposes using your account Enter your password specify another account or change the scheduled start to manual G22 Backup plan s credentials Provide the credentials for the account under which the plan s tasks will run To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Run under the current user The tasks will run under the credentials with which the user who starts the tasks is logged on If any of the tasks has to run on schedule you will be asked for the current user s password on completing the plan creation Use the following credentials The tasks will alw
556. t have errors and warnings In addition to the deployment state and status as related to a specific machine the backup policy has the deployment state and status on a group of machines and the cumulative deployment state and status of the policy Policy deployment state on a group To see this parameter select Machines in the tree then select the group and then select the Backup policies tab on the Information pane This state is defined as a combination of deployment states of the policy on the machines included in the group and its child groups For example you applied the policy to the group consisting of machines A and B While the deployment takes place on both machines the policy s state on the group will be Deploying If the deployment completes on one of the machines while it continues on the other the state will be Deploying Deployed When the deployment completes on both machines the state will be Deployed Policy status on a group To see this parameter select Machines in the tree then select the group and then select the Backup policies tab on the Information pane This status is defined as the most severe status of the policy on the machines included in the group and its child groups If the policy is currently not applied to any machine its status is OK Cumulative state and status of a policy In addition to the deployment state and status as related to a specific machine or group the backup policy h
557. t in Tower of Hanoi and Grandfather Father Son backup schemes with customizable parameters A variety of events and conditions can be chosen to trigger a backup Policy based centralized management Applying backup policies to groups of machines Static and dynamic machine grouping Grouping either physical or virtual machines Easy work with virtual environments Backup and recovery of virtual machines without installing backup software on each individual machine Conversion of a backup to a fully configured VMware Microsoft Parallels or Citrix virtual machine Redesigned GUI Dashboard for quick operational decision making Overview of all configured and running operations with color coding for successful and failed operations Enterprise level of security Controlling user rights to perform operations and access backups Running services with minimal user rights Restricted remote access to a backup agent Secure communication between the product components Using third party certificates for authentication of the components Data encryption options for both data transmission and storage Backup of remote machines to a centralized storage node behind firewalls 1 2 Getting started Direct management 1 Install Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Console and Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent 2 Start the console Windows Start the console by selecting it from the start menu Linux Log in as root or log in as an
558. t possible Usage scenarios Sharing mounted images can be easily shared to networked users Band aid database recovery solution mount up an image that contains an SQL database from a recently failed machine This will give access to the database until the failed machine is recovered Offline virus clean if a machine is attacked the administrator shuts it down boots with bootable media and creates an image Then the administrator mounts this image in read write mode scans and cleans it with an antivirus program and finally recovers the machine Error check if recovery failed due to a disk error mount the image in the read write mode Then check the mounted disk for errors with the chkdsk r command To mount an image perform the following steps Source Archive p 239 Specify the path to the archive location and select the archive containing disk backups Backup p 240 Select the backup Access credentials p 240 Optional Provide credentials for the archive location To access this option select the Advanced view check box Mount settings Volumes p 241 Select volumes to mount and configure the mount settings for every volume assign a letter or enter the mount point choose the read write or read only access mode When you complete all the required steps click OK to mount the volumes 6 5 1 Archive selection Selecting the archive 1 Enter the full path to the location in the Path field or sel
559. t the lifetime retention period of the backups The retention rules are effective if the archive contains more than one backup This means that the last backup in the archive will be kept even if a retention rule violation is detected Please do not try to delete the only backup you have by applying the retention rules before backup This will not work Use the alternative setting Clean up archive gt When there is insufficient space while backing up p 210 if you accept the risk of losing the last backup 1 Delete backups older than This is a time interval counted back from the moment when the retention rules are applied Every time a retention rule is applied the program calculates the date and time in the past corresponding to this interval and deletes all backups created before that moment None of the backups created after this moment will be deleted Retention rule is applied S444 44 i t Delete r not delete 2 Keep the archive size within This is the maximum size of the archive Every time a retention rule is applied the program compares the actual archive size with the value you set and deletes the oldest backups to keep the archive size within this value The diagram below shows the archive content before and after the deletion Archive Archive F Backup 1 Backup 1 F Backup 2 F Backup 3 Backup 3 F Backup 4 Backup 4 F Backup 5 Maximum size gt There is a certain risk that all but one backu
560. t to the license server a warning is recorded into the agent s log You can view this warning in the Dashboard If the value is 0 no license check will be performed without a license Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 s functionality will be disabled after the number of days given by Maximum Time Without License Server see the next parameter See also License Server Connection Retry Interval later in this topic Maximum Time Without License Server in days Description Specifies how long in days Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 will work as normal until its functionality is disabled Possible values any integer number between 0 and 60 Default value 30 If Acronis License Server is unavailable Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 will continue working with full functionality for the number of days specified in Maximum Time Without License Server as counted from the moment of installation or from the last successful check License Server Connection Retry Interval in hours Description Specifies the interval in hours between connection attempts when Acronis License Server is unavailable Possible values any integer number between 0 and 24 Default value 1 If during a check for the license key see License Check Interval earlier in this topic Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent could not connect to the license server it will try to reconnect once in the number of hours given by License Server Connection Retry Interval I
561. t whether a backup policy is currently being deployed revoked or updated check the deployment state p 287 of the policy Way of working with the backup policies view Use the toolbar s operational buttons to create new policies apply the existing policies to machines or perform other operations with backup policies p 288 Use the Information pane s tabs to view detailed information about the selected policy and perform additional operations such as revoke the policy view details of the machine group the policy is applied to etc The panel is collapsed by default To expand the panel click the lAl chevron The content of the pane is also duplicated in the Policy details p 290 window Use the filtering and sorting p 289 capabilities of the policy table for easy browsing and examination Backup policy deployment states A backup policy deployment state is a combination of the policy deployment states on all machines the policy is applied to For example if the policy is applied to three machines and has the Deploying state on the 1st machine the Updating state on the 2nd machine and the Deployed state on the 3rd machine the state of the policy will be Deploying Updating Deployed A backup policy deployment state on a group of machines is a combination of the policy deployment states on the machines included in the group For detailed information about backup policy deployment states see the Backup policy s
562. ta the storage node needs to manage the vault In case the storage node is lost or its database is corrupted the new storage node retrieves the metadata and re creates the database When the vault is attached to another storage node the same procedure takes place Management server Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server A central server that drives data protection within the enterprise network Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server provides the administrator with asingle entry point to the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 infrastructure an easy way to protect data on numerous machines p 375 using backup policies p 368 and grouping enterprise wide monitoring functionality the ability to create centralized vaults p 370 for storing enterprise backup archives p 367 the ability to manage storage nodes p 377 If there are multiple management servers on the network they operate independently manage different machines and use different centralized vaults for storing archives Media builder A dedicated tool for creating bootable media p 369 P Personal vault A local or networked vault p 379 created using direct management p 371 Once a personal vault is created a shortcut to it appears under the Personal vaults item of the Navigation pane Multiple machines can use the same physical location for example a network share as a personal vault Physical machine On Acronis
563. target hardware has a specific mass storage controller such as a SCSI RAID or Fiber Channel adapter for the hard disk For more information please refer to Universal Restore p 227 The drivers will be placed in the visible Drivers folder on the bootable media The drivers are not loaded into the target machine RAM therefore the media must stay inserted or connected throughout the Universal Restore operation Adding drivers to bootable media is available on the condition that 1 The Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Universal Restore add on is installed on the machine where the bootable media is created AND 2 You are creating a removable media or its ISO or detachable media such as a flash drive Drivers cannot be uploaded on a PXE server or WDS RIS The drivers can be added to the list only in groups by adding the INF files or folders containing such files Selecting individual drivers from the INF files is not possible but the media builder shows the file content for your information To add drivers 1 Click Add and browse to the INF file or a folder that contains INF files 2 Select the INF file or the folder 3 Click OK The drivers can be removed from the list only in groups by removing INF files To remove drivers 1 Select the INF file 2 Click Remove Adding the Acronis Plug in to WinPE 1 x Acronis Plug in for WinPE can be added to Windows PE 2004 1 5 Windows XP Professional with Service Pack 2
564. task using Windows scheduler To synchronize machines with a text file using command line 1 Log on asa member of the Acronis Centralized Admins security group 2 Inthe command prompt change the directory to the folder where Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server has been installed by default C Program Files Acronis AMS 3 Run the following command syncmachines path_to_the_file username password where m path_to_the_file is the path to a txt or csv file containing the list of machines The tool does not accept spaces in the path name username password belong to a user who is a member of the Administrators group on all machines listed in the file If not specified the single sign on mechanism is used to operate on all the machines Importing machines from a text file To import machines from a file 1 Inthe Navigation tree select te Physical machines or All physical machines 2 Click Import machines from file on the toolbar 3 In the Path field enter a path to the txt or csv file or click Browse and select the file in the Browse window A txt or csv file should contain machine names or their IP addresses beginning from a new line for each of the machines Example Machine_name_1 Machine_name_2 192 168 1 14 192 168 1 15 4 Under Logon settings specify the user name and password of a user who is a member of the Administrators group on all machines that are listed in the file 5
565. te en Help e e SS Local Computer Poky S Comeuter Configuration E O Scftware Settings a O Windows Settings E a Administrative Templates fl User Configuration a C Software Setting E C Windows Settings E Ly Administrative Teniphates Select an Ren bo view Rs description Li Widows Components J Sipsters M Abeta Add Remove Templates i 2 x 1271772007 10 Vea FR V25 2004 332 25 2004 3532 IASA 22 1725 2004 32 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node The following are the parameters of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node that can be set by using Acronis Administrative Template Client Connection Limit Description Specifies the maximum number of simultaneous connections to the storage node by the agents that perform backup or recovery Possible values Any integer number between 1 and 2147483647 Default value 10 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 agents connect to the storage node to access its managed vaults during backup or recovery The Client Connection Limit parameter determines the maximum number of such connections that the storage node can handle simultaneously When this limit is reached the storage node will use the backup queue see the next parameter for the agents that are awaiting connection Backup Queue Limit Description Specifies the maximum number of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components in the storage node s backup queue Possible values Any integer n
566. ted in the table 2 Click the items you want to be displayed hidden Log entry details Displays detailed information on the log entry you have selected and lets you copy the details to the clipboard To copy the details click the Copy to clipboard button Log entry data fields A local log entry contains the following data fields Type type of event Error Warning Information Date date and time of the event occurrence Backup plan the backup plan the event relates to if any Task the task the event relates to if any Code the program code of the event Every type of event in the program has its own code A code is an integer number that may be used by Acronis support service to solve the problem Module number of the program module where the event has occurred It is an integer number that may be used by Acronis support service to solve the problem Owner user name of the backup plan owner only under operating system Message a text description of the event The log entry s details that you copy will have the appearance as follows Log Entry Details Type Information Date and time DD MM YYYY HH MM SS Backup plan Backup plan name Task Task name Message Description of the operation Code 12 3x45678A Module Module name Owner Owner of the plan Date and time presentation varies depending on your locale settings 6 2 Creat
567. ter might be changed and some of the installed programs might stop running 3 If another active volume is present in the system you will receive the warning that the previous active volume will have to be set passive first By clicking OK in the Warning window you ll add the pending operation of setting active volume Please note even if you have the Operating System on the new active volume in some cases the machine will not be able to boot from it You will have to confirm your decision to set the new volume as active To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 283 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them The new volume structure will be graphically represented in the Disk management view immediately Change volume letter Windows operating systems assign letters C D etc to hard disk volumes at startup These letters are used by applications and operating systems to locate files and folders in the volumes Connecting an additional disk as well as creating or deleting a volume on existing disks might change your system configuration As a result some applications might stop working normally or user files might not be automatically found and opened To prevent this you can manually change the letters that are automatically assigned to the volumes by the operating system If you need to change a letter assigned to a volume by the operating system
568. the machine becomes available to the server Machine details Accumulates in four tabs all information on the selected machine Lets the management server administrator perform operations with the backup plans and tasks existing on the machine and policies applied to the machine This information is also duplicated on the Information panel Machine The tab displays the following information on the registered machine Name name of the selected machine taken from the Computer name in Windows IP address IP address of the selected machine Status the machine s status Determined as the most severe status p 183 of all backup plans both local and centralized existing on the machine and backup policies p 287 applied to the machine Last connect how much time has passed since the management server last connected to the machine Last successful backup how much time has passed since the last successful backup Availability Online the machine is available for the management server This means that the management server s last connection to the machine was successful Connection is established every 2 minutes Offline the machine is unavailable for the management server it is turned off or its network cable is unplugged Unknown this status is displayed until the first connection between the management server and the machine is established after adding the machine or starting the management server
569. the archive contents Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 will display a message saying that it detected information about the volume structure 4 Click Details in the area with that message 5 Review the volume structure and then click Apply RAID LVM to create it To create the volume structure by using a script 1 Boot the machine from a Linux based bootable media 2 Click Acronis Bootable Agent Then click Run management console 3 On the toolbar click Actions and then click Start shell Alternatively you can press CTRL ALT F2 4 Run the restoreraids sh script specifying the full file name of the archive for example bin restoreraids sh smb server backups linux_machine_2010 01 02 12 00 00 123D tib 5 Return to the management console by pressing CTRL ALT F1 or by running the command bin product 6 Click Recover then specify the path to the archive and any other required parameters and then click OK If Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 could not create the volume structure or if it is not present in the archive create the structure manually Creating the volume structure manually The following are a general procedure for recovering MD devices and logical volumes by using a Linux based bootable media and an example of such recovery You can use a similar procedure in Linux To recover MD devices and logical volumes 1 Boot the machine from a Linux based bootable media 2 Click Acronis Bootable Agent Then
570. the backup plans Schedule The types of the backup plans schedules Manual and or Scheduled Manual schedule means that a backup plan runs only when you start it manually Owner The list of users who created the backup plans With the default filter settings the report includes all backup plans from all machines Report view Under Report view choose how the report will look Select whether to show all items in a single table or to group them by a particular column Specify which table columns to show and in which order Specify how to sort the table Report about the tasks In this view you can generate a report about the tasks that run on registered machines This report consists of one or more tables Filters Under Filters choose which tasks to include in the report Only the tasks that meet all filter criteria are included Origin The types of origin of the tasks Centralized Local and or Local without backup plan A centralized task belongs to a centralized backup plan A local task might not belong to a backup plan for example a recovery task Backup policies centralized tasks only The backup policies on which the tasks are based Machines The list of machines on which the tasks exist Type The task types for example disk backup tasks Execution state The execution states of the tasks for example Running Last result The last results of the tasks Succeeded Succeeded
571. the backup data Use this option to reserve a part of the network bandwidth to other network activities The preset is Maximum To set the network connection speed for backup Do any of the following Click Transferring speed stated as a percentage of the estimated maximum speed of the network connection and then drag the slider or type a percentage in the box Click Transferring speed stated in kilobytes per second and then enter the bandwidth limit for transferring backup data in kilobytes per second Notifications Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 provides the ability of notifying users about backup completion through e mail or the messaging service E mail This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media The option enables you to receive e mail notifications about the backup task s successful completion failure or need for interaction along with the full log of the task The preset is Disabled To configure e mail notification 1 Select the Send e mail notifications check box to activate notifications 2 Inthe E mail addresses field type the e mail address to which notifications will be sent You can enter several addresses separated by semicolons 3 Under Send notifications select the appropriate check boxes as follows When backup completes successfully to send a notification when the backup task has completed success
572. the default settings the snapshot storage is created in a Windows temporary files folder and occupies 50 percent of the space available on the volume containing that folder This size may then grow if more space is needed for the snapshot You may want to increase the initial size of the snapshot storage or to place it on a different volume when experiencing problems with backing up data that changes extensively during backup This parameter is used when creating a backup policy and applies to all centralized backup plans that will be based on this policy Changes to this parameter do not affect already existing backup policies and their centralized backup plans This parameter has the following settings Snapshot Storage Path Description Specifies the folder in which to place the snapshot storage Possible values Any string 0 to 32765 characters long Default value Empty string An empty string means a temporary files folder which is typically given by the TMP or TEMP environment variable You can specify a local folder on any volume including a volume you are backing up Snapshot Storage Absolute Size Description Specifies the initial size of the snapshot storage in megabytes Possible values Any integer number between 0 and 2147483647 Default value 0 If this setting is 0 the management server uses the Snapshot Storage Relative Size setting The initial size will not exceed the available space minus 50 MB Snapshot Stor
573. the library ToH Example 3 Imagine the backup plan has the following tape options the Use a separate tape set option is selected 154 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2010 the Always use a free tape For each full backup option is selected the Always use a free tape For each incremental backup option is selected the Always use a free tape For each differential backup option is selected The figure shows tape rotation for the ToH scheme with these options Be 01 By 05 Be 01 E Maximal number of tapes used in the rotation is seven that is more than in classical five level ToH scheme Two additional tapes used for 1 keeping an old full backup postponed deletion as it is a base for other level backups 2 keeping an old backup on a level until a new backup has been successfully created on the level The example demonstrates that the tapes usage efficiency is reduced Moreover the data recovery requires access to the backups kept on one full backups 6 two differential backups 44 or three incremental backups 50 tapes So on average the operation takes more time than in the previous examples Tape planning Once you have specified the backup scheme and tape options you should determine the minimal number of tapes necessary to achieve full automation of tape rotation To simplify the tape planning lets discard the possibility that the calculated tapes might contain backups of other data It is imp
574. the managed machine s off peak period On the other hand if you prefer to be immediately informed whether the data is not corrupted and can be successfully recovered consider starting validation right after the task creation Choose one of the following Now to start the validation task right after its creation that is after clicking OK on the Validation page Later to start the one time validation task at the date and time you specify Specify the appropriate parameters as follows Date and time the date and time when to start the task The task will be started manually do not schedule the task select this check box if you wish to start the task manually later On schedule to schedule the task To learn more about how to configure the scheduling parameters please see the Scheduling p 165 section 6 5 Mounting an image Mounting volumes from a disk backup image lets you access the volumes as though they were physical disks Multiple volumes contained in the same backup can be mounted within a single mount operation The mount operation is available when the console is connected to a managed machine running either Windows or Linux Mounting volumes in the read write mode enables you to modify the backup content that is save move create delete files or folders and run executables consisting of one file Limitation Mounting of volume backups stored on Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node is no
575. the respective Edit page will be opened The Edit managed vault page lets you change the vault s name encryption password if the vault is encrypted and information in the Comments field The Edit unmanaged vault page lets you edit the vault s name and information in the Comments field Validate a vault 1 Select the vault 2 Click validate You will be taken to the Validation p 235 page with an already pre selected vault as a source The vault validation checks all the archives in this vault Delete a vault 1 Select the vault 2 Click XxX Delete You ll be asked whether to keep the archives stored in the vault or delete the vault along with all the archives The plans and tasks that use this vault will fail If you choose to keep the archives for a managed vault the vault will be detached from the storage node Later on you ll be able to attach this vault to the same or to another storage node Explore an unmanaged 1 Select the unmanaged vault vault o 2 Click S Explore The vault will be available for examination with the standard file manager program Attach the managed Click Attach vault that was deleted without removing its content The procedure of attaching a managed vault to a storage node is described in depth in the Attaching a managed vault p 135 section Change user credentials Click Change user for accessing a vault 2 ae F F 8 Changing user credentials is available for v
576. the second run is exactly two hours for instance First machine Every day at 09 30 03 AM and 11 30 03 AM Second machine Every day at 09 00 00 AM and 11 00 00 AM Third machine Every day at 09 59 59 AM and 11 59 59 AM To specify advanced settings 1 Oy lS ee Connect to the management server or to a machine registered on it and then start creating a backup policy or a backup plan In How to back up select the Simple Tower of Hanoi or Custom scheme and then click Change to specify a schedule for the scheme Under Run the task select Daily Weekly or Monthly In the Advanced settings area click Change To enable the use of the Wake On LAN functionality select the Use Wake on LAN check box To distribute the centralized backup tasks start times select the Distribute start time within the time window check box and then specify the maximum delay value and the distribution method 5 6 Conditions Conditions add more flexibility to the scheduler enabling to execute backup tasks with respect to certain conditions Once a specified event occurs see the Scheduling section for the list of available events the scheduler checks the specified condition and executes the task if the condition is met The scheduler behavior in case the event occurs but the condition or any of multiple conditions is not met is defined by the Task start conditions p 114 backup option There you can specify how important the conditions are for
577. the snapshot is taken Volume shadow copy writers Before backing up the data of VSS aware applications make sure that the volume shadow copy writers for those applications are turned on by examining the list of writers that are present in the operating system To view this list run the following command vssadmin list writers Note In Microsoft Windows Small Business Server 2003 the writer for Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 is turned off by default For instructions on how to turn it on see the corresponding Microsoft Help and Support article http support microsoft com kb 838183 en Compression level This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media The option defines the level of compression applied to the data being backed up The preset is Normal The optimal data compression level depends on the type of data being backed up For example even maximum compression will not significantly reduce the archive size if the archive contains essentially compressed files such as jpg pdf or mp3 However formats such as doc or xls will be compressed well To specify the compression level Select one of the following None the data will be copied as is without any compression The resulting backup size will be maximal Normal recommended in most cases High the resulting backup size will typically be less than for the Normal level Maximum the data will be compressed as
578. the tapes with free space instead of the deleted backups on the first Friday of the following year At the time the differential backup blue rectangle is written onto tape 24 g g 02 g 03 g 04 g 05 g oi 148 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2010 The full backup stored on tape 01 is deleted after the next full backup is created onto both tapes 23 and 24 on Friday of the 52nd week As all backups of tape 01 have been deleted the tape is considered as free and can be reused Further analysis of the example proves that the maximal number of tapes required to store the data backups is 25 tapes This maximum occurs on the 16th week of the following year The above mentioned figures show that a data recovery requires one or two tapes for a full backup two or three tapes for a differential backup and one two or three tapes for an incremental backup For example if we need to recover data from a backup created on Monday of the 52nd week the task will require the following tapes Tape 23 with an incremental backup marked with 52 and a differential backup created on Friday of the 51st week Tape 21 and Tape 22 that contain a full backup created on Friday of the 48th week The example reveals the following shortcomings of the scheme combination with the specified tape options commonly any data recovery is a long process that requires loading mounting rewinding and reading of one 3 for backups displayed in the Tape u
579. the volume to be mounted 3 If several volumes are selected for mounting click on every volume to set its mounting parameters described in the previous step 4 Click OK 6 6 Managing mounted images Once a volume is mounted you can browse files and folders contained in the backup using a file manager and copy the desired files to any destination Thus if you need to take out only a few files and folders from a volume backup you do not have to perform the recovery procedure Exploring images Exploring mounted volumes lets you view and modify if mounted in the read write mode the volume s content To explore a mounted volume select it in the table and click Explore The default file manager window opens allowing the user to examine the mounted volume contents Unmounting images Maintaining the mounted volumes takes considerable system resources It is recommended that you unmount the volumes after the necessary operations are completed If not unmounted manually a volume will remain mounted until the operating system restarts To unmount an image select it in the table and click amp Unmount To unmount all the mounted volumes click amp Unmount all 6 7 Exporting archives and backups The export operation creates a copy of an archive or a self sufficient part copy of an archive in the location you specify The original archive remains untouched The export operation can be applied to a single archive an e
580. ther of the following ways Automatically in Linux based bootable media by using the management console or a script see Creating the volume structure automatically p 263 Manually by using the lvm utility see Creating the volume structure manually p 264 Creating the volume structure automatically Suppose that you saved the volume structure to the etc Acronis directory see Backing up LVM volumes Linux p 44 and that the volume with this directory is included in the archive To recreate the volume structure in Linux based bootable media use either of the methods described below Caution As a result of the following procedures the current volume structure on the machine will be replaced with the one stored in the archive This will destroy the data that is currently stored on some or all of the machine s hard disks If disk configuration has changed An MD device or a logical volume resides on one or more disks each of its own size If you replaced any of these disks between backup and recovery or if you are recovering the volumes to a different machine make sure that the new disk configuration includes enough disks whose sizes are at least those of the original disks To create the volume structure by using the management console 1 Boot the machine from a Linux based bootable media 2 Click Acronis Bootable Agent Then click Run management console 3 Inthe management console click Recover Under
581. tial and daily incremental backups plus cleanup example in the Custom backup scheme p 210 section Season schedule Run the task on all workdays during the northern autumn seasons of 2009 and 2010 During a workday the task is performed every 6 hours from 12 AM midnight till 6 PM The schedule s parameters are set up as follows 1 Months September October November 2 On lt all gt lt workdays gt 3 Every 6 hours From 12 00 00 AM Until 06 00 00 PM 4 Effective From 08 30 2009 Actually the task will be started on the first workday of September By setting up this date we just define that the task must be started in 2009 To 12 01 2010 Actually the task will end on the last workday of November By setting up this date we just define that the task must be discontinued in 2010 after autumn ends in the northern hemisphere Several monthly schedules for one task In the case when the task needs to be run on different days or weeks with different time intervals depending on the month consider adding a dedicated schedule to every desired month or several months Suppose that the task goes into effect on 11 01 2009 During northern winter the task runs once at 10PM on every workday During northern spring and autumn the task runs every 12 hours on all workdays During northern summer the task runs every first and fifteenth of every month at 10 PM Thus the following three schedules are added to the ta
582. time has passed since the last backup Creation backup plan creation date Comments description of the plan if provided Source The Source tab provides the following information on the data selected for backup Source type the type of data p 198 selected for backing up Items to back up items selected to back up and their size Destination The Destination tab provides the following information Location name of the vault or path to the folder where the archive is stored Archive name name of the archive Archive comments comments on the archive if provided Settings The Settings tab displays the following information Backup scheme the selected backup scheme and all its settings with schedules Validation if selected events before or after which the validation is performed and validation schedule Backup options backup options changed against the default values 6 1 3 Log The Log stores the history of operations performed by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 on the machine or actions a user takes on the machine using the program For instance when a user edits a task the respective entry is added to the log When the program executes a task it adds multiple entries With the log you can examine operations results of tasks execution including reasons for failure if any Way of working with log entries Use filters to display the desired log entries You can also hide t
583. ting system and the virtualization product settings For example virtual machines may be allowed to use no more than 30 of memory Disks Initial setting the number and size of the source machine s disks The number of disks is generally equal to that of the source machine but might be different if the program has to add more disks to accommodate the source machine volumes because of limitations set by the virtualization product You can add virtual disks to the machine configuration or in some cases delete the proposed disks Implementation of Xen machines is based on Microsoft Virtual PC and inherits its limitations up to 3 IDE disks with a maximum size of 127 GB and 1 processor SCSI disks are not supported Processors Initial setting if not contained in the backup or the backed up setting is not supported by the virtualization server the default server s setting This is the number of processors of the new virtual machine In most cases it is set to one The result of assignment of more than one processor to the machine is not guaranteed The number of virtual processors may be limited by the host CPU configuration the virtualization product and the guest operating system Multiple virtual processors are generally available on multi processor hosts A multicore host CPU or hyperthreading may enable multiple virtual processors on a single processor host File destination To specify a destination 1 Select a location to
584. tion Specifies the maximum number of simultaneous synchronization connections to keep Possible values Any integer number between 1 and 500 Default value 200 If the total number of online registered machines does not exceed the value in Maximum Connections connections to those machines are always kept and the management server periodically performs synchronization with each machine Otherwise it connects to a number of registered machines depending on the allotted number of simultaneous connections After synchronization for a machine is complete the management server may disconnect from that machine and use the free connection for synchronization with another machine and so on Note Connections to machines with high synchronization priority see Period High Priority later in this topic are likely to be always kept Synchronization connections are unrelated to connections such as those between Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server and Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Console Maximum Workers Description Specifies the maximum number of threads to use for synchronization Possible values Any integer number between 1 and 100 Default value 30 The management server s process uses special threads called worker threads or workers to perform synchronization for a registered machine which is connected for synchronization Each worker performs synchronization for exactly one machine at a time A connected ma
585. tion describes how to configure Internet Small Computer System Interface iSCSI devices and Network Direct Attached Storage NDAS devices when working under bootable media These devices are connected to the machine through a network interface and appear as if they were locally attached devices On the network an iSCSI device is identified by its IP address and an NDAS device is identified by its device ID An iSCSI device is sometimes called an iSCSI target A hardware or software component that provides interaction between the machine and the iSCSI target is called the iSCSI initiator The name of the iSCSI initiator is usually defined by an administrator of the server that hosts the device To add an iSCSI device 1 Ina bootable media Linux based or PE based run the management console a od S Click Configure iSCSI NDAS devices in a Linux based media or Run the iSCSI Setup in a PE based media Specify the IP address and port of the iSCSI device s host and the name of the iSCSI initiator If the host requires authentication specify the user name and password for it Click OK Select the iSCSI device from the list and then click Connect If prompted specify the user name and password to access the iSCSI device To add an NDAS device On es IS In a Linux based bootable media run the management console Click Configure iSCSI NDAS devices In NDAS devices click Add device Specify the 20 character device ID If
586. tion on the selected group Allows performing operations with the policies applied to the group This information is also duplicated in the Information panel Group Displays the following information on the group Name name of the selected group Parent group for subgroups only name of the parent group Machines number of machines in the group Type type of the group static or dynamic Criteria for dynamic groups only grouping criteria Comments the group description if specified Backup policies Displays a list of backup policies related to the group and allows performing the following operations To Do View details of a policy Click View details In the Policy details p 290 window examine all information related to the selected backup policy View tasks of a policy Click View tasks The Tasks p 319 view will display a list of the tasks related to the selected backup policy View log of a policy Click View log The Log p 321 view will display a list of the log entries related to the selected backup policy Revoke a policy from the Click u Revoke group The management server revokes the policy from the group While the changes are being transferred to the machines and the agents are deleting the backup plans the policy state of the group is Revoking The policy itself remains on the management server Examine where the policy Click Explore inheritance applied to the gro
587. tions Execute before the backup Execute after the backup 2 Do any of the following m Click Edit to specify a new command or a batch file Select the existing command or the batch file from the drop down list 3 Click OK Pre backup command To specify a command batch file to be executed before the backup process starts 1 Inthe Command field type a command or browse to a batch file The program does not support interactive commands i e commands that require user input for example pause 2 Inthe Working directory field specify a path to a directory where the command batch file will be executed In the Arguments field specify the command s execution arguments if required Depending on the result you want to obtain select the appropriate options as described in the table below 5 Click Test command to check if the command is correct Check box Selection Fail the task if the command Selected Cleared Selected Cleared execution fails Do not back up until the Selected Selected Cleared Cleared command execution is complete Result Preset Perform the N A Perform the backup backup after the concurrently with Perform the backup command is the command only after the executed despite execution and command is execution failure irrespective of the successfully or success command execution result executed Fail the task if the command execution fails Post backup command To specify a command executable file
588. tions connect the console to the managed machine and then select Options gt Default backup and recovery options gt Default recovery options from the top menu Availability of the recovery options The set of available recovery options depends on The environment the agent operates in Windows Linux bootable media The type of data being recovered disk file The operating system being recovered from the disk backup Windows Linux The following table summarizes the availability of the recovery options Agent for Windows Agent for Linux Bootable media Linux based or PE based Disk File recovery Disk File recovery Disk File recovery eee ae also from a recovery also from a recovery also from a disk backup disk backup disk backup Pre Post recovery PE only PE only commands p 120 Recovery priority p 121 t i File level security p 122 Recover files with their 5 t t j security settings Error handling p 125 Do not show messages and t t t 7 F dialogs while processing silent mode Re attempt if an error occurs i bi a ii Additional settings p 125 Set current date and time for t i t 7 recovered files Validate backup archive before recovery Check file system after recovery Reboot machine automatically if it is required for recovery Change SID after recovery Windows 3 Windows Windows recovery recovery recovery Notifications E mail p 122
589. tions can also be performed using the context menu right click the selected backup policy or using the Backup policy name actions bar on the Actions and tools pane The following is a guideline for you to perform operations with backup policies To Do Create a backup policy Click g Create backup policy The procedure of creating a backup policy is described in depth in the Creating a backup policy p 346 section Apply policy to machines Click F Apply to or groups In the Machines selection p 289 window specify the machines groups the selected backup policy will be applied to If the machine is currently offline the policy will be deployed when the machine comes online again Edit a policy Delete a policy View details of a policy or revoke a policy View tasks of a policy View log of a policy Refresh a list of policies Machines selection Click Edit Editing policies is performed in the same way as creating p 346 Once the policy is edited the management server updates the policy on all machines the policy was deployed to Click x Delete As a result the policy will be revoked from the machines it was deployed to and deleted from the management server If the machine is currently offline the policy will be revoked when the machine comes online again Click View details In the Policy details p 290 window examine information on the selected policy There you can also revoke the
590. tions that can be performed on disks Disk Initialization p 271 initializes the new hardware added to the system Basic disk cloning p 271 transfers complete data from the source basic MBR disk to the target Disk conversion MBR to GPT p 273 converts an MBR partition table to GPT Disk conversion GPT to MBR p 274 converts a GPT partition table to MBR Disk conversion Basic to Dynamic p 274 converts a basic disk to dynamic Disk conversion Dynamic to Basic p 275 converts a dynamic disk to basic The full version of Acronis Disk Director will provide more tools and utilities for working with disks Acronis Disk Director Lite must obtain exclusive access to the target disk This means no other disk management utilities like Windows Disk Management utility can access it at that time If you receive a message stating that the disk cannot be blocked close the disk management applications that use this disk and start again If you cannot determine which applications use the disk close them all Disk initialization If you add any new disk to your machine Acronis Disk Director Lite will notice the configuration change and scan the added disk to include it to the disk and volume list If the disk is still not initialized or possibly has a file structure unknown to the machine system that means that no programs can be installed on it and you will not be able to store any files there Acronis Disk Di
591. tivation of loaders other than Windows loaders and GRUB Agent Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent An application that performs data backup and recovery and enables other management operations on the machine p 375 such as task management and operations with hard disks The type of data that can be backed up depends on the agent type Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 includes the agents for backing up disks and files and the agents for backing up virtual machines residing on virtualization servers Agent side cleanup Cleanup p 370 performed by an agent p 366 according to the backup plan p 368 that produces the archive p 367 Agent side cleanup is performed in unmanaged vaults p 379 Agent side validation Validation p 379 performed by an agent p 366 according to the backup plan p 368 that produces the archive p 367 Agent side validation is performed in unmanaged vaults p 379 Archive See Backup archive p 367 B Backup The result of a single backup operation p 367 Physically it is a file or a tape record that contains a copy of the backed up data as of specific date and time Backup files created by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 have a TIB extension The TIB files resulting from backup consolidation p 371 are also called backups Backup archive Archive A set of backups p 367 created and managed by a backup plan p 368 An archive can contain multiple full backups p 374
592. tive only for disk level backups of machines running Linux The preset is Enabled When this option is enabled Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 will save information about the structure of logical volumes known as LVM volumes and of Linux Software RAID devices known as MD devices to the etc Acronis directory before creating the backup When recovering MD devices and LVM volumes under bootable media you can use this information to automatically recreate the volume structure For instructions see Recovering MD devices and logical volumes p 263 When using this option make sure that the volume containing the etc Acronis directory is among the volumes to back up Use FTP in Active mode The preset is Disabled Enable this option if the FTP server supports active mode and you want this mode to be used for file transfers 3 4 2 Default recovery options Each Acronis agent has its own default recovery options Once an agent is installed the default options have pre defined values which are referred to as presets in the documentation When creating a recovery task you can either use a default option or override the default option with the custom value that will be specific for this task only You can also customize a default option itself by changing its value against the pre defined one The new value will be used by default in all recovery tasks you will create later on this machine To view and change the default recovery op
593. to run the task once again Edit a plan task Delete a plan task Backup plan Click Edit Backup plan editing is performed in the same way as creation p 195 except for the following limitations It is not always possible to change backup scheme properties if the created archive is not empty i e contains backups 1 It is not possible to change the scheme to Grandfather Father Son or Tower of Hanoi 2 If the Tower of Hanoi scheme is used it is not possible to change the number of levels In all other cases the scheme can be changed and should continue to operate as if the existing archives were created by a new scheme For empty archives all changes are possible Why can t I edit the backup plan The backup plan is currently running Editing of the currently running backup plan is impossible The backup plan has a centralized origin Direct editing of centralized backup plans is not possible You need to edit the original backup policy Task Click F Edit Why can t I edit the task m Task belongs to a backup plan Only tasks that do not belong to a backup plan such as a recovery task can be modified by direct editing When you need to modify a task belonging to a local backup plan edit the backup plan A task belonging to a centralized backup plan can be modified by editing the centralized policy that spawned the plan Backup plan Click XxX Delete What will happen if delete the backup plan Th
594. to be executed after the backup is completed 1 Inthe Command field type a command or browse to a batch file 2 Inthe Working directory field specify a path to a directory where the command batch file will be executed 3 Inthe Arguments field specify the command execution arguments if required If successful execution of the command is critical for your backup strategy select the Fail the task if the command execution fails check box In case the command execution fails the program will remove the resulting TIB file and temporary files if possible and the task will fail When the check box is not selected the command execution result does not affect the task execution failure or success You can track the command execution result by exploring the log or the errors and warnings displayed on the Dashboard 5 Click Test Command to check if the command is correct Pre Post data capture commands This option is effective for both Windows and Linux operating systems The option enables you to define the commands to be automatically executed before and after data capture that is taking the data snapshot performed by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 at the beginning of the backup procedure The following scheme illustrates when the pre post data capture commands are executed lt Backup gt Pre backup Pre data Dati Post data Post backup command capture capture capture
595. top menu and then refer to the context help Grouping the machines registered on the management server Group the registered machines by appropriate parameters create several policies and apply each policy to the appropriate group of machines For more information please refer to Grouping the registered machines p 61 The comprehensive example of advanced centralized management is provided in the Setting up centralized data protection in a heterogeneous network p 58 section 1 2 1 Using the management console As soon as the console connects to a managed machine p 375 or to a management server p 376 the respective items appear across the console s workspace in the menu in the main area with the Welcome screen the Navigation pane the Actions and tools pane enabling you to perform agent specific or server specific operations Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Connected to This Machine Local Connection QQ Dore pasm Krok e Mirin Navigation Welcome to Machine12 Actions and tools Navigation Actions The console t connected to the managed machine Choose the action to perform o the tool to use To Mochinet2 check for warnings and review statistics navigate to the Dashboard view e o Dadboxd R Bachp plans and tasks BH Recover vaks vaise Log j gt Dick management B Create personal vauk Shortcuts Create Acronis Seowe Zone P Loca machine Mahnet Nort mace QQ Manage morted mages To
596. torage nodes To Add a storage node to the management server Remove a storage node from the management server Create a centralized managed vault on the selected storage node Change the compacting task schedule View details of the storage node Do Click amp Add In the Add storage node p 318 window specify the machine the storage node is installed on Adding a storage node establishes a trusted relationship between the management server and the storage node in the same way as when you add machines to the server Once the storage node is added to the management server you will be able to create managed vaults on the node Click x Remove Once the storage node is removed from the management server the vaults being managed by the storage node disappear from the vault list p 128 and become unavailable for performing operations All the plans and tasks that use these vaults will fail All the databases and vaults of this storage node remain untouched It is possible to add the previously removed storage node to the management server again As a result all the vaults managed by the storage node will appear in the vault list and become available once again for all the plans and tasks that used these vaults Click Create vault The Create managed vault page p 132 will be opened with the pre selected storage node Perform the remaining steps to create the vault After deleting backups from deduplicating
597. tors group on the storage node can additionally View and manage any archive in any centralized vault managed by the storage node Create centralized vaults to be managed by the storage node provided that the user is also an Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server administrator Re schedule the compacting task as described in Operations with storage nodes p 317 under Change the compacting task schedule Users with these additional privileges are also called storage node administrators Recommendations on user accounts To allow users to access the centralized vaults managed by a storage node you must ensure that those users have a right to access the storage node from the network If both the users machines and the machine with the storage node are in one Active Directory domain you probably do not need to perform any further steps all users are typically members of the Domain Users group and so can access the storage node Otherwise you need to create user accounts on the machine where the storage node is installed We recommend creating a separate user account for each user who will access the storage node so that the users are able to access only the archives they own When creating the accounts follow these guidelines For users whom you want to act as storage node administrators add their accounts to the Administrators group For other users add their user accounts to the Users group Additional
598. treams However these streams are never deduplicated even when the file itself is 2 14 7 Privileges for centralized management This section describes the users privileges that are required to manage a machine locally and remotely to manage a machine registered on Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server and to access and manage Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node Types of connection to a managed machine There are two types of connection to a managed machine local connection and remote connection Local connection The local connection is established between Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Console on a machine and Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent on the same machine To establish a local connection On the toolbar click Connect then point to New connection and then click This machine Remote connection A remote connection is established between Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Console on one machine and Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent on another machine You might need to specify logon credentials to establish a remote connection To establish a remote connection 1 On the toolbar click Connect then point to New connection and then click Manage a remote machine 2 In Machine type or select the name or IP address of the remote machine to which you want to connect or click Browse to select the machine from the list 3 To specify credentials for connect
599. tree The log entries can be filtered by machines backup plans and other parameters Refer to the context help for details Creating centralized vaults If you opt for storing all backup archives in a single or a few networked locations create centralized vaults in these locations After a vault is created you can view and administer its content by selecting Vaults gt Centralized gt Vault name in the Navigation tree The shortcut to the vault will be deployed to all the registered machines The vault can be specified as a backup destination in any backup plan created by you or by the registered machines users The advanced way of centralized management To make the best use of the centralized management capabilities offered by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 you can opt for Using deduplication 1 Install Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node p 20 and add it to the management server Create the deduplicating managed vault on the storage node Install the Acronis Deduplication add on to the agent on all machines that will back up to the deduplicating vault 4 Ensure that the backup plans you create use the managed vault as destination for the backup archives Creating a backup policy rather than backup plans Set up a centralized backup policy and apply it to the All machines group This way you will deploy backup plans on each machine with a single action Select Actions gt Create backup policy from the
600. tualization servers VMware vCenter integration This option defines whether to show virtual machines managed by a VMware vCenter Server in the management server and show the backup status of these machines in the vCenter Integration is available in all Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 advanced editions a license for Virtual Edition is not required No software installation is required on the vCenter Server On the management server side When integration is enabled the vCenter s VMs and Templates inventory view appears in the management server s GUI under Navigation gt Virtual machines From the management server s standpoint this is a dynamic group of virtual machines The group name matches the vCenter Server name or IP address whatever was specified when configuring integration The group content is synchronized with the vCenter Server and cannot be changed on the management server side In case of an occasional inconsistency right click the group and select Refresh The virtual machines managed by the vCenter Server also appear in the All virtual machines group You can view virtual machine properties and power state create groups of virtual machines and add virtual machines to existing groups Backup and recovery of a virtual machine is not possible unless Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for ESX ESXi is deployed p 311 to the virtual machine s host Such machines appear as not manageable grayed out Once the agent
601. tware and or Service The license terms for such third parties are detailed in the license txt file located in the root installation directory You can always find the latest up to date list of the third party code and the associated license terms used with the Software and or Service at http kb acronis com content 7696 Table of contents 1 Introducing Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 cssssssssssseccccssssssssesececesenssssseseessesnansssseesees 7 1 1 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 overview ccccececsssseceeeeeceeseseeaececeescessesaaaeeeeeesseeseseaeeeeeesseesees 7 1 2 GOtting Started raine eae aaeeea acnceeccetachdevacdea ceeaudes a EEE aaa Ea 8 1 2 1 Using the management Console cneas riarekin iaar EE E ENEE ENE 10 1 3 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 COMPONENLS cssccccccecsssessssececececessesssaeeeceesceesesenaeeeeeeesessees 16 t31 GABEMETOR WIMAOWS rasen aa a a a e settee lN 17 132 AgentTOr LINUR esere e Eee an ar EEr aE E RAE EE EE aa EEEE E 18 13 3 Agent Tor ESX ESXi secesisaiseisssisesssdaxexssescansegoasavassoaseaesasdacovagsavasacoanetsissastisisiacatsieasaiavenseiseasanaisiasaas tele Tia eia 18 1 3 4 Components for centralized management cccesscscssessessesecssesessessesscecsessecsesassaesecseesecseeeesaussessesaeeeeeeees 18 1 3 5 Management COmSOle cvsiucssccheeveccvcsvcakeneds ha a aa a 1 3 6 Bootable Media Builder ccecsscesssesscessecsseeeseeseeeseeeesesecseeeesesesecseeecseseee
602. tware that are enrolled in Support Upon mutual agreement by both parties Acronis shall i supply code corrections to you to correct Software malfunctions in order to bring such Software into substantial conformity with the published operating specifications for the most current version of the Software unless your unauthorized modifications prohibit or hamper such corrections or cause the malfunction or ii supply code corrections to correct insubstantial problems at the next general release of the Software More information about contacting Acronis Technical Support is available at the following link http www acronis com enterprise support 2 Understanding Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 This section attempts to give its readers a clear understanding of the product so that they can use the product in various circumstances without step by step instructions 2 1 Basic concepts Please familiarize yourself with the basic notions used in the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 graphical user interface and documentation Advanced users are welcome to use this section as a step by step quick start guide The details can be found in the context help Backup under operating system 1 To protect data on a machine install Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 agent p 366 on the machine which becomes a managed machine p 375 from this point on To be able to manage the machine using Graphical User Interface install Acronis Backup
603. twork The network booting Eliminates the need to have a technician onsite to install the bootable media p 369 into the system that has to be booted During group operations reduces the time required for booting multiple machines as compared to using physical bootable media License Server The server enables you to manage licenses of Acronis products and install the components that require licenses For more information about Acronis License Server please see Using Acronis License Server L320 Management Console Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Console is an administrative tool for remote or local access to Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 agents and in the product editions that include the centralized management capability to the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server The console has two distributions for installation on Windows and installation on Linux While both distributions enable connection to any Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 agent and Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server we recommend that you use the console for Windows if you have a choice between the two The console that installs on Linux has limited functionality remote installation of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components is not available the Active Directory related features such as browsing the AD are not available 1 3 6 Bootable Media Builder Acronis Bootable Media Builder is a dedicated tool for
604. ual machine will be configured automatically the source machine configuration being copied where possible The configuration is displayed in the Virtual Machine Settings p 225 section Check the settings and make changes if necessary Then you proceed to the regular volume mapping procedure described below Existing virtual machine Available when the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Hyper V or Agent for ESX ESXi is installed On selecting this you specify the virtualization server and the target virtual machine Then you proceed to the regular volume mapping procedure described below Please be aware that the target machine will be powered off automatically before recovery If you prefer to power it off manually modify the VM power management option Recover Disk MBR to If the Master Boot Record is selected for recovery Disk p 223 Choose the disk to recover the Master Boot Record to NT signature p 221 Select the way the disk s signature contained in the MBR will be handled The disk signature is used by Windows and the Linux kernel version 2 6 and later Recover Volume Letter to Disk Volume p 223 Sequentially map each of the source volumes to a volume or an unallocated space on the destination disk Size p 223 Optional Change the recovered volume size location and other properties MBR destination To specify a destination disk 1 Select the disk to recover the MBR to 2 Clic
605. ually when the device contains the boot volume follow these guidelines If all parts of the MD device are volumes a typical case such as in the first example make sure that the type of each volume called partition type or system ID is Linux raid automount the hexadecimal code of this partition type is OxFD This will guarantee that the device will be automatically assembled following the reboot To view or change the partition type use a disk partitioning utility such as fdisk Otherwise such as in the second example recover the device from bootable media no reboot is required in this case Use the mdadm utility for assembly In bootable media you may need to create the MD device manually as described in Recovering MD devices and logical volumes p 263 6 3 13 Recovering a vast number of files from a file backup Applies to Microsoft Windows Server 2003 When recovering a very large number of files at a time hundreds of thousands or millions from a file backup you might encounter the following problem The recovery process fails and the message Error reading the file appears Not all of the files are recovered The most likely cause of the problem is an insufficient amount of memory allocated to the recovery process by the operating system s cache manager You can either work around this problem or modify the registry to increase the amount of allocated memory as described below To resolve the problem do
606. uccessfully created on the level The table shows the pattern for the five level backup scheme The pattern consists of 16 sessions imeem lal fal Lal lal lal fal u ECE FEE EEE E SERRE CREE 3 Differential rT O EEEREN SESRREE SS S As a result of using incremental and differential backups the situation may arise when an old backup deletion must be postponed as it still is a base for other backups The table below indicates the case when deletion of full backup E created at session 1 is postponed at session 17 until session 25 because the differential backup D created at session 9 is still actual In the table all cells with deleted backups are grayed out Session fioc Al lal lel lel Tt a hal aerea 8 fel fel fel y ey sonen eT TT tt et tt tt et SS T A y C sew Differential backup D created at session 9 will be deleted at session 25 after creation of a new differential backup is completed This way a backup archive created in accordance with the Tower of Hanoi scheme by Acronis sometimes includes up to two additional backups over the classical implementation of the scheme For information about using Tower of Hanoi for tape libraries see Using the Tower of Hanoi tape rotation scheme p 152 2 7 Retention rules The backups produced by a backup plan make an archive The two retention rules described in this section enable you to limit the archive size and se
607. udes all files with the log extension Mask my log Excludes all log files with names consisting of five symbols and starting with my 13 9 Archive Specify where to store the archives and define names for the new backup archives 1 Selecting the archives destination Choose where to store machines archives Store all machines archives in a single location To store archives in a centralized vault expand the Centralized group and click the vault To store archives on a network share expand the Network folders group then select the required networked machine and then click the shared folder If the network share requires access credentials the program will ask for them To store archives on an FTP or SFTP server expand the corresponding group and reach the appropriate server then select the folder that will be used for storing archives According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer Store each machine s archive in the specified folder on the machine Enter the full path to the folder in the Path field This path will be created on each machine the policy will be applied to Store each machine s archive in the machine s Acronis Secure Zone Acronis Secure Zone has to be created on each machine the polic
608. uld be available in the repository of your Linux distribution LG System requirements The components installed in operating systems Component Memory above the OS and running applications The components installed in Windows Complete installation Agent for Windows Agent for Hyper V add on Bootable Media Builder Management Console Management Server Wake on LAN Proxy Storage Node License Server PXE Server 300 MB 120 MB See Agent for Windows 80 MB 30 MB 40 MB Negligible 100 MB Negligible 5 MB The components installed in Linux Complete installation 160 MB Disk space required during installation or update 2 7 GB 700 MB 50 MB 700 MB 950 MB 250 MB 400 MB for SQL Express Server 30 MB 150 MB 25 MB 80 MB 400 MB Disk space occupied Additional by the component s 1 7 GB including SQL Express Server 260 MB 20 MB 300 MB CD RW or DVD RW drive 450 MB Screen resolution 1024 768 pixels or higher 250 MB 400 MB for SQL Express Server 5 MB 150 MB Recommended When using a tape mele wanes library space 4 GB RAM required for tapes High speed database approx 1 MB per 10 archives storage such as hardware RAID 25 MB 15 MB 250 MB Agent for Linux 65 MB 150 MB 70 MB Bootable Media Builder 70 MB 240 MB 140 MB Management Console 25 MB 100 MB 40 MB The components installed on VMware ESX i server Agent for ESX E
609. ult Generally this option ensures more efficient usage of tapes than the A separate tape set for each single machine option However the second one can be useful for example when there are special requirements to store the tapes with backups from a specific machine off site When the Use a separate tape set option is enabled there might be a case when the backup has to be written onto a tape that is currently out of the tape library device Define what to do in this case Ask for user interaction the backup task will enter the Need Interaction state and wait for the tape with the required label to be loaded into the tape library device Usea free tape the backup will be written onto a free tape so the operation will be paused only if there is no free tape in the library Always use a free tape If you leave the options below unchanged then each backup will be written onto the tape specified by the Use a separate tape set option With some of the options below enabled the program will add new tapes to the tape set every time when a full incremental or differential backup is created For each full backup The preset is Disabled When this option is enabled each full backup will be written onto a free tape The tape will be loaded to a drive especially for this operation If the Use a separate tape set option is enabled only incremental and differential backups of the same data will be appended to the tape For each dif
610. umber between 1 and 2147483647 Default value 50 The backup queue is a list of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components that are awaiting connection to the storage node or are currently connected to it see the previous parameter When the number of components in the backup queue is equal to the value in Backup Queue Limit and another component tries to establish a connection the storage node does not put the component in the queue In this case the component s connection to the storage node will fail If the component is an Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent the corresponding backup or recovery task will stop with the Failed status Vault Warnings and Limits Specifies the amount of free space in a vault both as an absolute value and as a percentage below which a warning or error is recorded in the log This parameter contains the following settings Vault Free Space Warning Limit Description Specifies the amount of free space in a managed vault in megabytes below which a warning is recorded in the storage node s log Possible values Any integer number between 0 and 2147483647 Default value 200 A vault s free space is the amount of free space on the medium such as a disk volume that stores the vault When the amount of free space in a vault is equal to the value in Vault Free Space Warning Limit or less a warning is recorded in the storage node s log indicating the vault in question You can view storage no
611. up amp Recovery 10 components viewing the centralized log and more Centralized task A task p 378 belonging to a centralized backup plan p 370 Such task appears on the managed machine p 375 as a result of deploying a backup policy p 368 from the management server p 376 and can be modified only by editing the backup policy Centralized vault A networked location allotted by the management server p 376 administrator to serve as storage for the backup archives p 367 A centralized vault can be managed by a storage node p 377 or be unmanaged The total number and size of archives stored in a centralized vault are limited by the storage size only As soon as the management server administrator creates a centralized vault the vault name and path to the vault are distributed to all machines registered p 377 on the server The shortcut to the vault appears on the machines in the Centralized vaults list Any backup plan p 368 existing on the machines including local plans can use the centralized vault On a machine that is not registered on the management server a user having the privilege to back up to the centralized vault can do so by specifying the full path to the vault If the vault is managed the user s archives will be managed by the storage node as well as other archives stored in the vault Cleanup Deleting backups p 367 from a backup archive p 367 in order to get rid of outdated backups or prev
612. up and select Export from the context menu The Export page will be opened with the pre selected object as a source All you need to do is to select a destination and optionally provide a name for the task To export an archive or a backup perform the following steps General Task name Optional Enter a unique name for the task A conscious name lets you quickly identify the task among the others Task credentials p 244 Optional The export task will run on behalf of the user who is creating the task You can change the task credentials if necessary To access this option select the Advanced view check box What to export Export Select an object to export Archive p 218 in that case you need to specify the archive only Backups p 245 specify the archive first and then select the desired backup s in this archive Access credentials p 245 Optional Provide credentials for accessing the source if the task account does not have enough privileges to access it To access this option select the Advanced view check box Where to export Archive p 246 Enter the path to the location where the new archive will be created Be sure to provide a distinct name and comment for the new archive Access credentials p 247 Optional Provide credentials for the destination if the task credentials do not have enough privileges to access it To access this option select the Advanced view check box After you have per
613. up came T from The Inheritance order p 308 window will display the inheritance order of the policy applied to the group Filtering and sorting Filtering and sorting of the backup policies is performed in the same way as for the Backup policies view See the Filtering and sorting backup policies p 289 section for details Inheritance order The Inheritance order window lets you examine where the policy applied to the group came from The policy that is directly applied to the group is displayed as follows Group name The following example illustrates how the policy that is applied on the group through inheritance is displayed Group1 gt kl Group2 gt Group3 Group in the root contains Group2 to which the policy is applied directly Group2 in turn contains child Group3 that inherits the policy from the parent The group to which the policy was applied directly is boldfaced and marked with an icon All items are interactive i e when you click on a group its parent group view will be opened 7 1 4 Virtual machines You can centrally manage virtual machines using either of the following methods or both Adding a virtual machine as a physical machine Install Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows or Agent for Linux on the virtual machine and register p 294 it on the management server The machine will be treated as a physical one You will be able to apply any backup policy to the machine including
614. up options section on the Create backup policy plan page It opens the Backup options window where the Tape support page is contained with the pre defined values When backing up to a tape and the end of the tape is reached a free tape will be mounted automatically and the operation will continue onto the new tape While a backup task is running the following tape specific information is accessible from the console number of tapes currently used by the backup operation labels of the tapes used by the task up to the current time in case of backup splitting label of the tape that is currently written Recovering from tape library Data recovery from archives located on tape devices is performed in the same way as with other storage devices When recovering you start creating a recovery task select the tape device vault and select the archive and the backup to recover data from At task creation the program uses the storage node database instead of accessing tapes However selection of data to recover e g some files or specific volumes requires reading of one or more tapes so it might be durational The program finds the tapes and inserts them automatically in the right order The Task Need Interaction window comes up if a required tape is not found Keep in mind that a data recovery operation may require access to a number of tapes For example data recovery from an incremental backup commonly might require loading mountin
615. up plan that will regularly back up data and clean up the resulting archive according to the GFS scheme Create the backup plan as usual For the backup destination choose any storage device where automatic cleanup can be performed such as an HDD based storage device or robotic tape library Since the space freed on the tape after cleanup cannot be reused until all the tape becomes free take into account additional considerations when using GFS on a tape library p 146 The following is an explanation of the settings that are specific for the GFS backup scheme GFS related settings of the backup plan Start backup at Back up on This step creates the total backup schedule that is defines all the days you need to back up on Assume you select backing up at 8 00 PM on workdays Here is the total schedule you have defined B stands for backup Toal 5 Bo BOB OB 8 B B B8B 8 B B B8B 8 B BBB schedule a The total schedule Schedule Workdays at 8 00 PM Weekly Monthly This step forms the daily weekly and monthly cycles in the schedule Select a day of the week from the days selected in the previous step Each 1st 2nd and 3rd backup created on this day of the week will be considered as a weekly backup Each 4th backup created on this day of the week will be considered as a monthly backup Backups created on the other days will be considered as daily backups Assume you select Friday for Weekly Monthly ba
616. urce disk volumes is possible but without any data loss then the user will be allowed to proceed If due to the size limitations safe transfer of all the source disk data to the target disk is impossible even with the proportional resizing of the volumes then the Clone basic disk operation will be impossible and the user will not be able to continue If you are about to clone a disk comprising of a system volume pay attention to the Advanced options By clicking Finish you ll add the pending operation of the disk cloning To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 283 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them Using advanced options When cloning a disk comprising of a system volume you need to retain an operating system bootability on the target disk volume It means that the operating system must have the system volume information e g volume letter matched with the disk NT signature which is kept in the MBR disk record But two disks with the same NT signature cannot work properly under one operating system If there are two disks having the same NT signature and comprising of a system volume on a machine at the startup the operating system runs from the first disk discovers the same signature on the second one automatically generates a new unique NT signature and assigns it to the second disk As a result all the volumes on the second disk will lose their
617. ve located on a tape through the console even if a tape library is turned off due to content information stored in the database To create an incremental or differential backup of data the program uses the database instead of loading mounting rewinding and reading a tape with the full data backup However a tape should be read for example to validate p 379 a backup or to recover data from a backup A tape library can be locally attached to a machine the agent is installed on but only in the case the library is considered as a single tape drive The agent can use such device to write and read data backups but the backup s format differs from the format of the backups on the tapes written through the storage node To get information about the readability of the archives on tapes written by different components of other versions of the product by means of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 see the Tape compatibility table p 50 section Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 enables you to set up distribution of backups by media For example a separate tape set can be used to back up some specific data and the backups of all other data will be written onto any currently mounted tape which does not belong to the tape set See the Tape support p 115 section for more information The backup schemes Grandfather Father Son p 34 Tower of Hanoi p 37 considerably assist you with creating effective schedule and retention rules for backups o
618. ver resides Click Install now to launch the installation wizard The alert is displayed only if Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows is installed on the management server The alert warns that no data was backed up on the management server for a period of time Back up now will take you to the Create backup plan page where you can instantly configure and run the backup operation To configure the length of time that is considered critical select Options gt Console options gt Time based alerts Activities The stacked column chart lets you explore the daily history of the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 agents activities The history is based on the log entries collected from the registered machines and from the management server The chart shows the number of log entries of each type error warning information for a particular day Statistics for the selected date are displayed to the right of the chart All the statistics fields are interactive i e if you click any field the Log view will be opened with the log entries pre filtered by this field At the top of the chart you can select the activities to display depending on the presence and severity of the errors The Select current date link focuses selection to the current date System view The System view section shows summarized statistics of registered machines tasks backup policies and centralized backup plans Click the items in these secti
619. very 10 automatically updates Windows loaders after recovery so there is no need to recover the MBR and Track 0 for Windows systems unless the MBR is damaged Files selection To select a backup and files to recover 1 Select one of the successive backups by its creation date time Thus you can revert the files folders to a specific moment in time 2 Specify the files and folders to recover by selecting the corresponding check boxes in the archives tree Selecting a folder automatically selects all its nested folders and files Use the table to the right of the archives tree to select the nested items Selecting the check box for the Name column s header automatically selects all items in the table Clearing this check box automatically deselects all the items 3 Click OK 6 3 5 Access credentials for location Specify the credentials required for access to the location where the backup archive is stored To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Use the task credentials The program will access the location using the credentials of the task account specified in the General section Use the following credentials The program will access the location using the credentials you specify Use this option if the task account does not have access permissions to the location You might need to provide special credentials for a network share or a storage node vault Specify User name When entering the name of an A
620. very day including weekends Be able to recover files as of any date over the past seven days Have access to weekly backups of the past month Keep monthly backups indefinitely Backup scheme parameters can then be set up as follows Start backup at 11 00 PM Back up on All days Weekly monthly Saturday for example Keep backups Daily 1 week Weekly 1 month m Monthly indefinitely As a result an archive of daily weekly and monthly backups will be created Daily backups will be available for seven days since creation For instance a daily backup of Sunday January 1 will be available through next Sunday January 8 the first weekly backup the one of Saturday January 7 will be stored on the system until February 7 Monthly backups will never be deleted Limited storage If you do not want to arrange a vast amount of space to store a huge archive you may set up a GFS scheme so as to make your backups more short lived at the same time ensuring that your information can be recovered in case of an accidental data loss Suppose that you need to Perform backups at the end of each working day Be able to recover an accidentally deleted or inadvertently modified file if this has been discovered relatively quickly Have access to a weekly backup for 10 days after it was created Keep monthly backups for half a year Backup scheme parameters can then be set up as follows Start backup at 6 00 PM B
621. viously created archive You might experience short pauses that are required to rewind the tape Low quality or old tape as well as dirt on the magnetic head might lead to pauses that can last up to several minutes Limitations 1 Multiple full backups within one archive are not supported 2 Individual files cannot be recovered from a disk backup 3 Backups cannot be deleted from a tape either manually or automatically during cleanup Retention rules and backup schemes that use automatic cleanup GFS Tower of Hanoi are disabled in the GUI when backing up to a locally attached tape Personal vaults cannot be created on tape devices 5 Because the presence of an operating system cannot be detected in a backup located on a tape Acronis Universal Restore p 378 is proposed at every disk or volume recovery even when recovering a Linux or non system Windows volume 6 Acronis Active Restore p 366 is not available when recovering from a tape Recovery from a locally attached tape device Before creating a recovery task insert or mount the tape containing the backup you need to recover When creating a recovery task select the tape device from the list of available locations and then select the backup After recovery is started you will be prompted for other tapes if the tapes are needed for recovery 2 13 Proprietary Acronis technologies This section describes the proprietary technologies inherited by Acronis Backup amp Rec
622. w communication settings to take effect restart all running Acronis components preferably by restarting Windows If restart is not possible make sure you do the following f Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Console is running close it and start it again If other Acronis components such as Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows or Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server are running restart their correspondent services from the Services snap in in Windows Remote Agent ports Specifies the port that the component will use for incoming and outgoing communication with other Acronis components Select one of the following Not configured The component will use the default TCP port number 9876 Enabled The component will use the specified port type the port number in the Server TCP Port box Disabled The same as Not configured For details about the network port and instructions on how to specify it in Linux and a bootable environment see Network port configuration p 85 Client Encryption options Specifies whether to encrypt the transferred data when the component acts as a client application and whether to trust self signed SSL certificates Select one of the following Not configured The component will use the default settings which is to use encryption if possible and to trust self signed SSL certificates see the following option Enabled Encryption is enabled In En
623. want them to be saved forever The default values for each backup type are as follows Daily 7 days recommended minimum Weekly 4 weeks Monthly indefinitely The retention period for weekly backups must exceed that for daily backups the monthly backups retention period must be greater than the weekly backups retention period We recommend setting a retention period of at least one week for daily backups Advanced settings To specify Advanced scheduling settings p 174 click Change in the Advanced settings area At all times a backup is not deleted until all backups that directly depend on it become subject to deletion as well This is why you might see a weekly or a monthly backup remain in the archive for a few days past its expected expiration date If the schedule starts with a daily or a weekly backup a full backup is created instead Examples Each day of the past week each week of the past month Let us consider a GFS backup scheme that many may find useful Back up files every day including weekends Be able to recover files as of any date over the past seven days Have access to weekly backups of the past month Keep monthly backups indefinitely Backup scheme parameters can then be set up as follows Start backup at 11 00 PM Back up on All days Weekly monthly Saturday for example Keep backups Daily 1 week Weekly 1 month m Monthly indefinitely As a result an archive of dail
624. wed you to start the console as described in the previous procedure 2 Run the following command sudo usr sbin acronis_console 3 Click Manage this machine Privileges for remote connection in Windows To establish a remote connection to a machine running Windows the user must be a member of the Acronis Remote Users security group on that machine After remote connection is established the user has management rights on the remote machine as described in User rights on a managed machine p 30 Note On a remote machine running Windows Vista with enabled User Account Control UAC and which is not part of adomain only the built in Administrator user can back up data and perform disk management operations To overcome the restriction include the machine into a domain or disable UAC on the machine by default UAC is enabled The same applies to machines running Windows Server 2008 and Windows 7 For information about Acronis security groups and their default members see Acronis security groups p 78 Privileges for remote connection in Linux Remote connections to a machine running Linux including those performed by the root user are established according to authentication policies which are set up by using Pluggable Authentication Modules for Linux known as Linux PAM For the authentication policies to work we recommend installing the latest version of Linux PAM for your Linux distribution The latest stable
625. will be converted to dynamic automatically If need be you will be prompted to add the necessary number of disks to your selection according to the chosen type of the future volume If you click the Back button you will be returned to the previous page Select the type of volume being created p 278 If you click the Next button you will proceed to the next page Set the volume size p 279 Set the volume size On the third wizard page you will be able to define the size of the future volume according to the previously made selections In order to choose the necessary size between the minimum and the maximum values use the slider or enter the necessary values into the special windows between the minimum and the maximum values or click on the special handle and hold and drag the borders of the disk s picture with the cursor The maximum value normally includes the most possible unallocated space But in some cases the possible unallocated space and the proposed maximum volume size might differ e g when the size of one mirror establishes the size of the other mirror or the last 8Mb of the disk space is reserved for the future conversion of the disk from basic to dynamic For basic volumes if some unallocated space is left on the disk you also will be able to choose the position of the new volume on the disk If you click the Back button you will be returned to the previous page Select destination disks p 278 If you cli
626. will be established only if the use of SSL certificates is enabled on the client application Disabled The same as Not configured Event tracing parameters In Windows the events occurring in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 can be recorded into the event log a file or both Each event has a level from zero to five based on the event s severity as shown in the following table lent owe oacinis O Event whose level of severity is unknown or not applicable Information Informational event such as one about the successful completion of an operation or startup of a service Warning Event which is a possible impending problem such as low free space in a vault Error Event that resulted in a loss of data or functionality Critical Event that resulted in the termination of a process such as the agent s process Event tracing parameters are specified as the following settings in the administrative template File Trace Minimal Level Description Specifies the minimum severity level of events to be recorded in the file Only events of levels greater than or equal to File Trace Minimal Level will be recorded Possible values Any severity level from Unknown through Critical or Blocked to not record any events Default value 2 meaning that events with severity levels two through five will be recorded The log files are located inside the folder ALLUSERSPROFILE Application Data Acronis in the Logs subfolder for the particular c
627. will be lost Clear the check box for this option if you prefer to power off virtual machines manually before the recovery Power on the target virtual machine when recovery is completed The preset is Off After a machine is recovered from a backup to another machine there is a chance the existing machine s replica will appear on the network To be on the safe side power on the recovered virtual machine manually after you take the necessary precautions Select the check box for this option if automatic powering on of the virtual machine is required 4 Vaults A vault is a location for storing backup archives For ease of use and administration a vault is associated with the archives metadata Referring to this metadata makes for fast and convenient operations with archives and backups stored in the vault A vault can be organized on a local or networked drive detachable media or a tape device attached to the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node There are no settings for limiting a vault size or number of backups in a vault You can limit the size of each archive using cleanup but the total size of archives stored in the vault is limited by the storage size only Why create vaults We recommend that you create a vault in each destination where you are going to store backup archives This will ease your work as follows Quick access to the vault You will not have to remember paths to the folders where the archives a
628. with the management console Navigation pane The navigation pane includes the Navigation tree and the Shortcuts bar Navigation tree The Navigation tree enables you to navigate across the program views Views depend on whether the console is connected to a managed machine or to the management server Views for a managed machine When the console is connected to a managed machine the following views are available in the navigation tree Machine name Root of the tree also called a Welcome view Displays the name of the machine the console is currently connected to Use this view for quick access to the main operations available on the managed machine m 2 Dashboard Use this view to estimate at a glance whether the data is successfully protected on the managed machine _ Backup plans and tasks Use this view to manage backup plans and tasks on the managed machine run edit stop and delete plans and tasks view their states and statuses monitor plans m vaults Use this view to manage personal vaults and archives stored in there add new vaults rename and delete the existing ones validate vaults explore backup content mount backups as virtual drives etc m Log Use this view to examine information on operations performed by the program on the managed machine lt Disk management Use this view to perform operations on the machine s hard disk drives Views for a management server When the console is
629. work connection to start the bootable rescue utility This feature has the trade name Acronis Startup Recovery Manager Acronis Startup Recovery Manager is especially useful for mobile users If a failure occurs the user reboots the machine hits F11 on prompt Press F11 for Acronis Startup Recovery Manager and performs data recovery in the same way as with ordinary bootable media The user can also back up using Acronis Startup Recovery Manager while on the move On machines with the GRUB boot loader installed the user selects the Acronis Startup Recovery Manager from the boot menu instead of pressing F11 Activation and deactivation of the Acronis Startup Recovery Manager The operation that enables using Acronis Startup Recovery Manager is called activation To activate Acronis Startup Recovery Manager select Actions gt Activate Acronis Startup Recovery Manager from the program menu You can activate or deactivate the Acronis Startup Recovery Manager at any time from the Tools menu The deactivation will disable the boot time prompt Press F11 for Acronis Startup Recovery Manager or removes the corresponding entry from GRUB s boot menu This means you will need bootable media in case the system fails to boot Limitation Acronis Startup Recovery Manager requires re activation of third party loaders after activation Upgrade from Acronis True Image Echo After upgrade from Acronis True Image Echo to Acronis Backup amp R
630. xact archive copy will be created a single backup an archive consisting of a single full backup will be created The export of an incremental or a differential backup is performed using consolidation of the preceding backups up to the nearest full backup your choice of backups belonging to the same archive the resulting archive will contain only the specified backups Consolidation is performed as required so the resulting archive may contain full incremental and differential backups an entire vault that can be exported by using the command line interface For more information please refer to Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Command Line Reference Usage scenarios Export enables you to separate a specific backup from a chain of incremental backups for fast recovery writing onto removable or detachable media or other purposes By exporting a managed vault to a detachable media you obtain a portable unmanaged vault that can be used in the following scenarios keeping an off site copy of your vault or of the most important archives physical transportation of a vault to a distant branch office recovery without access to the storage node in case of networking problems or failure of the storage node recovery of the storage node itself Export from an HDD based vault to a tape device can be considered as simple on demand archive staging The resulting archive s name By default the exported archive inherits the na
631. xample disk backup tasks Owner The list of users who created the tasks With the default filter settings the report includes all tasks that existed on the registered machines any time during the report period Column selection In the Column Selection window you can choose which table columns and to include in the report and in which order The tables in the report will contain columns from left to right as listed in Display in report The topmost column in the list will be the leftmost column in the report When choosing the columns to display use the left arrow and right arrow buttons to include or exclude columns and the up arrow and down arrow buttons to change the order of columns Some columns such as Machine name in a report about machines cannot be excluded from the list or moved up or down in it Report view In order for your web browser to correctly display dates and other information in generated reports enable active content JavaScript You can allow active content to run temporarily for the currently displayed webpage or enable it permanently To allow active content to run temporarily in Internet Explorer click the Information bar that appears at the top of the webpage by default and then click Allow blocked content To allow active content permanently in Internet Explorer 1 Onthe Tools menu click Internet Options and then click the Advanced tab 2 Select the Allow active content to run files o
632. y This step defines the retention rule for weekly backups The cleanup task will run after each weekly backup and delete all weekly backups that are older than you specify The weekly backups retention period cannot be less than the daily backups retention period It is usually set several times longer Keep backups Monthly This step defines the retention rule for monthly backups The cleanup task will run after each monthly backup and delete all monthly backups that are older than you specify The monthly backups retention period cannot be less than the weekly backups retention period It is usually set several times longer You have the option to keep the monthly backups infinitely The resulting archive ideal Assume you select to keep daily backups for 7 days weekly backups for 2 weeks and monthly backups for 6 months Here is how your archive would appear after the backup plan is launched if all the backups were full and so could be deleted as soon as the scheme requires The left column shows days of the week For each day of the week the content of the archive after the regular backup and the subsequent cleanup is shown D stands for the backup that is considered Daily W stands for the backup that is considered Weekly M stands for the backup that is considered Monthly Su e Wo rnu Ft Be Wo fue fw Thu f Ft fisat el wo Tu Wo Ti Ft a Mo Tue f tJ Total D D D W D D D D W D D D DW D D
633. y weekly and monthly backups will be created Daily backups will be available for seven days since creation For instance a daily backup of Sunday January 1 will be available through next Sunday January 8 the first weekly backup the one of Saturday January 7 will be stored on the system until February 7 Monthly backups will never be deleted Limited storage If you do not want to arrange a vast amount of space to store a huge archive you may set up a GFS scheme so as to make your backups more short lived at the same time ensuring that your information can be recovered in case of an accidental data loss Suppose that you need to Perform backups at the end of each working day Be able to recover an accidentally deleted or inadvertently modified file if this has been discovered relatively quickly Have access to a weekly backup for 10 days after it was created Keep monthly backups for half a year Backup scheme parameters can then be set up as follows Start backup at 6 00 PM Back up on Workdays Weekly monthly Friday Keep backups Daily 1 week Weekly 10 days Monthly 6 months With this scheme you will have a week to recover a previous version of a damaged file from a daily backup as well as 10 day access to weekly backups Each monthly full backup will be available for six months since the creation date Work schedule Suppose you are a part time financial consultant and work in a company on
634. y Sunday at 1 00 AM as soon as all users are logged off Incremental Specifies on what schedule and under which conditions to perform an incremental backup If the archive contains no backups at the time of the task run a full backup is created instead of the incremental backup Differential Specifies on what schedule and under which conditions to perform a differential backup If the archive contains no full backups at the time of the task run a full backup is created instead of the differential backup Clean up archive Specifies how to get rid of old backups either to apply retention rules p 39 regularly or clean up the archive during a backup when the destination location runs out of space By default the retention rules are not specified which means older backups will not be deleted automatically Using retention rules Specify the retention rules and when to apply them This setting is recommended for backup destinations such as shared folders or centralized vaults When there is insufficient space while backing up The archive will be cleaned up only during backup and only if there is not enough space to create a new backup In this case the program will act as follows Delete the oldest full backup with all dependent incremental differential backups If there is only one full backup left and a full backup is in progress then delete the last full backup with all dependent incremental differential backups If th
635. y an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer If the archive is stored on a locally attached tape device expand the Tape drives group then click the required device For the management server in the folders tree select the managed vault In the table to the right of the tree select the archive The table displays the names of the archives contained in each vault folder you select If the archive is password protected provide the password While you are reviewing the location content archives can be added deleted or modified by another user or by the program itself according to scheduled operations Use the Refresh button to refresh the list of archives Click OK 6 7 3 Backup selection To specify a backup s to export 1 At the top of the window select the respective check box es To ensure that you choose the right backup click on the backup and look at the bottom table that displays the volumes contained in the selected backup To obtain information on a volume right click it and then select Information Click OK 6 7 4 Access credentials for source Specify credentials required for access to the location where the source archive or the backup is stored To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Use the task credentials The program will access the location using the credentials of the task account specified in the General section Use the following credentials The program wil
636. y and act as Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server administrator These groups are created when Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agents or Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server are being installed During installation you can specify what users to include in each group Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agents When Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows is being installed on a machine the Acronis Remote Users group is created or updated A user who is a member of this group can manage the machine remotely by using Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Console according to the management rights described in Users privileges on a managed machine p 30 By default this group includes all members of the Administrators group Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server When Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server is being installed on a machine two groups are created or updated Acronis Centralized Admins A user who is a member of this group is a management server administrator Management server administrators can connect to the management server by using Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Console they have the same management rights on the registered machines as users with administrative privileges on those machines regardless of the contents of Acronis security groups there To be able to connect to the management server remotely an administrator of the
637. y files The program will not decrease a volume where free space is or becomes less than 25 of the total volume size Only when all volumes on the disk have 25 or less free space will the program continue decreasing the volumes proportionally As is apparent from the above setting the maximum possible zone size is not advisable You will end up with no free space on any volume which might cause the operating system or applications to work unstably and even fail to start 6 8 2 Managing Acronis Secure Zone Acronis Secure Zone is considered as a personal vault p 379 Once created on a managed machine the zone is always present in the list of Personal vaults Centralized backup plans can use Acronis Secure Zone as well as local plans If you have used the Acronis Secure Zone before please note a radical change in the zone functionality The zone does not perform automatic cleanup that is deleting old archives anymore Use backup schemes with automatic cleanup to back up to the zone or delete outdated archives manually using the vault management functionality With the new Acronis Secure Zone behavior you obtain the ability to list archives located in the zone and backups included in each archive examine backup content mount a volume backup to copy files from the backup to a physical disk safely delete archives and backups from the archives To learn more about operations with vaults see the Vaults p 128 section
638. y which files and folders to exclude Set up any of the following parameters Exclude all hidden files and folders Select this check box to skip files and folders with the Hidden attribute If a folder is Hidden all of its contents including files that are not Hidden will be excluded Exclude all system files and folders Select this check box to skip files and folders with the System attribute If a folder is System all of its contents including files that are not System will be excluded You can view file or folder attributes in the file folder properties or by using the attrib command For more information refer to the Help and Support Center in Windows Exclude files matching the following criteria Select this check box to skip files whose names match any of the criteria called file masks in the list use the Add Edit Remove and Remove All buttons to create the list of file masks You can use one or more wildcard characters and in a file mask The asterisk substitutes for zero or more characters in a file name for example the file mask Doc txt yields files such as Doc txt and Document txt The question mark substitutes for exactly one character in a file name for example the file mask Doc txt yields files such as Doc1 txt and Docs txt but not the files Doc txt or Doc11 txt Exclusion examples By name File1 log Excludes all files named File1 log By path C Finance test lo
639. y will be applied to For information on how to create Acronis Secure Zone see the Creating Acronis Secure Zone p 248 section 2 Naming the archives Data from each machine will be backed up to a separate archive Specify names for the archives The program generates a common name for the new archives and displays it in the Name field The name looks like PolicyName _ MachineName _ Archive1 If you are not satisfied with the automatically generated name construct another name If you selected Store all machines archives in a single location you have to use variables in order to provide the unique archive names within the location 1 Click Add variables then select Machine name substitution for the machine s name Policy name substitution for the backup policy s name As a result in the Name field the following rule will appear Machine name _ Policy name _Archive1 So if the backup policy named say SYSTEM_BACKUP will be applied to three machines say FINDEPT1 FINDEPT2 FINDEPT3 the following three archives will be created in the location FINDEPT1_SYSTEM_BACKUP_Archive1 FINDEPT2_SYSTEM_BACKUP_Archive1 FINDEPT3_SYSTEM_BACKUP_Archive1 2 Click OK The name looks like ArchiveN where N is a sequence number If the program finds that the archive Archive is already stored in the location it will automatically suggest the name Archive2 7 3 6 Access credentials for location Specify credentials required
640. your selection in the new window that has check boxes for each archive and each backup Review the selection and correct if need be then confirm the deletion 4 3 2 Operations with backups To perform any operation with a backup you have to select it first To select a backup expand the archive then click the backup If the archive is protected with a password you will be asked to provide it All the operations described below are performed by clicking the corresponding buttons on the toolbar These operations can be also accessed from the Backup name actions bar on the Actions and tools pane and from the Backup name actions item of the main menu The following is a guideline for you to perform operations with backups To View backup content in a separate window Recover Recover a disk volume as a virtual machine Validate a backup Export a backup Delete a single or multiple backups Do Click G View content In the Backup Content window examine the backup content Click Recover The Recover data p 215 page will be opened with the pre selected backup as a source Right click the disk backup then select Recover as virtual machine The Recover data p 215 page will be opened with the pre selected backup as a source Select the location and the type of new virtual machine and then proceed as with regular disk or volume recovery Click Validate The Validation p 235 page will be
641. ystem uses Linux Loader LILO and was recovered from a normal not from a raw that is sector by sector backup LILO contains numerous references to absolute sector numbers and so cannot be repaired automatically except for the case when all data is recovered to the sectors that have the same absolute numbers as on the source disk Solution Reactivate the boot loader You might also need to fix the loader configuration file for the reason described in the previous item The system loader points to the wrong volume This may happen when system or boot volumes are not recovered to their original location Solution Modification of the boot ini or the boot bcd files fixes this for Windows loaders Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 does this automatically and so you are not likely to experience the problem For the GRUB and LILO loaders you will need to correct the GRUB configuration files If the number of the Linux root partition has changed it is also recommended that you change etc fstab so that the SWAP volume can be accessed correctly Linux was recovered from an LVM volume backup to a basic MBR disk Such system cannot boot because its kernel tries to mount the root file system at the LVM volume Solution Change the loader configuration and etc fstab so that the LVM is not used and reactivate the boot loader How to reactivate GRUB and change its configuration Generally you should refer to the boot loader manual pages for the ap

Acronis Backup & Recovery 10 Advanced Server Virtual Edition

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Acronis Backup &amp; Recovery 10 Advanced Server Virtual Edition

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Acronis Backup & Recovery 10 Advanced Server Virtual Edition